Reyrolle Product Catalogue

Reyrolle Product
Catalogue
siemens.com/reyrolle
Contents
Editorial _________________________________________________________________________________________________________ 3
Devices and Fields of Application __________________________________________________________________________________ 4
1.1 Main Protection _________________________________________________________________________________________ 4
1.1.1 7SR10/7SR105 _______________________________________________________________________________________4
1.1.1.1 7SR10 Non-Directional Overcurrent Protection Relay ___________________________________________________4
1.1.1.2 7SR105 Motor Protection Relay ___________________________________________________________________ 16
1.1.2 7SR1 Range _______________________________________________________________________________________ 26
1.1.2.1 7SR11 and 7SR12 Non-Directional/Directional Overcurrent Relays ______________________________________ 30
1.1.2.2 7SR157 Check Synchronising Relay ________________________________________________________________ 46
1.1.2.3 7SR158 Voltage and Frequency Relay ______________________________________________________________ 55
1.1.2.4 7SR191 Capacitor Protection Relay ________________________________________________________________ 64
1.1.2.5 7SR17 Motor Protection Relay ____________________________________________________________________ 81
1.1.2.6 7SR18 Differential Protection Relay ________________________________________________________________ 92
1.1.3 7SR2 Range ______________________________________________________________________________________ 100
1.1.3.1 7SR210 & 7SR220 Non-Directional/Directional Overcurrent Relays _____________________________________ 105
1.1.3.2 7SR224 Recloser Controller ______________________________________________________________________ 116
1.1.3.3 7SR23 High Impedance Circulating Current Relay ___________________________________________________ 128
1.1.3.4 7SR242 Transformer Protection Relay _____________________________________________________________ 136
1.1.4 7SR45 Non-Directional Overcurrent Protection _________________________________________________________ 146
1.1.5 Arc Fault Protection ________________________________________________________________________________ 158
1.1.5.1 7XG3120 Arc Fault Monitor Relay ________________________________________________________________ 158
1.1.5.2 7XG3123 Arc Fault Interface Module______________________________________________________________ 170
1.1.5.3 7XG3124 Arc Fault Monitor Relay ________________________________________________________________ 178
1.1.5.4 7XG3130 Optical Arc Fault Sensor ________________________________________________________________ 193
1.2 Alpha Range _________________________________________________________________________________________ 198
1.2.1 7PG11 Auxiliary Relay ______________________________________________________________________________ 198
1.2.2 7PG15 Tripping Relay ______________________________________________________________________________ 232
1.2.3 7PG18 Tripping Relay-A ____________________________________________________________________________ 258
1.2.4 XR 7PG17 Interposing and Supervision Relays __________________________________________________________ 269
1.2.4.1 7PG17 XR105, XR106, XR107, XR205 and XR206 Interposing Relays ___________________________________ 269
1.2.4.2 7PG17 XR151 Trip Relay Supervision Relay _________________________________________________________ 273
1.2.4.3 7PG17 XR152 and XR153 Supply Supervision Relays_________________________________________________ 276
1.2.4.4 7PG17 XR250 to XR351 Trip Circuit Supervision Relays ______________________________________________ 279
1.3 Classical Range and Associated Products __________________________________________________________________ 284
1.3.1 7PG23 Restricted Earth Fault ________________________________________________________________________ 284
1.3.2 7PG21 Pilot Wire Current Differential Protection ________________________________________________________ 288
1.4 Ancillary Equipment ___________________________________________________________________________________ 305
1.4.1 7SG21 Multi Range Digital Setting Time Delay Relay ____________________________________________________ 305
1.4.2 7XG15 High Impedance Component Box ______________________________________________________________ 312
1.4.3 7XG21 Capacitor Cone Adapter Unit for NVD protection _________________________________________________ 319
1.4.4 7XG22 2RMLG, 8W & 10W Test Blocks ________________________________________________________________ 322
1.4.5 7XG225 – 3RMLG Test Block System _________________________________________________________________ 330
Siemens Protection Devices Limited 2

Editorial
Since 1886, when Mr A.C Reyrolle established a small work shop in London, the Reyrolle brand has been prominent at all
stages of the power supply chain from generation to large end-users. We design and manufacture relays for the world
wide protection and control market.
We are committed to high technology development and manufacture with full use of the latest software at all stages of
product development, manufacture and testing. This can be seen in the latest digital products that Reyrolle offer.
With over 100 years of proven innovative technology and many industry firsts, we are very well established in the
global protection market.
Responsible, Excellent, Innovative
 User friendly products

 Withdrawable cases on most devices
 No battery back-up required on all devices except 7SR45
 High quality, reliable and dependable products - ISO9001 certified
 Complete range of electromechanical, trip and auxiliary relays
 Excellent delivery times
 Fast track replacement service
 Cost effective solutions
 Free of charge setting software
 Representation in over 140 countries
 Highly skilled workforce
 Excellent competence in Applications and R&D engineering
 Advanced technology facilities
Sub-transmission, distribution, industrial – three sectors, same standards
Reyrolle products cover the segments of sub-transmission, distribution and industrial solutions. The use of IEC 60870-5-103,
Modbus, DNP3.0 and IEC 61850 communication standards within the product means they are suitable for common
communication and system integration requirements.
Creating sustainable value through successive generations, Reyrolle products have been developed to increase value to
our customers. This increase in value is a result of consistent, high technology development by our R&D engineers based in
the UK and India.
By continuing to develop new products and solutions, we want to support your business in the best way possible. At the
same time we strive to maintain and strengthen our position as a leader in power protection. Our complete and
comprehensive solutions are able to serve your needs – whether you’re a new or existing customer.

Devices and Fields of Application
1.1 Main Protection

1.1.1 7SR10/7SR105
1.1.1.1 7SR10 Non-Directional Overcurrent Protection Relay

81 THD Total Harmonic Distortion Supervision
Control
79 Auto Reclose
86 Lockout
CB Control
CB Trip/Close
Features
Cold Load Settings
Two Settings Groups
Password Protection – 2 levels
User Programmable Logic
Self Monitoring
Circuit Breaker Trip and Maintenance Counter
Trip Timers
User Interface
Description 20 Character x 4 Line Backlit LCD

Menu Navigation Keys
9 User Programmable Tri-colour LEDs
The 7SR10 overcurrent and earth fault relay is developed by User Language Configuration
using the latest generation of hardware technology and is Dedicated circuit breaker open and close push buttons
available in multiple variants depending on power supply,
Binary input/binary output configuration and data
communication facility. 7SR10 is a member of Siemens Monitoring Functions
Reyrolle® protection devices Argus product family.
The 7SR10 overcurrent and earth fault relay is housed in a Primary/Secondary Current Phases and Earth
4U high, size 4 non draw-out case and these relays provide Positive Phase Sequence (PPS) Current
protection, monitoring, instrumentation, and metering with Negative Phase Sequence (NPS) Current
integrated input and output logic, data logging and fault Zero Phase Sequence (ZPS) Current
reports. Communication access to the relay functionality is Frequency
via a front USB port for local PC connection or rear electrical Binary Input/Output status
RS485 (optional) port for remote connection. Trip circuit healthy/failure
Time and date
Starters
Function Overview Fault records
Event records
Circuit breaker trip counters
Protection I2t summation for contact wear
46BC Broken Conductor, Load Unbalance
46 NPS Negative Phase Sequence Overcurrent
49 Thermal Overload Hardware
50 Instantaneous Overcurrent Protection
50N/G Instantaneous Earth Fault
51 Time Delayed Overcurrent Protection 4 CT 3 Binary Inputs/3 Binary Outputs 10 LEDs
51N/G Time Delayed Derived/Measured Earth Fault 4 CT 6 Binary Inputs/6 Binary Outputs 10 LEDs
Protection
51c
50BF
Current Protection: Cold Load
Circuit Breaker Fail
Data Storage and
81HBL2 Inrush Restraint Communication
50SEF Instantaneous Sensitive Earth Fault
51SEF Time Delayed Sensitive Earth Fault Protection
Front USB port + Rear RS485 port (optional)
Supervision Protocols - IEC60870-5-103, DNP3.0 or Modbus RTU
74 T/CCS Trip and Close Circuit Supervision Event Records - User Configurable

Fault Records
Waveform Records
Measurands 49 Thermal Overload
Commands The thermal algorithm calculates the thermal states from the
Time Synchronism measured currents and can be applied to lines, cables and
Viewing and Changing Settings transformers. Alarm outputs are given for thermal overload
and thermal capacity.
Application 51c Cold Load Protection

If a circuit breaker is closed onto a ‘cold’ load, (i.e.) one that
The 7SR10 overcurrent and earth fault relay is a numerical has not been powered for a prolonged period, this can
overcurrent protection relay intended for use in the impose a higher than normal load-current demand on the
distribution and industrial networks. It provides a highly system which could exceed normal settings. These
comprehensive functional software package with a range conditions can exist for an extended period and must not be
of integral application functions aimed at reducing interpreted as a fault. To allow optimum setting levels to be
installation, wiring, and engineering time. applied for normal operation, the cold load pickup feature
will apply alternative current settings for a limited period.
A wide range of measured values can be viewed on the
front LCD or remotely via the communication channel. The feature resets when either the circuit breaker has been
closed for a settable period or if the current has reduced
The integrated control feature allows the operation of a beneath a set level for a user set period.
single circuit breaker and monitoring its trip and closed
circuits. 50/51 Phase Fault
50 INST/DTL and 51 IDMTL/DTL elements provide overcurrent
protection, each with independent settings for pickup
7SR10 Functional Diagram current, time-multiplier (51) and time-delays. User can select
IEC or ANSI time current characteristics. The IDMT stage has
a user programmable reset characteristic, either DTL or
7SR10 shaped current ~ time reset characteristic to improve the
grading with electromechanical protection.
81 50 50 51 81 51c
49
THD BF (x2) (x2) HBL2
IL1
(IA)
50G/51G/50N/51N/50SEF Earth Fault/Sensitive Earth Fault
Two earth fault measurement modes are available. One
81 50 50 51 81
THD
49
BF (x2) (x2) HBL2
51c mode directly measures the earth current from an
IL2
(IB) independent CT, or the residual connection of the 3 line CTs.
81 50 50 51 81
IL3 THD
49
BF (x2) (x2) HBL2 51c This input can be ordered as earth fault or sensitive
(IC) earth fault (50G/51G/50SEF/51SEF).
46 81
46 50N 51N
BC
NPS
(x2)
(x2) (x2)
HBL2
N
The second mode derives the earth current internally from
the 3 phase CT inputs to give earth fault (50N/51N).
I4
(IG) 51SEF 50SEF 50G 51G 50
81 50 INST/DTL and 51 IDMTL/DTL elements provide overcurrent
HBL2
(x2) (x2) (x2) (x2) BF
G protection, each with independent settings for pickup
current, time-multiplier (51) and time-delays. User can select
86
74 IEC or ANSI time current characteristics. The IDMT stage has
T/CCS
a user programmable reset characteristic either DTL or
shaped current ~ time reset characteristic to improve grading
with electromechanical protection.
79 Optional Version D software
Fig 1. Four Pole Overcurrrent Relay
Description of Functionality
46BC Phase Unbalance/Broken Conductor
Element has settings for pickup level and DTL delay. With the
circuit breaker closed, if the NPS: PPS current ratio is above
setting this could be due to a broken conductor.
46NPS Negative Phase Sequence Overcurrent

Each element has user settings for pickup level and IDMTL or
DTL delay, the element operates if NPS current exceeds
setting and delay. NPS current elements can be used to
detect unbalances on the system or remote earth faults
when a delta-star transformer is in circuit.

1000
74T/CCS Trip and Close Circuit Supervision

The trip or close circuit(s) can be monitored via binary
inputs. Trip circuit failure raises an HMI alarm and output(s).
81HBL2 Inrush Restraint

Where second harmonic current is detected (i.e. during
100
transformer energisation) user selectable elements can be

blocked and an alarm given.
Time
(sec)
81THD Total Harmonic Distortion Supervision
10
Total harmonic distortion is the percentage of harmonics
Long Time Inverse present in fundamental frequency current. THD calculates
the 2nd to 15th harmonic currents presents inline current and
displayed in the ‘Harmonic Meter’ window as a percentage of
Normal Inverse
fundamental frequency current. Separate THD threshold
setting and delay is available as a function.
1
Very Inverse
Programmable Logic
The user can map binary inputs, protection elements, LEDs
and binary outputs together in a logical scheme.
Extremely Inverse Up to 4 logic equations can be defined using standard logic
functions e.g. Timers, AND/OR gates, Inverters and Counters
0.1
to provide the user required functionality.
1 2 3 4 5 6 8
10 20 30 40 50 60 80
100 Each logic equation output can be used for alarm &
indication and/or tripping.
Current (multiples of setting)
Fig 2. IEC Overcurrent Curves

1000
Virtual Inputs/Outputs
There are 8 virtual inputs/outputs to provide internal logical
states to assist in the application of the functions. Each
virtual I/O can be assigned in the same way as a physical I/O.
Circuit Breaker Maintenance

100
Two circuit breaker operations counters are provided to
assist with maintenance scheduling. The maintenance
counter records the overall number of operations and the
Time delta counter records the number of operations since the
(sec) last reset.
10
An I2t summation counter provides a measure of the contact
wear indicating the total energy interrupted by the circuit
breaker contacts.
Each counter has a user set target operations count which,

when reached, can be mapped to raise alarms/binary
Moderately Inverse
outputs. A CB Trip Time meter is also available, which
1
measures the time between the trip or open command being
Very Inverse issued and the auxiliary contacts changing state.
Control Mode
Extremely Inverse
The relay has a control menu with access to commonly used
command operations. Access to the control commands is
0.1 restricted by a 4 character control function password. Each
command requires a select then execute operation, if the
2 3 4 5 6 8 20 30 40 50 60 80
1 10 100
execute operation is not performed within a time window
Fig 3. ANSI Overcurrent Curves the command is aborted. The control mode supports the CB
Operation control function only.
50BF Circuit Breaker Fail
The circuit breaker fail function may be triggered from an CB Open/Close
internal trip signal or from a binary input. Line currents and The circuit breaker (CB) control function is used to manually
earth currents are monitored following a trip signal and an open and close the CB when it is connected to the power
output is issued if any current is still detected above the system. Two dedicated push buttons are provided on the
setting after a specified time interval. Alternatively, if the HMI to execute the CB manual close and open operations.
trip is from a mechanical protection the circuit breaker
position can be used to determine a failure. A second time Standard Version – Plus 79 Auto-Reclose
delay is available to enable another stage to be utilized if
A high proportion of faults on an overhead line network are
required. An input is also available to bypass the time delays
transient and can be cleared quickly by high speed tripping
when the circuit breaker is known to be faulty.
followed by an automated circuit breaker reclose sequence.

The function provides independent phase fault and earth
fault/sensitive earth fault sequences of up to 5 trip i.e. 4
reclose attempts before lockout. An auto-reclose sequence
can be user set to be initiated from internal protection
operation or via binary input from an external protection. Term
Ext Wire loop to
1 1 Include line
To Control 2 2 A/+ terminating Res
3 3 GND
System 4
Data Acquisition -
4 B/-
Rear terminals Rear terminals
Via Communication Interface

RS485 Screened RS485 Screened
twisted pair twisted pair
Fig 4. Typical RS485 connection

Sequence of Event Records
Up to 1000 events are stored and time tagged to 1 ms The rear RS485 can be user selected to be OFF,
resolution. IEC60870-5-103, MODBUS RTU or DNP3.0 protocol.
Fault Records
The last 15 fault records are displayed on the relay fascia and Construction
are also available through the communication interface with
time and date of trip, measured quantities and type of fault.
The relay is housed in a non draw-out case 4U high, size 4
case.
Waveform Recorder
The waveform recorder stores analogue data for all poles The rear connection comprises of user friendly pluggable
and the states of protection functions, binary inputs, LEDs, type terminals for wire connections for BI, BO,
and binary outputs with user settable pre and post trigger Communication, and Power Supply.
data. A record can be triggered from protection function,
binary input or via data communications. 15 records of 1 The fascia cover can be ordered with one push button to
second duration are stored. allow the user to reset the fault indication without removing
the cover.
Demand Metering
A rolling record of demand over the last 24 h is stored. The The CT terminals are suitable for ring type lug connection to
demand is averaged over a user selectable period of time. A provide a secure and reliable termination.
rolling record of such demand averages is stored and
provides the demand history. A typical application is to
record 15min averages for the last 7 days.
Real Time Clock

The time and date can be set and are maintained while the
relay is de-energised by a back up storage capacitor. The
time can be synchronized from a binary input pulse or the
data communication channel.
Language Editor
The Language editor software gives the user the ability to
customize the text displayed in the relays, Menu structure
and instrumentation views. The tool allows a language file
to be created and transferred to the relay also containing
Western European characters.
The data acquisition via communication interface can be
done by Reydisp Evolution.
Serial Communications
The relay offers a USB serial port as standard on the front of
all units. All of the relays functions can be set on a PC using
Reydisp Evolution via the USB port. The connection is made
with a USB cable and operates with a ‘plug and play’
connection, so no pre-setting of the relay is required.
The front port can be switched off or set to use either the
DNP3.0, MODBUS-RTU, IEC60870-5-103 and ASCII protocols
for testing purposes.
A rear RS485 electrical connection is optionally available on

the relay for system interface connections. An internal
terminating resistor is provided, which can be connected
into the circuit by adding a wire loop between the relevant
terminals.

User Interface Technical Data
For full technical data, refer to the Technical Specification
Section of the User Manual.
Technical Data Overview

Product Family Non Directional, Overcurrent and
Large LCD
(Auxiliary powered) Earth Fault Protection Relay
Case and LEDs Non Draw-out Polycarbonate case
(Size4 standard, Non Draw-out
design), 10 LEDs
Measuring Inputs 1 A/5 A, 50 Hz/60 Hz
(Current)
Programmable Auxiliary Voltage 60 V - 240 V AC/DC
from Fascia
24 V - 60 V DC
Communication Default front communication port

Multi-colored
LEDs
Back port: RS485 (optional –
IEC 60870-5-103 or Modbus RTU or
DNP 3.0)
Protection Functions 50, 50G/N, 51, 51G/N, 50BF, 50SEF,
Fig 5. User Interface 51SEF, 49, 46BC, 46NPS
Supervision and 74 T/CCS, 86, 81HBL2 – (inrush
The operator interface is designed to provide a user friendly control functions restraint), 51c, 81THD, 79 AR
method of controlling, viewing menus, entering settings, Binary Input and 3 BI or 6 BI
and retrieving data from the relay. Five buttons are provided Binary Output 3 BO or 6 BO, (2 changeover
for navigation around the menu structure. contact)
Threshold voltage
Two dedicated push buttons are provided on the HMI to - 88 VAC/DC or 44 V AC/DC available
execute the CB manual close and open operations. with 60 V - 240 V AC/DC power
supply version
LCD - 19 V DC with 24 V - 60 V DC
A 4 line by 20 character liquid crystal display with power power supply version
save operation indicates the relay identifier, settings, Overvoltage Category III
instrumentation, fault data and control commands. Up to 6 Pollution Degree 2
user programmable general alarms can be configured to
display your own indications on the LCD. Mechanical Specifications
LEDs Design Flush mounting, Non Draw-out
Polycarbonate moulded case
A green steadily illuminated LED indicates the ‘Protection
Healthy’ condition. 9 users programmable LEDs are available Enclosure IP 54 (front panel)
eliminating the need for expensive panel mounted pilot IP 20 Protection for terminals (rear
lights and associated wiring. Each LED is tri- color (red, side)
green, yellow) allowing for clear indication of the associated Depth is 199 mm
function’s state and has a label for identification. Weight 1.6 kgs (appx)
Relay Information Terminal Blocks

The device is identified by the rating label on the front Current Inputs 12 position, M4 Screw-type
fascia. The user can also give the device its own identity by Barrier Terminal block suitable for
editing the ‘Relay Identifier’ displayed on the LCD. 2.5 mm2/4 mm2 cable
Auxiliary Supply 3 position, M3 screw-type plug-in
Indication of Conformity terminals suitable for 2.5 mm 2
cable
This product complies with the directive of Rear Communication 4 position, M2 screw-type plug-in
the Council of the European Communities on Port terminals suitable for 1.5 mm2
harmonization of the laws of the Member cable
States relating to electromagnetic Front USB, Type B
compatibility (EMC Council Directive Communication Port
2004/108/EC) and concerning electrical
Binary Input 6 or 12 position, M3 screw-type
equipment for use within specified
plug-in terminals suitable for
voltage limits (Low Voltage Directive
2.5 mm2 cable
2006/95/EC).
This conformity has been proved by tests Binary Output 8 or 14 position, M3 screw-type
performed according to the Council Directive plug-in terminals suitable for
in accordance with the generic standard IEC/ 2.5 mm2 cable
EN 60255-26 (for EMC directive) and with the
standards IEC/EN 60255-27 (for Low Voltage
Directive) by Siemens AG.
Binary Outputs
Inputs and Outputs Number 3 or 6 (2 change over contacts)
Operating Voltage Voltage Free
Current Inputs Operating Mode User selectable - Self or
Quantity 3 x Phase & 1 x Earth Hand/Electrical Reset or pulsed
Rated Current In 1 A/5 A Operating Time <20 ms
Measuring Range 80*In from energizing Binary
8*In (SEF) Input
Instrumentation ±1% (Typical) Making Capacity:
(≥ 0.1xIn to 3xIn) Carry continuously
± 3% Make and carry 5 A AC or DC
(> 3xIn to 80xIn) (L/R  40 ms and 20 A AC or DC for 0.5 s
Frequency 50 Hz (Range: 47 Hz to 52 Hz) V  300 V) 30 A AC or DC for 0.5 s
60 Hz (Range: 57 Hz to 62 Hz) Breaking Capacity:
Thermal Withstand * (  5 A and  300 V):
Continuous 4 x In AC Resistive 1250 VA
10 seconds 30 x In AC Inductive 250 VA at p.f.  0.4
1 Second 100 A (1 A) 350 A (5 A) DC Resistive 75 W
Burden @ In ≤ 0.3 VA per phase and earth for DC Inductive 30 W at L/R  40 ms
both 1 A and 5 A 50 W at L/R  10 ms
* ZY20 - Special version with Thermal withstand 500A Disengaging time < 20 ms
(5A CT)
Rear Communication Port
Auxiliary Supply
Quantity 1 No. (Optional)
Rated Voltage 60 V - 240 V AC/DC,
Tolerance -20% to +10% Electrical connection RS485, 2 wire electrical
Allowable super 15% of DC voltage Protocol Support MODBUS RTU,
imposed AC component IEC 60870-5-103,
Typical power <7W DNP 3.0
consumption (DC) Rate Data Transfer rate:
Typical power <7 VA 0.5 PF 2400 - 38400 bps
consumption (AC)
Max Interruption time ≤”100 ms (110 V DC) Front Communication Port
(Collapse to Zero) ≤ 1000 ms (230 V AC) Quantity 1 No.
Electrical connection USB, Type B
Auxiliary Supply
Rated Voltage 24 V - 60 V DC Data Storage
Tolerance -20% to +10%
Allowable super 15% of DC voltage
imposed AC component Fault Record 15
Typical Power <7W Waveform Record 15 Rec x 1 Sec
consumption (DC)
7 Rec x 2 Sec
Max Interruption time 20 ms (24 V DC)
(Collapse to Zero) 3 Rec x 5 Sec
1 Rec x 15 Sec
Pre trigger 10…90%
Binary Inputs Events 1000 events (1 ms Resolution)
Number 3 or 6
19 V DC Range 24 V - 66 V DC
44 V AC/DC Range 44 V - 265 V Mechanical Tests
DC 44 V - 265 V DC
Range
Operating Voltage* AC 36 V - 265 V AC Test Standard
88 V AC/DC Range 88 V - 265 V Vibration IEC 60255-21-1
DC 88 V - 265 V DC Response and Endurance, Class I
Range
AC 68 V - 265 V AC Shock and Bump IEC 60255-21-2
3.5 mA Shock response and withstand Class
Maximum AC/DC
I Bump, Class I
current for operation
Pick Up Delay User selectable 0 to 14,400,000 ms Degree of Protection IEC 60529
(up to 4 hours) IP 54 front
IP 20 back
Drop Off Delay User selectable 0 to 14,400,000 ms
(up to 4 hours) Seismic IEC 60255-21-3, Class I
* Refer to Ordering Information for more details. Contact IEC 60255-1
For more details about binary inputs, refer to Technical Manual. (Ref: Std IEC 61810-1)
Electrical Endurance IEC 60255-1
Test (Ref: Std IEC 61810-1)
(10000 operations at 250 V, 5 A)
Electrical Tests Climatic Environmental Tests
Test Standard Temperature

Insulation Resistance IEC 60255-27# IEC 60068-2-1/IEC 60068-2-2
500 V DC, >100M Ohms Operating
-100C to + 600C
Impulse Voltage IEC 60255-27# Temperature
Withstand 5 kV, 5 +ve, -ve pulses Storage Range - 250C to + 700C
Hi Voltage IEC 60255-27#
(Dielectric) Voltage 2 kV@1 min Humidity
(Between any terminal and earth, IEC 60068-2-30/IEC 60068-2-78
independent circuits) Damp heat test, 6 days at 400C and 93% relative
1 kV AC RMS for 1 min Cyclic humidity
(across normally open contacts)
Damp heat test,
High Frequency IEC 60255-26 4 days at 95% RH, +400C
Steady State
Disturbance 2.5 kV (CM), 1.0 kV (DM)
Maximum Altitude
1 MHz, 100 kHz Upto 2000 m
of Operation
Electrostatic IEC 60255-26
Discharge 8 kV air discharge
Electrical Fast IEC 60255-26, Zone A Product Safety Test
Transient or Burst * 4 kV, 5 kHz
Surge Immunity * IEC 60255-26, Zone A
4 kV (CM), 2 kV (DM) IEC/EN 60255-27
1.2/50 µs Type Test Parameters Values
Radiated Immunity IEC 60255-26
80 MHz to 1.0 GHz and 1.4 GHz to Clearances Clearances and creepage ≥ 4 mm
2.7 GHz and Creepage distances between external
Both frequency at 10 V/m Distances circuits mutual and to the
enclosure
Conducted Radio IEC 60255-26
Frequency 150 kHz to 80 MHz, Class III Protective Test voltage: < 12V AC/DC
Interference Bonding
Power Frequency IEC 60255-26 Resistance Test duration: 1 min
Magnetic Field 30 A/m applied 1 min,
300 A/m applied for 3 s Bonding resistance < 0.1 Ohm
Conducted Emissions IEC 60255-26 Protective Accessible conductive parts Low current
CISPR 22, Class A Bonding should be bonded with the continuity test
Radiated Emissions IEC 60255-26 Continuity protective conductor
CISPR 11, Class A terminal
Thermal Withstand IEC 60255-27
Continuous 4 x In Flammability Structure Part Standard for
1s 100 A (1 A) 350 A (5 A) of Insulating insulating
Burden IEC 60255-1 Materials, material of
≤0.3 VA per phase and earth for Components flammability
both and Fire class
1 A and 5 A enclosures
Terminals Class UL 94 V-0
Functional IEC 60255-3
Maximum Allowable IEC 60255-6 Terminal Mounting Class UL 94 V-0
Temperature Max. temperature limit +1000C
Limiting Dynamic 10 ms Wiring (CT) (N)2GFAF
Value 700 A (1 A) 2500 A (5 A) (VDE)
Gradual IEC 60255-26
Components mounting Class UL 94 V-0
shutdown/Start-up Shut down/start up ramp 60 s
test Power off 5 min
Enclosure Class UL 94 V-0
* NOTE: 45 ms DTL pick-up delay applied to binary inputs
PCB Class UL 94 V-0
# NOTE: All aspect of IEC 60255-5 have been covered under
IEC 60255-27 LCD Class UL 94 V-0
Single Fault Assessment of: The equipment
Condition  Insulation between shall not
circuits and parts present a risk
 Compliance with of electric
requirements for shock or fire
protection against the after a single-
spread of fire fault test.

Type Test Parameters Values Operate time 
 I 2  I p2 

t    In 2 2 
 I  k  I B  
 
 Overloads ±5% absolute or ±100 ms where
 Intermittently rated Ip = prior current
resistors Alarm Level Disabled, 50,51…100%
 Compliance with
Inhibited by Binary or Virtual Input
requirements for
mechanical protection
50 Instantaneous & DTL OC&EF
Operation Non directional
Elements Phase, Derived Earth,
IEC/EN 61010-1
Measured Earth, Sensitive
Test Description Applicable Earth fault
Clause No. Setting Range Is 0.05,0.06…50 x In
(50/50N/50G)
Marking and Documentation 5
Setting Range Is (50SEF) 0.005.... 5 x In
Protection against electric shock 6 Time Delay 0.00…14400 s
Operate Level Iop 100% Is, ±5% or ±1%xIn
Protection against mechanical hazard 7
Reset level  95 % Iop
Resistance to mechanical stresses (shock 8 Reset level (50SEF) >= 95 % Iop or Iop - 0.1% In
and impact) Operate time:
50, 50G,50SEF 0 to 2x Is – 35 ms, ±10 ms,
Protection against the spread of fire 9
0 to 5x Is – 25 ms, ±10 ms
Equipment temperature limits and 10 50N 0 to 2x Is – 40 ms, ±10 ms,
resistance to heat 0 to 5x Is – 30 ms, ±10 ms
Operate time following Tbasic +td , ±1% or ±10 ms
Protection against liberated gases and 13 delay
substances, explosion and implosion Inhibited by Binary or Virtual Input
Components and sub assemblies 14 Inrush detector
HAZARDS resulting from application 16 81HBL2 Inrush Detector

I Setting 0.10, 0.11... 0.5
Risk Assessment 17
(Ratio of 2nd Harmonic
current to fundamental
component current)
Performance t basic Element basic Will pick-up before operation
operate time of any protection element due
46 Negative Phase Sequence Overcurrent to magnetic inrush
Number of Elements DT & IT Reset Time Will operate until drop-off of
DT Setting Range Is 0.05,0.10…4.0 x In any protection element due to
DT Operate Level 100% Is, ±5% or ±1%xIn magnetic inrush
DT Delay Setting td 0.00, 0.01…20,
20.5…100,101…1000,
1010…10000, 10100…
14400 s
DT Basic Operate Time
0 to 2x Is 40 ms ±10 ms
0 to 5x Is 30 ms ±10 ms
DT Operate time Tbasic +td , ±1% or ±10 ms
following delay
IT Char Setting IEC NI,VI,EI,LTI, ANSI MI,VI,EI &
DTL
IT Setting Range 0.05..2.5
Tm Time Multiplier 0.025, 0.030… 1.6, 1.7… 5, 6…
100
Char Operate Level 105% Is, ±4% or ±1%In
Overshoot Time < 40 ms
49 Thermal Overload
Operate levels Operate and Alarm
Setting Range Is 0.10,0.11…3.0 x In
Operate Level 100% Is, ±5% or ±1%xIn
Time Constant Setting 1,1.5…1000 min

46BC Broken Conductor 74 T/CCS Trip/Close Circuit Supervision
46BC setting, NPS to PPS 20, 21…100% Number of supervisable 3 x Trip and 3 x Close
ratio circuits
tf Delay setting 0.03,04,20.0,20.1,100, Number of BI’s Required 1 or 2 per function
101,1000,1010…..14400 s
I Curr Operate level 100 % I set ± 5 % NOTE: Use the correct threshold voltages for BI when using
Reset level TCS with 2 BI.
90 % I curr ± 5 %
tbasic 1x In to 0 A 40 ms Control Functions
Basic operate time
CB Trip/Close
Operate time tf + tbasic , ± 1 % or ± 20 ms Inst Prot IN/OUT
EF IN/OUT
51 Time Delayed OC&EF SEF IN/OUT
Operation Non directional Hot Line IN/OUT
Elements Phase, Derived Earth, Relay Mode Local/Remote/Local or Remote
Measured Earth, Sensitive Reset LED’s & O/P’s (Test/Reset key)
Earth fault
Characteristic IEC-NI, -VI, -EI, -LTI; ANSI-MI, - CB Maintenance
VI, -EI; DTL
Trip Counter Total & Delta
Setting Range Is (51/51G) 0.05,0.06…4 x In 0…10000
Setting Range Is (51SEF) 0.005,...0.5 x In I2t Alarm 10…100000
Time Multiplier 0.01, 0.015....1.6, 1.7,....5,
6...100 81THD Supervision
Time Delay 0,0.01… 20 s
Ithd Setting 5, 6,.....100%
Operate Level 105% Is, ±4% or ±1%x In
td Delay setting 0.02, 0.03…20.00, 20.10… 100,
Minimum Operate time
101… 1000, 1010… 10000,
IEC top 
K
 Tm 10100… 14400 s
 IsI   1
ANSI  A 
top   P  B  Tm 79 AutoReclose
  Is   1 
I
Operating Mode Phase, Earth, SEF External

± 5% absolute or ± 40ms Number of Reclose 1..4
for TMS setting (0.01 to Number of Trips to 1..5
0.245) Lockout
± 5% absolute or ± 30ms Dead Time 0…14400
for TMS setting (0.25 to 100) Reclaim Timer 0…600
Follower Delay 0 s - 20 s Lockout Reset CB, Timer & BI
Reset ANSI decaying, 0 s - 60 s
Inrush detector
50 BF Circuit Breaker Fail

Operation Current check - Phase and
Measured Earth with
independent settings
Mechanical Trip
CB Faulty Monitor
2 Stage Time Delays Timer 1 20…60000 ms
Timer 2 20…60000 ms
Disengaging time < 20 ms
Operate time following Tcbf ±1% or ±20 ms
delay
Triggered by Any function mapped as trip
contact
Inhibited by Binary/Virtual Input
Timer By pass Yes, 50BF CB Faulty Input

Case Dimensions
Fig 7. Rear View

Fig 6. Front View
Fig 8. Panel cut-out view Fig 9. Side View

7SR10 Terminal/Wiring Diagram with Control Push Buttons
Fig 10. Terminal/Wiring Diagram View (Extended Fig 11. Terminal/Wiring Diagram View (Basic Version)
Version)

Ordering Information
Product Description Variants Order No.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 - 8 9 10 11 12 - 13 14 15 16
7SR10 Argus 7 S R 1 0 0 - 0 - A 0
Nondirectional O/C Relay (Argus)

Case, I/O and Fascia
Size 4 Moulded case, 4 CT, 3 Binary Inputs/3 Binary Outputs, 10 LEDs 2 1 1
Size 4 Moulded case, 4CT, 6 Binary Inputs/6 Binary Outputs, 10 LEDs 3
Measuring input
1/5 A, 50/60Hz 1) 2/3 1
1/5 A, 50/60Hz with SEF input 2) 3 2
Auxiliary voltage
AC/DC 60-240V, Binary input threshold 44 V AC/VDC L
AC/DC 60-240V, Binary input threshold 88 V AC/VDC K
DC 24-60 V, Binary input threshold 19 VDC J
Protective Cover
Standard version – No Cover A
Plastic Cover with 1 Push Button for Test/Reset B
Communication
Front Port : USB 2 1
Front Port : USB and Rear Port : RS-485 supporting IEC 60870-5-103 3 2
or Modbus RTU or DNP 3.0
Front Fascia
Standard Version – with Breaker Control Push Buttons 2
Protection Function Packages C

Standard version - included in all models
46BC Broken Conductor/Load Unbalance
49 Thermal overload
50 Instantaneous Phase Fault Overcurrent
50BF Circuit Breaker fail
50G/N Instantaneous Earth Fault
50SEF 2)4) Instantaneous Sensitive Earth Fault Overcurrent
51 Timed Delayed Phase Fault Overcurrent
51 G/N Timed Delayed Earth Fault
51SEF 2)4) Time Delayed Sensitive Earth Fault
74T/CCS Trip/Close Circuit Supervision
81HBL2 3) 2nd Harmonic block/Inrush restraint
86 Hand Reset Contacts
51C Cold Load Pickup
Programmable Logic
81THD Total Harmonic Distortion Supervision
Standard version – plus

79 Autoreclose D
Additional Functionality
No Additional Functionality A
Z Y2 0
Special version5)
1) 4CT is configured as 3PF + EF
2) 4CT is configured as 3PF + SEF
3) Not available on SEF input
4) Only with position 7 = 3
5) Special version for Turkey market with thermal withstand capability of 500A (5A CT), 1 sec and sup porting Turkish
scripts.
6) Available only with position 8 = 1

1.1.1.2 7SR105 Motor Protection Relay
Control
86 Lockout
Motor Start/Stop Control
Features
Two Settings Groups
Self Monitoring
Circuit Breaker Trip and Maintenance Counter
Trip Timers
User Interface
20 Character x 4 Line Backlit LCD

Dedicated motor start and stop push buttons
Monitoring Functions
Description
Primary/Secondary Current Phases and Earth
The 7SR105 Rho motor protection relay is developed by Positive Phase Sequence (PPS) Current
using the latest generation of hardware technology. Negative Phase Sequence (NPS) Current
7SR105 is a member of Siemens Reyrolle® protection Zero Phase Sequence (ZPS) Current
devices Rho product family. Thermal equivalent and unbalanced currents
Binary Input/Output status
The 7SR105 Rho motor protection relay is housed in a 4U Time and date
high, size 4 non draw-out case and these relays provide Starters
protection, monitoring, instrumentation, and metering with Fault records
integrated input and output logic, data logging and fault Event records
reports. Communication access to the relay functionality is Circuit breaker trip counters and Time to trip
via a front USB port for local PC connection or rear electrical I2t summation for contact wear
RS485 port for remote connection. Temperature input values
Function Overview Hardware

Protection 4 CT 6 Binary Inputs/6 Binary Outputs 10 LEDs
14 Stall Protection 4 CT 6 Binary Inputs/6 Binary Outputs 10 LEDs 6 RTD
46 Phase Unbalance Protection
49 Thermal Overload Protection
48/66 Start Protection Data Storage and
37
50
Undercurrent Protection
Instantaneous Overcurrent Protection
Communication
50N/G Instantaneous Derived/Measured Earth
Fault Front USB port + Rear RS485 port
51 Time Delayed Overcurrent Protection Protocols - IEC60870-5-103, DNP3.0 or Modbus RTU
51N/G Time Delayed Derived/Measured Earth Fault Event Records - User Configurable
Protection Fault Records
Waveform Records
Supervision Measurands
Commands
74 T/CCS Trip and Close Circuit Supervision
Time Synchronism
81B Anti Backspin
Viewing and Changing Settings
46PhRev Phase Reversal
Maximum Temperature recorded input
50BCL Breaking Capacity Limit
TEMP Temperature Input Monitoring

49 Thermal Protection – Rotating Plant
Application The operating curves take into account the effects of present
loading, prior loading and unbalanced currents on the motor
operating temperature.
7SR105 Rho motor protection relay is a numerical protection
relay intended for use in the motor protection applications.
A user definable thermal curve is selectable to allow
It provides a highly comprehensive functional software
matching of the relay thermal characteristic to all motor and
package with a range of integral application functions
cooling system types.
aimed at reducing installation, wiring, and engineering time.
‘Starting’ and ‘cooling’ constants modify the thermal
A wide range of measured values can be viewed on the
characteristic during motor run-up and stopped conditions.
front LCD or remotely via the communication channel.
The enhanced thermal algorithm provides compliance with
IEC60255-8 (Thermal Electrical relays).
The integrated control feature allows the safe operation of a
motor and monitoring its start and stop operations.
50/51 G/N Earth Fault Protection
Two earth fault measurement modes are available.
7SR105 Functional Diagram
Measured earth fault mode (G) directly measures the earth
current from an independent CT, or the residual connection
of the 3 line CT’s.
3 37 46Ph 14 48 /
49
50 50 50 51
7SR105 Derived earth fault mode (N) derives the earth current
(x2) Rev (x4) 66 BCL BF (x2) (x2)
internally from the line CT inputs.
50N 51N 46NPS
1 Independent settings are available for pickup current and

50G
50G 51G
BF time-delays.
74 T/
81B 86 TEMP
CCS
IDMT curves are available.
M
50/51 Overcurrent Protection
Definite time elements provide short circuit overcurrent
Fig 1. 7SR105 Rho Motor Protection Relay
protection with independent settings for pickup current and
time-delays.
Description of Functionality IDMT curves can also be selected.

14 Stall Protection
The circuit breaker fail function may be triggered from an
Each element has a single definite time overcurrent internal trip signal or from a binary input. Where a CB closed
characteristic with settings for pickup level and Definite Time is detected following a trip signal an output is issued after a
Lag (DTL) delays. specified time interval. This can be used to re-trip the CB or
to back-trip an upstream CB. A second time delay is available
Operation can be controlled from motor stopped or running to enable another stage to be utilized if required.
conditions.
81B Anti Backspin
37 Undercurrent Protection
To inhibit attempted restarting of the motor until after the
Each element has settings for the pickup level and the rotor has completely stopped backspin protection is applied.
definite time lag (DTL) delay. The element operates when Starting is inhibited until the 81B time delay has elapsed.
current falls below setting for the duration of the delay.
TEMP Temperature Inputs
Motor resistance temperature detectors (RTDs) can be
Unbalance current has a significant heating effect on the connected via temperature inputs. Up to six RTD sensors can
motor. be monitored. Provision to configure seven types of RTD
inputs (for 3 wire configuration). Temperature inputs can be
Two phase unbalance measurement modes are available. configurable for RTD Alarm and Trip application.
Either NPS current or the difference between maximum and
minimum phase currents can be used as a measurement of NOTE:
the unbalance level. Any one of the RTD type can be configured for all six
temperature inputs.
Inverse or definite time operation can be selected.
74TCS Trip Circuit Supervision
48/66 Start Protection
The trip circuits can be monitored via binary inputs
The feature provides settings to control both the number of connected in H5/H6 or H7 schemes. Trip circuit failure raises
times a motor can be started within a specified time period an HMI alarm and output(s).
and the minimum time between starts. Motor starting can
be inhibited when this limit is reached.
Motor start time can also be monitored.

Programmable User Logic Fault Records
The user can map Binary Inputs and Protection operated The last 15 fault records are displayed on the relay fascia and
outputs to Function Inhibits, Logic Inputs, LEDs and/or Binary are also available through the communication interface with
Outputs. time and date of trip, measured quantities and type of fault.
The user can also enter up to 4 equations defining scheme Waveform Recorder
logic using standard functions e.g. Timers, AND/OR gates, The waveform recorder stores analogue data for all poles
Inverters and Counters. and the states of protection functions, binary inputs, LEDs,
and binary outputs with user settable pre and post trigger
Each Protection element output can be used for data. A record can be triggered from protection function,
Alarm/Indication and/or tripping. binary input or via data communications. 15 records of 1
second duration are stored.
Function LED’s
Ten user programmable tri-colour LED’s are provided Demand Metering
eliminating the need for separate panel mounted indicators A rolling record of demand over the last 24 h is stored. The
and associated wiring. Each LED can be user set to red, green demand is averaged over a user selectable period of time. A
or yellow allowing for indication of the associated function’s rolling record of such demand averages is stored and
status. A slip-in pocket adjacent to the LEDs enables the user provides the demand history. A typical application is to
to insert customised labels. A printer compatible template is record 15 min averages for the last 7 days.
available.
Real Time Clock
Virtual Inputs/Outputs The time and date can be set and are maintained while the
There are 8 virtual inputs/outputs to provide internal logical relay is de-energised by a back up storage capacitor. The
states to assist in the application of the functions. Each time can be synchronized from a binary input pulse or the
virtual I/O can be assigned in the same way as a physical I/O. data communication channel.
Circuit Breaker Maintenance Language Editor

Two circuit breaker operations counters are provided to The Language editor software gives the user the ability to
assist with maintenance scheduling. The maintenance customize the text displayed in the relays, Menu structure
counter records the overall number of operations and the and instrumentation views. The tool allows a language file
delta counter records the number of operations since the to be created and transferred to the relay also containing
last reset. Western European characters.
An I2t summation counter provides a measure of the contact The data acquisition via communication interface can be
wear indicating the total energy interrupted by the circuit done by Reydisp Evolution.
breaker contacts.
Each counter has a user set target operations count which, Serial Communications
when reached, can be mapped to raise alarms/binary
measures the time between the trip or open command being The relay offers a USB serial port as standard on the front of
issued and the auxiliary contacts changing state. all units. All of the relays functions can be set on a PC using
Reydisp Evolution via the USB port. The connection is made
Control Mode with a USB cable and operates with a ‘plug and play’
The relay has a control menu with access to commonly used connection, so no pre-setting of the relay is required.
restricted by a 4 character control function password. Each The front port can be switched off or set to use either the
command requires a select then execute operation, if the DNP3.0, MODBUS-RTU, IEC60870-5-103 and ASCII protocols
execute operation is not performed within a time window for testing purposes.
the command is aborted.
Motor Start/Stop the relay for system interface connections. An internal
terminating resistor is provided, which can be connected
The motor control function is used to manually start and
into the circuit by adding a wire loop between the relevant
stop the motor when it is connected to the power network.
terminals.
Two dedicated push buttons are provided on the HMI to
execute the motor manual start and stop operations.
Data Acquisition -
Via Communication Interface To Control
System
1
2
3
1
2
3
4
Term
A/+
GND
4 B/-
GND Ext Wire loop to

Sequence of Event Records RS485 Rear RS485 Rear Include line
Screened terminals Screened terminals terminating Res
Up to 1000 events are stored and time tagged to 1 ms twisted pair twisted pair
resolution.
Fig 2. Typical RS485 connection
The rear RS485 can be user selected to be OFF,

IEC60870-5-103, MODBUS RTU or DNP3.0 protocol.
Construction User Interface
The relay is housed in a non draw-out case 4U high, size 4
case.
The rear connection comprises of user friendly pluggable

type terminals for wire connections for BI, BO, Large LCD
Communication, Temperature inputs, and Power Supply.
The CT terminals are suitable for ring type lug connection to

provide a secure and reliable termination.
Programmable
from Fascia
Multi-colored LEDs
Fig 3. User Interface
The operator interface is designed to provide a user friendly

method of controlling, viewing menus, entering settings,
and retrieving data from the relay. Five buttons are provided
for navigation around the menu structure.
Two dedicated push buttons are provided on the HMI to
execute the motor manual start and stop operations.
LCD
A 4 line by 20 character liquid crystal display with power
save operation indicates the relay identifier, settings,
instrumentation, fault data and control commands. Up to 6
user programmable general alarms can be configured to
display your own indications on the LCD.
LEDs
Healthy’ condition. 9 users programmable LEDs are available
eliminating the need for expensive panel mounted pilot
lights and associated wiring. Each LED is tri- color (red,
green, yellow) allowing for clear indication of the associated
function’s state and has a label for identification.
Relay Information
The device is identified by the rating label on the front
fascia. The user can also give the device its own identity by
editing the ‘Relay Identifier’ displayed on the LCD.
Indication of Conformity
This product complies with the directive of

the Council of the European Communities
on harmonization of the laws of the
Member States relating to electromagnetic
compatibility (EMC Council Directive
2014/30/EU) and concerning electrical
equipment for use within specified
voltage limits (Low Voltage Directive
2014/35/EU).
This conformity has been proved by tests

performed according to the Council
Directive in accordance with the generic
standard IEC/EN 60255-26 (for EMC
directive) and with the standards IEC/EN
60255-27 (for Low Voltage Directive) by
Siemens AG.
Technical Data Inputs and Outputs
For full technical data, refer to the Technical Specification
Current Inputs
Quantity 3 x Phase & 1 x Earth
Technical Data Overview Rated Current In 1 A/5 A
Measuring Range 80*In
Product Family Motor Protection Relay
8*In (Measure E/F)
(Auxiliary powered)
Instrumentation ±1 % (Typical)
Case and LEDs Non Draw-out Polycarbonate
(≥ 0.1xIn to 3xIn)
case (Size 4 standard,
±3%
Non Draw-out design), 10 LEDs
(> 3xIn to 80xIn)
Measuring Inputs 1 A/5 A, 50 Hz/60 Hz
Frequency 50 Hz
(Current)
(Range: 47.5 Hz to 52.5 Hz)
Auxiliary Voltage 60 V - 240 V AC/DC
60 Hz (Range: 57 Hz to 63 Hz)
24 V - 60 V DC
Thermal Withstand:
Communication Default front communication
Continuous 4 x In
port
10 seconds 30 x In
(IEC 60870-5-103 or MODBUS
1 Second 100 A (1 A) 350 A (5 A)
RTU)
Burden @ In ≤ 0.3 VA per phase and earth
Rear port: RS485 (optional - IEC
for both 1 A and 5 A
60870-5-103 or Modbus RTU or
DNP 3.0)
Auxiliary Supply
Protection Functions 14, 37, 48/66, 50, 50G/N, 51,
51G/N, 49, 46 Rated Voltage 60 V - 240 V AC/DC,
Supervision and 74 T/CCS, 86, 50 BCL, 81 B, Tolerance -20% to +10%
control functions 46 Ph Rev, 50BF, TEMP Allowable super 15% of DC voltage
Binary Input and 6 BI and 6 BO (2 changeover imposed AC component
Binary Output contact) Typical power <7W
Threshold voltage consumption (DC)
- 44 V AC/DC with 60 V - 240 V Typical power <7 VA 0.5 PF
AC/DC power supply version consumption (AC)
- 19 V DC with 24 V - 60 V DC Max Interruption time ≤”100 ms (110 V DC)
power supply version (Collapse to Zero) ≤ 1000 ms (230 V AC)
Overvoltage Category III
Pollution Degree 2 Auxiliary Supply
Mechanical Specifications Rated Voltage 24 V - 60 V DC
Tolerance -20% to +10%
Design Flush mounting, Non Draw-out Allowable super 15% of DC voltage
Polycarbonate moulded case imposed AC component
Enclosure IP 54 (front panel) Typical Power <7W
IP 20 Protection for terminals consumption (DC)
(rear side) Max Interruption time 20 ms (24 V DC)
Depth is 199 mm (Collapse to Zero)
Weight 1.6 kgs (appx)
Terminal Blocks Binary Inputs

Current Inputs 12 position, M4 Screw-type Number 6
Barrier Terminal block suitable for 19 V DC Range 24 V - 66 V DC
2.5 mm2/4 mm2 cable 44 V AC/DC Range 44 V - 265 V
Auxiliary Supply 3 position, M3 screw-type plug-in Operating Voltage* DC 44 V - 265 V DC
terminals suitable for 2.5 mm 2 Range
AC 36 V - 265 V AC
cable 3.5 mA
Maximum AC/DC
Rear Communication 4 position, M2 screw-type plug-in
current for operation
Port terminals suitable for 1.5 mm2
Pick Up Delay User selectable 0 to 14,400,000 ms
cable
(up to 4 hours)
Front USB, Type B Drop Off Delay User selectable 0 to 14,400,000 ms
Communication Port (up to 4 hours)
Binary Input 12 position, M3 screw-type plug-in Reset/Operate voltage ≥ 90%
terminals suitable for ratio
2.5 mm2 cable Response time < 9 ms
Binary Output 14 position, M3 screw-type plug-in
*Refer to ordering information for more details.
terminals suitable for 2.5mm2 cable
For more details about binary inputs, refer to Technical
Temperature Inputs 18 position (Terminal X6, X7), M2 Manual.
screw-type plug-in terminals
suitable for 1.5 mm 2 shielded
cable

Binary Outputs Degree of Protection IEC 60529
Number 6 IP 54 front
4 NO contacts and 2 change IP 20 back
over contacts Seismic IEC 60255-21-3, Class I
Operating Voltage Voltage Free Contact IEC 60255-1
Operating Mode User selectable - Self or (Ref: Std IEC 61810-1)
Hand/Electrical Reset or pulsed Electrical Endurance IEC 60255-1
Operating Time < 20 ms Test (Ref: Std IEC 61810-1)
from energizing Binary (10000 operations at 250 V,
Input 5 A)
Making Capacity:
Carry continuously
Make and carry
5 A AC or DC
20 A AC or DC for 0.5 s
Electrical Tests
(L/R  40 ms and 30 A AC or DC for 0.5 s
V  300 V) Test Standard
Breaking Capacity Insulation Resistance IEC 60255-27#
(  5 A and  300 V): 500 V DC, >100M Ohms
AC Resistive 1250 VA
Impulse Voltage IEC 60255-27#
AC Inductive 250 VA at p.f.  0.4
Withstand 5 kV, 5 +ve, -ve pulses
DC Resistive 75 W
Hi Voltage (Dielectric) IEC 60255-27#
DC Inductive 30 W at L/R  40 ms
Voltage 2 kV@1 min
50 W at L/R  10 ms
(Between any terminal and
Disengaging time < 20 ms earth, independent circuits)
1 kV AC RMS for 1 min
Temperature Inputs (across normally open contacts)
Number 6 High Frequency IEC 60255-26
Measuring Range -50 ºC to +250ºC Disturbance 2.5 kV (CM), 1.0 kV (DM)
Response time <3s 1 MHz
Sensing current < 0.5 mA Electrostatic Discharge IEC 60255-26
8 kV air discharge
Rear Communication Port 6 kV contact discharge
Electrical Fast IEC 60255-26, Zone A
Quantity 1 No.
Transient or Burst * 4 kV, 5 kHz
Electrical connection RS485, 2 wire electrical
Surge Immunity * IEC 60255-26, Zone A
Protocol Support MODBUS RTU, 4 kV (CM), 2 kV (DM)
IEC 60870-5-103, 1.2/50 µs
DNP 3.0
Radiated Immunity IEC 60255-26
Rate Data Transfer rate: 80 MHz to 1.0 GHz and 1.4 GHz
2400 - 38400 bps to 2.7 GHz
Both frequency at 10 V/m
Front Communication Port
Quantity 1 No. Frequency 150 kHz to 80 MHz
Electrical connection USB, Type B Interference
Power Frequency IEC 60255-26
Data Storage 300 A/m applied for 3 s
Conducted Emissions IEC 60255-26
CISPR 22, Class A
Fault Record 15
Radiated Emissions IEC 60255-26
Waveform Record 15 Rec x 1 Sec
CISPR 11, Class A
7 Rec x 2 Sec
3 Rec x 5 Sec Thermal Withstand IEC 60255-27
1 Rec x 15 Sec Continuous 4 x In
Pre trigger 10…90 % 1s 100 A (1 A) 350 A (5 A)
Events 1000 events (1 ms Resolution) Burden IEC 60255-1
≤ 0.3 VA per phase and earth for
both 1 A and 5 A
Mechanical Tests Functional IEC 60255-8
Temperature Input IEC 60751
(Pt100)
Test Standard Maximum Allowable IEC 60255-6
Vibration IEC 60255-21-1 Temperature Max. temperature limit +100 0 C
Response and Endurance, Limiting Dynamic 10 ms
Class I Value 700 A (1 A) 2500 A (5 A)
Shock and Bump IEC 60255-21-2 Gradual shutdown/ IEC 60255-26
Shock response and withstand Start-up test Shut down/start up ramp 60 s
Class I Bump, Class I Power off 5 min
Type Test Parameters Values
* NOTE: 45 ms DTL pick-up delay applied to binary inputs
against the spread of fire after a single-
# NOTE: All aspect of IEC 60255-5 have been covered under - Overloads fault test.
IEC 60255-27 - Intermittently rated
resistors
- Compliance with
Climatic Environmental Tests requirements for
mechanical protection
Temperature
IEC 60255-1/IEC 60068-2-1/IEC 60068-2-2
Performance
Operating
-10 0 C to + 60 0 C
Temperature
14 Stall Protection
Storage Range - 25 0 C to + 70 0 C
Number of Elements 4
Setting Range Is: - 0.05 to 10 x In
Humidity
Time Delay 0.00 to 14400 s
IEC 60255-1/IEC 60068-2-30/IEC 60068-2-78
Operate Level 100 % Is ±5 % or ±1 % xIn
Damp heat test, 6 days at 40 0 C and 93 % relative Operate time
Cyclic humidity 2 x Is 35 ms ± 10 ms,
Damp heat test, 5 x Is 25 ms ± 10 ms
10 days at 95 % RH, +40 C 0
Steady State Operate time following tbasic +td , ±1 % or ±10 ms
Maximum Altitude delay
Upto 2000 m
of Operation Controlled by Stopped, No acceleration,
Running, None
Product Safety Test
37 Undercurrent
IEC/EN 60255-27 Number of Elements 2
U/C Guard 0.05 to 5.0 x In
Type Test Parameters Values Setting Range Is 0.05 to 5.0 x In
Operate Level 100 % Is ± 5 % or ± 1 % xIn
Clearances Clearances and creepage ≥ 4 mm
and distances between external Delay Setting td 0 to 14400 s
Creepage circuits mutual and to the Basic Operate Time: -
Distances enclosure 0.5 x Is 35 ms ± 20 ms
Operate time following tbasic + t d , ± 1 % or ± 10 ms
Protective Test voltage: < 12V AC/DC delay.
Bonding Overshoot Time < 40 ms
Resistance Test duration: 1 min
Bonding resistance < 0.1 Ohm Disengaging time < 60 ms
Protective Accessible conductive parts Low current 46 Phase Unbalance Protection

Bonding should be bonded with the continuity test
Number of Elements 1 (Magnitude difference or
Continuity protective conductor
NPS)
terminal
Setting Range Is 0.1 to 0.4 x Itheta
Flammability Structure Part Standard for Operate Level 100 % Is ± 5 % or ± 1 % x In
of Insulating insulating IT Min. Operate Time 0 to 20 s
Materials, material of DT Delay Setting td 0 to 20 s
Components flammability DT Basic Operate Time
and Fire class for NPS -
enclosures 2 x Is 65 ms ± 10 ms
Terminals Class UL 94 V-0
5 x Is 60 ms ± 10 ms
Terminal mounting Class UL 94 V-0 DT Basic Operate Time
for magnitude -
Wiring (CT) (N)2GFAF(VDE) 2 x Is 60 ms ± 10 ms
5 x Is 50 ms ± 10 ms
Components mounting Class UL 94 V-0 DT Operate time td ± 1 % or ± 30 ms
following delay
Enclosure Class UL 94 V-0 Tm Time Multiplier 0.025 to 2.0
PCB Class UL 94 V-0 Disengaging time < 80 ms
LCD Class UL 94 V-0
Single Fault Assessment of: The equipment
Condition - Insulation between shall not Max. No. of Starts OFF, 1 to 20
circuits and parts present a risk Max. Starts Period 1 to 60 minutes
- Compliance with of electric Start Inhibit Delay 1 to 60 minutes
requirements for protection shock or fire Time Between Starts OFF, 1 to 60 minutes

49 Thermal Protection 50 BF Circuit Breaker Fail
Setting Range Itheta 0.1 to 3.0 x In Operation Current check - Phase and
NPS Weighting Factor(K) 0.1 to 10.0  0.1 Measured Earth with
TauH Heating Constant 0.5 to 1000 mins,  0.5 mins independent settings
TauS Starting Constant 0.005 to 1.0 x TauH ,  0.005 Mechanical Trip
TauC Cooling Constant 1 to 100 x TauH ,  1 CB Faulty Monitor
Hot/cold ratio OFF, 1 to 100 %,  1 % Setting Range I s 0.05,0.055…2.0 x In
Operate Level 100 % Is, ±5 % or ±1 % x In Setting Range I s 0.01,0.015,...2.0 x In
Operate time  2  H  2 2 Stage Time Delays Timer 1 20…60000 ms
 I EQ  1  C  I p 
 Timer 2 20…60000 ms
t    In    


2
I EQ  I2  Operate Level 100 % Is, ±5 % or ±1 %x In
 
  Disengaging time < 20 ms
±5 % or ±100 ms Operate time following Tcbf ±1 % or ±20 ms
(Itheta = 0.3 to 3 x In) delay
(1.2 to 20 x Itheta) Triggered by Any function mapped as trip
User defined contact
Capacity Alarm Level Disabled, 50,51…100 % Inhibited by Binary/Virtual Input
Load Alarm Level OFF, 0.5 to 1.0 x Itheta ,  0.05 Timer By pass Yes, 50BF CB Faulty Input
Thermal restart inhibit 20 to 100 %,  1 %
Inhibited by Binary or Virtual Input 74 T/CCS Trip/Close Circuit Supervision
Number of supervisable 3 x Trip and 3 x Close
50 Instantaneous & DTL OC&EF circuits
Operation Non directional Number of BI’s Required 1 or 2 per function
Measured Earth 50BCL Break Capacity Limit
Setting Range Is (50/50N) 0.05,0.06…50 x In Setting 1.0, 1.5… 50 xIn
Setting Range I s (50G) 0.01, 0.011,.... 5 x In Operate level 100 % Is, ± 5 % or ± 1% In
Time Delay 0.00…14400 s Reset level ≥ 95 % Iop
Operate Level I op 100 % Is, ±5 % or ±1 %xIn Element basic operate 0 to 2 xIs: 20 ms or ± 10 ms
time 0 to 5 xIs: 15 ms or ± 10 ms
Reset level (50G) >= 95 % Iop or I op - 0.1 % In 46PH REV Phase Reversal
Operate time: 0 to 2x Is – 35 ms, ±10 ms, NPS to PPS ratio 20…100 %
50, 50G 0 to 5x Is – 25 ms, ±10 ms Delay setting 0…14400 s
0 to 2x Is – 40 ms, ±10 ms,
Operate level 100 % I s ± 5 %
50N 0 to 5x Is – 30 ms, ±10 ms
Reset level >85 % Iop,
Operate time following tbasic +td , ±1 % or ±10 ms Basic operate time 1x In to 0 A (60 ms)
delay Operate time tf + tbasic, ±1 % or ± 20 ms
Inrush detector Temperature Inputs (RTD)
Disengaging time (50G) < 50 ms Temperature input type Cu10 (0.00427),
(Temperature Ni100 (0.00618),
51 Time Delayed OC&EF Coefficient Resistance Pt100 (0.00385),
Operation Non directional based on DIN/IEC 60751 Ni120 (0.00672),
Elements Phase, Derived Earth, standard) Pt250 (0.00385),
Measured Earth Ni250 (0.00618), and
Characteristic IEC-NI, -VI, -EI, -LTI; ANSI-MI, - Pt1000 (0.00385)
VI, -EI; DTL Temperature input 0,1,2...250ºC
Setting Range Is (51/51N) 0.05,0.06…4 x In Alarm
Setting Range Is (51G) 0.01,0.011,...0.5 x In Temperature input Trip 0,1,2...250ºC
Time Multiplier 0.01,0.015..1.6,1.7..5,6..100 Operate value 100 % Tset, ± 2% or ±2ºC,
Time Delay 0,0.01… 20 s For Cu10: ± 2 % or ± 5ºC
Operate Level 105 % Is, ±4 % or ±1 %x In Response time <3s
Minimum Operate time K Sensing current ≤ 0.5 mA
top   Tm
IEC  IsI   1 Maximum lead 25 Ω/lead
 A  resistance For Cu10: 2.5 Ω/lead
top   P  B  Tm
ANSI   Is   1 
I
± 5% absolute or ± 40 ms for Control Functions

TMS setting (0.01 to 0.245) Motor Start/Stop
± 5 % absolute or ± 30 ms EF IN/OUT
for TMS setting (0.25 to 100) Relay Mode Local/Remote/Local or Remote
Follower Delay 0 s - 20 s Reset LED’s & O/P’s (Test/Reset key)
Reset ANSI decaying, 0 s - 60 s
Inhibited by Binary or Virtual Input CB Maintenance
Inrush detector
Trip Counter Total & Delta 0…10000
I2t Alarm 10…100000

Case Dimensions
104.5
78.0
181.0
98.5
12.5
BINARY OUTPUT
BINARY INPUT
RTD INPUT
168.0
159.0
185.0
168.0
RS485
RTD INPUT
CT
POWER SUPPLY
Ø 4.5 –
10.25 4 Holes
198.5 25 78.0
25 mm
clearance for
Front View Rear View Side View terminal wiring Panel Cut-Out View
7SR105 Terminal/Wiring Diagram
Fig 4. Terminal/Wiring Diagram View (Non RTD) Fig 5. Terminal/Wiring Diagram View (RTD)

Use the following MLFB ordering code for ordering 7SR105 Rho Motor Protection Relay.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
7SR105 Rho 7 S R 1 0 5 - - A 0

Size 4 Moulded case, 4 CT Inputs,
6 Binary Inputs/6 Binary Outputs, 10 LEDs 3
Measuring Input
2
1/5 A, 50/60 Hz
Auxiliary Voltage
AC/DC 60-240V, Binary input threshold 44 V AC/V DC L
DC 24-60 V, Binary input threshold 19 V DC J 1
Protective Cover
Standard version – No Cover A
Communication
Front Port : USB and Rear Port: RS-485 supporting
IEC 60870-5-103 or Modbus RTU or DNP 3.0 2
Temperature Input
Without RTD 1 E
6 RTD Input 2 F
Front Fascia
Standard Version – with Breaker Control Push Buttons 2
Protection Function Packages
Standard version - included in all models E
14 Stall Protection
37 Undercurrent
46PhRev Phase Reversal
49 Thermal Overload
50/51 Overcurrent
50/51, GN Earth fault
50BCL Break Capacity Limit
50BF Circuit breaker fail
74T/CCS Trip/Close circuit supervision
81B Anti Backspin
CB Counters
I^2T CB Wears
Programmable Logic
Standard Version Plus
Additional Function in Temperature Input version model F

1.1.2 7SR1 Range
HSR (High-availability Seamless Redundancy)
The following information is applicable to all devices in
the 7SR1 range. Data
Event Records – User Configurable
Fault Records
Data Acquisition - Waveform Records
Via Communication Interface Measurands
Commands
Time Synchronism
Sequence of event records Viewing and Changing Settings
Up to 1000 events are stored and time tagged to 1ms
resolution. Serial Communications
Fault Records
The last 10 fault records are displayed on the relay fascia and The relay offers a USB serial port as standard on the front of
are also available through the communication interface, all units. All of the relays functions can be set on a PC using
with time and date of trip, measured quantities and type of Reydisp Evolution via the USB port. The connection is made
fault. (5 records for 7SR1102-1*A12-*AA0 versions). with a USB cable and operates with a ‘plug and play’
Waveform recorder The front port can be switched off or set to use either the
The waveform recorder stores analogue data for all poles DNP3.0, MODBUS-RTU, IEC60870-5-103 and ASCII protocols
and the states of protection functions, binary inputs, LEDs for testing purposes.
and binary outputs with user settable pre & post trigger A rear RS485 electrical connection is available on all units for
data. A record can be triggered from protection function, system interface connections. An internal terminating
binary input or via data communications. 10 records of 1 resistor is provided, which can be connected into the circuit
second duration are stored. (8 records for the 7SR18 and 5 by adding a wire loop between the relevant terminals.
records for 7SR1102-1*A12-*AA0 versions).
Demand Metering
A record of demand is available. The demand minimum,
maximum and average values for currents, frequency and if Ext Wire loop to
applicable, voltages and real, reactive and apparent power, To Control System Include line
terminating Res
over a user selectable period of time, is displayed and 14 14
16 16
available via data communications. Typically this is set as a 18 18
20
rolling value for the last 24 hours.
twisted pair twisted pair Rear terminals
Real Time Clock

The time and date can be set and are maintained while the Fig 1. Typical RS485 connection
relay is de-energised by a back up storage capacitor. The
time can be synchronized from a binary input pulse or the The rear RS485 can be user selected to be OFF, IEC60870-5-
data communication channel. 103, MODBUS RTU or DNP3.0 protocol.
IEC 61850
Data Storage and IEC61850 communication is available through an optional
EN100 communication module. The EN100 Module can be
Communication ordered with either 2x Electrical RJ45 or 2x Fibre optic LC
Ethernet ports.
Information on IEC61850 functionality can be found in the
Standard Communication Ports
following 7SR1 documents:
Front USB port + Rear RS485 port
Model Implementation Conformance Statement (MICS)
Additional Optional Communication Ports
2x Electrical RJ45 Ethernet ports Protocol Implementation (PICS,PIXIT & TICS)
2x LC Fibre Optic Ethernet ports
Standard Protocols Ethernet Communications

IEC60870-5-103, DNP3.0 or Modbus RTU
User Selectable with programmable data points
IEC 61850
Optional Protocols IEC61850 communication is available through an optional
IEC61850 (E6 Case) EN100 communication module. The EN100 Module can be
ordered with either 2x Electrical RJ45 or 2x Fibre optic LC
Ethernet Redundancy Protocols: Ethernet ports.
Information on IEC61850 functionality can be found in the
Standard in all IEC61850 models:
PRP (Parallel Redundancy Protocol)
RSTP (Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol) Model Implementation Conformance Statement (MICS)

Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement (PICS) modification of the IEC60870-5-103, DNP 3.0 and MODBUS
Protocols.
Protocol Implementation Extra Information for Testing (PIXIT)
Reydisp Evolution
Reydisp Evolution is a Windows based software tool,

providing the means for the user to apply settings,
interrogate settings and retrieve events and disturbance
waveforms from the device and is common to the entire
range of Reyrolle protection relays.
Fig 4. Typical Communications Editor Screenshot
Curve Editor
The Curve Editor tool can be used to add user defined
characteristics for use by any of the Voltage, Current or
Thermal IDMTL elements.
Fig 2. Typical Reydisp Evolution Screenshot
Language Editor
Western European characters. Fig 5. Typical Curve Editor Screenshot
Reydisp Manager
Reydisp Manager is a Windows based application which
enables configuration of multiple Reyrolle devices.
It provides the following features:
• Project based handling of all features of multiple devices to
allow engineering of IEC61850 projects.
• Template based structure allowing offline configuration
• Configure and store device settings for all settings groups
• Create and edit graphical logic diagrams
• Configure data points and options for serial protocols
• Configure Language
• Configure User Curves
• Update device firmware
Fig 3. Typical Language Editor Screenshot Please refer to the Reydisp Manager User Guide for further
information.
Communications Editor
To facilitate easier interfacing to a substation the relays
default Protocol configuration may be modified using the
communication editor software tool.
The communication editor is a PC based software package
provided within the Reydisp software suite which allows

Fig 6. Typical Reydisp Manager Screenshot
Fig 7. Typical Settings Editor Screenshot
Fig 8. Typical Reylogic Express graphical logic editor

Screenshot

Case Dimensions
Case Earth
11 31 216.5 connection 103.5
151.5
Typical
177
FRONT
when SIDE VIEW
VIEW
fitted
25mm MIN CLEARANCE FOR TERMINAL WIRING
98.5
Diameter 3.6 - 4 holes (see note)
NOTE:
THE 3.6 HOLES ARE FOR M4 THREAD FORMING (TRILOBULAR) SCREWS.
THESE ARE SUPPLIED AS STANDARD AND ARE SUITABLE FOR USE IN
FERROUS / ALUMINIUM PANELS 1.6mm THICK AND ABOVE. FOR OTHER E4
168
159
PANELS, HOLES TO BE M4 CLEARANCE (TYPICALLY 4.5 DIAMETER) AND PANEL CUT-
RELAYS MOUNTED USING M4 MACHINE SCREWS, NUTS AND OUT
LOCKWASHERS (SUPPLIED IN PANEL FIXING KIT).
10.25 78
Fig 9. E4 Case Dimensions
Case Earth
11 31 216.5 connection
150
151.5
Typical
168
159
PANEL CUT-OUT when SIDE VIEW

fitted
10 130 MINIMUM CLEARANCES:

25mm FOR TERMINAL WIRING
75mm FOR ETHERNET COMMS MODULE
155.5
177
TOP VIEW
FRONT VIEW
FRONT
NOTE:
THE 3.6 HOLES ARE FOR M4 THREAD FORMING (TRILOBULAR) SCREWS. THESE ARE SUPPLIED AS STANDARD AND ARE SUITABLE FOR
USE IN FERROUS / ALUMINIUM PANELS 1.6mm THICK AND ABOVE. FOR OTHER PANELS, HOLES TO BE M4 CLEARANCE (TYPICALLY 4.5
DIAMETER) AND RELAYS MOUNTED USING M4 MACHINE SCREWS, NUTS AND LOCKWASHERS (SUPPLIED IN PANEL FIXING KIT).
Fig 10. E6 Case Dimensions

1.1.2.1 7SR11 and 7SR12 Non-Directional/Directional Overcurrent Relays
Supervision
60CTS CT Supervision
74T/CCS Trip & Close Circuit Supervision
60VTS VT Supervision
Control
79 Auto Reclose
86 Lockout
CB Control
Features
Cold Load Settings
Four Settings Groups
Description Password Protection – 2 levels
Self Monitoring
The 7SR11 & 7SR12 are overcurrent protection relays Circuit Breaker Trip and Maintenance Counter
developed to enhance the Argus family of products by Trip Timers
providing a familiar product using the latest generation of
hardware technology.
The 7SR11provides overcurrent and earth fault protection, User Interface
the 7SR12 comes with additional voltage inputs providing
directional protection. Both relays are available in single and
four pole variants. 20 Character x 4 Line Backlit LCD
Housed in a 4U high, size E4 or E6 (Optional IEC61850 Menu Navigation Keys
model) cases, these relays provide protection, monitoring, 9 User Programmable Tri-colour LEDs
instrumentation and metering with integrated input and User Language Configuration
output logic, data logging & fault reports. Communication
access to the relay functionality is via a front USB port for
local PC connection, a rear electrical RS485 port for remote Monitoring Functions
connection & optional IEC61850 communication through
two rear Ethernet ports (Electrical or Optical). Primary/Secondary Current Phases and Earth
Direction
Function Overview Primary/Secondary Line and Phase Voltages
Apparent Power and Power Factor
Real and Reactive Power
Protection W Hr & VAr Hr Forward and Reverse
Historical Demand Record
37 Undercurrent
Positive Phase Sequence (PPS) Voltage & Current
46BC Broken Conductor / Load Unbalance
Negative Phase Sequence (NPS) Voltage & Current
Zero Phase Sequence (ZPS) Voltage
49 Thermal Overload
Frequency
50 Instantaneous Overcurrent
Direction
50G/N/SEF Instantaneous Earth Fault
50AFD Arc Flash Detection (6 zones)
Trip circuit healthy/failure
Time and date
51 Time Delayed Overcurrent
Starters
51G/N/SEF Time Delayed Measured/Derived/Sensitive EF
Fault records
64H High Impedance REF
Event records
27/59 Under/Over Voltage
Energy
47 Negative Phase Sequence Voltage
51V Voltage Controlled Overcurrent
I2t summation for contact wear
59N Neutral Voltage Displacement
67/50 Directional Instantaneous Overcurrent
67/50G/N
67/51
Directional Instantaneous Earth Fault
Directional Time Delayed Overcurrent
Hardware
67/51G/N Directional Time Delayed Earth Fault
32 Directional Power 1 CT 3 Binary Inputs 5 Binary Outputs
32S Directional Sensitive Power 4 CT 3 Binary Inputs 5 Binary Outputs
55 Power Factor 4 CT 6 Binary Inputs 8 Binary Outputs
81HBL2 Inrush Detector 4 CT 4 Bin.In. 8 Bin.Out. (segregated rear terminals)
81 Under/Over Frequency 1 CT 3 VT 3 Binary Inputs 5 Binary Outputs
Line Check/Switch onto Fault 4 CT 3 VT 3 Binary Inputs 5 Binary Outputs
4 CT 3 VT 6 Binary Inputs 8 Binary Outputs
4 CT 3 VT 4 Bin. In. 8 Bin.Out. (segregated rear terminals)

Application 7SR11 Functional Diagrams
The Argus is a numerical overcurrent protection relay 7SR11
intended for use on distribution and industrial networks. It I
provides a highly comprehensive functional software (IG/ISEF)
37 50G 51G 50 SEF 51 SEF 81
64H
package with a range of integral application functions aimed (x2) (x2) (x2) (x2) (x2) HBL2G
at reducing installation, wiring and engineering time.

An extensive range of metered values can be viewed on the 86
74
T/CCS
front LCD or at a remote point via the communication
channel.
The integrated control feature allows operation of a single Fig 1. Single Pole Overcurrent Relay
circuit breaker and monitoring of its trip and close circuits
(except 7SR1102-1*A12-*AA0 models).
7SR11
Function Matrix IL1
50
BF
50
(x2)
51
(x2)
60
CTS
(IA)
50 50 51 60
IL2 BF (x2) (x2) CTS
(IB)
FUNCTIONAL REQUIREMENT
7SR1102-1*A**-*[C/D]A0
50 50 51 60
IL3 BF (x2) (x2) CTS
7SR1102-1*A12-*AA0
7SR1101-1*A**-**A0
7SR1101-3*A**-**A0
7SR1102-3*A**-**A0
7SR1204-2*A**-**A0
7SR1204-4*A**-**A0
7SR1205-2*A**-**A0
7SR1205-4*A**-**A0
(IC)
50N 51N
(x2) (x2)
FUNCTION
I4
(IG) 50G 51G 50
(x2) 64H
(x2) BF
74
86 T/CCS
27 Undervoltage ■ ■ ■ ■
32 Directional Power ■ ■
32S Directional Sensitive Power ■
3BI/5BO No Control functions
37 Undercurrent ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
46BC Broken Conductor / Load Unbalance ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Fig 2. Four Pole Overcurrent Relay Version A software
Negative Phase Sequence
46NPS ■ ■ ■ ■
Overcurrent
47 Negative Phase Sequence Voltage ■ ■
7SR11
49 Thermal Overload ■ ■ ■ ■
37 50 50 51 50 60 81 51c
50 Instantaneous Overcurrent ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 49
IL1 (x2) BF (x2) (x2) AFD CTS HBL2
(IA)
50G Measured Instantaneous Earth Fault ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
37 50 50 51 50 60 81
Measured Instantaneous Sensitive 49 51c
50SEF ■ ■ ■ ■ IL2 (x2) BF (x2) (x2) AFD CTS HBL2
Earth Fault (IB)
50N Derived Instantaneous Earth Fault ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
37 50 50 51 50 60 81
49 51c
IL3 (x2) BF (x2) (x2) AFD CTS HBL2
50AFD Arc Flash Detection ■ ■ ■ ■
(IC)
50BF CB Failure ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 46
46 50N 51N
NPS
51 Time Delayed Overcurrent ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ BC
(x2)
(x2) (x2)
51G Measured Time Delayed Earth Fault ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

I4
Measured Time Delayed Sensitive (IG/ISEF) 37 50G 51G 50
50 51
51SEF ■ ■ ■ ■ SEF SEF 64H
Earth Fault (x2) (x2) (x2) BF
(x2) (x2)
51N Derived Time Delayed Earth Fault ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
55 Power Factor ■ ■ 74
86
59 Overvoltage ■ ■ ■ ■ T/CCS
59N Neutral Voltage Displacement ■ ■ ■ ■

High Impedance Restricted Earth
64H ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Fault
67 Directional Overcurrent ■ ■ 79 Optional Version D Software
67G Directional Measured Earth Fault ■ ■

67SEF Directional Sensitive Earth Fault ■ ■ Fig 3. Four Pole Overcurrent Relay Version C Software
67N Directional Derived Earth Fault ■ ■
81HBL Inrush Detector ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
81 Under/Over Frequency ■ ■ ■ ■
CONTROL / MONITOR
51c Cold Load - Phase Only ■ ■ ■ ■
60CTS CT Supervision ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
60VTS VT Supervision ■ ■ ■ ■
74T/CC
Trip & Close Circuit Supervision ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
S
79 Autoreclose □ □ □ □
86 Lockout ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Line Check/SOTF ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Key - ■ - Included as standard
□ - Ordering option

32S Sensitive Power
7SR12 Functional Diagrams This is provided in 4 pole SEF relays and provides elements
operated by single phase measured current in the I SEF input.
Each element has settings for pickup level, Definite Time Lag
7SR12 (DTL) delay and Direction. Each element can be set as Under
67/ 67/ 67/ 67/
or Over power, to operate from Apparent, Real or Reactive
37
(x2)
50G 51G
81
HBL2
50SEF 51SEF 64H power.
I (x4) (x4) (x4) (x4)
(IG/ISEF)
37 Undercurrent
Each element has settings for pickup level and Definite Time
27/59 Lag (DTL) delays. Operates if current falls below setting for
V1 (x4) duration of delay.
27/59 81 59N 46BC Phase Unbalance/Broken Conductor

V2 (x4) (x4) (x2)
Element has settings for pickup level and DTL delay. With the
circuit breaker closed, if the NPS:PPS current ratio is above
27/59
V3 (x4) 86
74 setting this could be due to a broken conductor.
T/CCS

Fig 4. Single Pole Directional Relay Each element has user settings for pickup level and IDMTL or
DTL delay, operates if NPS current exceeds setting and delay.
NPS current elements can be used to detect unbalances on
7SR12
the system or remote earth faults when a delta-star
67/ 67/
IL1
37
(x2)
49
50
BF
51V 50
(x4)
51
(x4)
81
HBL2
51c
32
(x2)
55
(x2)
50
AFD transformer is in circuit.
(IA)
67/ 67/
IL2
37
(x2)
49
50
BF
51V 50
(x4)
51
(x4)
81
HBL2
51c
32
(x2)
55
(x2)
50
AFD 47 Negative Phase Sequence Voltage
(IB)
67/ 67/
37 50
Lag (DTL) delays. Operates if NPS voltage exceeds setting for
49 51V 81 32 55 50
50 51 51c
IL3 (x2) BF
(x4) (x4)
HBL2 (x2) (x2) AFD
(IC)
46 67/ 67/
duration of delay.
46 50 60 60
NPS 50N 51N
BC BF CTS VTS
(x2) (x4) (x4)
49 Thermal Overload
67/ 67/ 67/ 67/
I4 37
(x2)
50
BF
50SEF
(x4)
51SEF 50G 51G 64H
32S
(x2)
The thermal algorithm calculates the thermal states from the
(IG/ (x4) (x4) (x4)
SEF) measured currents and can be applied to lines, cables and
transformers. Alarm outputs are given for thermal overload
27
V1 59
(x4)
and thermal capacity.
27
V2 59 47
(x2)
81
(x4)
59N
(x2)
(x4)
27 86
74 The circuit breaker fail function may be triggered from an
T/CCS
V3 59
(x4)
internal trip signal or from a binary input. Line currents and
earth currents are monitored following a trip signal and an
output is issued if any current is still detected, above setting,
79 Optional after a specified time interval. Alternatively, if the trip is
from a mechanical protection the circuit breaker position can
Fig 5. Four Pole Directional Overcurrent Relay be used to determine a failure. A second time delay is
available to enable another stage to be utilized if required.
Notes An input is also available to bypass the time delays when the
1. Items shown dotted are only available in some circuit breaker is known to be faulty.
models; please refer to the Ordering Information
Section. 51c Cold Load Pickup
2. The use of some functions are mutually exclusive If a circuit breaker is closed onto a ‘cold’ load, i.e. one that
has not been powered for a prolonged period, this can
impose a higher than normal load-current demand on the
Description of Functionality system which could exceed normal settings. These
conditions can exist for an extended period and must not be
interpreted as a fault. To allow optimum setting levels to be
applied for normal operation, the cold load pickup feature
Each element has settings for pickup level, drop-off level and will apply alternative current settings for a limited period.
Definite Time Lag (DTL) delays. Operates if voltage exceeds The feature resets when either the circuit breaker has been
setting for duration of delay. closed for a settable period, or if the current has reduced
beneath a set level for a user set period.
32 Power
Each element has settings for pickup level, Definite Time Lag 50/51 Phase Fault
(DTL) delay and Direction. Each element can be set as Under 50 INST/DTL and 51 IDMTL/DTL elements provide overcurrent
or Over power, to operate from Apparent , Real or Reactive protection, each with independent settings for pickup
power and can be set for any phase or all three phases. current, time-multiplier (51) and time-delays. User can select

shaped current ~ time reset characteristic, to improve 1000
grading with electromechanical protection.
50G/51G/50N/51N Earth Fault/Sensitive Earth Fault

mode directly measures the earth current from an
independent CT, or the residual connection of the 3 line CTs. 100
This input can be ordered as either earth fault or sensitive
earth fault (50G/51G).
The second mode derives the earth current internally from
the 3 phase CT inputs to give earth fault (50N/51N). 50 Time
(sec)
INST/DTL and 51 IDMTL/DTL elements provide overcurrent
current, time-multiplier (51) and time-delays. User can select 10

a user programmable reset characteristic either DTL or
shaped current ~ time reset characteristic to improve grading
with electromechanical protection.
The directional SEF element is also suitable for use on
compensated networks. Moderately Inverse
1
1000 Very Inverse
Extremely Inverse
0.1
2 3 4 5 6 8 20 30 40 50 60 80
1 10 100
100 Current (multiples of setting)
Fig 7. ANSI Overcurrent Curves
Time 51V Voltage Controlled Overcurrent

(sec)
Each phase shaped overcurrent element can be
independently controlled by the level of measured input
10 voltage. For applied voltages above setting the 51-n
Long Time Inverse element operates in accordance with its current setting but
for voltages below the setting a multiplier is applied to
reduce the 51-n pick up current setting.
Normal Inverse
50AFD Arc Flash Detector

The 7SR1 relays can be used with the 7XG31 ReyArc range of
Arc Flash Detection devices. Arc fault protection is a
1
Very Inverse
technique employed for the fast clearance of arcing faults on

busbars, within metal clad switchgear & associated cable
boxes. The arc is detected using an optical sensor & the
Extremely Inverse
signal input to a protection device which also monitors the
load current on the system. A trip signal can be achieved in
0.1 less than 10 ms using arc detection only or within 20 ms
1 2 3 4 5 6 8
10 20 30 40 50 60 80
100 when using overcurrent check.
Fig 6. IEC Overcurrent Curves 55 Power Factor

Each element has settings for Under or Over Power Factor
pickup level, Definite Time Lag (DTL) delay and Lead/Lag
Direction. Each can also be set for any phase or all three
phases operation.
59N Neutral Overvoltage

Neutral overvoltage can be used to detect earth faults in
high impedance earthed or isolated systems.
Operates if the neutral voltage exceeds setting for duration
of delay.
The relay has two methods of CT supervision.. The 7SR11
monitors each phase current input and operates if any one
or two inputs fall below the setting. The 7SR12 has the
above method and an addition method that considers the
presence of negative phase sequence current, without an

equivalent level of negative phase sequence voltage, for a Circuit Breaker Maintenance
user set time as a CT failure. Two circuit breaker operations counters are provided to
Both element types have user operate and delay settings. assist with maintenance scheduling. The maintenance
60VTS VT Supervision delta counter records the number of operations since the
The VT supervision uses a combination of negative phase last reset.
sequence voltage and negative phase sequence current to An I2t summation counter provides a measure of the contact
detect a VT fuse failure. This condition may be alarmed or wear indicating the total energy interrupted by the circuit
used to inhibit voltage dependent functions. Element has breaker contacts.
user operate and delay settings. Each counter has a user set target operations count which,
when reached, can be mapped to raise alarms/ binary
64H Restricted Earth Fault outputs. A CB Trip Time meter is also available, which
The measured earth fault input may be used in a 64H high measures the time between the trip or open command being
impedance restricted earth fault scheme to provide sensitive issued and the auxiliary contacts changing state.
high speed unit protection. A calculation is required to
determine the values of the external series stabilising Control Mode
resistor and non-linear shunt resistor which can be ordered The relay has a control menu with access to commonly used
separately. command operations (except 7SR1102-1*A12-*AA0
models). Access to the control commands is restricted by a 4
67/67N Directional Control character control function password. Each command
Phase, earth and sensitive earth fault elements can be requires a select then execute operation, if the execute
directionalised. Each element can be user set to Forward, operation is not performed within a time window the
Reverse, or Non-directional. command is aborted. The following control functions are
Directional Phase Fault elements are polarised from available:
quadrature voltage. CB Operation
Derived earth fault elements can be user set to be polarised Auto Reclose In/Out
from residual voltage or negative phase sequence voltage. Auto Reclose Trip & Reclose
Measured earth fault elements are polarized from Vo. Auto Reclose Trip & Lockout
SEF In/Out
74T/CCS Trip & Close Circuit Supervision Inst Prot In/Out
The trip or close circuit(s) can be monitored via binary Hot Line Working In/Out
inputs. Trip circuit failure raises an HMI alarm and output(s).

Where second harmonic current is detected (i.e. during
transformer energisation) user selectable elements can be
blocked and an alarm given.
81 Under/Overfrequency
Each element has settings for pickup level, drop-off level and
Definite Time Lag (DTL) delays. Operates if frequency
exceeds setting for duration of delay. Typically applied in
load shedding schemes. Fig 8. Example of Control Function View
Standard Version – Plus 79 Auto-Reclose

A high proportion of faults on an overhead line network are Construction
transient and can be cleared quickly by high speed tripping
followed by an automated circuit breaker reclose sequence. The relay is housed in a 4U high, size E4 or E6 (Optional
IEC61850 model) case with a removable clear fascia cover.
The function provides independent phase fault and earth The fascia cover can be ordered with or without two push
fault / sensitive earth fault sequences of up to 5 trip i.e. 4 buttons to allow the user to view the settings and
reclose attempts before lockout. An auto-reclose sequence instruments without removing the cover.
can be user set to be initiated from internal protection Two handles are provided to allow the relay to be withdrawn
operation or via binary input from an external protection. from its case, contacts in the case ensure that the CT circuits
and normally closed contacts remain short circuited when
Programmable Logic the relay is withdrawn.
The user can map binary inputs, protection elements, LEDs The rear terminal blocks comprise M4 female terminals for
and binary outputs together in a logical scheme. ring crimp wire connections, to provide a secure and reliable
Up to 4 logic equations can be defined using standard logic termination.
Each logic equation output can be used for alarm &
Fig 12. Front view of relay (E6 Case with IEC61850
Fig 9. Rear view of relay (E4 Case) User Interface
User
Function
Label
Large LCD
Multi-
coloured
Programmable
LED’s
from fascia
Fig 13. User Interface

method of controlling, viewing menus, entering settings and
Fig 10. Rear view of relay with 2x LC Fibre Optic ports retrieving data from the relay. Five buttons are provided for
(E6 Case with IEC61850) navigation around the menu structure.
LCD
instrumentation, fault data and control commands.
Up to 6 user programmable general alarms can be
configured to display your own indications on the LCD.
LEDs
Healthy’ condition.
9 user programmable LEDs are available eliminating the
need for expensive panel mounted pilot lights and
associated wiring. Each LED is tri-color (red, green, yellow)
allowing for clear indication of the associated function’s
state and has a label insert for identification.
Relay Information
The device is identified by the rating label on the fascia. The
user can also give the device its own identity by editing the
Fig 11. Front view of relay (E4 Case with push buttons) ‘Relay Identifier’ displayed on the LCD or space is provided to
place a slip in label giving the relays function.

Pick Up Delay User Selectable 0 to 14,400,000ms
Technical Data (up to 4 hours)
Drop Off Delay User Selectable 0 to 14,400,000ms
(up to 4 hours)
For full technical data refer to the Performance Specification
For AC operation the BI pick-up delay should be set to 0ms
Section of the Technical Manual.
and the drop-off delay to 20ms.
Inputs and Outputs Binary Outputs

Number 5 or 8
(3 change over contacts)
Current Inputs Operating Voltage Voltage Free
Quantity 3 x Phase & 1 x Earth or Operating Mode User selectable - Self or
Sensitive Earth Hand/Electrical Reset or pulsed.
Rated Current In 1/5A Operating Time from <20ms
Measuring Range 80 x In Energizing Binary Input
Instrumentation ≥ 0.1xIn ±1% In Making Capacity:
Frequency 50/60Hz Carry continuously 5A ac or dc
Thermal Withstand: Make and carry 20A ac or dc for 0.5s
Continuous 3 x In (L/R  40 ms and V  300 30A ac or dc for 0.2s
10 Minutes 3.5 x In V)
2 Minutes 6 x In Breaking Capacity
1 Second 100A (1A) 350A (5A) (  5 A and  300 V):
1 Cycle 700A (1A) 2500A (5A) AC Resistive 1250 VA
Burden @ In ≤0.02VA (1A phase and Earth AC Inductive 250 VA at p.f.  0.4
element) DC Resistive 75 W
≤0.2VA (5A phase and earth DC Inductive 30 W at L/R  40ms
element) 50 W at L/R  10ms
Voltage Inputs
Nominal 40…160 Vrms
Unit Design
Operating Range 0… 200 Vrms
Instrumentation ≥ 0.8xVn ±1% Vn Housing E4 or E6(see dimension
Burden @ 110V  0.06 VA drawing)
Overvoltage Withstand 300 Vrms Indication 20 Character 4 line Display
Relay Healthy LED
Auxiliary Supply 9 Tri Coloured User
Rated DC Voltage 24-250V DC Programmable Self or Hand
Operating Range 19.2 to 275V Reset LED’s
Allowable superimposed 12% of DC voltage With-drawable Element Yes
ac component User Interface 5 Navigation Keys
Weight Typical 3.1Kg
Rated AC Voltage 100-230 VAC 50/60Hz IP Rating installed with IP 51 from front
Range 80 to 253 V rms AC cover
50/60Hz ±5% IP Rating installed without IP 20 from front
Power Consumption: Min (DC) 3.6W(6.1W with cover
IEC61850)
Max (DC) 8.4W (11W with
IEC61850) Data Communication Interface
Min (AC) 9VA (14.5VA with
Max (AC) IEC61850)
17VA (23VA with Communication Port Front USB Type B
IEC61850)
Rear RS485 2 wire electrical
Allowable breaks/dips in DC 50ms
supply (collapse to zero) AC 2.5/3 cycles IEC61850 optional ports:
@50/60Hz 2x Electrical RJ45 Ethernet
2x LC Fibre Optic Ethernet
Binary Inputs Protocols IEC60870-5-103
Number 3,4 or 6
MODBUS RTU (Serial)
Operating Voltage 19V dc DC Range 17 to 320V dc
AC Range 92 to 138 VRMSAC DNP3.0 O (Serial)
88V dc Range 70 to 320V dc IEC61850 - optional
Maximum dc 1.5mA Fibre Optic Ethernet Data
current for Communication Interface
operation (IEC 61850 Option)
Maximum peak ac 1.5mA
current for
operation

EN100 Fibre Optic Data Communication Interface displacement
(IEC 61850 Option) below crossover
Physical layer Fibre-optic freq (8-9Hz)
0.5gn above
Connectors Duplex LC 100BaseF in acc.
With IEEE802.3 Mechanical Classification
Recommended fibre 62.5/125 m glass fibre with Durability >106 operations
Duplex-LC connector
Transmission Speed 100 MBits/s
Optical Wavelength 1300 nm
Electrical Tests
Bridgeable distance 2 km
Insulation
IEC 60255-5
EN100 Electrical Ethernet Data Communication Interface
Type Level
(IEC 61850 Option)
Between any terminal 2.0 kV AC RMS for 1 min
Physical Electrical
and earth
Connectors RJ45 100BaseF in acc. With Between independent 2.0 kV AC RMS for 1 min
IEEE802.3 circuits
Transmission Speed 100 MBits/s Across normally open 1.0 kV AC RMS for 1 min
contacts
Test Voltage (with regard to 500 VAC 50 Hz
socket) High Frequency Disturbance
Bridgeable distance 20m IEC 60255-22-1 Class III
Type Level Variation
Common 2.5 kV 5%
Data Storage (longitudinal) mode
Series (transverse) 1.0 kV 5%
mode
Fault Record 10 (5 for 7SR1102-1*A12-*AA0).
Waveform Record 10 x 1sec Electrostatic Discharge
2 x 5sec IEC 60255-22-2
5 x 2sec
1 x 10sec
(5x1sec, 2x2sec, 1x5sec Front Cover Fitted Class IV, 5%
for 7SR1102-1*A12-*AA0) 15 kV Air Discharge
Events 1000 1ms Resolution
Front Cover Removed Class III, 5%
8 kV Air Discharge
Mechanical Tests Fast Transients

IEC 60255-22-4 Class A (2002)
Vibration (Sinusoidal)
5/50 ns 2.5 kHz 4kV 5%
IEC 60255-21-1 Class I
repetitive
Vibration response 0.5 gn 5% Surge Immunity
Vibration response 1.0 gn 5% IEC 60255-22-5
Shock and Bump
Analog Inputs:
IEC 60255-21-2 Class I 4.0 kV  10%
Line to Earth
Shock response 5 gn, 11 ms 5% Case, Aux Power &
2.0 kV  10%
Shock withstand 15 gn, 11 ms 5% I/O: Line to Earth
Bump test 10 gn, 16 ms 5% RS485 Comms port:
1.0 kV No Data Loss
Line to Earth
Seismic
IEC 60255-21-3 Class I Analog Inputs:
1.0 kV  10%
Type Level Variation Line to Line
X-plane - Case, Aux Power &
1.0 kV *  10%
3.5mm I/O: Line to Line
displacement * Note 45ms DTL pick-up delay applied to binary inputs
below crossover
Seismic response 5% Conducted Radio Frequency Interference
freq (8-9Hz) 1gn
and above IEC 60255-22-6
Y-plane – Type Level Variation
1.5mm 0.15 to 80 MHz 10 V 5%

Radiated Radio Frequency 32 Power (7SR12)
IEC 60255-25 Number of Elements 2 Forward or Reverse
Type Limits at 10 m, Quasi-peak Operate P, Q or S
30 to 230 MHz 40 dB(V) U/C Guard 0.05 to 1.0 x In
230 to 10000 MHz 47 dB(V) Setting Range Ss 0.05 to 2.0 x Sn
Operate Level Sop 100% Ss, ± 5% or ± 2% Sn
Conducted Radio Frequency Reset Level: - ≥95% Sop
Type Limits Basic Operate Time: -
Quasi-peak Average 1.1 x Ss (over) 60ms ± 10ms
0.15 to 0.5 MHz 79 dB(V) 66 dB(V) 2.0 x Ss (over) 45ms ± 10ms
0.5 to 30 MHz 73 dB(V) 60 dB(V) 0.5 x Ss (under) 30ms ± 10ms
Delay Setting td 0 to 14400s
Radiated Immunity Operate time tbasic +td , ±1% or ±10ms
IEC 60255-22-3 Class III following delay.
Inhibited by Undercurrent Guard, VTS
Type Level
80 MHz to 1000 MHz Sweep 10 V/m
32S Sensitive Power (7SR12 SEF)
1.4GHz to 2.7GHz Sweep 10V/m
Number of Elements 2 Forward or Reverse
80,160,380,450,900,1850,2150 10V/m Operate P, Q or S
MHz Spot U/C Guard 0.005 to 1.0 x In
Setting Range Ss 0.005 to 2.0 x Sn
Climatic Tests Operate Level
Reset Level: -
100% Ss ± 5% or ± 2% Sn
≥95% Sop
Basic Operate Time: -
Temperature 1.1 x Ss (over) 60ms ± 10ms
IEC 60068-2-1/2 2.0 x Ss (over) 45ms ± 10ms
Operating Range -10 C to +55 C 0.5 x Ss (under) 30ms ± 10ms
Storage range -25 C to +70 C Delay Setting td 0 to 14400s
Operate time tbasic +td ± 1% or ± 10ms
Humidity following delay.
IEC 60068-2-78 Inhibited by Undercurrent Guard, VTS
Operational test 56 days at 40 C and 93 %
37 Undercurrent
relative humidity
Number of Elements 2 Phase and 2 EF/SEF
Cyclic Temperature and Humidity Operate Any phase or ALL
IEC 60068-2-30 Setting Range Is Phase and EF
0.05,0.10…5.0 x In
Operational test 25 C to 55 C (outdoor
SEF
equipment) and 97/93 % relative
0.005,0.010…5.0 x In
humidity. 6 x 24h (12h+12h)
cycles.
Current Guard Phase 0.05,0.1…5.0 x In
Delay Setting td 0.00,0.01…20,20.5…100,101…
Performance 1000,1010…10000,10100…144
00s
Basic Operate Time:
27/59 Under/Over Voltage 1.1 to 0.5xIn 35ms ±10ms
Number of Elements 4 Under or Over Operate time following Tbasic +td , ±1% or ±10ms
Operate Any phase or All phases delay.
Voltage Guard 1,1.5…200V Overshoot Time < 40ms
Setting Range Vs 5,5.5…200V Inhibited by Binary or Virtual Input
Hysteresis Setting 0.0.1…80%
Vs Operate Level 100% Vs, ±1% or ±0.25V 46 Negative Phase Sequence Overcurrent
Reset Level: Number of Elements DT & IT
Overvoltage =(100%-hyst)xVop, ±1% DT Setting Range Is 0.05,0.10…4.0 x In
Undervoltage =(100%+hyst)xVop, ±1% DT Operate Level 100% Is, ±5% or ±1%xIn
Delay Setting td 0.00,0.01…20,20.5…100,101… DT Delay Setting td 0.00,0.01…20,20.5…100,101…
1000,1010…10000,10100…144 1000,1010…10000,10100…
00s 14400s
Basic Operate Time : DT Basic Operate Time
0 to 1.1xVs 73ms ±10ms 0 to 2 xIs 40ms ±10ms
0 to 2.0xVs 63ms ±10ms 0 to 5 xIs 30ms ±10ms
1.1 to 0.5xVs 58ms ±10ms DT Operate time Tbasic +td , ±1% or ±10ms
Operate time following Tbasic +td , ±1% or ±10ms following delay.
delay. IT Char Setting IEC NI,VI,EI,LTI ANSI MI,VI,EI &
Inhibited by Binary or Virtual Input DTL
VT Supervision IT Setting Range 0.05..2.5
Voltage Guard Tm Time Multiplier 0.025,0.030…1.6,1.7…5,6…100
Char Operate Level 105% Is, ±4% or ±1%In 2/4 x SEF where fitted
Overshoot Time < 40ms Characteristic IEC NI,VI,EI,LTI ANSI MI,VI,EI &
Inhibited by Binary or Virtual Input DTL
47 Negative Phase Sequence SEF 0.005…0.5 x In
Number of Elements 2 Time Multiplier 0.025,0.030…1.6,1.7…5,6...100
Setting Range Vs 1,1.5…90V Time Delay 0,0.01… 20s
Hysteresis Setting 0,0.1…80% Operate Level 105% Is, ±4% or ±1%xIn
Operate Level 100% Vs, ±2% or ±0.5V Minimum Operate time
Delay Setting td 0.00,0.01…20,20.5…100,101… IEC top 
K
 Tm
1000,1010…10000,10100…  IsI   1
14400s ANSI  A 
top   P  B  Tm
Basic Operate Time  IsI   1 
0V to 1.5xVs 80ms ±20ms
 5 % absolute or  30 ms
0V to 10xVs 55ms ±20ms
Follower Delay 0 - 20s
Operate time following Tbasic +td , ±2% or ±20ms
delay. Reset ANSI decaying, 0 – 60s
Overshoot Time < 40ms Inhibited by Binary or Virtual Input
Inrush detector
VT Supervision
49 Thermal Overload
Operate levels Operate and Alarm
Setting Range 5,5.5…200V
Operate Level 100% Vs, ±5% or ±1%xVn
Multiplier 0.25.0.3…1 x 51Is
Time Constant Setting 1,1.5…1000min
Inhibited by VT Supervision
Operate time 
 I 2  I p2 

t    In 2 2 

 I  k  I  

B
±5% absolute or ±100ms where

Ip = prior current Number of Zones 6, segregated outputs with and
Alarm Level Disabled, 50,51…100% without current supervision.
Inhibited by Binary or Virtual Input Setting Range Is 1,2…10 x In
50 (67) Instantaneous & DTL OC&EF (Directional) Reset level  95 % Iop
Operation – 7SR12 only Non directional, Forward or Operate time: 50AFD Overcurrent
reverse <16ms
Elements Phase, Derived Earth, Measured AFD Zone Operate Time
Earth & SEF <25ms
Number of Elements 2/4 x OC
2 x 7SR11 2/4 x Derived EF ‘N’ 50BF Circuit Breaker Fail
4 x 7SR12 2/4 x Measured EF ‘G’ where Operation Current check - Phase and
fitted Measured Earth with
2/4 x SEF where fitted independent settings
Mechanical Trip
Setting Range Is 0.05,0.06…50 x In CB Faulty Monitor
SEF 0.005…5 x In Setting Range Is 0.05,0.055…2.0 x In
Time Delay 0.00…14400s 2 Stage Time Delays Timer 1 20…60000ms
Operate Level Iop 100% Is, ±5% or ±1%xIn Timer 2 20…60000ms
Reset level  95 % Iop Operate Level 100% Is, ±5% or ±1%xIn
Operate time: Disengaging time < 20ms
50 0 to 2xIs – 35ms, ±10ms, Operate time following Tcbf ±1% or ±2ms
0 to 5xIs – 25ms, ±10ms delay
50N 0 to 2xIs – 40ms, ±10ms, Triggered by Any function mapped as trip
0 to 5xIs – 30ms, ±10ms contact.
Operate time following Tbasic +td , ±1% or ±10ms Inhibited by Binary/Virtual Input
delay Timer By pass Yes, 50BF CB Faulty Input
Inrush detector 55 Power factor (7SR12)
VT Supervision Number of Elements 2
Operation Under or Over, Lead or Lag
51(67) Time Delayed OC&EF (Directional) U/C Guard 0.05 to 1.0
Operation – 7SR12 only Non directional, Forward or Setting Range PFs 0.05 to 0.99
reverse Time Delays 0 to 14400s
Elements Phase, Derived Earth, Measured Operate Level ± 0.05
Earth & SEF Basic Operate time ≤ 70ms
Number of Elements 2/4 x OC Operate time following tbasic +td ± 1% or ± 10ms
2 x 7SR11 2/4 x Derived EF ‘N’ delay
4 x 7SR12 2/4 x Measured EF ‘G’ Inhibited by Undercurrent Guard, VTS
59N Neutral Voltage Displacement Not available in 7SR1102-1*A12-*AA0
Number of Elements DT & IT
DT Setting Range Is 1…100V CB Maintenance
DT Operate Level 100% Vs, ±2% or ±0.5V Trip Counter Total & Delta
DT Delay Setting td 0 …14400s 0…10000
DT Basic Operate Time Counts to AR Block 0…10000
0V to 1.5 x Vs 76ms ±20ms Frequent Operations 0…10000
0V to 10 x Vs 63ms ±20ms I2t Alarm 10…100000
DT Operate time Tbasic +td , ±1% or ±20ms
following delay.
IT Char Setting IDMTL & DTL
IT Setting Range 1…100V
Tm Time 0.1…140
Multiplier(IDMT)
Delay (DTL) 0…20s
Reset ANSI Decaying, 0…60s
Char Operate Level 105% Vs, ±2% or ±0.5V
60 Supervision
CT 7SR11 Current
7SR12 Current or Vnps & Inps
VT nps/zps
64H Restricted Earth Fault

Setting Range SEF input 0.005, 0.006 …
0.100, 0.105 …
0.950 xIn
EF input 0.05, 0.055...
0.95 xIn
Time Delay 0.00… 14400s
Basic Operate Time 0 to 2 xIs 45ms ±10ms
0 to 5 xIs 35ms ±10ms
74T/CC Trip/Close Circuit Supervision

Number of supervisable 3 x Trip and 3 x Close
circuits
Number of BI’s Required 1 or 2 per function
79 AutoReclose
Operating Mode Phase, Earth, SEF External
Number of Reclosures 4
Number of Trips 5
Dead Time 0…14400
Reclaim Time 0…600
Lockout Reset CB, Timer & BI
81 Under/Over Frequency
Number of Elements 4 Under or Over
Under Voltage Guard Yes/No
Setting Range Hz 43,43.01…68Hz
Hysteresis Setting 0, 0.1… 2%
Operate Level 100% Fs ±10mHz
Operate Time Typical <150ms
Vs Operate Delay 0…14400s
Control Functions
CB Open/Close
Inst Prot IN/OUT
EF IN/OUT
SEF IN/OUT
Hot Line IN/OUT
Relay Mode Local/Remote/Local or Remote
Reset LED’s & O/P’s
7SR11 Connection Diagram
Alternative 4BI+8BO
2
+ve +ve
3
without common terminals
-ve BI 1 BI 4 -ve +ve
4 1 3
+ve +ve BI 4 -ve
6 5 1
BI 2 BI 5
-ve
8 5
+ve +ve
10 7 BO 6 7
-ve BI 3 BI 6
12 9
9 BO 7 11
14 A
BO 6 11 13
RS485
16 Screen
BO 7 13 BO 8 15
18 B
BO 8 15
20 Term. B
+ve
22
-ve
24
1 2 1 2
28 GND.
B IEC61850
Data B A
1A Comms
13 3
(Optional)
14 BO 1 1
5A IL1
15 2
16 4 27 28 27 28
1A
17 BO 2 6
Rear View
18 5 Arrangement of terminals and modules
5A IL2
19
20
8
1A BO 3 NOTES
21
7
22 BI = Binary Input
5A IL3 10 BO = Binary Output
23 BO 4
9
24
1A 12
25 BO 5
11 Shows contacts internal to relay
26
IL4 case assembly.
5A
27 Contacts close when the relay
chassis is withdrawn from case
28
A
Fig14. Diagram showing 7SR11 relay with 4 CT inputs, up to 6 binary inputs and 8 binary outputs.

+ve +ve
Alternative 4BI+8BO
2 3
BI 1 BI 4 without common terminals
-ve -ve
4 1
+ve
3
+ve +ve
6 5 BI 4
BI 2 BI 5 -ve
1
-ve
8
+ve 5
+ve
10 7
-ve BI 3 BI 6 BO 6 7
12
9
9
14 A BO 7 11
BO 6 11
RS485
16 Screen 13
BO 7 13
18 B BO 8 15
BO 8 15
20 Term.
17
B
V1
19
+ve
22
21
-ve
24 V2
23
28 GND. 1 2 1 2
25
V3
B 27
IEC61850
13
1A
3 Data B A
Comms
14 BO 1 1
(Optional)
5A IL1
15 2
16 4
1A 27 28 27 28
17 BO 2 6
18 5
IL2 Rear View
5A
19 Arrangement of terminals and modules
20
8
21
1A BO 3 NOTES
7
22 BI = Binary Input
5A IL3 10 BO = Binary Output
23 BO 4
9
24
1A 12
25 BO 5
11 Shows contacts internal to relay
26
IL4 case assembly.
5A
27 Contacts close when the relay
chassis is withdrawn from case
28
A
Fig15. Diagram showing 7SR12 relay with 4 CT inputs, 3 VT inputs, up to 6 binary inputs and 8 binary outputs.

Ordering Information – 7SR11 Argus Non-Directional Overcurrent
Product description Variants Order No.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Nondirectional O/C Relay (Argus) 7 S R 1 1 0 □ - □□ A □□ - □ □ A 0
Overcurrent and earth fault

Protection relay
Protection Product
Overcurrent – Non Directional 1
Housing I/O and Fascia

1 CT, 3 Binary Inputs / 5 Binary Outputs, 10 LEDs 1 1 C
4 CT, 3 Binary Inputs / 5 Binary Outputs, 10 LEDs 2 A/C/D
4 CT, 6 Binary Inputs / 8 Binary Outputs, 10 LEDs 3 C/D
4 CT, 4 Binary Inputs / 8 Binary Outputs, 10 LEDs 7) 7 C/D
Measuring Input
1/5 A, 50/60Hz1) 1 A/C/D
1/5 A, 50/60Hz with SEF Input 2) 3 C/D
Auxiliary voltage
PSU Rated: 24-250V DC / 100-230V AC. BI threshold 19V DC (Rated: 24-250V DC / 100-120V AC) M
PSU Rated: 24-250V DC / 100-230V AC. BI threshold 88V DC (Rated: 110-250V DC) N
Communication Interface
Standard version – included in all models, USB front port, RS485 rear port (E4 Case) 1 2
Standard version – plus additional rear electrical Ethernet RJ45 (x2), E6 Case 6) 7 7 C/D
Standard version – plus additional rear optical Ethernet duplex (x2), E6 Case 6 ) 8 7 C/D
Protocol
IEC 60870-5-103 Modbus RTU and DNP3 (user selectable) 2
IEC 60870-5-103 Modbus RTU, DNP3 and IEC 61850 (user selectable settings) 6) 7
Relay Cover
Standard Version – No Push Buttons 1
Push Buttons – Down and Right Arrows 2

Basic version 5) A
46BC3) Broken conductor/load unbalance
503) Instantaneous phase fault overcurrent
50BF3) Circuit breaker fail
50G/50N Instantaneous earth fault
513) Time delayed phase fault overcurrent
51G/51N Time delayed earth fault
60CTS3) CT Supervision
64H High impedance REF
74T&C Trip & Close circuit supervision
86 Hand reset contacts
Standard version C
37 Undercurrent
46BC3) Broken conductor/load unbalance
46NPS3) Negative phase sequence overcurrent
493) Thermal overload
503) Instantaneous phase fault overcurrent
50AFD Arc Flash Detection
50SEF2) Instantaneous sensitive earth fault
513) Time delayed phase fault overcurrent
51SEF2) Time delayed sensitive earth fault
60CT3) CT Supervision
74T/CC Trip and Close circuit supervision
81HBL24) 2nd harmonic block/inrush restraint
51C3) Cold load pickup
Programmable logic
(continued on next page)

Ordering Information – 7SR11 Argus Non-Directional Overcurrent
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Nondirectional O/C Relay (Argus) 7 S R 1 1 0 - A - A 0
continued from previous page
Standard version – plus D

79 Autoreclose

2) 4CT is configured as 3PF + SEF/REF.
3) Functions only available in 4CT relay
5) Protection function package ordering option A is only available on hardware variant 7SR1102-1XA12-XAA0- 4CT 3BI 5BO
6) E4 case is standard, E6 case is required if IEC61850 model ordered
7) 4 Binary Input variant provides segregated Binary Outputs without a common terminal

Ordering Information – 7SR12 Argus Directional Overcurrent
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Directional O/C 7 S R 1 2 0 - A - A 0
Relay (Argus)
Directional
overcurrent
and earth fault Protection Product
protection relay Overcurrent – Directional 2
Housing I/O and Fascia

1 CT, 3 VT, 3 Binary Inputs / 5 Binary Outputs, 10 LEDs 4 1 C
4 CT, 3 VT, 3 Binary Inputs / 5 Binary Outputs, 10 LEDs 5
4 CT, 3 VT, 6 Binary Inputs / 8 Binary Outputs, 10 LEDs 6
4 CT, 3 VT, 4 Binary Inputs / 8 Binary Outputs, 10 LEDs 6) 8
Measuring Input
1/5 A, 40 to 160 V, 50/60Hz1) 2
1/5 A, 40 to 160 V, 50/60Hz with SEF Input2) 4
Auxiliary voltage
PSU Rated: 24-250V DC / 100-230V AC. BI threshold 19V DC (Rated: 24-250V DC / 100-120V AC) M
PSU Rated: 24-250V DC / 100-230V AC. BI threshold 88V DC (Rated: 110-250V DC) N
Standard version – included in all models, USB front port, RS485 rear port (E4 Case) 1 2
Standard version – plus additional rear electrical Ethernet RJ45 (x2), E6 Case 5) 7 7
Standard version – plus additional rear optical Ethernet duplex (x2), E6 Case 5 ) 8 7
Protocol
IEC 60870-5-103, Modbus RTU and DNP3 (user selectable) 2
IEC 60870-5-103 Modbus RTU, DNP3 and IEC 61850 (user selectable settings) 5) 7
Relay Cover

Standard version – Included in all models C
27/59 Under/overvoltage
323) Power
32S7) Sensitive Power
37 Undercurrent
46BC 3) Broken conductor/load unbalance
46NPS 3) Negative phase sequence overcurrent
47 Negative phase sequence voltage
493) Thermal overload
50AFD Arc Flash Detection
51V3) Voltage controlled overcurrent
553) Power Factor
59N Neutral voltage displacement
60CTS3) CT supervision
60VTS 3) VT supervision
67/50 Directional instantaneous phase fault overcurrent
67/50G 67/50N Directional instantaneous earth fault
67/50SEF2) Instantaneous sensitive earth fault
67/51 Directional time delayed phase fault overcurrent
67/51G 67/51N Directional time delayed earth fault
67/51/SEF2) Time delayed sensitive earth fault
81HBL24) 2nd harmonic block/inrush restraint
74T/CC Trip & Close circuit supervision
51C 3) Cold load pickup
81U/0 Under/Over Frequency
Programmable logic
Standard version – plus D

79 Autoreclose

2) 4CT is configured as 3PF + SEF/REF
3) Functions only available in 4CT relay
5) E4 case is standard, E6 case is required if IEC61850 model ordered
6) 4 Binary Input variant provides segregated Binary Outputs without a common terminal
7) Functions only available in 4CT SEF relay

1.1.2.2 7SR157 Check Synchronising Relay
 Independent check, system synchronising and close

on zero settings.
 Adjustable slip frequency, phase angle, voltage
blocking and Differential voltage blocking.
 Split system detection.
 Configurable dead/live bus and dead/live line voltage
settings, (2 State and 3 State).
 Synchronising bypass logic is provided to connect a
dead line or bus to a live line or bus.
 For manual synchronising the relay includes a
circuit breaker close guard feature, which is used to
prevent the control switch being held closed during
a synchronising operation.
Monitoring
25 Undervoltage Detector
Fig. 1 7SR157 Fascia
Differential Voltage Detector
Voltage Levels (Live and Dead status)
Description Control
25 Voltage Trim (Magnitude and Phase)
The 7SR157 Argus is a combined check and system System Split Detector
synchronising relay which can carry out controlled closing of a Check Synchronising
circuit breaker using measurements of the line and bus Check Synchronising Close Guard
voltages. The relay will prevent closure of the circuit breaker if System Synchronising
the differences in phase angle, slip frequency or magnitude of Close On Zero Synchronising
the voltages fall outside prescribed limits. System Split Lockout
Synchronising Bypass
If the parameters are within limits, the relay will issue an
output which can be used to close the circuit breaker directly
Supervision
or in conjunction with an auto-reclose scheme.
74 Close Circuit Supervision
Housed in a 4U high, size E4 or E6 (Optional IEC61850 60 VT Fail
model) case, the relay provides instrumentation and fault Demand Metering
data with integrated input and output logic, data logging &
fault reports. Communication access to the relay Features
functionality is via a front USB port for local PC connection Four Settings Groups
or rear electrical RS485 port for remote connection & Password Protection – 2 levels
optional IEC61850 communication through two rear User Programmable Logic
Ethernet ports (Electrical or Optical). Self Monitoring
Function Overview User Interface

Check Sync Limits

0°
Nominal System Sync Limits Menu Navigation Keys
Voltage
Live
Volts User Language Configuration
Hardware
Dead
Volts
2 VT, 3 Binary Inputs, 5 Binary Outputs
2 VT, 6 Binary Inputs, 8 Binary Outputs
Application
Check or system synchronising is required whenever two parts

180° of a power system network, each containing generation, have
to be connected or re-connected together. To avoid shock
System Split
loading and possible damage to primary electrical plant the

voltage, frequency and phase angle difference between the the live threshold, the live output is RESET but the Dead
two systems should be within acceptable limits relative to one output does not SET until the voltage falls below the Dead
another. threshold. This is an indeterminate state, where both Live
and Dead outputs have the same value, both are RESET.
Where two systems have been previously interconnected, the
frequencies of the two systems will drift apart slowly following
25 Voltage Trim
circuit breaker tripping and the phase angle difference will
increase. Here the slip rate will be small and the circuit breaker The relay incorporates a Voltage Trim Magnitude feature
can be closed using check synchronising settings as the and a Voltage Trim Angle feature for both the line and bus
limiting parameters. voltages. This allows small adjustments to the input voltages
and phase angles of the relay.
However, if the two systems become asynchronous so one
system is an ‘island’ of generation then a high rate of slip may 25 System Split Detector
result causing the two systems to pass through anti-phase The method used to detect a system split can be selected as
conditions. The relay will detect this system split condition, either phase angle or slip frequency. When the selected
inhibit the check synchronising algorithms and apply system condition is exceeded the 25 System Split output is set;
synchronising settings as limiting parameters. Typically in this indicating the system is split. A drop-off delay timer 25
mode the slip rate will be much higher and so there will be a System Split Timer is applied to the output, to suppress
narrower allowable phase angle difference before closing. In flickering.
addition, closure of the circuit breaker will only be allowed
under conditions of decreasing difference in phase angle. 25 Check Sync
Check Synchronising sets 25 InSyncCS and 25 Check Sync
Functional Diagram Close outputs when the Line and Bus voltages are healthy and
synchronised. The phase angle tolerance for being
synchronised is set by 25 Check Sync Angle setting. The
synchronised conditions must be held for a minimum time of
25 Check Sync Timer setting. An optional setting 25 Check
Sync Slip may be applied to limit Slip Frequency.
V Line
There are two modes of operation, Auto and Manual.
AUTO: 25 Check Sync Close output is set when the Check
25
synchronizing conditions are met.
MANUAL: 25 Check Sync Close output is set when Check
V Bus
synchronizing conditions are met and a manual close
command is received, via Start Check Sync input.
60
VTF
Close Guard
If manual closes are required to be carried out via an operator,
74
CCS the Close Guard feature can be enabled. This issues an alert
message and a general alarm, intended to warn the operator
about initiating a CB close before the relay issues a valid Check
Sync Close signal. This prevents the operator from pre-empting
Fig2. VLine, Vbus connection the relays’ decision.
Description of Functionality 25 System Synchronising

System Synchronising is triggered by a system split. After a
split, System Sync will wait for Line and Bus phases to
25 Line/Bus Undervolts realign, before setting 25 InSyncSS and 25 System Sync
The undervoltage detector element can block a close output Close outputs. The phase angle tolerance for being
command if either the line or bus voltages are below the 25 synchronised is set by 25 System Sync Angle setting (for
Line U/V / 25 Bus U/V setting value. the System Sync outputs to be set the phase angle between
the two voltages must be decreasing). The slip frequency
25 Voltage Diff must not be excessive, within 25 System Sync Slip setting.
The Differential Voltage Detector Element can block a close The synchronised conditions must be held for a minimum
output command if the scalar difference between the line time of 25 System Sync Timer setting.
and bus voltages is greater than the 25 Volt Differential
setting value. There are two modes of operation, Auto and Manual, there is
also a lockout mode.
VT Level Mode AUTO: 25 System Sync Close output is set when the Check
Option of 2 State or 3 State, to determine when a voltage is synchronizing conditions are met.
live or dead:
MANUAL: 25 System Sync Close output is set when Check
synchronizing conditions are met and a manual close
2 State – Line or Bus voltages are dead until they exceed the
command is received, via Start Check Sync input.
live threshold. The voltages are then live until they drop
below the dead threshold. LOCKOUT: The System Split Lockout output is set when there
is a 25 System Split event.
3 State - The Line or Bus Voltages are only classed as live
when above the live threshold. When the voltage falls below

25 Close On Zero
If the 25 Split Mode is set to COZ and a 25 System Split
occurs, a Close On Zero operation will be activated. Close On
Zero differs from System Sync, by attempting to issue a close
output when phase angle is precisely zero. The phase angle,
slip frequency and CB Close time delay are used to predict
when zero phase angle will occur.
The slip frequency must be less than the 25 COZ Slip Freq
but greater than the 25 Split Slip setting to avoid reversion
to Check Synchronising conditions.
25 Synchronising Bypass
Sync Bypass is triggered for switching operations, which
involve connecting a dead line or bus to a live line or live
bus. For these switching operations the synchronising
conditions will not be met, the Sync Bypass setting is
required to bypass the synchronising operations and allow
the Bypass Close output.
74 Close Circuit Supervision

Monitors the open/closed status of up to 3 circuits. If circuit
status is open for a minimum time of 74CCS-n-Delay
setting, Close Circuit Fail and Close Circuit Fail n events are
Fig3. Rear view of Standard E4 relay
raised.
60 VT Fail
When the circuit breaker is closed, both voltages should be
either Live or Dead. If this is not true, a VT Fail output is set
(60VTS, to indicate the Line VT has failed and 60VTF-Bus to
indicate the Bus VT has failed). A time delay setting (60VTF
– Line/Bus Delay) suppresses spurious operations during
transient switching conditions.
Programmable Logic
Up to 4 logic equations can be defined using standard logic
Fig4. Rear view of relay with 2x LC Fibre Optic ports
Construction (E6 Case with IEC61850)
The relay is housed in a 4U high size E4 case with a

removable clear plastic fascia cover. The plastic fascia cover
can be ordered with or without two push buttons to allow
the user to view the settings and instruments without
removing the cover.
Two plastic handles are provided to allow the relay to be
withdrawn from its case.
The rear terminal blocks comprise M4 female terminals for
ring crimp wire connections, to provide a secure and reliable
termination.

Auxiliary Supply
User Interface Rated DC Voltage 110/125/220/250V
Range 64 to 300V
Relay 24/48/60V
Specification Range 18 to 72V
User Label
Function Allowable superimposed 12% of DC voltage
Label ac component
Large LCD Rated AC Voltage 115 VAC 50/60Hz
Range 92 to 138 V rms AC
50/60Hz ±5%
Power Consumption: E4 Min (DC) 3.9W
Programmable
E4 Max (DC) 8W
Multi-
from fascia coloured E4 Min (AC) 9VA 0.5PF
LED’s E4 Max (AC) 16VA 0.5PF
E6 Min (DC) 6.4W
E6 Max (DC) 10.5W
E6 Min (AC) 14.5VA 0.5PF
Front USB
Comms E6 Max (AC) 21.5VA 0.5PF
Port Allowable breaks/dips in DC 50ms
supply (collapse to zero) AC 2.5/3 cycles
@50/60Hz
Fig5. User Interface
Binary Inputs
The operator interface is designed to provide a user friendly Number 6 or 3
retrieving data from the relay. Five buttons are provided for
AC Range 92 to 138 VRMSAC
navigation around the menu structure.
88V dc Range 70 to 320V dc
LCD Maximum dc 1.5mA
A 4 line by 20 character liquid crystal display with power current for
save operation indicates the relay identifier, settings, operation
instrumentation, fault data and control commands. Maximum peak ac 1.5mA
Up to 6 user programmable general alarms can be current for
configured to display your own indications on the LCD. operation
LEDs (up to 4 hours)
A green steadily illuminated LED indicates the ‘Protection Drop Off Delay User Selectable 0 to 14,400,000ms
Healthy’ condition. (up to 4 hours)
9 user programmable LEDs are available eliminating the For AC operation the BI pick-up delay should be set to 0ms
need for expensive panel mounted pilot lights and and the drop-off delay to 20ms.
allowing for clear indication of the associated function’s Binary Outputs
state and has a label insert for identification. Number 8 (2 change over contacts)
5 (2 change over contacts)
Relay Information Operating Voltage Voltage Free
The device is identified by the rating label on the fascia. The Operating Mode User selectable - Self or
user can also give the device its own identity by editing the Hand/Electrical Reset or pulsed.
‘Relay Identifier’ displayed on the LCD or space is provided to Operating Time from <20ms
place a slip in label giving the relays function. Energizing Binary Input
Making Capacity:
Carry continuously 5A ac or dc
Technical Data Make and carry 20A ac or dc for 0.5s
(L/R  40 ms and V  300 30A ac or dc for 0.2s
V)
Breaking Capacity
(  5 A and  300 V):
Inputs and Outputs AC Inductive
DC Resistive
250 VA
75 W
at p.f.  0.4
DC Inductive 30 W at L/R  40ms

Voltage Inputs 50 W at L/R  10ms
Instrumentation ≥ 0.8xVn ±1% Vn
Unit Design
Burden @ 110V  0.06 VA
Overvoltage Withstand 300 Vrms Housing E4 (see dimension drawing)
Indication 20 Character 4 line Display
Relay Healthy LED 5 x 2sec
9 Tri Coloured User 1 x 10sec
Programmable Self or Hand Pre trigger 10…90%
Reset LED’s Events 1000 1ms Resolution
With-drawable Element Yes
User Interface 5 Navigation Keys
Weight Typical 3.2kg E4 case,
4.15 kg E6 case.
Additional Transport Mechanical Tests
packaging: add 0.4kg
IP Rating installed with IP 51 from front
cover Vibration (Sinusoidal)
IP Rating installed without IP 20 from front
cover Type Level Variation
Vibration response 0.5 gn 5%
Data Communication Interface
Shock and Bump
Communication Port Front USB Type B Type Level Variation
Rear RS485 2 wire electrical Shock response 5 gn, 11 ms 5%
IEC61850 optional ports: Shock withstand 15 gn, 11 ms 5%
2x Electrical RJ45 Ethernet Bump test 10 gn, 16 ms 5%
Seismic
Protocols IEC60870-5-103 IEC 60255-21-3 Class I
MODBUS RTU (Serial) Type Level Variation
DNP3.0 O (Serial) X-plane -
3.5mm
IEC61850 - optional
displacement
Fibre Optic Ethernet Data below crossover
Communication Interface freq (8-9Hz) 1gn
(IEC 61850 Option) and above
Seismic response 5%
Y-plane –
1.5mm
EN100 Fibre Optic Data Communication Interface displacement
(IEC 61850 Option) below crossover
Physical layer Fibre-optic freq (8-9Hz)
0.5gn above
Connectors Duplex LC 100BaseF in acc.
With IEEE802.3 Mechanical Classification
Recommended fibre 62.5/125 m glass fibre with Durability >106 operations
Duplex-LC connector
Optical Wavelength 1300 nm
Electrical Tests
Bridgeable distance 2 km
Insulation
IEC 60255-5
EN100 Electrical Ethernet Data Communication Interface Type Level
(IEC 61850 Option)
Physical Electrical and earth
Connectors RJ45 100BaseT in acc. With Between independent 2.0 kV AC RMS for 1 min
IEEE802.3 circuits
Transmission Speed 100 MBits/s Across normally open 1.0 kV AC RMS for 1 min
contacts
Test Voltage (with regard to 500 VAC 50 Hz
socket) High Frequency Disturbance
Bridgeable distance 20m IEC 60255-22-1 Class III
Common 2.5 kV 5%
Data Storage (longitudinal) mode
mode
Fault Record 10
Waveform Record 10 x 1sec
2 x 5sec
Electrostatic Discharge Humidity
IEC 60255-22-2 Class IV IEC 60068-2-78
Type Level Variation Operational test 56 days at 40 C and 93 %
Contact discharge 8.0 kV 5% relative humidity
Fast Transients Cyclic Temperature and Humidity

IEC 60255-22-4 Class A (2002) IEC 60068-2-30
Type Level Variation Operational test 25 C to 55 C (outdoor
5/50 ns 2.5 kHz 4kV 5% equipment) and 97/93 % relative
repetitive humidity. 6 x 24h (12h+12h)
cycles.
Surge Immunity
IEC 60255-22-5
Performance
Analog Inputs:
4.0 kV  10%
Line to Earth 25 Check Synchronising
Case, Aux Power & Line Nom Voltage 40-160 V
2.0 kV  10%
I/O: Line to Earth Bus Nom Voltage 40-160 V
RS485 Comms port: System Frequency 50/60 Hz
1.0 kV No Data Loss
Line to Earth
25 Check Sync Angle 0 – 90 º
Analog Inputs:
1.0 kV  10% 25 Check Sync Slip 0 – 2Hz
Line to Line
25 Check Sync Timer 0-100 s
Case, Aux Power &
1.0 kV *  10% 25 Split Slip 0 – 2Hz
I/O: Line to Line
* Note 50ms DTL pick-up delay applied to binary inputs 25 System Split Timer 0 – 60 s
Conducted Radio Frequency Interference
IEC 60255-22-6 25 Check Sync Angle Difference
Type Level Variation Operate angle diff, ± 1 º
0.15 to 80 MHz 10 V 5% Reset angle op, ± 1 º
Radiated Radio Frequency Repeatability 1º

IEC 60255-25
Type Limits at 10 m, Quasi-peak 25 Check Sync Slip Frequency
30 to 230 MHz 40 dB(V) Operate frequency fslip, ± 10 mHz
230 to 10000 MHz 47 dB(V) Reset frequency fop, - 10 mHz
Conducted Radio Frequency Repeatability  10 mHz

Type Limits
Quasi-peak Average 25 Split Angle Detector
0.15 to 0.5 MHz 79 dB(V) 66 dB(V) Operate angle diff, ± 1 º
0.5 to 30 MHz 73 dB(V) 60 dB(V)
25 Split Slip Frequency Detector
Radiated Immunity
Operate frequency fslip, ± 10 mHz
IEC 60255-22-3 Class III
Type Level Reset frequency fop, - 10 mHz
80 MHz to 1000 MHz Sweep 10 V/m Repeatability  10 mHz
1.4GHz to 2.7GHz Sweep 10V/m 25 Check Sync Timer

Accuracy  1 % or  20ms
80,160,380,450,900,1850,2150 10V/m
MHz Spot Repeatability  1 % or  20ms
-10 °C to +55 °C 5%
Variation
Climatic Tests fnom ± 5 % 5%
25 System Synchronising
Temperature
IEC 60068-2-1/2 Line Nom Voltage 40-160 V
Operating Range -10 C to +55 C Bus Nom Voltage 40-160 V
Storage range -25 C to +70 C System Frequency 50/60 Hz
25 System Sync Angle 0 – 90 º
25 COZ Slip Freq 0 – 2Hz

25 System Sync Slip 0 – 2Hz
25 System Sync Timer 0-100 s
25 SS Close Pulse 0-60 s
25 System Sync Angle Difference

Operate angle diff, ± 1 º
Reset angle op, ± 1 º
Repeatability 1º
25 System Sync Slip Frequency

Reset frequency fop, - 10 mHz
Repeatability  10 mHz
25 Close on Zero Slip Frequency

Reset frequency fop, - 10 mHz
Repeatability  10 mHz
25 System Sync Timer

Accuracy  1 % or  20ms
Repeatability  1 % or  20ms
-10 °C to +55 °C 5%
Variation
fnom ± 5 % 5%
74 CCS Close Circuit Supervision Operate and Reset Time

Element basic operate time 25ms
Operate time following
tbasic + t d,  1 % or  20ms
delay
-10 °C to +55 °C 5%
Variation
fnom ± 5 % 5%
60 VTF VT Failure Operate and Reset Time

Element basic operate time 63 ms,  10ms
Operate time following
tbasic + t d,  1 % or  20ms
delay
-10 °C to +55 °C 5%
Variation
fnom ± 5 % 5%

Connection Diagram
+ve +ve
2 3
BI 1 BI 4 -ve
-ve 1
4
+ve +ve
6 5
BI 5 Optional
-ve BI 2
8
+ve +ve
10 7
-ve BI 3 BI 6 1 2 1 2
12
9
14 A
BO 6 11 Data B A
RS485
16 GND Comms
BO 7 13
18 B (optional)
BO 8 15
20 Term.
17
V Line 27 28 27 28
19
+ve
22
21
-ve
24 V Bus Rear View
23
Arrangement of terminals and modules
28
GND.
B NOTES
BI = Binary Input
3
BO = Binary Output
Items shown in BOLD are ordering options
BO 1 1
4 Shows contacts internal to relay case

assembly.
BO 2 6
Contacts close when the relay chassis is
5 withdrawn from case
8
BO 3
7
10
BO 4
9
12
BO 5
11
Fig6. Connection Diagram

Voltage Relay (Argus) 7 S R 1 5 7 □ - 5 □ A □ □ - □ C A 0
Protection Product
Voltage 5
Relay Type
Check Synchronising 7

2 VT, 3 Binary Inputs / 5 Binary Outputs, 10 LEDs 7
2 VT, 6 Binary Inputs / 8 Binary Outputs, 10 LEDs 8
Measuring Input
40/160V, 50/60Hz 5
Auxiliary voltage
80 to 250 VDC / 115 VAC, binary input threshold 19 V DC G
80 to 250 V DC, binary input threshold 88 V DC H
24 to 60 V DC, binary input threshold 19 V DC J
Spare
A
Standard version – included in all models, USB front port, RS485 rear port 1 2
(E4 case) 1)
Standard version - plus additional rear electrical Ethernet RJ45 (x2) (E6 7 7
Case) 1)
Standard version - plus additional rear optical Ethernet duplex (x2) 8 7
(E6 Case) 1)
Protocol
IEC 60870-5-103, Modbus RTU and DNP3 (user selectable setting) 2
IEC 60870-5-103, Modbus RTU, DNP3 and IEC 61850. (user selectable 7
settings)
Front Cover
Push Buttons – Down and right arrows 2

Standard version
25 Check Synchronising C
No additional functionality A
Spare 0
1) E4 case is standard, E6 case is required if IEC61850 option fitted

1.1.2.3 7SR158 Voltage and Frequency Relay
User Interface
Primary/Secondary Line and Phase Voltages
Positive Phase Sequence (PPS) Voltage
Negative Phase Sequence (NPS) Voltage
Frequency
Fig. 1 7SR158 Fascia Time and date
Starters
Fault data
Description Event records
CB trip and maintenance counters and Time to Trip
The 7SR158 is a voltage and frequency protection relay
developed to enhance the Argus family of products by
providing a familiar device using the latest generation of
Function Matrix
hardware technology.
Housed in a 4U high, size E4 or E6 (Optional IEC61850
model) case, these relays provide protection, monitoring,
7SR1587-5*A**-*DA0
7SR1587-5*A**-*CA0
instrumentation and metering with integrated input and
output logic, data logging & fault reports. Communication
access to the relay functionality is via a front USB port for REQUIREMENT
FUNCTIONAL
local PC connection or rear electrical RS485 port for remote

FUNCTION
connection & optional IEC61850 communication through

two rear Ethernet ports (Electrical or Optical).
Function Overview 27 Undervoltage ■ ■

47 Negative Phase Sequence Voltage ■ ■
Protection (can include) 59 Overvoltage ■ ■
27/59 Under/Over Voltage 59N Neutral Voltage Displacement ■ ■

47 Negative Phase Sequence Voltage 78 Vector Shift ■
59N Neutral Voltage Displacement 81 Under/Over Frequency ■ ■
78 Vector Shift
82 Under/Over Frequency 81R Rate of Change of Frequency ■
81R Rate-of-Change-of-Frequency (df/dt) CONTROL / MONITOR
74T/CCS Trip & Close Circuit Supervision ■ ■
Supervision 86 Lockout ■ ■
Control
86 Lockout
CB Control
Features
Self Monitoring

3
27/
59
47
(x2)
59N
(x2)
78
(x2)
81
(x6)
81R
(x6)
(x4)
* * With reference to figure 2 ‘Function Diagrams’.

74T
CCS CT/VT CONFIG > Phase Voltage Config:
(x3) Van,Vbn,Vcn, or Vab,Vbc,3V0 27/59 Under/Over Voltage
Definite Time Lag (DTL) delay. Operates when voltage
* Not all versions - see Function Matrix exceeds setting for the duration of delay.

27/
47 59N 81 81R Lag (DTL) delays. Operates when NPS voltage exceeds
3 59
(x4)
(x2) (x2) (x6) (x6) setting for the duration of delay.
* 59N Neutral Overvoltage
74T
CCS CT/VT CONFIG > Phase Voltage Config: Neutral overvoltage can be used to detect earth faults in
(x3) Va,Vb,Vc high impedance earthed or isolated systems.
Operates when neutral voltage exceeds setting for the
Fig. 2 Functional Diagrams
duration of delay.
VT Connections 74T/CCS Trip & Close Circuit Supervision

The trip or close circuit(s) can be monitored via binary
inputs. Detection of trip circuit failure can be used to raise an
A B C HMI alarm (general alarm) and/or output(s).
Va
B17
78 Vector Shift
B19 Operates if the voltage vector ‘jumps’ by more than setting
Vb
during abrupt change in load. The function is applied to
B21
detect ‘islanding’ or loss of connection between a generator
and the main utility supply.
B23
B25
Vc
CT/VT CONFIG >
Phase Voltage Config:
B27 Definite Time Lag (DTL) delays. Operates if frequency
Van,Vbn,Vcn exceeds setting for duration of delay.
The function is typically applied in load shedding schemes.
81R Rate of Change of Frequency (df/dt)

Va
B17 Each element has settings for pickup level and Definite Time
Lag (DTL) delay. Operates when the df/dt gradient exceeds
B19
setting for duration of delay.
Vb The function is typically applied in load shedding schemes or
B21
to detect ‘islanding’ or loss of connection between a
B23
generator and the main utility supply
Vc
B25 Programmable Logic
CT/VT CONFIG >
Phase Voltage Config:
B27
Va,Vb,Vc Up to 4 logic equations can be defined using standard logic
Va
B17
B19
Vb Virtual Inputs/Outputs
B21 There are 8 virtual inputs/outputs to provide internal logical
Vc B23 virtual I/O can be assigned in the same way as a physical I/O.
Dn
B25 Circuit Breaker Maintenance
CT/VT CONFIG > Da Two circuit breaker operations counters are provided to
B27
Phase Voltage Config: assist with maintenance scheduling. The maintenance
Vab,Vbc,3V0 counter records the overall number of operations and the
delta counter records the number of operations since the
Fig. 3 VT Connections last reset.

issued and the auxiliary contacts changing state.
Control Mode
restricted by a 4 character control function password. Each
the command is aborted. The following control functions
are available:
CB Control
Local or remote operation
Fig.6 Rear view of relay with 2x LC Fibre Optic ports

(E6 Case with IEC61850)
User Interface
Fig.4 Example of Control Function View
Construction
The relay is housed in a 4U high size E4 or E6 case with a
removable clear plastic fascia cover. The plastic fascia cover
can be ordered with or without two push buttons to allow
removing the cover.
Two plastic handles are provided to allow the relay to be
withdrawn from its case, contacts in the case ensure that the
normally closed contacts remain short circuited when the
relay is withdrawn.
The rear terminal blocks comprise M4 female terminals for
ring crimp wire connections, to provide a secure and reliable
termination.
Fig.7 User Interface

retrieving data from the relay. Five buttons are provided for
navigation around the menu structure.
LCD
instrumentation, fault data and control commands.
Up to 6 user programmable general alarms can be
configured to display your own indications on the LCD.
LEDs
Fig.5 Rear view of relay (E4 Case) A green steadily illuminated LED indicates the ‘Protection
Healthy’ condition.

9 user programmable LEDs are available eliminating the For AC operation the BI pick-up delay should be set to 0ms
need for expensive panel mounted pilot lights and and the drop-off delay to 20ms.
allowing for clear indication of the associated function’s Binary Outputs
state and has a label insert for identification. Number 8
(3 change over contacts)
Relay Information Operating Voltage Voltage Free
The device is identified by the rating label on the fascia. Operating Mode User selectable - Self or
The user can give the device its own unique identity by Hand/Electrical Reset or pulsed.
editing the ‘Relay Identifier’ displayed on the LCD, also space Operating Time from <20ms
is provided for a further slip-in label. Energizing Binary Input
Making Capacity:
Technical Data Make and carry 20A ac or dc for 0.5s
(L/R  40 ms and V  300 30A ac or dc for 0.2s
For full technical data refer to the Performance Specification V)
Section of the Technical Manual. Breaking Capacity
(  5 A and  300 V):
Inputs and Outputs AC Inductive 250 VA at p.f.  0.4
DC Resistive 75 W
DC Inductive 30 W at L/R  40ms
Voltage Inputs 50 W at L/R  10ms
Instrumentation ≥ 0.8xVn ±1% Vn Unit Design
Burden @ 110V  0.06 VA
Overvoltage Withstand 300 Vrms Housing E4 or E6 (see dimension
drawing)
Auxiliary Supply Indication 20 Character 4 line Display
Rated DC Voltage 110/125/220/250V Relay Healthy LED
Range 64 to 300V 9 Tri Coloured User
24/48/60V Programmable Self or Hand
Range 18 to 72V Reset LED’s
Allowable superimposed 12% of DC voltage With-drawable Element Yes
ac component User Interface 5 Navigation Keys
Rated AC Voltage 115 VAC 50/60Hz
3.65 kg E6 case.
Additional Transport
50/60Hz ±5%
packaging: add 0.4kg
Power Consumption: E4 Min (DC) 3.9W
IP Rating installed with IP 51 from front
E4 Max (DC) 8W
cover
E4 Min (AC) 9VA 0.5PF
IP Rating installed without IP 20 from front
E4 Max (AC) 16VA 0.5PF
cover
E6 Min (DC) 6.4W
E6 Max (DC) 10.5W
E6 Min (AC) 14.5VA 0.5PF Data Communication Interface
E6 Max (AC) 21.5VA 0.5PF
supply (collapse to zero) AC 2.5/3 cycles Communication Port Front USB Type B
@50/60Hz
Binary Inputs IEC61850 optional ports:
2x Electrical RJ45 Ethernet
Number 6
AC Range 92 to 138 VRMSAC Protocols IEC60870-5-103
88V dc Range 70 to 320V dc MODBUS RTU (Serial)
Maximum dc 1.5mA
DNP3.0 O (Serial)
current for
operation IEC61850 - optional
Maximum peak ac 1.5mA Fibre Optic Ethernet Data
(up to 4 hours)
(up to 4 hours)

EN100 Fibre Optic Data Communication Interface
(IEC 61850 Option) Electrical Tests
Physical layer Fibre-optic
Connectors Duplex LC 100BaseF in acc. Insulation
With IEEE802.3 IEC 60255-5
Recommended fibre 62.5/125 m glass fibre with Type Level
Duplex-LC connector Between any terminal 2.0 kV AC RMS for 1 min
Transmission Speed 100 MBits/s and earth
Optical Wavelength 1300 nm Between independent 2.0 kV AC RMS for 1 min
Bridgeable distance 2 km circuits
Across normally open 1.0 kV AC RMS for 1 min
EN100 Electrical Ethernet Data Communication Interface contacts
(IEC 61850 Option)
Physical Electrical High Frequency Disturbance
Connectors RJ45 100BaseT in acc. With
IEEE802.3
Common 2.5 kV 5%
(longitudinal) mode
Test Voltage (with regard to 500 VAC 50 Hz Series (transverse) 1.0 kV 5%
socket) mode
Bridgeable distance 20m Electrostatic Discharge
IEC 60255-22-2 Class IV
Data Storage Contact discharge 8.0 kV 5%
Fast Transients
Fault Record 10
IEC 60255-22-4 Class A (2002)
Waveform Record 10 x 1sec
2 x 5sec Type Level Variation
5 x 2sec 5/50 ns 2.5 kHz 4kV 5%
1 x 10sec repetitive
Events 1000 1ms Resolution Surge Immunity
IEC 60255-22-5
Mechanical Tests Analog Inputs:
4.0 kV  10%
Line to Earth
Vibration (Sinusoidal) Case, Aux Power &
IEC 60255-21-1 Class I 2.0 kV  10%
I/O: Line to Earth
Type Level Variation RS485 Comms port:
Vibration response 0.5 gn 5% 1.0 kV No Data Loss
Line to Earth
Analog Inputs:
1.0 kV  10%
Shock and Bump Line to Line
IEC 60255-21-2 Class I Case, Aux Power &
Type Level Variation 1.0 kV *  10%
I/O: Line to Line
Shock response 5 gn, 11 ms 5% * Note 50ms DTL pick-up delay applied to binary inputs
Shock withstand 15 gn, 11 ms 5%
Bump test 10 gn, 16 ms 5% Conducted Radio Frequency Interference
IEC 60255-22-6
Seismic Type Level Variation
IEC 60255-21-3 Class I 0.15 to 80 MHz 10 V 5%
X-plane - 3.5mm Radiated Radio Frequency
displacement below IEC 60255-25
crossover freq (8- Type Limits at 10 m, Quasi-peak
Seismic 9Hz) 1gn and above 30 to 230 MHz
5% 40 dB(V)
response Y-plane – 1.5mm
230 to 10000 MHz 47 dB(V)
displacement below
Conducted Radio Frequency
crossover freq (8-
9Hz) 0.5gn above Type Limits
Quasi-peak Average
Mechanical Classification 0.15 to 0.5 MHz 79 dB(V) 66 dB(V)
Durability >106 operations 0.5 to 30 MHz 73 dB(V) 60 dB(V)

Radiated Immunity Setting Range Vs 1,1.5…90V
IEC 60255-22-3 Class III Hysteresis Setting 0.0.1…80%
Type Level Operate Level 100% Vs, ±2% or ±0.5V
80 MHz to 1000 MHz Sweep 10 V/m Reset Level (100% - hyst) x Vop, ±1%
or ± 0.25V
1.4GHz to 2.7GHz Sweep 10V/m Delay Setting td 0.00,0.01…20,20.5…100,101…
1000,1010…10000,10100…144
80,160,380,450,900,1850,2150 10V/m 00s
MHz Spot Basic Operate Time :
0 to 2.0 x Vs 80ms ±20ms
0 to 10 x Vs 70ms ±20ms
Environmental Tests Operate time following Tbasic + td , ±2% or ±20ms
delay.
Temperature Voltage Guard
IEC 60068-2-1/2
Operating Range -10C to +55C 74T/CC Trip/Close Circuit Supervision
Storage range -25C to +70C Number of supervisable 3 x Trip and 3 x Close
circuits
Humidity Number of BI’s Required 1 or 2 per function
IEC 60068-2-78
Operational test 56 days at 40C and 93% relative 78 Vector Shift
humidity Number of Elements 2
Under-Voltage Guard 1,1.5…200V
Cyclic Temperature and Humidity Setting Range VSs 2.0, 2.5 ... 30 °
IEC 60068-2-30 Operate Level 100% VSs,  2°
Operational test 25 C to 55 C (outdoor Operate Time  40ms
equipment) and 97/93 % relative
humidity. 6 x 24h (12h+12h) 81 Under/Over Frequency
cycles.
IP Ratings Under Voltage Guard 35,35.5…200V
IEC 60529 Setting Range 43,43.01…68Hz
Hysteresis Setting 0, 0.1… 2%
Type Level
Operate Level 100% Fs ±10mHz
Installed with cover IP 51 from front of relay Operate Time Maximum <150ms
Installed with cover removed IP 20 from front of relay Operate Delay 0…14400s
81R Rate of Change of Frequency (df/dt)

Performance Number of Elements 6
Under Voltage Guard 35,35.5…200V
Setting Range Rs 0.050, 0.075 …10.0 Hz/s
27/59 Under/Over Voltage Operate Level Rs  50mHz/s (F.nom  3Hz)
Number of Elements 4 Under or Over Operate Time
Operate Any phase or All phases for ROCOF 1.3x setting  300ms
Under-Voltage Guard 1,1.5…200V for ROCOF 2x setting  200ms
Setting Range Vs 5,5.5…200V Operate Delay 0…200s
Hysteresis Setting 0.0.1…80%
Vs Operate Level 100% Vs, ±1% or ±0.25V 59N Neutral Voltage Displacement
Reset Level: Number of Elements DT & IT
Overvoltage = (100% - hyst) x Vop, ±1% DT Setting Range Is 1…100V
Undervoltage = (100% + hyst) x Vop, ±1% DT Operate Level 100% Vs, ±2% or ±0.5V
Delay Setting td 0.00,0.01…20,20.5…100,101… DT Delay Setting td 0 …14400s
1000,1010…10000,10100…144 DT Basic Operate Time
00s 0V to 1.5 x Vs 76ms ±20ms
Basic Operate Time : 0V to 10 x Vs 63ms ±20ms
0 to 1.1xVs 73ms ±10ms DT Operate time Tbasic +td , ±1% or ±20ms
0 to 2.0xVs 63ms ±10ms following delay.
1.1 to 0.5xVs 58ms ±10ms IT Char Setting IDMTL & DTL
Operate time following Tbasic +td , ±1% or ±10ms IT Setting Range 1…100V
delay. Tm Time 0.1…140
Inhibited by Binary or Virtual Input Multiplier(IDMT)
Voltage Guard Delay (DTL) 0…20s
Reset ANSI Decaying, 0…60s
47 Negative Phase Sequence Voltage Char Operate Level 100% Vs, ±2% or ±0.5V
Number of Elements 2 Inhibited by Binary or Virtual Input
Under-Voltage Guard 1,1.5…200V
Control Functions
CB Open/Close
CB Maintenance
0…10000
Counts to AR Block 0…10000
Frequent Operations 0…10000
I2t Alarm 10…100000

+ve +ve
2 3
-ve BI 1 BI 4 -ve
4 1
+ve +ve
6 5
BI 2 BI 5
-ve
8
+ve +ve
10 7
-ve BI 3 BI 6
12
9
14 A
BO 6 11
RS485
16 GND
BO 7 13
18 B
BO 8 15
20 Term.
17
19
+ve
22 See
Relay 21
-ve
24 Voltage
Config. 23
Setting
28 GND. 25
B 27
BO 1 1
BO 2 6
8
BO 3
7
10
BO 4
9
12
BO 5
11
1 2 1 2
NOTES
BI = Binary Input, BO = Binary Output
Ethernet
Data
Comms B A Shows contacts internal
(optional) to relay case assembly.
Contacts close when
relay chassis withdrawn
27 28 27 28 from case
Fig.8 - 7SR158 Connection Diagram

Ordering Information – 7SR158
Voltage/frequency relay 7 S R 1 5 8 7 - 5 □A□□ - □ □A 0

▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
| | | | | | | | | | | |
Protect Product Family | | | | | | | | | | | |
Voltage 5 | | | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | | | |
Relay Type | | | | | | | | | | |
Voltage & Frequency 8 | | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | | |
Case, I/O and Fascia | | | | | | | | | |
E4 case, 3 VT, 6 Binary Inputs / 8 Binary Outputs, 10 LEDs 7 | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | |
Measuring input | | | | | | | | |
40 to 160 V, 50/60Hz 5 | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
Auxiliary voltage | | | | | | | |
80 to 250 V DC / 115 V AC, binary input threshold 19 V DC G | | | | | | |
80 to 250 V DC binary input threshold 88 V DC H | | | | | | |
24 to 60 V DC, binary input threshold 19 V DC J | | | | | | |
| | | | | | |
Spare | | | | | | |
A | | | | | |
Communication Interface | | | | | |
Standard version – included in all models, USB front port, RS485 rear port (E6 Case) 1) 1 2 | | | |
Standard version - plus additional rear electrical Ethernet RJ45 (x2) (E6 Case) 1) 7 7 | | | |
Standard version - plus additional rear optical Ethernet duplex (x2) (E6 Case) 1) 8 7 | | | |
| | | | |
Protocol | | | | |
IEC 60870-5-103, Modbus RTU and DNP3(user selectable setting) 2 | | | |
IEC 60870-5-103, Modbus RTU, DNP3 and IEC 61850. (user selectable settings) 7 | | | |
| | | |
Front Cover | | | |
Standard Version – No Push Buttons 1 | | |
Push Buttons – Down and right Arrows 2 | | |
| | |
Protection Function Packages | | |
For future development A | |
For future development B | |
Standard Version C | |
27/59 Under/overvoltage | | |
47 Negative phase sequence voltage | | |
59N Neutral voltage displacement | | |
74T&C Trip & Close circuit supervision | | |
81 Under/overfrequency | | |
| | |
Standard version – plus D | |
78 Voltage Vector Shift | |
81R Rate of Change of Frequency | |
| |
Additional Functionality | |
No additional functionality A |
|
Spare 0

1.1.2.4 7SR191 Capacitor Protection Relay
Supervision
Control
CB Control
Reswitch Blocking
Features
Cold Load Settings
Description Password Protection – 2 levels
User specified voltage, current & thermal protection curves
The 7SR191 Capa devices are numeric protection relays Self Monitoring
designed for application on shunt connected distribution Circuit Breaker Trip and Maintenance Counter
capacitor banks arranged in all common connection Trip Timers
configurations, typically single star, double star, delta or in
an H configuration. These relays provide all protection
functions required in a single device. Relay versions which User Interface
can be connected to primary voltage transformers provide
additional voltage protection functions and metering.
The 7SR191 relays are developed from the proven 7SR11 & 20 Character x 4 Line Backlit LCD
7SR12 Argus family of products providing a familiar product Menu Navigation Keys
using the latest generation of hardware technology. 9 User Programmable Tri-colour LEDs
Housed in a 4U high, size E4 or E6 (Optional IEC61850 User Language Configuration
model) case, these relays provide protection, monitoring,
instrumentation and metering with integrated input and
output logic, data logging & fault reports. Communication Monitoring Functions
access to the relay functionality is via a front USB port for
local PC connection or rear electrical RS485 port for remote Primary/Secondary Current Phases and Earth Direction
connection & optional IEC61850 communication through Primary/Secondary Line and Phase Voltages
two rear Ethernet ports (Electrical or Optical). Capacitor Overvoltage
Capacitor Unbalance Current
Function Overview Apparent Power and Power Factor
Real and Reactive Power
Import and Export, Real and Reactive Energy
Protection Historical Demand Record
Positive Phase Sequence (PPS) Voltage & Current
37 Undercurrent/Loss of Supply
Negative Phase Sequence (NPS) Voltage & Current
46MDT Phase Unbalance
46 Negative Phase Sequence Overcurrent
Frequency
49 Thermal Overload
Harmonic currents up to 15th and Total Harmonic Distortion
50N Instantaneous Earth Fault
Time and date
Starters
51N Time Delayed Derived Earth Fault
Fault records
59C Overvoltage by Current Integration
Event records
60C Capacitor Unbalance Current
87REF High Impedance REF
59IT
59N
Inverse Time Overvoltage
Neutral Voltage Displacement
Hardware
67/50 Directional Instantaneous Overcurrent
67/50N Directional Instantaneous Earth Fault 4 CT 3 Binary Inputs 5 Binary Outputs
67/51 Directional Time Delayed Overcurrent 4 CT 6 Binary Inputs 8 Binary Outputs
67/51N Directional Time Delayed Earth Fault 4 CT 3 VT 3 Binary Inputs 5 Binary Outputs
83 Under/Over Frequency 4 CT 3 VT 6 Binary Inputs 8 Binary Outputs

Application Function Matrix
The 7SR191 Capa is a numerical protection relay intended for
3P OC +1P UB mode *
1P OC +3P UB mode *
3P OC +1P UB mode *
1P OC +3P UB mode *
use on shunt connected distribution capacitor banks. It
7SR1912/7SR1913
7SR1912/7SR1913
7SR1915/7SR1916
7SR1915/7SR1916
provides a highly comprehensive functional software
REQUIREMENT
FUNCTIONAL
package with a range of integral application functions aimed
at reducing installation, wiring and engineering time.
An extensive range of metered values can be viewed on the
front LCD or at a remote point via the communication
59C Overvoltage by current integration ■ ■ ■ ■
channel.
60C Capacitor Unbalance ■ ■ ■ ■
The integrated control feature allows local and remote 37 Undercurrent, Loss of Supply ■ ■ ■ ■
operation of a single circuit breaker and monitoring of its Reswitch Blocking ■ ■ ■ ■
trip and close circuits. Loss of supply to the capacitor is 46MDT Phase Unbalance ■ ■
detected and can be used to disconnect from the network. 46 Negative Phase Sequence Overcurrent ■ ■
Automatic blocking of subsequent reconnection until the 47 Negative Phase Sequence Voltage ■ ■
capacitor has safely discharged is also provided. 49 Thermal Overload ■ ■ ■ ■

50 Instantaneous Overcurrent ■ ■
Distribution capacitor banks are constructed from a large 50N Derived Instantaneous Earth Fault ■ ■
number of individual capacitor units. These units will 50BF CB Failure ■ ■ ■ ■
periodically fail due to the electrical stress applied during 51 Time Delayed Overcurrent ■ ■
normal service. Failure of a single unit is acceptable as the 51N Derived Time Delayed Earth Fault ■ ■
resulting short circuit will be cleared by either operation of 27 Undervoltage ■ ■
fuses, in internally or externally fused arrangements, or 59 Overvoltage ■ ■
simply be coped with by design in unfused and fuseless 59N Neutral Voltage Displacement ■ ■
arrangements. However, the failure of one unit will impose 87REF High Impedance Restricted Earth Fault ■ ■
67 Directional Overcurrent ■
increased stress on remaining units increasing the
67N Directional Derived Earth Fault ■
probability that these units will fail. This will further increase
81 Under/Over Frequency ■ ■
stresses and if not disconnected, could eventually lead to
CONTROL / MONITOR
cascading failure of the whole bank. The bank is often split
51c Cold Load ■ ■ ■ ■
into similar sections, arranged such that the balanced nature
60CTS CT Supervision ■ ■ ■
can be used as a basis for early failure detection. Current
60VTS VT Supervision ■ ■
transformers are typically fitted at suitable locations to allow
50BF Circuit breaker Fail ■ ■ ■ ■
unbalance current to be measured by protection devices.
Key - ■ - Included as standard
In addition to this, measurement of the total bank current is
* - Mode is selectable by user setting
measured to detect unbalance between phases caused by
capacitor unit failure as well as overload protection and for
detection of insulation failure faults such as phase to phase
and phase to earth flashover.
The 7SR191 provides user configuration settings for
operating mode to allow the current inputs to be allocated
to the protection functions to cater for all common bank
arrangements with a single ordering code. When set in 3
Pole Overcurrent + 1 Pole Unbalance mode, the four current
inputs are allocated as three phase current inputs plus one
unbalance input. In 1 Pole Overcurrent + 3 Pole Unbalance
mode, the four inputs are allocated instead to provide three
phase segregated inputs plus a single phase reference input.

Voltage Inputs are optional and provide additional measuring and protection functionality as shown
27/59 47 47IT 59N 60 81

(x4) 59IT 59N IT
(x2) (x2) DT VTS (x4)
37 46 59C 59C 50 51 60
50 46 50N 51N 51c
49 46M DT IT CTS
(x2) BF DT IT (x4) (x2) (x4) (x2)
(x2) (x2)
60C 60C 87
DT IT
(x2) (x2) REF
7SR1912/1913 without voltage inputs
74TCS 74CCS 7SR1915/1916 with voltage inputs
(x3) (x3) 3 Pole OC + 1 Pole Unbal.configuration
Fig1. Typical Unearthed Double Star (DY)
27/59 47 47IT 59N 60 81

(x4) 59IT 59N IT
(x2) (x2) DT VTS (x4)
37 46 59C 59C 50 51 60
50 46 50N 51N 51c
49 46M DT IT CTS
(x2) BF DT IT (x4) (x2) (x4) (x2)
(x2) (x2)
60C 60C 87
DT IT
(x2) (x2) REF
Fig2. Typical Earthed Double Star (DY)
27/59 47IT 59N 60

(x4) 59IT 47 (x2) 59N IT 81 (x4)
(x2) DT VTS
59C 59C
37 50
49 DT IT
(x2) BF
(x2) (x2)
60C 60C
DT IT
(x2) (x2)
74TCS 74CCS
7SR1915/1916 with voltage inputs
(x3) (x3)
1 Pole OC + 3 Pole Unbal.configuration
Fig3. Typical Earthed Double Star (DY) with segregated unbalance

27/59 47 47IT 59N 60 81

(x4) 59IT 59N IT
(x2) (x2) DT VTS (x4)
37 46 59C 59C 50 51 60
50 46 50N 51N 51c
49 46M DT IT CTS
(x2) BF DT IT (x4) (x2) (x4) (x2)
(x2) (x2)
60C 60C 87
DT* IT*
(x2) (x2) REF
* 60C is not used for this application as no unbalance CT is available
Fig4. Typical Single Star
27/59 47 47IT 59N 60 81

(x4) 59IT 59N IT
(x2) (x2) DT VTS (x4)
37 46 59C 59C 50 51 60
50 46 50N 51N 51c
49 46M DT IT CTS
(x2) BF DT IT (x4) (x2) (x4) (x2)
(x2) (x2)
60C 60C 87
DT IT
(x2) (x2) REF
Fig5. Typical Delta
27/59 47IT 59N 60

(x4) 59IT 47 (x2) 59N IT 81 (x4)
(x2) DT VTS
59C 59C
37 50
49 DT IT
(x2) BF
(x2) (x2)
60C 60C
DT IT
(x2) (x2)
74TCS 74CCS
7SR1915/1916 with voltage inputs
(x3) (x3)
1 Pole OC + 3 Pole Unbal.configuration
Fig6. Typical H Bridge (Split H)

7SR1912/3 Functional Diagrams 7SR1915/6 Functional Diagrams
7SR1912/1913 3 Pole OC + 1 Pole Unbal. Config 7SR1915/1916 3 Pole OC + 1 Pole Unbal. Config
37 50 51 59C 50
37 50 67/ 67/
49 51c 59C
(x2) (x4) (x2) (x4) BF 49 50 51 51c
IL1 IL1 (x2) BF (x4)
(IA) (x4) (x2)
(IA)
37 50 51 59C 50
37 50 67/ 67/
49 51c 59C
IL2 (x2) (x4) (x2) (x4) BF 49 50 51 51c
IL2 (x2) BF (x4)
(x4) (x2)
(IB)
(IB)
37 50 51 59C 50 67/ 67/
49 51c 37 50 59C
IL3 (x2) (x4) (x2) (x4) BF 49 50 51 51c
(IC)
IL3 (x2) BF (x4)
(x4) (x2)
(IC)
46
50N 51N 60
46 67/ 67/
46M NPS 50 60 60
(x4) (x2) CTS 46M NPS 50N 51N
(x2) BF CTS VTS
(x2) (x4) (x2)
IL4
(IUB/REF) 60C 50 87 50 60C 87
(x4) BF REF
IL4 BF (x4) REF
(IUB/REF)
74 74
TCS CCS
74 74
27
59 TCS CCS
VL1 59
IT
(x4)
Fig7. 7SR1912/1913 3 Pole OC + 1 Pole Unbal.
Configuration VL2
27
59
59 47 81 59N
IT (x4) (x4) (x2)
(x4)
7SR1912/1913 1 Pole OC + 3 Pole Unbal. Config VL3

27
59
59
IT
(x4)
50 60C
IL1 BF (x4)
(IA) Fig9. 7SR1915/1916 3 Pole OC + 1 Pole Unbal.
50 60C Configuration
IL2 BF (x4)
(IB)
50 60C 7SR1915/1916 1 Pole OC + 3 Pole Unbal. Config

IL3 BF (x4)
(IC)
50 60C
BF (x4)
IL1
37 59C 50 50 60C
49 51c
IL4 (x2) (x4) BF BF (x4)
IL2
(IREF)
50 60C
BF (x4)
74 74 IL3
TCS CCS

Configuration 37
49
50 59C
51c
(x2) BF (x4)
I4 60
VTS
1P
74 74
27 TCS CCS
59
VL1 59
IT
(x4)
27
59 47 81 59N
VL2 59
IT (x4) (x4)
(x4) (x2)
27
59
VL3 59
IT
(x4)

Configuration
Notes
1. The use of some functions are mutually exclusive.
e.g. 60C/87REF
2. Some functions are dependent on the operating
mode selection.

51c Cold Load Pickup
Description of Functionality When a capacitor bank is initially energized the connected
system may create transient effects which could appear as
operating currents at the relay. These conditions can exist
for an extended period and must not be interpreted as a
Each element has settings for pickup level, drop-off level and fault. To allow optimum setting levels to be applied for
Definite Time Lag (DTL) delays. Operates if voltage exceeds normal operation, the cold load pickup feature will apply
setting for duration of delay. alternative current settings or protection element inhibits for
a limited period. The feature resets when either the circuit
37 Loss of Supply/Undercurrent breaker has been closed for a settable period, or if the
Each element has settings for pickup level and Definite Time current has reduced beneath a set level for a user set period.
Lag (DTL) delays. Operates if current falls below setting for
duration of delay. 50/51 Phase Fault
50 INST/DTL and 51 IDMTL/DTL elements provide 3 phase
Re-switch Blocking overcurrent protection in 3P OC + 1P UB mode, each with
If the capacitor is disconnected or otherwise de-energised, independent settings for pickup current, time-multiplier (51)
automatic blocking of re-energisation can be applied and time-delays. User can select IEC or ANSI time current
utilising a user selectable timer to allow the capacitor characteristics. The IDMT stage has a user programmable
voltage to discharge before re-energisation. Detection of de- reset characteristic, either DTL or shaped current ~ time reset
energisation can be selected from current level or CB status characteristic, to improve grading with electromechanical
signals or combinations of both. protection.
46M Phase Unbalance 50N/51N Earth Fault

The element has settings for pickup level and DTL delay. The The earth fault current is internally derived from the 3 phase
difference in magnitude of the highest and lowest phase CT inputs in normal operating mode. 50N INST/DTL and 51N
current is compared to the average phase current. This can IDMTL/DTL elements provide overcurrent protection, each
be used to detect that a number of capacitor units have with independent settings for pickup current, time-multiplier
failed in such a pattern that measured unbalance spill (51) and time-delays. User can select IEC or ANSI time
current is negligible. current characteristics. The IDMT stage has a user
programmable reset characteristic either DTL or shaped
46NPS Negative Phase Sequence Overcurrent current ~ time reset characteristic to improve grading with
Each element has user settings for pickup level and IDMTL or electromechanical protection.
DTL delay, operates if NPS current exceeds setting and delay.
NPS current elements can be used to detect that a number of 1000
capacitor units have failed in such a pattern that measured

unbalance spill current is negligible.

Lag (DTL) delays. Operates if NPS voltage exceeds setting for 100
duration of delay.
49 Thermal Overload
Time
The thermal algorithm continuously calculates the present (sec)
thermal state of the capacitor bank from the measured
currents and the previous thermal state thus including long
term overload conditions. Alarm outputs are given for 10
Long Time Inverse
thermal overload and thermal capacity.
50BF Circuit Breaker Fail Normal Inverse

internal trip signal or from a binary input. Line currents and
earth currents are monitored following a trip signal and an 1
Very Inverse
output is issued if any current is still detected, above setting,
after a specified time interval. Alternatively, if the trip is
from an external protection the circuit breaker position can
be used to determine a failure. A second time delay is Extremely Inverse
available to enable another stage to be utilized if required.
An input is also available to bypass the time delays when the
circuit breaker is known to be faulty. 0.1
2 3 4 5 6 8 20 30 40 50 60 80
1 10 100
Fig 11. IEC Overcurrent Curves

1000
100
Time
(sec)
10
Moderately Inverse
1
Very Inverse
Fig 13. Capacitor Curve (Time Multiplier = 1)

Extremely Inverse

0.1
Neutral overvoltage can be used to detect unbalance in the
1 2 3 4 5 6 8
10 20 30 40 50 60 80
100 capacitor bank in ungrounded arrangements.
Operates if the calculated neutral voltage exceeds setting for
Fig 12. ANSI Overcurrent Curves duration of delay.
59C Overvoltage 60C Capacitor Unbalance

The effective applied voltage is calculated from the In 3P OC + 1P UB mode, 60C is applied at the 4 th current
measured capacitor current by numeric integration input, typically connected to an unbalance CT. In 1P OC + 3P
techniques such that all harmonic frequency components of UB mode, 60C is applied at each of the 3 phase segregated
the current are correctly incorporated. current inputs, typically connected to an unbalance CT. Each
The capacitor units are rated to withstand 110% of rated element has user settings for pickup level and IDMTL or DTL
voltage continuously. IEC and ANSI standards specify delay, operates if measured current exceeds setting and
withstand times for higher voltage levels. These delay. The element can be trimmed for phase and magnitude
requirements are used to construct an overvoltage withstand to suit the natural unbalance current and also can be zeroed
curve. Time Multiplier set to default setting = 0.9 is manually. This calibration is compensated to allows for the
recommended to provide safety margin. switch-off condition
i> (vc>) Standard duration (s) 60CTS CT Supervision

1.1 infinite The relay has two methods of CT supervision. The 7SR1912/3
1.15 1,800 lEC 871-1 monitors each phase current input and operates if any one
1.20 300 IEC 871-1 or two inputs fall below the setting. The 7SR1915/6 has the
1.30 60 ANSI 18-1980, IEC 871-1 above method and an addition method that considers the
1.40 15 ANSI 18-1980 presence of negative phase sequence current, without an
1.7 1 ANSI 18-1980 equivalent level of negative phase sequence voltage, for a
2.00 0.3 ANSI 18-1980 user set time as a CT failure.
2.20 0.12 ANSI 18-1980 This function is not used in 1 Pole OC + 3 Pole UB mode.
Both element types have user operate and delay settings.
The VT supervision uses a combination of negative phase
sequence voltage and negative phase sequence current to
detect a VT fuse failure in 3 Pole OC + 1 Pole UB mode. This
condition may be alarmed or used to inhibit voltage
dependent functions. Element has user operate and delay
settings.
In1 Pole OC + 3 Pole UB mode, a simpler element using
current and voltage magnitudes is provided.

87REF Restricted Earth Fault
The measured earth fault input may be used in a 87REF high
impedance restricted earth fault scheme to provide sensitive
high speed unit protection. A calculation is required to
determine the values of the external series stabilising
resistor and non-linear shunt resistor which can be ordered
separately. This function is used on single-star arrangements
where no unbalance CT is available and is connected to the
unused 4th current input.
67/67N Directional Control

Fig14. Example of Control Function View
Phase, earth and sensitive earth fault elements can be
directionalised. Each element can be user set to Forward,
Reverse, or Non-directional. Construction
Directional Phase Fault elements are polarised from
quadrature voltage.
Derived earth fault elements can be user set to be polarised The relay is housed in a 4U high size E4 or E6 case with a
from residual voltage or negative phase sequence voltage. removable clear plastic fascia cover. The plastic fascia cover
Measured earth fault elements are polarized from Vo. can be ordered with or without two push buttons to allow
74T/CCS Trip & Close Circuit Supervision removing the cover.
The trip or close circuit(s) can be monitored via binary Two plastic handles are provided to allow the relay to be
inputs. Trip circuit failure raises an HMI alarm and output(s). withdrawn from its case, contacts in the case ensure that the
CT circuits and normally closed contacts remain short
81 Under/Overfrequency circuited when the relay is withdrawn.
Each element has settings for pickup level, drop-off level and The rear terminal blocks comprise M4 female terminals for
Definite Time Lag (DTL) delays. Operates if frequency ring crimp wire connections, to provide a secure and reliable
exceeds setting for duration of delay. termination.
Programmable Logic
Up to 8 logic equations can be defined using standard logic

Two circuit breaker operations counters are provided to
assist with maintenance scheduling. The maintenance
delta counter records the number of operations since the
last reset.
An I2t summation counter provides a measure of the contact
wear indicating the total energy interrupted by the circuit Fig15. Rear view of E4 relay
breaker contacts.
issued and the auxiliary contacts changing state.
Control Mode
restricted by a 4 character control function password. Each
the command is aborted. The following control functions
are available: CB Operation

Relay Information
The device is identified by the rating label on the fascia. The
user can also give the device its own identity by editing the
‘Relay Identifier’ displayed on the LCD or space is provided to
place a slip in label giving the relays function.
Technical Data
Inputs and Outputs
Current Inputs
Quantity 4
Rated Current In 1/5A
Measuring Range 80 x In
Instrumentation ≥ 0.1xIn ±1% In
Fig16. Rear view of relay with 2x LC Fibre Optic ports Frequency 50/60Hz
(E6 Case with IEC61850) Thermal Withstand:
Continuous 4 x In
User Interface 1 Second
1 Cycle
100A (1A) 350A (5A)
700A (1A) 2500A (5A)
Burden @ In ≤0.02VA (1A phase and Earth
element)
≤0.2VA (5A phase and earth
User element)
Function
Label
Voltage Inputs (optional)
Large LCD
Quantity 3, ph-ph or ph-n
Multi- Burden @ 110V  0.06 VA
coloured
Programmable Overvoltage Withstand 300 Vrms
LED’s
from fascia
Auxiliary Supply
Rated DC Voltage 110/125/220/250V
Operating range 64 to 300V
24/48/60V
Operating range 18 to 72V
Allowable superimposed 12% of DC voltage
ac component
Rated AC Voltage 115 V rms 50/60Hz
The operator interface is designed to provide a user friendly Range 92 to 138 V rms AC
method of controlling, viewing menus, entering settings and 50/60Hz ±5%
retrieving data from the relay. Five buttons are provided for Power Consumption: E4 Min (DC) 3.9W
navigation around the menu structure. E4 Max (DC) 8W
E4 Min (AC) 9VA 0.5PF
LCD E4 Max (AC) 16VA 0.5PF
A 4 line by 20 character liquid crystal display with power E6 Min (DC) 6.4W
save operation indicates the relay identifier, settings, E6 Max (DC) 10.5W
instrumentation, fault data and control commands. E6 Min (AC) 14.5VA 0.5PF
Up to 6 user programmable general alarms can be E6 Max (AC) 21.5VA 0.5PF
configured to display your own indications on the LCD. Allowable breaks/dips in DC 50ms
LEDs @50/60Hz
Healthy’ condition. Binary Inputs
9 user programmable LEDs are available eliminating the
Number 3 or 6
associated wiring. Each LED is tri-colour (red, green, yellow)
AC Range 92 to 138 VRMSAC
allowing for clear indication of the associated function’s
state and has a label insert for identification. 88V dc Range 70 to 320V dc
Maximum dc 1.5mA Fibre Optic Ethernet Data
Maximum peak ac 1.5mA
current for
operation
EN100 Fibre Optic Data Communication Interface
(up to 4 hours)
(IEC 61850 Option)
(up to 4 hours) Physical Fibre-optic
For AC operation the BI pick-up delay should be set to 0ms
and the drop-off delay to 20ms. Connectors Duplex LC 100BaseF in acc.
With IEEE802.3
Binary Outputs Recommended fibre 62.5/125 m glass fibre with
Duplex-LC connector
Number 5 or 8
(3 change over contacts) Transmission Speed 100 MBits/s
Operating Voltage Voltage Free Optical Wavelength 1300 nm
Operating Mode User selectable - Self or Bridgeable distance 2 km
Hand/Electrical Reset or pulsed.
Operating Time from <20ms
Energizing Binary Input EN100 Electrical Ethernet Data Communication Interface
Making Capacity: (IEC 61850 Option)
Carry continuously 5A ac or dc Physical Electrical
Make and carry 20A ac or dc for 0.5s
(L/R 40 ms and V 300 V) 30A ac or dc for 0.2s Connectors RJ45 100BaseT in acc. With
Breaking Capacity IEEE802.3
(  5 A and  300 V): Transmission Speed 100 MBits/s
AC Inductive 250 VA at p.f.  0.4 Test Voltage (with regard to 500 VAC 50 Hz
DC Resistive 75 W socket)
DC Inductive 30 W at L/R  40ms Bridgeable distance 20m
50 W at L/R  10ms
Unit Design Data Storage
Housing E4 or E6 (see dimension Fault Record 10

drawing) Waveform Record 10 x 1sec
Indication 20 Character 4 line Display 2 x 5sec
Relay Healthy LED 5 x 2sec
9 Tri Coloured User 1 x 10sec
Programmable Self or Hand Pre trigger 10…90%
Reset LED’s Events 1000 1ms Resolution
With-drawable Element Yes
User Interface 5 Navigation Keys
Mechanical Tests
4.15 kg E6 case.
Additional Transport Vibration (Sinusoidal)
packaging: add 0.4kg IEC 60255-21-1 Class I
Data Communication Interface Vibration response 0.5 gn 5%
Communication Port Front USB Type B Shock and Bump

IEC61850 optional ports:
Shock response 5 gn, 11 ms 5%
2x LC Fibre Optic Ethernet Shock withstand 15 gn, 11 ms 5%
Bump test 10 gn, 16 ms 5%
Protocols IEC60870-5-103
MODBUS RTU (Serial) Seismic
DNP3.0 O (Serial)
IEC61850 - optional X-plane -
Seismic response 3.5mm 5%
displacement

below crossover Radiated Radio Frequency
freq (8-9Hz) 1gn IEC 60255-25
above. Type Limits at 10 m, Quasi-peak
Y-plane – 30 to 230 MHz 40 dB(V/m)
1.5mm 230 to 10000 MHz 47 dB(V/m)
displacement
below crossover Conducted Radio Frequency
freq (8-9Hz)
0.5gn above. Type Limits
Quasi-peak Average
Mechanical Classification 0.15 to 0.5 MHz 79 dB(V) 66 dB(V/m)
0.5 to 30 MHz 73 dB(V) 60 dB(V/m)
Durability >106 operations
Radiated Immunity
Electrical Tests IEC 60255-22-3 Class III
Type Level
80 MHz to 1000 MHz Sweep 10 V/m
Insulation 1.4GHz to 2.7GHz Sweep 10V/m
IEC 60255-5 80,160,380,450,900,1850, 10V/m
Type Level 2150 MHz Spot
and earth Magnetic Field with Power Frequency
IEC 61000-4-8, Class V
Between independent 2.5 kV AC RMS for 1 min
circuits Type Level
Across normally open 1.0 kV AC RMS for 1 min 100A/m (0.126mT) continuous 50Hz
contacts 1000A/m (1.26mT) for 3s
High Frequency Disturbance

Environmental Tests
Case, Aux Power & I/O. 2.5kV  10% Temperature
Common mode IEC 60068-2-1/2
Case, Aux Power & I/O. 1.0kV  10% Operating Range -10 C to +55 C
Transverse mode Storage range -25 C to +70 C
RS485 Comms 1.0kV No data loss
Humidity
Electrostatic Discharge IEC 60068-2-78
IEC 60255-22-2 Class IV Operational test 56 days at 40 C and 93 %
Type Level Variation relative humidity
Contact discharge 8.0 kV 5%
Cyclic Temperature and Humidity
Electrical Fast Transient / Burst Immunity IEC 60068-2-30
IEC 60255-22-4 Class A (2002) Operational test 25 C to 55 C (outdoor
Type Level Variation equipment) and 97/93 % relative
Case, Aux Power & I/O 4kV  10 % humidity. 6 x 24h (12h+12h)
RS485 Comms 2.0kV No data loss cycles.
Surge Immunity IP Ratings

IEC 60255-22-5; IEC 61000-4-5 IEC 60529
Type Level Variation Type Level
Analog Inputs. 4.0 kV  10 % Installed with cover IP 51 from front of relay
Line to Earth
Installed with cover removed IP 20 from front of relay
Case, Aux Power & I/O. 2.0 kV  10 %
Line to Earth
RS485 Comms port 1.0 kV No Data Loss
Line to Earth Performance
Analog Inputs. 1.0 kV  10 %
Line to Line
Case, Aux Power & I/O. 1.0 kV*  10 % 27/59 Under/Over Voltage
Line to Line Number of Elements 4 Under or Over
*Note 50ms DTL pick up delay applied to binary inputs Operate Any phase or All phases
Voltage Guard 1 to 200V
Conducted Radio Frequency Interference Setting Range Vs 5 to 200V
IEC 60255-22-6 Hysteresis Setting 0 to 80%
Type Level Variation Vs Operate Level 100% Vs, ±1% or ±0.25V
0.15 to 80 MHz 10 V 5% Reset Level:

Overvoltage =(100%-hyst)xVop, ±1% or ±0.25V IT Tm Time Multiplier 0.025 to 100
Undervoltage =(100%+hyst)xVop, ±1% or±0.25V IT Char Operate Level 100% Is, ±2% or ±0.5V
Delay Setting td 0.00 to 14400s Overshoot Time < 40ms
Basic Operate Time : Inhibited by Binary or Virtual Input
0 to 1.1xVs 73ms ±10ms
0 to 2.0xVs 63ms ±10ms 49 Thermal Overload
1.1 to 0.5xVs 58ms ±10ms Operate levels Operate and Alarm
Operate time Tbasic +td , ±1% or ±10ms Setting Range Is 0.10 to 3.0 x In
following delay. Operate Level 100% Is, ±5% or ±1%xIn
Inhibited by Binary or Virtual Input Time Constant Setting 1 to 1000min
VT Supervision, Voltage Guard Operate time  I 2  I p2 
 
t    In 2 2 

 I  k  I  

37 Undercurrent
B
±5% absolute or ±100ms where

Number of Elements 2 Ip = prior current
Operate Any phase or ALL Alarm Level Disabled, 50,51…100%
Setting Range Is 0.05 to 5.0 x In Inhibited by Binary or Virtual Input
Current Guard 0.05 to 5.0 x In 50 (67) Instantaneous & DTL OC&EF (Directional)
Delay Setting td 0.00 to 14400s Operation Non directional, Forward or
Basic Operate Time: 7SR1915/6 only reverse
1.1 to 0.5xIn 35ms ±10ms
Elements Phase (50)& Derived Earth (50N)
Number of Elements 4 x OC
delay.
4 x Derived EF
Overshoot Time < 40ms
Operating Current RMS or Fundamental frequency
Inhibited by Binary or Virtual Input, Guard Setting Range Is 0.05 to 50 x In
46MDT Phase Unbalance Time Delay 0.00 to 14400s
Number of Elements 1 Operate Level 100% Is, ±5% or ±1%xIn
Setting Range Ss 0.01 to 1.0 Operate time:
Operate Level 100% Ss, ±5% for Imean ≥0.1xIn 50 0 to 2xIs – 35ms, ±10ms,
Delay Setting td 0.00 to 14400s 0 to 5xIs – 25ms, ±10ms
Basic Operate Time 50N 0 to 2xIs – 40ms, ±10ms,
0.01 to 1 95ms ±10ms 0 to 5xIs – 30ms, ±10ms
Operate time following Tbasic +td , ±1% or ±10ms Operate time following Tbasic +td , ±1% or ±10ms
delay. delay
Inhibited by Binary or Virtual Input Inhibited by Binary or Virtual Input
VT Supervision
Number of Elements DT & IT 51(67) Time Delayed OC&EF (Directional)
DT Setting Range Is 0.05,0.10…4.0 x In Operation – 7SR1915/6 Non directional, Forward or
DT Operate Level 100% Is, ±5% or ±1%xIn only reverse
DT Delay Setting td 0.00 to 14400s Elements Phase & Derived Earth
DT Basic Operate Time Number of Elements 2 x OC
0 to 2 xIs 40ms ±10ms 2 x Derived EF
0 to 5 xIs 30ms ±10ms Operating Current RMS or Fundamental frequency
DT Operate time Tbasic +td , ±1% or ±10ms Characteristic IEC NI,VI,EI,LTI ANSI MI,VI,EI &
following delay. DTL
IT Char Setting IEC NI,VI,EI,LTI ANSI MI,VI,EI & Setting Range Is 0.05 to 2.5 x In
DTL Time Multiplier 0.025 to 100
IT Setting Range 0.05 to 2.5 Time Delay 0,0.01… 20s
Tm Time Multiplier 0.025 to 100 Operate Level 105% Is, ±4% or ±1%xIn
Char Operate Level 105% Is, ±4% or ±1%In Minimum Operate time
Overshoot Time < 40ms IEC t 
K
 Tm
op
 IsI   1
ANSI  A 
top   P  B  Tm
47 Negative Phase Sequence Overvoltage   Is   1 
I
Number of Elements 2xDT & 2xIT

Setting Range Vs 1 to 90V
DT Hysteresis Setting 0 to 80%
Reset ANSI decaying, 0 – 60s
Operate Level 100% Vs, ±2% or ±0.5V
DT Delay Setting td 0.00 to14400s
VT Supervision
Basic Operate Time
0V to 1.5xVs 80ms ±20ms
0V to 10xVs 55ms ±20ms
DT Operate time Tbasic +td , ±2% or ±20ms Operation Current check - Phase and
following delay. Measured I4 with independent
IT Char Setting IDMTL, DTL settings, Mechanical Trip,
CB Faulty Monitor following delay.
Setting Range Is 0.05 to 2.0 x In IT Char Setting IDMTL & DTL
2 Stage Time Delays Timer 1 - 20 to 60000ms IT Setting Range 1 to 100V
Timer 2 - 20 to 60000ms Tm Time 0.1 to 140
Operate Level 100% Is, ±5% or ±1%xIn Multiplier(IDMT)
Disengaging time < 20ms Delay (DTL) 0 to 20s
Operate time following Tcbf ±1% or ±2ms Operate time M
t op  V
delay IDMTL Vs   1 ,  5 % or  65 ms.
Triggered by Any function mapped as trip
contact. Reset IEC/ANSI Decaying, 0 to 60s
Inhibited by Binary/Virtual Input Char Operate Level 105% Vs, ±2% or ±0.5V
Timer By pass Yes, 50BF CB Faulty Input Inhibited by Binary or Virtual Input
59IT Time Delayed Phase Overvoltage 60C Capacitor Unbalance

Number of Elements 1 Number of Elements DT & IT
IT Char Setting IDMTL, Capacitor & DTL DT Setting Range Is 0.01 to 2.0 x In
IT Setting Range 1 to 100V DT Operate Level 100% Is, ±5% or ±1%xIn
Tm Time 0.1 to 140 DT Delay Setting td 0.00 to 14400s
Multiplier(IDMT) DT Basic Operate Time
Delay (DTL) 0 to 20s 0 to 2 xIs 50ms ±10ms
Operate time M 0 to 5 xIs 40ms ±10ms
t op  V
IDMTL Vs   1 ,  5 % or  65 ms. DT Operate time Tbasic +td , ±1% or ±10ms
following delay.
IT Char Setting DTL & User Specified
Capacitor See Fig. 13 above,  5 % or  IT Setting Range 0.01 to 2
65 ms. Tm Time Multiplier 0.025 to 100
Char Operate Level 105% Is, ±4% or ±1%In
DTL td,  1 % or  40ms Overshoot Time < 40ms
Reset 0 to 60s Inhibited by Binary or Virtual Input
Inhibited by Binary or Virtual Input 60 Supervision
CT 7SR1912/3 Current
59C Capacitor Overvoltage 7SR1915/6 Current or Vnps &
Number of Elements 2xDT & 2xIT Inps
Capacitor Rated Current, 0.1 to 5 xIn VT 7SR1915/6 nps/zps
equivalent to Vcr
Setting Range Is 80 to 150% Vcr 87REF Restricted Earth Fault
DT Operate Level 100% Vs, ±2% or ±0.5V Setting Range 0.05 to 0.95 xIn
DT Delay Setting td 0.00 to 14400s Operate Level 100% Is, ±5% or ±1%xIn
DT Basic Operate Time Time Delay 0 to 60s
0 to 2 xVs 50ms ±10ms Basic Operate Time 0 to 2 xIs 40ms ±10ms
0 to 5 xVs 45ms ±10ms 0 to 5 xIs 30ms ±10ms
DT Operate time Tbasic +td , ±1% or ±20ms Inhibited by Binary or Virtual Input
following delay.
IT Char Setting Capacitor, IDMTL, DTL 74T/CC Trip/Close Circuit Supervision
IT Setting Range 80 to 150% Vcr Number of supervisable 3 x Trip and 3 x Close
IT Tm Time Multiplier 0.025 to 1.6 circuits
IT Char Operate Level 100% Is, ±2% or ±0.5V Number of BI’s Required 1 or 2 per function
Operate time M
t op  V
IDMTL Vs   1 ,  5 % or  65 ms. 81 Under/Over Frequency
Capacitor See Fig. 13 above,  5 % or  Under Voltage Guard Yes/No
65 ms. Setting Range Hz 43 to 57Hz (50Hz)
53 to 68Hz (60Hz)
DTL td,  1 % or  50ms
Hysteresis Setting 0 to 2%
Overshoot Time < 40ms Operate Level 100% Fs ±10mHz
Inhibited by Binary or Virtual Input Operate Time Typical <150ms
Vs Operate Delay 0 to 14400s
Number of Elements DT & IT Reswitch Blocking
DT Setting Range Is 1 to 100V Operation UC, CB position,
DT Operate Level 100% Vs, ±2% or ±0.5V UC&CB, UC or CB
DT Delay Setting td 0 to 14400s Blocking time 0 to 60000s
DT Basic Operate Time Setting Range Is 0.05 to 5.0 x In
0V to 1.5 x Vs 76ms ±20ms Operate Level 100% Is, ±5% or ±1%xIn
0V to 10 x Vs 63ms ±20ms
Delay Setting td 0.00 to 14400s
DT Operate time Tbasic +td , ±1% or ±20ms
Basic Operate Time:
1.1 to 0.5xIn 50ms ±10ms
delay.
CB Maintenance
0…10000
I2t Alarm 10…100000
Control Functions
CB Open/Close
EF IN/OUT
Relay Mode Local/Remote/Local or Remote
Reset LED’s & O/P’s

7SR1912/1913 Connection Diagram
+ve +ve
2 3
-ve BI 1 BI 4 -ve
4 1
+ve +ve
6 5
BI 2 BI 5
-ve
8
+ve +ve
10 7 1 2 1 2
-ve BI 3 BI 6
12
9
14 A Data
BO 6 11
Comms B A
RS485
16 GND
BO 7 13 (optional)
18 B
BO 8 15
20 Term.
27 28 27 28
+ve
22
-ve Rear View
24
28 GND.
B
NOTES
1A
13 3 BI = Binary Input
14 BO 1 1 BO = Binary Output
5A IL1
15 2
16 4
1A Shows contacts internal to relay
17 BO 2 6
case assembly.
18 5 Contacts close when the relay
IL2
19
5A chassis is withdrawn from case
20
8
21
1A BO 3
7
22
5A IL3 10
23 BO 4
9
24
1A 12
25 BO 5
11
26
5A IL4
27
28
A
Fig18. Diagram showing 7SR1913 relay with 4 CT inputs, 6 binary inputs and 8 binary outputs.

7SR1915/1916 Connection Diagram
+ve +ve
2 3
-ve BI 1 BI 4 -ve
4 1
+ve +ve
6 5
BI 2 BI 5
-ve
8
+ve +ve
10 7
-ve BI 3 BI 6 1 2 1 2
12
9
14 A
BO 6 11 Data
B A
RS485
16 GND
BO 7 13 Comms
18 B (optional)
BO 8 15
20 Term.
17
V1 27 28 27 28
19
+ve See
22
Relay 21
-ve
24 Voltage V2 Rear View
Config. 23
Setting Arrangement of terminals and modules
28 GND. 25
V3
B 27 NOTES
BI = Binary Input
1A
13 3 BO = Binary Output
14 BO 1 1
5A IL1
15 2
16 4 Shows contacts internal to relay

17
1A
BO 2 6
case assembly.
Contacts close when the relay
18 5
IL2 chassis is withdrawn from case
5A
19
20
8
21
1A BO 3
7
22
5A IL3 10
23 BO 4
9
24
1A 12
25 BO 5
11
26
5A IL4
27
28
A
Fig19. Diagram showing 7SR1916 relay with 4 CT inputs, 3 VT inputs, 6 binary inputs and 8 binary outputs.

Ordering Information – 7SR191 Capa Capacitor Bank Protection
Capacitor Protection 7 S R 1 9 1 - 1 A - C A 0
Capacitor Bank
protection relay Protection Product
Miscellaneous Protection 9
Capacitor Protection 1
Case I/O and Fascia
4 CT, 3 Binary Inputs / 5 Binary Outputs, 10 LEDs 2
4 CT, 6 Binary Inputs / 8 Binary Outputs, 10 LEDs 3
4 CT, 3VT, 3 Binary Inputs / 5 Binary Outputs, 10 LEDs 5
4 CT, 3VT, 6 Binary Inputs / 8 Binary Outputs, 10 LEDs 6
Measuring Input
1/5 A, 50/60Hz1), 40-160V2) 1
Auxiliary voltage
80 to 250V DC / 115V AC, binary input threshold 19V DC G
80 to 250V DC, binary input threshold 88V DC H
24 to 60V DC, binary input threshold 19V DC J
Standard version – included in all models, USB front port, RS485 rear port (E4 case) 3) 1 2
Standard version - plus additional rear electrical Ethernet RJ45 (x2) (E6 Case) 3) 7 7
Standard version - plus additional rear optical Ethernet duplex (x2) (E6 Case) 3) 8 7
Protocol
IEC 60870-5-103, Modbus RTU and DNP3 (user selectable) 2
IEC 60870-5-103, Modbus RTU, DNP3 and IEC 61850. (user selectable settings) 7
Relay Cover
Standard version C
37 Undercurrent
46M Phase unbalance
46 Negative phase sequence overcurrent
49 Thermal overload
50 Instantaneous phase fault overcurrent
50N Instantaneous earth fault
51 Time delayed phase fault overcurrent
51c Cold load pickup
51N Time delayed earth fault
59C Overvoltage by current integration
60C Unbalance Overcurrent
60CTS CT supervision
87REF High Impedance REF
74T/CCS Trip & Close circuit supervision
Re-energisation Blocking
Programmable Logic
For variants with 3 x VT inputs, as above plus:
27/59 Under/overvoltage
47 Negative phase sequence voltage
67/50N Directional instantaneous earth fault
67/51N Directional time delayed earth fault
81U/0 Under/Over Frequency
1) 4CT is configured by user setting as: 3PF + 1 Unbalance OR 1PF +3 Unbalance
2) Voltage rating applies to models with optional VT inputs only.

1.1.2.5 7SR17 Motor Protection Relay
Control (can include)
86 Lockout
Motor Start/Stop Control
Features
4 Settings Groups
Password Protection – 2 levels (protection and control)
Self Monitoring
User Interface
20 character x 4 line backlit LCD
Menu navigation keys
Fig 1. 7SR17 Rho Fascia 9 Programmable Tri-colour LEDs
Description Monitoring Functions

The 7SR17 motor protection relay range utilises service and Monitoring Functionality (can include)
design experience accumulated with the previous Phase, earth and sequence currents
generations of Rho family of products. Thermal equivalent and phase difference currents
Housed in 4U high, size E4 or E6 cases the 7SR17 Rho can Line, phase, neutral and sequence voltages
provide protection, control, monitoring, instrumentation and Power - Apparent, Real and Reactive. Power factor
metering with integrated input and output logic, data Energy - WHr and VAr Hr
logging and fault reports. Demand metering
Relay functionality is accessed via a familiar user friendly Start/Run Monitoring Profiles:
interface. Number of Starts, Starts per hour
Communication access to relay functionality is via a front Start currents, voltages and power
USB port for local PC connection, rear RS485 port for remote Start method (Local/remote/comms)
connection or optional IEC61850 communication through Motor run / start / trip times, thermal status,
two rear Ethernet ports (Electrical or Optical). Binary Input / Output status
General Alarms inc. trip circuit healthy/failure
Starters
Function Overview Fault data
CB trip and maintenance counters and Time to Trip
Temperature input (optional) values
Protection (can include)
14 Stall Protection
46 Phase Unbalance Protection Description of Functionality
49 Thermal Overload
37 Undercurrent With reference to figure 4 ‘Function Diagrams’.
67/50, 67/51 Directional Overcurrent
67G/67N Directional Earth Fault 14 Stall Protection
87REF High Impedance REF Each element has a single definite time overcurrent
27/59 Under/Over Voltage characteristic with settings for pickup level and Definite Time
47 NPS Voltage/Phase Reversal Lag (DTL) delays.
81 Under/Over Frequency Operation can be controlled from motor stopped or running
32 Power conditions.
32S Sensitive Power
55 Power Factor 37 Undercurrent
Each element has settings for the pickup level and the
Supervision (can include) definite time lag (DTL) delay. The element operates when
46PhRev Phase Reversal current falls below setting for the duration of the delay.
50BCL Breaking Capacity Limit
50BF Circuit Breaker Fail 46 Phase Unbalance Protection
60CTS-I CT Supervision Unbalance current has a significant heating effect on the
60CTS Enhanced CT Supervision motor.
60VTS VT Supervision Two phase unbalance measurement modes are available.
74T/CCS Trip Circuit Supervision Either NPS current or the difference between maximum and
81B Anti Backspin minimum phase currents can be used as a measurement of
Temp Temperature Input Monitoring the unbalance level.
Inverse or definite time operation can be selected.
48/66 Start Protection 87REF High Impedance REF
The feature provides settings to control both the number of The 87REF function can provide high speed earth fault
times a motor can be started within a specified time period protection for motor winding faults. This function requires
and the minimum time between starts. Motor starting can an external series stabilising resistor and voltage limiting
be inhibited when this limit is reached. non-linear resistor.
Motor start time can also be monitored.
74TCS Trip Circuit Supervision
49 Thermal Protection – Rotating Plant The trip circuits can be monitored via binary inputs
The enhanced thermal algorithm provides compliance with connected in H4/H5/H6 or H7 schemes. Trip circuit failure
IEC60255-8 (Thermal Electrical relays). raises an HMI alarm and output(s).
The operating curves take into account the effects of present
loading, prior loading and unbalanced currents on the motor Programmable User Logic
operating temperature. The user can map Binary Inputs and Protection operated
A user definable thermal curve is selectable to allow outputs to Function Inhibits, Logic Inputs, LEDs and/or Binary
matching of the relay thermal characteristic to all motor and Outputs.
cooling system types. The user can also enter up to 4 equations defining scheme
‘Starting’ and ‘cooling’ constants modify the thermal logic using standard functions e.g. Timers, AND/OR gates,
characteristic during motor run-up and stopped conditions. Inverters and Counters.
Each Protection element output can be used for
Temperature Inputs Alarm/Indication and/or tripping.
Motor resistance temperature detectors (RTDs) can be
connected via an optional external 7XV5662-6AD10 Function LED’s
Temperature Monitoring Interface. Up to twelve Pt100 Ten user programmable tri-colour LED’s are provided
sensors can be monitored. eliminating the need for separate panel mounted indicators
The interface is connected to the COM1-RS485 port of the and associated wiring. Each LED can be user set to red, green
relay. or yellow allowing for indication of the associated function’s
status. A slip-in pocket adjacent to the LEDs enables the user
50/51, G/N Earth Fault to insert customised labels. A printer compatible template is
Two earth fault measurement modes are available. available.
Measured earth fault mode (G) directly measures the earth
current from an independent CT, or the residual connection
of the 3 line CT’s. Optional Functionality
Derived earth fault mode (N) derives the earth current
internally from the line CT inputs
Independent settings are available for pickup current and 27/59 Under/Over Voltage
time-delays. Each element has settings for pickup level, drop-off level and
IDMT curves are available. Definite Time Lag (DTL) delayed operation.
The elements can be independently selected to under or
50/51 Overcurrent over voltage operation.
Definite time elements provide short circuit overcurrent
protection with independent settings for pickup current and 32 Power
time-delays. This feature can be used to detect loss of motor load.
IDMT curves can also be selected. Each element can be set to measure real, apparent or
reactive power and has independent settings for pickup level
50BF Circuit Breaker Fail and Definite Time Lag (DTL) delayed operation.
internal trip signal or from a binary input. Where a CB closed 32S Sensitive Power
is detected following a trip signal an output is issued after a Sensitive power is measured from the 4 th CT input (IG) and
specified time interval. This can be used to re-trip the CB or user selected voltage inputs.
to back-trip an upstream CB. A second time delay is available Each element can be set to measure real, apparent or
to enable another stage to be utilized if required. reactive power and has independent settings for pickup level
and Definite Time Lag (DTL) delayed operation.
Two types of CT wiring monitoring is available dependent on 47 Negative Phase Sequence (NPS) Overvoltage
the availability of VT inputs: Unbalance (NPS) voltage can be caused by uneven system
60CTS-I determines CT failure from a comparison of phase loading.
current levels. Each element has independent settings for pickup level and
Where VT inputs are available 60CTS considers the presence Definite Time Lag (DTL) delayed operation.
of negative phase sequence current, without an equivalent
level of negative phase sequence voltage. 49TS Integral Temperature Sensor Inputs
The element has user operate and delay settings. 4 or 8 Temperature Sensors can be connected to the optional
integral temperature sensor inputs.
81B Anti Backspin RTD or thermistor sensors can be used. All sensors must be
To inhibit attempted restarting of the motor until after the of the same type.
rotor has completely stopped backspin protection is applied.
Starting is inhibited until the 81B time delay has elapsed. 55 Power factor
This feature is used to monitor motor operating conditions.

Each element has independent settings for pickup level and Thermistor 100Ω – 40KΩ  2% or  5Ω
Definite Time Lag (DTL) delayed operation.
Auxiliary supply
Nominal voltage Operating Range V
The VT Supervision uses a combination of sequence
component voltage and current to detect a VT fuse failure. 24 to 60V dc 18 to 72V dc
This condition can provide an output for indications/alarms 80 to 250V dc 64 to 300V dc
or used to inhibit voltage dependent functions. Element has 115V ac 92 to 138V ac
user operate and delay settings.
24 to 250 V dc 19.2 to 275 V dc
67 Directional Control for Overcurrent and Earth Fault 100 to 230 V ac 80 – 253V ac
Directional control can be used to provide additional Allowable superimposed ac 12% of DC voltage
protection discrimination e.g. correct discrimination for component
earth faults in non-effectively earthed systems with
appreciable capacitance. Allowable breaks/dips in 50ms (DC)
supply (collapse to zero) 2.5/3 cycles (AC)
Frequency elements can be used to monitor suuply quality Auxiliary supply: Burdens
e.g. under-frequency causing motor deceleration. Power Min (DC) 3.9W (6W with IEC61850)
Each element has independent settings for pickup level, Consumption Max (DC) 8W (10.1W with IEC61850)
drop-off level and Definite Time Lag (DTL) delayed Min (AC) 9VA (14.5VA with IEC61850)
operation. Max (AC) 15VA (20.5VA with IEC61850)
Binary Inputs
Technical Data Operating Voltage 19V: Range 17 to 320V dc
19V: Range 92 to 138 V ac
For full technical data refer to the Performance Specification 88V: Range 74 to 320V dc
Section of the Technical Manual. Maximum current for 1.5mA dc
operation 1.5mA peak ac
Inputs and Outputs Binary Outputs

Operating Mode User selectable - Self or
Current Inputs
Hand Reset
Quantity 3 x Phase, 1 x SEF Contact Operate / Release Time. 7ms / 3ms
Rated Current IN 1/5A Making Capacity:
Measuring Range Phase: 80 xIn Carry continuously 5A ac or dc
SEF: 10 xIn Make and carry 20A ac or dc for 0.5s
Instrumentation ±1% or ±1% In (L/R  40 ms and V  300 V) 30A ac or dc for 0.2s
10% to 200% In Breaking Capacity
Frequency 50/60Hz (  5 A and  300 V):
Thermal Withstand: AC Resistive 1250VA
Continuous 4.0 x In AC Inductive 250VA at PF  0.4
1 Second 100A (1A) 350A (5A) DC Resistive 75W
Burden @ In ≤0.1VA (1A Phase and SEF) DC Inductive 30W at L/R  40ms
≤0.3VA (5A Phase and SEF) 50W at L/R  10ms
Voltage Inputs
Quantity 3 (Optional) Data Communication Interface
Rated Voltage Vn 40 – 160V
Instrumentation 10% to 200% Vn ±1% or ±1% Vn
Communication Port Front USB Type B
Frequency 50/60Hz
Thermal Withstand: Continuous 300V rms Rear RS485 2 wire electrical
Burden @ 110V ≤0.6VA IEC61850 optional ports:
Temperature Detector Inputs 2x LC Fibre Optic Ethernet
Value Reference Accuracy
Fibre Optic Ethernet Data
Cu10, 0 – 540oC  30C (0 – 250oC) Communication Interface
Ni100, 0 – 400oC (IEC 61850 Option)
Ni120, 0 – 330oC
RTD EN100 Fibre Optic Data Communication Interface
Ni250, 0 – 535oC  10C (0 – 250oC) (IEC 61850 Option)
Pt100, 0 – 540oC Physical Layer Fibre-optic
Pt250, 0 – 540oC Connectors Duplex LC 100BaseF in acc.
Pt1000, 0 – 260oC  20C (0 – 250oC) With IEEE802.3

Recommended fibre 62.5/125 m glass fibre with Electrostatic Discharge
Duplex-LC connector IEC 60255-22-2
Transmission Speed 100 MBits/s Type Level Variation
Optical Wavelength 1300 nm Front Cover Fitted Class IV, 5%
Bridgeable distance 2 km 15 kV Air Discharge
Front Cover Removed Class III, 5%
EN100 Electrical Ethernet Data Communication Interface 8 kV Air Discharge
(IEC 61850 Option)
Physical Layer Electrical Electrical Fast Transient / Burst Immunity
IEC 60255-22-4 Class A (2002)
Connectors RJ45 100BaseF in acc. With
IEEE802.3 Type Level Variation
Recommended cable Minimum: Category 5 S/FTP Case, Aux Power & I/O 4.0kV  10%
(shielded/screened twisted pair) RS485 Comms 2.0kV No data loss
Surge Immunity
Test Voltage (with 500 VAC 50 Hz IEC 60255-22-5
regard to socket) Type Level Variation
Bridgeable distance 20m Analog Inputs. 4.0kV
Line to Earth
Case, Aux Power & I/O. 2.0kV
Line to Earth
Mechanical Tests Analog Inputs. 1.0kV  10%
Line to Line
Vibration (Sinusoidal) Case, Aux Power & I/O. 1.0kV*
IEC 60255-21-1 Class I Line to Line
RS485 Comms port. 1.0kV No data loss
Line to Earth
Vibration response 0.5gn 5%
*Note 50ms pick up delay applied to binary inputs
Vibration endurance 1.0gn 5%
Shock and Bump IEC 60255-22-6
Type Level Variation 0.15 to 80MHz 10V  5%
Shock response 5gn, 11ms 5%
Shock withstand 15gn, 11ms 5% Radiated Radio Frequency
Bump test 10gn, 16ms 5% IEC 60255-25
Type Limits at 10m, Quasi-peak
Seismic
30 to 230MHz 40dB(V/m)
230 to 10000MHz 47dB(V/m)
Seismic response 1gn 5% Conducted Radio Frequency
Type Limits
Mechanical Classification
Quasi-peak Average
Durability >106 operations 0.15 to 0.5MHz 79dB(V) 66dB(V)
0.5 to 30MHz 73dB(V) 60dB(V)
Electrical Tests Radiated Immunity
Insulation Type Level Variation
IEC 60255-5 80MHz to 1000MHz 10V/m  5%
Type Level
Between any terminal and earth Magnetic Field with Power Frequency
2.0kV AC RMS for 1min IEC 61000-4-8, Class V
Between independent circuits
Across normally open contacts 1.0kV AC RMS for 1min Type Level
100A/m (0.126mT) continuous 50Hz
1000A/m (1.26mT) for 3s
Environmental Tests
Case, Aux Power & I/O. 2.5kV  10%
Common mode Temperature
Case, Aux Power & I/O. 1.0kV  10% IEC 60068-2-1/2
Transverse mode Operating Range -10C to +55C
RS485 Comms 1.0kV No data loss Storage range -25C to +70C
Humidity 0.5 x Ss (under) 40ms ± 10ms
IEC 60068-2-78 Delay Setting td 0 to 14400s
Operational test 56 days at 40C and 93% relative Operate time tbasic +td , ±1% or ±10ms
humidity following delay.
Inhibited by Motor not running, VTS
IEC 60068-2-30 32S Sensitive Power
Operational test 25 C to 55 C (outdoor equipment) Number of Elements 2 Forward or Reverse
and 97/93 % relative humidity. 6 x Operate P, Q or S
24h (12h+12h) cycles. U/C Guard 0.005 to 1.0 x In
Setting Range Ss 0.005 to 2.0 x Sn
IP Ratings Operate Level 100% Ss ± 5% or ± 2% Sn
IEC 60529 Reset Level: - ≥95% Sop
Type Level Basic Operate Time: -
Installed with cover IP 51 from front of relay 1.1 x Ss (over) 60ms ± 10ms
2.0 x Ss (over) 45ms ± 10ms
Installed with cover removed IP 20 from front of relay 0.5 x Ss (under) 30ms ± 10ms
For full technical data refer to the Performance Specification Delay Setting td 0 to 14400s
Section of the Technical Manual. Operate time following delay. tbasic +td ± 1% or ± 10ms
Inhibited by Motor not running, VTS
Performance 37 Undercurrent
U/C Guard 0.05 to 5.0 x In
14 Stall Protection
Setting Range Is 0.05 to 5.0 x In
Number of Elements 4 Operate Level 100% Is ± 5% or ± 1% xIn
Setting Range Is: - 0.05 to 10 x In Delay Setting td 0 to 14400ss
Time Delay 0.00 to 14400s Basic Operate Time: -
Operate Level 100% Is ±5% or ±1% xIn 0.5 x Is 50ms ± 10ms
Operate time Operate time following tbasic + td , ± 1% or ± 10ms
2 x Is 35ms ± 10ms, delay.
5 x Is 25ms ± 10ms Overshoot Time < 40ms
Operate time following tbasic +td , ±1% or ±10ms Inhibited by Binary or Virtual Input
delay
Controlled by Stopped, No acceleration, 46 Phase Unbalance Protection
Running, None
Number of Elements 1 (Magnitude difference or NPS)
Setting Range Is 0.1 to 0.4 x Itheta
Operate Level 100% Is ± 5% or ± 1% x In
Number of Elements 4 Under or Over IT Min. Operate Time 0 to 20s
Operate Any or All phases DT Delay Setting td 0 to 20s
U/V Guard 1 to 200V Basic Operate
Setting Range Vs 5 to 200V (Magnitude Difference)
Hysteresis Setting 0 to 80% 2 x Is 55ms ± 10ms
Operate Level Vop 100% Vs ±1% or ±0.25V 5 x Is 50ms ± 10ms
Reset Level: - Basic Operate (NPS)
Undervoltage (100% + hyst) x Vop ±1% or ±0.25V 2 x Is 70ms ± 10ms
Overvoltage (100% - hyst) x Vop ±1% or ±0.25V 5 x Is 60ms ± 10ms
Delay Setting td 0 to 14400s DT Operate time td ± 1% or ± 30ms
Basic Operate Time: - following delay.
1.1xVs (OV) 73ms ±10ms Tm Time Multiplier 0.025 to 2.0
2.0xVs (OV) 63ms ±10ms Overshoot Time < 40ms
0.5xVs (UV) 58ms ±10ms Inhibited by Binary or Virtual Input
Operate time tbasic +td , ±1% or ±10ms
following delay. 47 Negative Phase Sequence Voltage
VT Supervision, Voltage Guard
Setting Range Vs 1 to 90V
Hysteresis Setting 0 to 80%
32 Power
Operate Level 100% Vs ± 2% or ± 0.5V
Number of Elements 2 Forward or Reverse Delay Setting td 0 to 14400s
Operate P, Q or S Basic Operate Time: -
U/C Guard 0.05 to 1.0 x In 2 x Vs 80ms ± 20ms
Setting Range Ss 0.05 to 2.0 x Sn 10 x Vs 55ms ± 20ms
Operate Level Sop 100% Ss, ± 5% or ± 2% Sn Operate time following tbasic +td ± 2% or ± 20ms
Reset Level: - ≥95% Sop delay.
Basic Operate Time: - Overshoot Time < 40ms
1.1 x Ss (over) 60ms ± 10ms Inhibited by Binary or Virtual Input
2.0 x Ss (over) 45ms ± 10ms
48/66 Start Protection Minimum Operate time top 
K
 Tm
Max. No. of Starts OFF, 1 to 20 IEC  IsI   1
Max. Starts Period 1 to 60 minutes  A 
top   P  B  Tm
Start Inhibit Delay 1 to 60 minutes ANSI   Is   1 
I
Time Between Starts OFF, 1 to 60 minutes

 5% or  30 ms
49 Thermal Protection
Setting Range Itheta 0.1 to 3.0 x In Inhibited by Binary or Virtual Input
NPS Weighting Factor (K) 0.1 to 10.0  0.1 VT Supervision
TauH Heating Constant 0.5 to 1000 mins,  0.5 mins
TauS Starting Constant 0.005 to 1.0 x TauH ,  0.005 50BF Circuit Breaker Fail
TauC Cooling Constant 1 to 100 x TauH ,  1 Operation Current check - Phase and
Hot/cold ratio OFF, 1 to 100%,  1% Measured Earth with
Operate Level 100% Is, ±5% or ±1% x In independent settings,
Operate time  2  H  2 Mechanical Trip,
 I EQ  1  C  I p 
   
t    In  2
I EQ  I2
 CB Faulty Monitor
 

 

Setting Range Is 0.05 to 2 x In (50BF)
±5% or ±100ms 0.005 to 2 x In (50BF-I4)
(Itheta = 0.3 to 3 x In) 2 Stage Time Delays Timer 1: 0.02 to 60s
(1.2 to 20 x Itheta) Timer 2: 0.02 to 60s
User defined Operate Level 100% Is ± 5% or ± 1% x In
Capacity Alarm Level Disabled, 50,51…100% Basic Operate time < 20ms
Load Alarm Level OFF, 0.5 to 1.0 x Itheta ,  0.05 Operate time following tdelay ±1% or ± 20ms
Thermal restart inhibit 20 to 100%,  1% delay
Inhibited by Binary or Virtual Input Triggered by Any function mapped as trip
contact.
50 (67) Instantaneous/DTL OC & EF Inhibited by Binary/Virtual Input
Operation
7SR17n2/3 Non directional.
55 Power factor
7SR17n5/6 Non directional, Forward or
reverse Number of Elements 2
Elements Phase, Derived Earth, Measured Operation Under or Over
Earth U/C Guard 0.05 to 1.0
Setting Range Is: - Setting Range PFs 0.05 to 0.99
O/C ‘50’ 0.05 to 50 x In Time Delays 0 to 14400s
Derived E/F ‘50N’ 0.05 to 50 x In Operate Level ± 0.05
Measured E/F ‘50G’ 0.005 to 5 x In Basic Operate time ≤ 80ms
Time Delay 0.00…14400s Operate time following delay tbasic +td ± 1% or ± 10ms
Operate Level 100% Is ± 5% or ± 1% x In Inhibited by Motor not running, VTS
Operate time:
50 0 to 2xIs – 35ms, ±10ms, 81 Under/Over Frequency
0 to 5xIs – 25ms, ±10ms Number of Elements 2 Under or Over
50N 0 to 2xIs – 40ms, ±10ms, U/V Guard 35 to 200V
0 to 5xIs – 30ms, ±10ms Setting Range Fs 43 to 68Hz
Operate time following tbasic +td , ±1% or ±10ms Hysteresis Setting 0 to 2%
delay Operate Level Fop 100% Fs ±10mHz
Inhibited by Binary or Virtual Input Reset Level: -
Inrush detector Under Frequency (100% + hyst) x Fop ± 10mHz
VT Supervision Overv Frequency (100% - hyst) x Fop ± 10mHz
Delay Setting td 0 to 14400s
51 (67) Time Delayed OC&EF Basic Operate Time: -
Operation For ROCOF between Typically < 110ms
7SR17n2/3 Non directional. 0.1 and 5Hz/second Maximum < 150ms
7SR17n5/6 Non directional, Forward or Operate time tbasic +td ± 1% or ± 10ms
reverse following delay.
Elements Phase, Derived Earth, Measured Inhibited by Binary or Virtual Input, Voltage
Earth Guard
Characteristic IEC: NI,VI,EI,LTI
ANSI: MI,VI,EI 87REF Restricted Earth Fault
DTL Setting Range Is 0.005 to 2.0 x In
Setting Range Is 0.05 to 2.5 x In (OC, N) Operate Level 100% Is ± 5% or ± 1% x In
0.005 to 0.5 x In (G)
Time Delay 0 to 60s
Time Multiplier 0.025 to 100
Basic Operate Time
(IEC/ANSI)
2 x Is 40ms ± 10ms
Time Delay 0 to 20s 5 x Is 30ms ± 10ms
Operate Level 105% Is ± 4% or ± 1% x In Inhibited by Binary or Virtual Input

7SR17 Rho Connection Diagram
COM3
RTD or Thermistor Connections (shown for
1
Ch.1
13
Temperature Sensor Inputs (TSI) 1-4):-
COM3
2 TSI 1 TSI 5 14
3
Ch.2
15 RTDs Thermistors
Optional
Optional
4 16 1 I+ 1
5 TSI 2 TSI 6 17 2 I- 2 TSI 1
TSI 1
6 18 3 COM 3
7 19 4 I+ 4
8 TSI 3 TSI cable screen TSI 7 20 5 I- 5 TSI 2
TSI 2
9 terminals 21 6 COM 6
10 22 7 I+ 7
11 TSI 4 TSI 8 23 8 I- 8 TSI 3
TSI 3
12 24 9 COM 9
C 10 I+ 10
GND 11 I- 11 TSI 4
TSI 4
12 COM 12
+ve +ve
2 3
-ve BI 1 BI 4 -ve
4 1 Screened cable is recommended for use
+ve +ve with the optional temperature inputs.
6 5
BI 2 BI 5 Four earth screw terminals are provided on
-ve
8
+ve +ve the rear of the relay for cable screens.
10 7
-ve BI 3 BI 6
12
9
14 A
Relay Earthing
BO 6 11
Optional
Terminal 28 of the Power Supply Unit

RS485
16 Screen
BO 7 13
should be earthed by a direct connection to
18 B
BO 8 15 the relay case earth stud.
20 Term.
17 The relay case earth stud should be solidly

V1 earthed by a direct connection to the panel
19
+ve earth.
22 See
Relay 21
-ve V2
24 Voltage
Config. 23 BI = Binary Input,
28 GND.
Setting
25 BO = Binary Output
V3 GND = Ground/earth
B 27
TSI = Temperature Sensor Input
1A
13 3
14 BO 1 1
5A IA Terminal contacts internal to
15 2
relay case assembly close
16 4
when relay chassis
1A
17 BO 2 6 withdrawn from case
18 5
5A IB
19
20
8
21
1A BO 3
7
1 2 1 2
22 COM3
5A IC 10
Ch.1
COM3
23 BO 4 Ch.2
9
24 1 13
1A 12
25 BO 5 C B A
11
26
5A IG 12 24
27
28
A 27 28 27 28
Fig2. 7SR17 Rho Wiring Diagram

Relay Voltage VT Wiring
Configuration Setting Connections
Va
B17
V1
B19
Vb
Van, Vbn, Vcn B21
V2
B23
B25
Vc
A B C V3
B27
Va
B17
V1
B19
Vb
B21
Va, Vb, Vc
V2
B23
B25
Vc
A B C V3
B27
Va
B17
V1
B19
Vab, Vbc, 3V0 Vb
B21
V2
Vc B23
A B C Dn
B25
V3
Da
B27
Fig3. 7SR17 Rho VT Wiring Connections

7SR17 Rho Function Diagram
3 37 46 46Ph
14
48/
49
50 50 50 50N 51 51N
60
CTS
(x2) (x2) Rev 66 BCL BF (x2) (x2) (x2) (x2)
-I
1 50G 50G 51G 87 NOTE: The use of functionality is dependent on external connections
(x2) BF (x2) REF to the relay i.e. some functions are mutually exclusive
49 74T
RTD CCS 81B
I/F (x3) 7SR170n-3nA12-nCA0
M
3 37 46 46Ph
14
48/
49
50 50
67/
50
67/
50N
67/
51
67/
51N
32/
55
60 60
(x2) (x2) Rev 66 BCL BF CTS VTS
(x2) (x2) (x2) (x2) (x2)
3 27/
59
47 81
81B
(x2) (x2)
(x2)
1 50G 87 32S
67/
50G
67/
51G
NOTE: The use of functionality is dependent on external connections
BF REF (x2) to the relay i.e. some functions are mutually exclusive
(x2) (x2)
49 74T
RTD CCS
I/F (x3) 7SR170n-4nA12-nDA0
M
3 37 46 46Ph
14
48/
49
50 50 50 50N 51 51N
60
CTS
(x2) (x2) Rev 66 BCL BF (x2) (x2) (x2) (x2)
-I
1 50G 50G 51G 87 NOTE: The use of functionality is dependent on external connections
(x2) BF (x2) REF to the relay i.e. some functions are mutually exclusive
74T
49
TS
CCS
(x3)
81B 7SR171n-3nA12-nCA0
M 7SR172n-3nA12-nCA0
3 37 46 46Ph
14
48/
49
50 50
67/
50
67/
50N
67/
51
67/
51N
32/
55
60 60
(x2) (x2) Rev 66 BCL BF CTS VTS
(x2) (x2) (x2) (x2) (x2)
3 27/
59
47 81
81B
(x2) (x2)
(x2)
1 50G 87 32S
67/
50G
67/
51G
NOTE: The use of functionality is dependent on external connections
BF REF (x2) to the relay i.e. some functions are mutually exclusive
(x2) (x2)
74T
49
TS
CCS
(x3)
7SR171n-4nA12-nDA0
M 7SR172n-4nA12-nDA0
Fig4. Function Diagrams - 7SR17 Relays

Ordering Information – 7SR17 Rho Motor Protection Relay
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
ORDER-No.: 7 S R 1 7 - A - C A 0
| | | | | | | | | | | |
Protection Product Family 5 | | | | | | | | | | |
Motor Protection 7 | | | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | | | |
Relay Type 6 | | | | | | | | | |
Basic Relay (See Note 1) 0 | | | | | | | | | |
Relay with 4 Temperature inputs (See Note 1) 1 | | M/N | | | | | | |
Relay with 8 Temperature inputs (See Note 1) 2 | | M/N | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | | |
Case, I/O and Fascia 7 | | | | | | | | |
4 CT, 3 Binary Inputs / 5 Binary Outputs, 10 LEDs 2 3 | | | | | | | |
4 CT, 6 Binary Inputs / 8 Binary Outputs, 10 LEDs 3 3 | | | | | | | |
4 CT, 3 VT, 3 Binary Inputs / 5 Binary Outputs, 10 LEDs 5 4 | | | | | | | |
4 CT, 3 VT, 6 Binary Inputs / 8 Binary Outputs, 10 LEDs 6 4 | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | |
Measuring input 8 | | | | | | | |
1/5 A, 50/60Hz with SEF Input 2/3 3 | | | | | | | |
1/5 A, 40-160V, 50/60Hz with SEF Input 5/6 4 | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
Auxiliary voltage 9 | | | | | | |
80-250V DC / 115V AC, binary input threshold 19V DC G | | | | | | |
80-250V DC, binary input threshold 88V DC H | | | | | | |
24-60V DC, binary input threshold 19V DC J | | | | | | |
PSU Rated: 24-250V DC / 100-230V AC. Binary Input threshold 19V DC (Rated: 24-250V DC / 100-120V AC) M | | | | | | |
PSU Rated: 24-250V DC / 100-230V AC. Binary Input threshold 88V DC (Rated: 110-250V DC) N | | | | | | |
| | | | | | |
Additional Options 10 | | | | | |
Standard relay A | | | | | |
| | | | | |
Communication Interface 11 | | | | |
Standard version - included in all models, USB front port, RS485 rear port (See Note 1) 1 2 | | | |
Standard version - plus additional rear electrical Ethernet RJ45 (x2) (See Note 1) M/N 7 7 | | | |
Standard version - plus additional rear optical Ethernet duplex (x2) (See Note 1) M/N 8 7 | | | |
| | | |
Protocol 12 | | | |
IEC 60870-5-103, Modbus RTU, DNP 3.0 (user selectable). Also Modbus RTD Client (see Note 2) 2 | | | |
IEC 60870-5-103, Modbus RTU, DNP 3.0 (user selectable) and IEC61850. Also Modbus RTD Client (see Note 2) 7/8 7 | | | |
| | | |
Front Cover 13 | | |
Standard Version - No Push Buttons 1 | | |
Push Buttons - DOWN and RIGHT Arrows 2 | | |

Ordering Information – 7SR17 Rho Motor Protection Relay
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
ORDER-No.: 7 S R 1 7 - A - C A 0
| | |
Protection Function Packages 14 | |
For future development A | |
For future development B | |
Standard version - included in all models C | |
14 Stall Protection | |
37 Undercurrent | |
46 Phase Unbalance | |
46PhRev Phase Reversal | |
48/66 Start Protection | |
49 Thermal overload | |
49 RTD I/F (See Note 2) RTD Monitoring via comms | |
50/51 Overcurrent | |
50/51, G/N Earth fault | |
50BF Circuit breaker fail | |
50BCL Break Capacity Limit | |
60CTS-I CT Supervision | |
74T/CCS Trip/Close Circuit Supervision | |
81B Backspin Protection | |
87REF High Impedance Restricted Earth Fault | |
Programmable Logic | |
| |
For variants with Temperature inputs | |
49 Temp Temperature Input monitoring | |
| |
For variants with 3 x VT inputs as above - plus | |
27/59 Under/Over Voltage | |
32/55 Directional Power/Power Factor | |
47 Negative Phase Sequence Overvoltage | |
60CTS Enhanced CT Supervision | |
60VTS VT Supervision | |
67/50, 67/51 Directional Overcurrent | |
67G/N Directional Earth Fault | |
81 Frequency | |
| |
| |
Additional Functionality 15 |
|
Spare 16
0
Notes
1) E4 case is standard, E6 case is required if IEC61850 and/or Temperature Input options are ordered
2) Applicable to non-integral Temperature Input variants. Requires selection of Protocol - Modbus RTD Client, which precludes use of system comms.

1.1.2.6 7SR18 Differential Protection Relay
Local end and remote end ammeters,

Differential starters,
Protection signalling link status,
General alarms,
Binary Input / Output status,
Trip circuit supervision
Time and date
Starters
Fault records
Event records
Current Differential Protection
The relay compares magnitude of measured currents at
Fig1. Typical Fascia showing additional LED variant either end of the protected feeder, it operates for faults
detected within the protected zone. The three-pole,
phase-fault differential comparators each provide two
Description bias-slopes. The first stage of bias accommodates
proportional measuring errors in the system. The second
stage accommodates additional spill current caused by CT
The Solkor, two-ended, line differential relay has been
saturation at high fault levels.
developed to enhance the Reyrolle family of products.
Designed using state-of-the-art hardware technology, it
provides differential protection and control for overhead
lines and cable feeders. Housed in a 4U high, size E6 Iremote
case, it provides protection, monitoring, instrumentation
and metering with integrated input and output logic, data Operate
logging & fault reports. Communication access to the Restrain
relay functionality is via a front USB port for local PC
connection or rear RS485 communications port for
remote connection. Is
Is Ilocal
Function Overview
87L Three-phase differential (two elements)
85 Inter-trip Feature
Operate
50G/50N Instantaneous Earth Fault
51G/51N Time Delayed Measured/Derived/Earth Fault
60CTS-I CT Supervision Fig2. Differential Protection Operating Characteristic
Two, three-pole differential elements, each with two It is not necessary to have the same CT ratios at either
stage bias characteristics, are provided for differential end of a protected feeder, since ratio compensation is
protection. Inter-tripping comes from internal or six settable. It is also possible to invert the current inputs to
independent external initiation channels. Overcurrent aid in commissioning.
protection can operate as a stand-alone feature, it can
also be configured to operate as ‘guard’ feature and/or Backup Overcurrent Protection
back-up in case of protection signalling communications In addition to the differential protection, comprehensive
failure. Connection to CTs is via selectable 1 A or 5 A overcurrent protection for phase and earth faults provides
inputs. Ratio correction for miss-matched line current back-up IDMTL and DTL characteristics in the event of a
transformer ratios is available. The ability to invert CT communications link failure.
inputs is provided to facilitate commissioning. There are
five or eight user-programmable binary output contacts Guard Relays
and three or six user programmable status inputs with
If it is necessary to add security to the differential scheme
pick-up and drop-off timers.
it is possible to configure an overcurrent element as a
‘guard’ feature. The appropriate overcurrent element

must operate at the same instance as the differential
element to allow a trip command to be issued. User Interface
Inter-tripping
Auxiliary signalling channels are provided for inter-
tripping. Internal inter-trip dedicated to the differential User
protection and independent inter-trips which can be used Function
Label
for either direct or permissive inter-tripping from an
internal or external source. Where an internal fault is fed Large LCD
largely from one end, the differential comparators at both
ends operate identically, but the guard at the low current
end may not pick up and so block the trip. To overcome
this, an internal inter-trip signal is sent which can be used
Multi-
at the receive end to either override the guard so coloured
Programmable
allowing the differential to trip or operate the trip LED’s
from fascia
contacts directly.
Protection Signalling
The end-to-end protection signalling channel is via a
direct optical link for distances up to 2 km* using multi-
mode fibres (ST®) bayonet style connectors or up to 40
km using single-mode fibres Duplex LC connectors.
Continuous protection signalling link supervision is
provided. Two test modes, loop test & line test, are Fig4. Typical User Interface
included to assist with commissioning the signalling link.
In loop test mode the local transmit and receive terminals The operator interface is designed to provide a user
can be connected together, allowing relays at each end to friendly method of controlling, viewing menus, entering
be tested in isolation. Line test mode allows the integrity settings and retrieving data from the relay. Five buttons
of the whole signalling channel to be checked. The relay are provided for navigation around the menu structure.
commands the remote end to ‘echo’ all received data back
to the local end. In line test mode, the remote differential LCD
protection is suspended. A 4 line by 20 character liquid crystal display (LCD) with
* For distances greater than 2 km consider using the additional 7XV5461-xxxxx devices power save operation permits viewing of the relay
identifier, settings, instrumentation, fault data and
Circuit Breaker Maintenance control commands. Up to 6 user programmable general
A circuit-breaker operations counter is provided. A alarms can be configured for status indication.
summation of I2 broken by the circuit-breaker provides a
measure of the contact erosion. Operations count and I 2 LEDs
alarm levels can be set which, when reached, can be used A steadily illuminated LED indicates the ‘Protection
as an input to a condition-based maintenance regime. Healthy’ condition. There are 9 or 17 user programmable
LEDs available eliminating the need for additional
expensive panel mounted indication and associated
Construction wiring. Each is tri-coloured (red, green, yellow) allowing
for indication severity classification of the associated
function’s state and has a label insert for text
The relay is housed in a 4U high size E6 case with a identification.
removable clear plastic fascia cover. Two handles are
provided to facilitate the withdrawal of the relay element Relay Information
from its case. Internal contacts within the case ensure the
The device type and rating information is shown as
CT circuits and normally closed contacts remain short-
standard on the fascia slip-in label. There is also provision
circuit when the relay is withdrawn. The rear connection
for relay designation to be displayed on the LCD showing
blocks are comprised of screw terminals facilitating M4
‘Relay Identifier’ & ‘Circuit Identifier’ information. In
ring-crimp connections, providing a secure and reliable
addition space is provided on the fascia via a slip-in label
termination.
repeating such information.
Fig3. Typical Rear view of relay

Binary Outputs
Technical Data Number 5 or 8 (2 are change-over
contacts)
For full technical data refer to the Performance Operating Voltage Voltage Free
Specification Section of the Technical Manual. Operating Mode User selectable - Self or
Hand/Electrical Reset or
pulsed.
Inputs and Outputs Operating Time from <20 ms
Energizing Binary Input
Making Capacity:
Current Inputs Carry continuously 5 A ac or dc
Quantity 3 x Phase & 1 x Earth Make and carry 20 A ac or dc for 0.5 s
Rated Current In 1 A or 5 A (L/R  40 ms and V  300 V) 30 A ac or dc for 0.2 s
Measuring Range 80 x In Breaking Capacity
Instrumentation ≥ 0.1xIn ±1% In (  5 A and  300 V):
Frequency 50 Hz or 60 Hz AC Resistive 1250 VA
Thermal Withstand: AC Inductive 250 VA at p.f.  0.4
Continuous 3 x In DC Resistive 75 W
10 Minutes 3.5 x In DC Inductive 30 W at L/R  40 ms
2 Minutes 6 x In 50 W at L/R  10 ms
1 Second 100 A (1 A) 350 A (5 A)
1 Cycle 700 A (1 A) 2500 A (5 A)
Burden @ In ≤0.02 VA (1 A phase and Earth Unit Design
element)
≤0.2 VA (5 A phase and earth
Housing E6 (see dimension drawing)
element)
Indication 20 Character 4 line Display
Relay Healthy LED
Auxiliary Supply
Tri-Coloured User
Rated DC Voltage Nominal Range 24 V to 250V Programmable Self or Hand
Absolute Range 19.2 V to 275 V Reset LED’s
With-drawable Element. Yes
User Interface. 5 Navigation Keys
Allowable 12% of DC voltage Weight. Typical 4.26 Kg
superimposed ac IP Rating installed with IP 51 from front
component cover fitted.
Rated AC Voltage Nominal Range 100 V to 230 V AC IP Rating installed with IP 20 from front
50 Hz or 60 Hz cover removed.
Absolute Range 88 V to 253 V rms AC
Power Min (DC) 3.9 W Phase/Earth Current Inputs: Thermal Withstand
Consumption: Max (DC) 8W Continuous 3.0 x In
Min (AC) 9 VA 0.5 PF
10 minutes 3.5 x In
Max (AC) 15 VA 0.5 PF
5 minutes 4.0 x In
Allowable DC 50 ms
3 minutes 5.0 x In
breaks/dips in AC 2.5 cycles or
supply (collapse to 3 cycles @50 Hz or 2 minutes 6.0 x In
zero) 60 Hz 1 A Input 5 A Input
3 Second 57.7 A 230 A
Binary Inputs 2 Second 70.7 A 282 A
Number 3 or 6 1 Second 100 A 400 A
19 V dc DC Range 17 V to 320 V dc I Cycle 700 A 2500 A
Operating
Voltage AC Range 92 V to 138 VRMSAC
88 V dc Range 70 V to 320V dc Operate State Burden
Maximum dc 1.5 mA Quiescent (Typical) 3W
current for Maximum 10 W
operation Allowable superimposed ac
 12% of dc voltage
Maximum peak 1.5 mA component
ac current for Allowable breaks/dips in
operation supply (collapse to zero from  20 ms
Pick Up Delay User Selectable 0 s to 14400 s nominal voltage)
(up to 4 hours)
Drop Off Delay User Selectable 0 s to 14400 s
(up to 4 hours)
For AC operation the BI pick-up delay should be set to 0
ms and the drop-off delay to 20 ms.

Radiated Radio Frequency Electromagnetic Field
Serial Interface Immunity
IEC60255-26
10 V/m, 80 MHz to 1000 MHz (Sweep)  5 % variation
Communication Port Front USB Type standard B
Rear RS485 2 wire electrical 10 V/m, 1.4 GHz to 2.7 GHz (Sweep)  5 % variation
Rear EN100+ IEC 61850 Electrical or 10 V/m, 80 MHz, 160 MHz, 380 MHz, 450  5 % variation
MHz, 900 MHz, 1850 MHz, 2150 MHz (Spot)
Optical (Optional)
Protocol IEC60870-5-103
Fast Transient
MODBUS RTU
IEC 60255-26
IEC61850
DNP3.0 4 kV, 5/50 ns, 5 kHz, repetitive  3 % variation
* Note 20 ms drop-off delay applied to binary inputs
Mechanical Conducted Disturbance Induced by Radio Frequency

Interference
IEC 60255-26
Vibration (Sinusoidal) 10 V, 0.15 MHz to 80 MHz  5 % variation
IEC 60255-21-1:1988 Class I
Vibration response 0.5 gn Conducted Disturbance Induced by Radio Frequency
Vibration endurance 1.0 gn Interference Limits
IEC 60255-26
Shock and Bump Frequency Range Limits dB(µV)
IEC 60255-21-2:1988 Class I Quasi-peak Average
Shock response 5 gn, 11 ms 0.15 MHz to 0.5 MHz 79 66
Shock withstand 15 gn, 11 ms 0.5 MHz to 30 MHz 73 60
10 gn, Bump test, 16 ms 10 gn, 16 ms
Radiated Radio Frequency Electromagnetic Field
Seismic Immunity Limits
IEC 60255-21-3 Class I IEC 60255-26
Seismic Response 1 gn Limits at 10 m
Frequency Range
Quasi-peak, dB(µV/m)
Mechanical Classification 30 to 230 MHz 40
Durability 230 to 1000 MHz 47
In excess of 106 operations
Surge
Electrical Tests IEC 60255-26
Analogue Inputs,
Insulation Auxiliary Power: 4.0 kV  10%
IEC 60255-27
Line to Earth
Between all terminals and 2.5 kV rms
earth for 1 minute I/O:
2.0 kV *  10%
Between independent 2.5 kV rms Line to Earth
circuits for 1 minute RS485 Comms port:
Across normally open 1.0 kV rms 1.0 kV No Data Loss
Line to Earth
contacts for 1 minute
Analogue Inputs,
Auxiliary Power: 2.0 kV  10%
Transient overvoltage
IEC 60255-27 Line to Line
Between all the terminals I/O:
1.0 kV *  10%
and earth or between any 5 kV Line to Line
two independent circuits 1.2/50 µs * Note 50 ms pick-up delay and 20 ms drop-off delay applied to binary inputs
without damage or 0.5 J
flashover
Environmental
Slow Damped Oscillatory Wave
IEC 60255-26
Temperature
2.5 kV Common mode IEC 60068-2-1
< 3 % deviation
1.0 kV Differential mode
Operating range -10 °C to +55 °C
Storage range -25 °C to +70 °C
Electrostatic Discharge
IEC 60255-26
Humidity
8 kV, Contact discharge  5 % variation IEC 60068-2-78
Operational test 56 days at +40 °C and 93 % RH

IEC 60068-2-30 The error limits on these diagrams are as follows: -
Operational test 25 C to 55 C (outdoor
equipment) and 97/93 % relative Operate Levels
humidity. 6 x 24h (12h+12h) Initial Setting  10% of IOP or  0.1In
cycles. Biased slope +(10 % of Restraint) or +
10 mA
Protection Elements Differential and Inter-trip operate times are given by: -
t = t0 +td
General Accuracy
Reference Conditions Where
General IEC 60255-151 t0 is the base operating time
Current settings 100% of In td is the Differential Delay time
Current input IDMTL – 0.05 to 2.5 xIs
DTL – 0.05 to 50 xIs Operate Times (Typical)
Auxiliary supply Nominal Differential base operate 30 ms ± 5 ms
Frequency 50 Hz or 60 Hz time (ldiff > 10 ls) (Fault Line)
Ambient temperature 20 C 50 ms ± 5 ms
(below fault line)
General Settings Differential Delay Time + 1 % or + 10 ms
Transient overreach of 5%
highset/lowset (X/R = 100) Overcurrent protection
Disengaging time (see note) < 42 ms Characteristic
Overshoot time < 40 ms Setting IEC Normal Inverse (NI)
IEC Very Inverse (VI)
Note. Output contacts have a programmable minimum IEC Extremely Inverse (EI)
dwell time, after which the disengaging time is as above. IEC Long Time Inverse, (LTI)
DTL
Accuracy Influencing Factors ANSI Moderatly Inverse (MI)
Temperature ANSI Very Inverse (VI)
ANSI Extremely Inverse (EI)
-10 C to +55 C  5 % variation
No. of elements 4
Frequency
Level
47 Hz to 52 Hz Level:  5 % variation Setting Range Is 0.05, 0.01…2.5 x In
57 Hz to 62 Hz
Accuracy Operate: 105 % Is, ±4 % or ±1 %
Operating  5 % variation xIn
time:
Reset ≥ 95% of operate current
Harmonic content Repeatability ± 1%
Frequencies to 550  5 % variation IDMTL Time Multiplier
Hz Setting 0.025, 0.05…100
Accuracy ± 5 % or ± 30 ms
Current differential Repeatability ± 1 % or ± 5 ms
Level DTL Delay
No. of elements 2 Setting 0.00 s to 14400 s
Initial Setting 0.1 to 2.5 Accuracy ± 10 ms
1st Bias Slope 0.1 to 0.7 Repeatability ± 5 ms
2nd Bias Slope 0.5 to 2 Reset
Typical operating threshold characteristics are shown Setting 0 s to 60 s
below: - Accuracy ± 1 % or ± 10 ms
10 Repeatability ± 1 % or ± 5 ms
Restraint = ( IL + IR ) / 2
9
Differential Threshold (xIs)
8
Differential = (IL) – (IR) DTL
Axes are scaled as multiples
No. of elements 4
7
of differential setting. Level
2
6 Setting Range Is 0.05 xIn to 50 xIn

s
Bia
5 Accuracy Operate: 100 % Is, ±5 % or, ±10 mA

Reset ≥ 95 % of operate current
4 Initial
Repeatability ±1%
3 DTL Delay
1
2 Bias old Setting 0.0 s to 14400 s
Break 2
T h resh
1 Biase
d Accuracy ± 5 ms
Repeatability ± 1 % or ± 5 ms
0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Restraint (x Is)
Fig5. Differential Protection Operating Characteristic
Connection Diagrams
7SR18
+ve
2
-ve BI 1
4
+ve
6
-ve BI 2
8
+ve
10 1 2 1 2
-ve BI 3
12
14 A B A
Protection
16 GND
RS485
Signaling
18 B
20 Term.
27 28 27 28
+ve
22
-ve Rear View
24
28
GND.
B NOTES
1A
13 3 BI = Binary Input
14 BO 1 1
BO = Binary Output
5A IL1
15 2
16 4
1A Shows contacts internal to relay case
17 BO 2 6
assembly.
18 5 Contacts close when the relay chassis is
5A IL2 withdrawn from case
19
20
8
1A BO 3
21
7
22
5A IL3 10
23 BO 4
9
24
1A 12
25 BO 5
11
26
5A IL4
27
28
A
Fig6. Connections Diagram for 7SR18 Non-Directional Relay (3BI and 5BO)

+ve 7SR18 +ve
3
2
BI 1 BI 4 -ve
-ve 1
4
+ve +ve
6 5
BI 5
-ve BI 2
8
+ve +ve
10 7
-ve BI 3 BI 6 1 2 1 2
12
9
14 A
BO 6 11
B A
RS485
16 GND
BO 7 13 Protection
18 B Signaling
BO 8 15
20 Term.
17
V1
19 27 28 27 28
+ve
22
21
-ve
24 V2 Rear View
23
28 25
GND. V3
B 27 NOTES
BI = Binary Input
1A
13 3 BO = Binary Output
14 BO 1 1
5A IL1
15 2
16 4 Shows contacts internal to relay case

1A assembly.
17 BO 2 6
Contacts close when the relay chassis is
18 5 withdrawn from case
5A IL2
19
20
8
1A BO 3
21
7
22
5A IL3 10
23 BO 4
9
24
1A 12
25 BO 5
11
26
5A IL4
27
28
A
Fig7. Connections Diagram for 7SR18 Directional Relay (6BI and 8BO)

Ordering Information – 7SR18 Solkor
7 S R 1 8 1 - - 0 A 0
Protection Product Family

Differential Protection 8
Case size
2)
E6 1
I/O and Fascia

3 Binary Inputs, 5 Binary Outputs, 18 LEDs 1 C
3 Binary Inputs, 5 Binary Outputs, 10 LEDs + (6 keys each with LED) 2 C
6 Binary Inputs, 8 Binary Outputs, 18 LEDs 3
6 Binary Inputs, 8 Binary Outputs, 10 LEDs + (6 keys each with LED) 4
Measuring input
4 CTs (1 A or 5 A) 1
4 CTs (1 A or 5 A), 3 VTs (40 V to 160 V) 2 C
Auxiliary voltage
24 V DC to 250 V DC, 100 V AC to 230 V AC, binary input threshold 19 V DC M
24 V DC to 250 V DC, 100 V AC to 230 V AC, binary input threshold 88 V DC N
Protection Signalling Channel

Optical fibre link (820 nm) (ST connection) 2 km 1) B 1
Optical fibre link (1300 nm) (LC connection) 40 km 1) C
Data Communication Interface

USB front port, RS485 (Terminal block) rear port 1 2
USB front port, RS485 (Terminal block) rear port, Electrical Ethernet RJ45 (x2) rear port 7 7
USB front port, RS485 (Terminal block) rear port, Optical Ethernet Duplex (x2) rear port 8 7
Protocol
IEC 60870-5-103 and Modbus RTU and DNP 3.0 (user selectable) 2
IEC 60870-5-103 and Modbus RTU and DNP 3.0 (user selectable) and IEC61850 7
Spare
0

Standard version C
87L 3-Phase differential (with variable settings)
87HS 3-Phase Differential High Set
85 Inter-Trip
50LC Line Check
37 Undercurrent
46NPS Negative phase sequence overcurrent
49 Thermal overload
46BC Broken conductor/load unbalance
60CTS-I CT Supervision
74T&C Trip & Close circuit supervision
51c Cold load pickup
81HBL2 Inrush Detector
Programmable Logic
For variants with 3 x VT inputs as above plus
60 VTS VT supervision
67/50, 67/51 Directional Overcurrent
67 G/N Directional Earth Fault
Version C - plus D
79 Autoreclose
Spare
0
1)
Refer to Technical Manual
2)
Standard Version Cover - No Push Buttons

1.1.3 7SR2 Range
Ethernet Redundancy: RSTP, HSR & PRP – standard on
ethernet equipped models
Data Acquisition -
Data
Via Communication Interface Event records
Fault records
Sequence of event records Waveform records
Measurands
Up to 5000 events are stored and time tagged to 1 ms
Commands
resolution. These can be viewed on the fascia LCD.
Time synchronism
Viewing and changing settings
Fault Records
A minimum of the previous 10 fault records are displayed on
the relay fascia and are also available through the Serial Communications
communication interface, with time and date of trip,
measured quantities and type of fault.
The relay offers a USB serial port as standard on the front of
Waveform recorder all units. All of the relays functions can be set on a PC using
The waveform recorder stores analogue data for all poles Reydisp Evolution via the USB port. The connection is made
and the states of protection functions, binary inputs, LEDs with a USB cable and operates with a ‘plug and play’
and binary outputs with user settable pre & post trigger connection, so no pre-setting of the relay is required.
data. The last ten waveform records are stored for easy The front port can be switched off or set to use either the
selection. Their duration is user selectable from 1 second, 2 DNP3.0, MODBUS-RTU, IEC60870-5-103 and ASCII protocols
seconds, 5 seconds or 10 seconds. for testing purposes.
A rear RS485 electrical connection is available on all units for
Demand Monitoring system interface connections. An internal terminating
A record of demand is available. The demand minimum, resistor is provided, which can be connected into the circuit
maximum and average values for currents, frequency and if by adding a wire loop between the relevant terminals.
applicable, voltages and real, reactive and apparent power
and power factor, over a user selectable period of time, is
displayed and available via data communications. Typically
this is set as a rolling value for the last 24 hours.
Ext Wire loop to
Data Log To Control System Include line
terminating Res
The average values of voltages, current and real & reactive 14

16
14
16
power are recorded at a user selectable interval and stored 18 18
20
to provide data in the form of a Data Log which can be RS485 Screened
RS485 Screened
downloaded for further analysis. A typical application is to twisted pair twisted pair Rear terminals
record 15 minute intervals over the last 7 days.

Fig1. Typical RS485 connection
Real Time Clock
The time and date can be set and are maintained while the The rear RS485 can be user selected to be OFF, IEC60870-5-
relay is de-energised by a back up storage capacitor. The 103, MODBUS RTU or DNP3.0 protocol.
time can be synchronized from a binary input pulse or the
data communication channel.
Ethernet Communications
Data Storage & Communication IEC 61850
IEC61850 communication is available through an optional
Standard Communications Ports EN100 communication module. The EN100 Module can be
Communication access to relay functionality is via a front ordered with either 2x Electrical RJ45 or 2x Fibre optic LC
USB port for local PC connection or rear electrical RS485 port Ethernet ports.
for remote connection Information on IEC61850 functionality can be found in the
Optional Communications Ports Model Implementation Conformance Statement (MICS)
2 Rear ST fibre optic ports (2 x Tx/Rx) + IRIG-B port
Protocol Implementation (PICS,PIXIT & TICS)
1 Rear RS485 + IRIG-B port
1 Rear RS232 + IRIG-B port
2 Electrical Ethernet
2 Optical Ethernet
Reydisp Evolution
Protocols Reydisp Evolution is a Windows based software tool,
IEC60870-5-103, Modbus RTU and optional DNP 3.0 providing the means for the user to apply settings,
protocols – User selectable with programmable data points interrogate settings and retrieve events and disturbance
IEC61850 over Ethernet – optional
waveforms from the device and is common to the entire
range of Reyrolle protection relays.
Fig 4. Typical Communications Editor Screenshot
Curve Editor
The Curve Editor tool can be used to add user defined
characteristics for use by any of the Voltage, Current or
Thermal IDMTL elements.
Fig 2. Typical Reydisp Evolution Screenshot
Language Editor
Western European characters.
Fig 5. Typical Curve Editor Screenshot
Reydisp Manager
Reydisp Manager is a Windows based application which
enables configuration of multiple Reyrolle devices.
It provides the following features:
• Project based handling of all features of multiple devices to
allow engineering of IEC61850 projects.
• Template based structure allowing offline configuration
Fig 3. Typical Language Editor Screenshot • Configure and store device settings for all settings groups
• Create and edit graphical logic diagrams
Communications Editor • Configure data points and options for serial protocols
To facilitate easier interfacing to a substation the relays • Configure Language
default Protocol configuration may be modified using the • Configure User Curves
communication editor software tool. • Update device firmware
The communication editor is a PC based software package
provided within the Reydisp software suite which allows Please refer to the Reydisp Manager User Guide for further
modification of the IEC60870-5-103, DNP 3.0 and MODBUS information.
Protocols.

Fig 6. Typical Reydisp Manager Screenshot
Fig 7. Typical Settings Editor Screenshot
Fig 8. Typical Reylogic Express graphical logic editor

Screenshot

Case Dimensions
Case Earth
150 11 31 216.5 connection 155.5
151.5
Typical
168
159
177
PANEL CUT-OUT when SIDE VIEW FRONT VIEW
fitted
COMMS WIRING
FOR ETHERNET
10 130
CLEARANCE
MINIMUM CLEARANCES:
75 mm MIN
70mm FOR F/O COMMS CABLE
NOTE:
THE 3.6 HOLES ARE FOR M4 THREAD FORMING (TRILOBULAR) SCREWS. THESE ARE SUPPLIED AS STANDARD AND ARE SUITABLE FOR USE IN FERROUS / ALUMINIUM PANELS
1.6mm THICK AND ABOVE. FOR OTHER PANELS, HOLES TO BE M4 CLEARANCE (TYPICALLY 4.5 DIAMETER) AND RELAYS MOUNTED USING M4 MACHINE SCREWS, NUTS AND
Fig9. E6 Case overall dimensions and panel drilling details (All dimensions in are mm)
Case Earth
201.5 11 31 216.5 connection 207.5
151.5
Typical
168
159
177
fitted
COMMS WIRING
FOR ETHERNET
9.75 182
CLEARANCE
MINIMUM CLEARANCES:
75 mm MIN

NOTE:
THE 3.6 HOLES ARE FOR M4 THREAD FORMING (TRILOBULAR) SCREWS. THESE ARE SUPPLIED AS STANDARD AND ARE SUITABLE FOR USE IN FERROUS / ALUMINIUM PANELS
1.6mm THICK AND ABOVE. FOR OTHER PANELS, HOLES TO BE M4 CLEARANCE (TYPICALLY 4.5 DIAMETER) AND RELAYS MOUNTED USING M4 MACHINE SCREWS, NUTS AND
Fig 10. E8 Case overall dimensions and panel drilling details (All dimensions are in mm)

Case Earth
252.75 11 31 216.5 connection 260
Typical
151.5
168
159
177
fitted
COMMS WIRING
FOR ETHERNET
9.25
75 mm MIN
CLEARANCE
74.25
MINIMUM CLEARANCES:
178.25 25mm FOR TERMINAL WIRING
243.25 45mm FOR ETHERNET COMMS MODULE
NOTE:
THE 3.6 HOLES ARE FOR M4 THREAD FORMING (TRILOBULAR) SCREWS. THESE ARE SUPPLIED AS STANDARD AND ARE
SUITABLE FOR USE IN FERROUS / ALUMINIUM PANELS 1.6mm THICK AND ABOVE. FOR OTHER PANELS, HOLES TO BE
M4 CLEARANCE (TYPICALLY 4.5 DIAMETER) AND RELAYS MOUNTED USING M4 MACHINE SCREWS, NUTS AND
THE RETAINING SCREW AT THE REAR OF THE CASE FOR THE ETHERNET VARIANT MUST BE FITTED FOR THE DEVICE
TO COMPLY WITH PERFORMANCE CLAIMS.
Fig11. E10 Case overall dimensions and panel drilling details (All dimensions in are mm)
Case Earth
304.5 11 31 216.5 connection 311.5
Typical
151.5
168
159
177
fitted
COMMS WIRING
FOR ETHERNET
9.25
75 mm MIN
CLEARANCE
100.25 MINIMUM CLEARANCES:

295.25 45mm FOR ETHERNET COMMS MODULE

NOTE:
THE RETAINING SCREW AT THE REAR OF THE CASE FOR THE ETHERNET VARIANT MUST BE FITTED FOR THE DEVICE
TO COMPLY WITH PERFORMANCE CLAIMS.
Fig12. E12 Case overall dimensions and panel drilling details (All dimensions are in mm)

1.1.3.1 7SR210 & 7SR220 Non-Directional/Directional Overcurrent Relays
47 Negative Phase Sequence (NPS) voltage
55 Power Factor
67/50 Bi-Directional Instantaneous Overcurrent
67/50G/N Bi-Directional Instantaneous Earth Fault
67/51 Bi-Directional Time Delayed Overcurrent
67/51G/N Bi-Directional Time Delayed Earth Fault
67/50/51 SEF for Compensated Networks
86 Lockout
Optional Functionality – 7SR210 & 7SR220

79 + 25 Auto Reclose + Check Sync
User Interface
Description
The 7SR210 and 7SR220 are a new generation of non- 3 fixed LEDs
directional and directional overcurrent protection relays, 8, 16 or 32 Programmable Tri-colour LEDs (Option)
built on years of numeric relay protection experience with 6 or 12 Programmable Function Keys each with Tri-colour
the Argus family of products. Housed in 4U high, size E6, E8 LED (Option)
or E12 cases, these relays provide protection, control,
monitoring, instrumentation and metering with integrated
input and output logic, data logging & fault reports. Monitoring Functions
Communication access to relay functionality is via a front
USB port for local PC connection or rear electrical RS485 port
for remote connection. Additional rear port options are Standard Monitoring – 7SR210 & 7SR220
available. Primary & Secondary current phases and earth
Positive Phase Sequence (PPS) Current
Negative Phase Sequence (NPS) Current
Function Overview Zero Phase Sequence (ZPS) Current
Standard Functionality – 7SR210 & 7SR220 Time and date
37 Undercurrent Starters
46BC Broken Conductor / Load Unbalance Fault records
46NPS Negative Phase Sequence Overcurrent Event records
49 Thermal Overload Waveform records
50 Instantaneous Overcurrent Circuit breaker trip counters
50G/N Instantaneous Earth Fault I2t summation for contact wear
50BF Circuit Breaker Fail Demand metering
51 Time Delayed Overcurrent Standard Monitoring - 7SR220 Directional Relay
51G/N Time Delayed Measured Earth Fault /SEF Direction
60CTS-I CT Supervision Frequency
64H High Impedance REF Primary line and phase voltages
74TC/CC Trip/Close Circuit Supervision Secondary voltages
81HBL2 2nd Harmonic Block/Inrush Restraint Apparent power and power factor
51c Cold Load Pickup Real and reactive power
8 Settings Groups W Hr forward and reverse
Password Protection – 2 levels VAr Hr forward and reverse
User Programmable Logic Historical demand record
Self Monitoring Positive phase sequence (PPS) Voltage
CB Control Negative phase sequence (NPS) Voltage
Zero phase sequence (ZPS) Voltage
Standard Functionality - 7SR220 Directional Relay
21FL Fault Locator
21LB Load Blinder
32 Power
32S Sensitive Power
below the setting. The element types have user operate and
Description of Functionality delay settings.
64H Restricted Earth Fault - scheme

With reference to figure 4 and figure 5 ‘Function Diagrams’.
The measured earth fault input may be used in a 64H high
impedance restricted earth fault scheme. Required external
Standard Functionality series stabilising resistor and non-linear shunt resistor can be
supplied.
37 Undercurrent 74TC/CC Trip/Close Circuit Supervision

Each element has settings for pickup level and Definite Time The trip/close circuit(s) can be monitored via binary inputs
Lag (DTL) delays. Operates if current falls below setting for connected in H4/H5/H6 or H7 schemes. Trip/Close circuit
duration of delay. failure raises an HMI alarm and output(s).
46BC Phase Unbalance/Broken Conductor 81HBL2/5 Harmonic Block / Inrush Restraint / Overfluxing
Element has settings for pickup level and DTL delay. With the Where second harmonic current is detected (i.e. during
circuit breaker closed, if one or two of the line currents fall transformer energisation) user selectable elements can be
below setting this could be due to a broken conductor. blocked.
46NPS Negative Phase Sequence Overcurrent 51c Cold Load

Two elements, one DTL and one IDMT, with user settings for If a circuit breaker is closed onto a ‘cold’ load, i.e. one that
pickup level and delays, will operate if NPS Current exceeds has not been powered for a prolonged period, this can
setting and delay. NPS Current elements can be used to impose a higher than normal load-current demand on the
detect unbalances on the system or remote earth faults system which could exceed normal settings. These
when a delta-star transformer is in circuit. conditions can exist for an extended period and must not be
interpreted as a fault. To allow optimum setting levels to be
49 Thermal Overload applied for normal operation, the cold load pickup feature
The thermal algorithm calculates the thermal states from the will apply alternative settings for a limited period. The
measured currents and can be applied to lines, cables and feature resets when either the circuit breaker has been
transformers. Outputs are available for thermal overload and closed for a settable period, or if the current has reduced
thermal capacity. beneath a set level for a user set period.
50/51 Phase Fault 21FL Fault Locator

50 INST/DTL and 51 IDMTL/DTL elements provide overcurrent The relay provides a basic single-end type fault locator which
protection, each with independent settings for pickup is able to estimate the fault position using analogue
current, time-multiplier (51) and time-delays. User can select information measured by the relay at one end of the
IEC or ANSI Time Current Characteristics. The IDMT stage has protected circuit during the short duration of the fault.
shaped current/time reset characteristic, to improve grading 21LB Load Blinder
with electromechanical protection. Load Blinders are used with overcurrent elements to block
tripping during periods of high reverse load currents that can
50G/51G/50N/51N Earth Fault/Sensitive Earth Fault occur in distribution networks. The blinder is operated
Two earth fault measurement modes are available. One during user defined load conditions and is used in
mode directly measures the earth current from an conjunction with the relay protection elements.
independent CT, or the residual connection of the 3 line CTs.
This input can be set to be either earth fault or sensitive 50AFD Arc Flash Detector
earth fault (50G/51G). The second mode derives the earth The 7SR2 relays can be used with the 7XG31 ReyArc range of
current internally from the 3 phase CTs (50N/51N). 50 Arc Flash Detection devices. Arc fault protection is a
INST/DTL and 51 IDMTL/DTL elements provide overcurrent technique employed for the fast clearance of arcing faults on
protection, each with independent settings for pickup busbars, within metal clad switchgear & associated cable
current, time-multiplier (51) and time-delays. User can select boxes. The arc is detected using an optical sensor & the
IEC or ANSI Time Current Characteristics. The IDMT stage has signal input to a protection device which also monitors the
a user programmable reset characteristic either DTL or load current on the system. A trip signal can be achieved in
shaped current/time reset characteristic to improve grading less than 10 ms using arc detection only or within 20 ms
with electromechanical protection. when using overcurrent check.
50BF Circuit Breaker Fail Programmable User Logic

The circuit breaker fail function may be triggered from an The user can map Binary Inputs and Protection operated
internal trip signal or from a binary input. Line currents are outputs to Function Inhibits, Logic Inputs, LEDs and/or Binary
monitored following a trip signal and an output is issued if Outputs. The user can also enter up to 16 equations defining
any current is still detected after a specified time interval. scheme logic using standard functions e.g. Timers, AND/OR
This can be used to re-trip the CB or to back-trip an upstream gates, Inverters and Counters. Each Protection element
CB. A second back-trip time delay is available to enable output can be used for Alarm & Indication and/or tripping.
another stage to be utilized if required.
60CTS-I CT Supervision Two circuit breaker operations counters are provided. The
The CTS-I CT Supervision function monitors each phase Maintenance Counters record the overall number of
current input and operates if any one or two inputs fall operations and the Delta Counter the number of operations
since the last reset. An I 2t summation Counter provides a 47 Negative Phase Sequence Overvoltage
measure of the contact wear indicating the total energy Each element has settings for pickup level and Definite Time
interrupted by the circuit breaker contacts. Each counter has Lag (DTL) delays. Operates if NPS Voltage exceeds setting for
a user set target operations count which, when reached, can duration of delay.
be mapped to raise Alarms/ Binary Outputs. These counters
assist with maintenance scheduling. 51V Voltage Controlled OverCurrent
Element has settings for UnderVoltage pickup level and
Function LED’s operates if voltage falls below setting. On Pick-up this
Eight, sixteen or thirty-two user programmable tri-colour element applies the set 51v Multiplier to the pickup setting
LED’s are provided eliminating the need for expensive panel of the 67/51 phase fault elements.
mounted pilot lights and associated wiring. Each LED can be
user set to red, green or yellow allowing for clear indication 59N Neutral Overvoltage
of the associated function’s state. A slip-in label pocket Two elements, one DTL and one IDMTL, have user settings
along-side enables the user to insert customised notation. A for pickup level and delays. These will operate if the Neutral
printer compatible template is available. voltage exceeds the setting for duration of delay. Neutral
overvoltage can be used to detect earth faults in high
Function Keys impedance earthed or isolated systems.
Six or twelve user programmable function keys are available
for implementing User logic and scheme control 60CTS CT Supervision
functionality, eliminating the need for expensive panel The CT Supervision considers the presence of negative phase
mounted control switches and associated wiring. Each sequence current, without an equivalent level of negative
function key has an associated user programmable tri-color phase sequence voltage, for a user set time as a CT failure.
LED (red, green, yellow) allowing for clear indication of the Element has user operate and delay settings.
associated function’s state. A slip-in label pocket along-side
enables the user to insert his own notation for the function 60VTS VT Supervision
Key LED Identification. Each Function Key can be mapped
The VT Supervision uses a combination of negative phase
directly to any of the built-in Command functions or to the
sequence voltage and negative phase sequence current to
User Logic equations.
detect a VT fuse failure. This condition may be alarmed or
used to inhibit voltage dependent functions. Element has
67/67N Directional Control

Phase fault, Earth fault and Sensitive Earth fault elements
can be directionalised. Each element can be user set to
Forward, Reverse, or Non-directional. Directional Phase fault
elements are polarised from quadrature voltage. Earth fault
elements can be user set to be polarised from residual
voltage or negative phase sequence voltage.
Definite Time Lag (DTL) delays. Operates if frequency
exceeds setting for duration of delay. Typically applied in
load shedding schemes.
Optional Functionality
79 Auto-Reclose
This function provides independent Phase fault and Earth
Fault/Sensitive Earth fault sequences of up to 5 Trips i.e. 4
Reclose attempts before Lockout. Auto-Reclose sequence can
be user set to be initiated from internal protection operation
or via Binary Input from an external Protection. The user can
set each trip in the sequence to be either instantaneous
Fig1. Tri-colour LED’s and function keys (Fast) or delayed. Independent times can be set by the user
for Reclose (Dead) time and Reclaim time.
Additional Functionality 25 Check Sync

The check synchronizing function is used to check that the
voltage conditions, measured by the voltage transformers on
either side of the open circuit breaker, indicate that it is safe
Each element has settings for pickup level, drop-off level and to close without risk of damage to the circuit breaker or
Definite Time Lag (DTL) delays. Operates if voltage ‘exceeds’ disturbance to the system.
setting for duration of delay. Can be applied in load
shedding schemes.

Binary Outputs
Technical Data Operating Voltage Voltage Free
For full technical data refer to the Performance Specification Hand Reset
Section of the Technical Manual. Contact Operate / Release 7 ms / 3 ms
Time.
Making Capacity:
Inputs and Outputs Carry continuously 5 A ac or dc
Make and carry 20 A ac or dc for 0.5 s
(L/R  40 ms and V  300 V) 30 A ac or dc for 0.2 s
Current Inputs Breaking Capacity
Quantity 3 x Phase & 1 x Earth or (  5 A and  300 V):
Sensitive Earth AC Resistive 1250 VA
Rated Current IN 1A/5A AC Inductive 250 VA at p.f.  0.4
Measuring Range 80 xIn DC Resistive 75 W
Instrumentation ≥ 0.1xIn ±1% In DC Inductive 30 W at L/R  40 ms
Frequency 50 Hz / 60 Hz 50 W at L/R  10 ms
Thermal Withstand:
Continuous 3.0 xIn
10 Minutes 3.5 xIn Mechanical Tests
5 Minutes 4.0 xIn
3 Minutes 5.0 xIn
2 Minutes 6.0 xIn
3 Seconds 57.7 A (1 A) 202 A (5 A)
2 Seconds 70.7 A (1 A) 247 A (5 A) Type Level Variation
1 Second 100 A (1 A) 350 A (5 A) Vibration response 0.5 gn 5%
1 Cycle 700 A (1 A) 2500 A (5 A) Vibration endurance 1.0 gn 5%
Burden @ In ≤0.1 VA (1 A phase and Earth
element) Shock and Bump
≤0.3 VA (5 A phase and earth IEC 60255-21-2 Class I
element) Type Level Variation
Shock response 5 gn, 11 ms 5%
Voltage Inputs Shock withstand 15 gn, 11 ms 5%
Quantity 4 Bump test 10 gn, 16 ms 5%
Nominal Voltage 40…160 V a.c. Range
Instrumentation ≥ 0.8 xVn ±1% Vn Seismic
Thermal Withstand: IEC 60255-21-3 Class I
Continuous and 1 Second 300 V Type Level Variation
Burden @ 110 V  0.1 VA Seismic response 1 gn 5%
DC Auxiliary supply Mechanical Classification

Nominal voltage Operating Range Durability >106 operations
24 V dc to 250 V dc 19.2 V dc to 275 V dc
100 V ac to 230 V ac 80 V ac to 253 V ac
Allowable superimposed ac 12% of DC voltage Electrical Tests
component
Allowable breaks/dips in 50 ms (DC) Insulation
supply (collapse to zero) 2.5/3 cycles (AC) IEC 60255-5
Type Level
Auxiliary supply: Power Consumption
Quiescent State (DC) 24V: 8W
and earth
110V: 7W
250V: 7W Between independent 2.0 kV AC RMS for 1 min
circuits
Maximum Load (DC) 24V: 12W
110V: 11W Across normally open 1.0 kV AC RMS for 1 min
250V: 11W contacts
Quiescent State (AC) 100V: 16VA
230V: 21VA High Frequency Disturbance
Maximum Load (AC) 100V: 23VA IEC 60255-22-1 Class III
230V: 30VA Type Level Variation
Common 2.5 kV  5%
Binary Inputs (longitudinal)
Operating Voltage 19 V dc: Range 17 to 290 V dc Series (transverse) 1.0 kV  5%
88 V: Range 74 to 290 V dc mode
Maximum dc current for 1.5 mA
operation

Electrostatic Discharge IP Ratings
IEC 60255-22-2 Class IV IEC 60529
Type Level Variation Type Level
Contact discharge 8.0 kV  5% Installed with cover IP 51 from front of relay
Fast Transients Installed with cover IP 20 from front of relay

IEC 60255-22-4 Class IV removed
Type Level Variation For full technical data refer to the Performance Specification
5/50 ns 2.5 kHz 4 kV  5% Section of the Technical Manual.
repetitive
Surge Immunity
Performance
IEC 60255-22-5
Type Level Variation 27/59 Under/Over Voltage
Between all 4.0 kV Number of Elements 4 Under or Over
terminals and earth Operate Any phase or All phases
Between any two 2.0 kV  10% or 1 mA
Voltage Guard 1, 1.5…200 V
independent circuits Setting Range Vs 5,5.5…200 V
Hysteresis Setting 0,0.1…80%
Conducted Radio Frequency Interference Vs Operate Level 100% Vs, ±1% or ±0.25 V
IEC 60255-22-6 Reset Level: -
Type Level Variation Undervoltage =(100%+hyst) xVop, ±1% or 0.25 V
0.15 to 80 MHz 10 V  5% Overvoltage =(100%-hyst) xVop, ±1% or 0.25 V
Delay Setting td 0.00,0.01…20,20.5…100,101…10
Radiated Radio Frequency 00,1010…10000,10100…14400 s
IEC 60255-25 Basic Operate Time: -
Type Limits at 10m, Quasi-peak 0 to 1.1xVs 73 ms ±10 ms
30 to 230 MHz 40 dB(V/m) 0 to 2.0xVs 63 ms ±10 ms
230 to 10000 MHz 47 dB(V/m) 1.1 to 0.5xVs 58 ms ±10 ms
Operate time tbasic +td , ±1% or ±10 ms
Conducted Radio Frequency following delay.
Type Limits
VT Supervision, Voltage Guard
Quasi-peak Average
0.15 to 0.5 MHz 79 dB(V) 66 dB(V)
37 Undercurrent
0.5 to 30 MHz 73 dB(V) 60 dB(V)
Radiated Immunity Setting Range Is 0.05,0.10…5.0 x In
IEC 60255-22-3 Class III Operate Level 100% Is, ±5% or ±1% xIn
Delay Setting td 0.00,0.01..20,20.5..100,101..10
00,1010..10000,10100..14400s
80 MHz to 1000 MHz 10 V/m  5%
Basic Operate Time: - 35 ms ±10 ms
1.1 to 0.5xIn
Magnetic Field with Power Frequency
Operate time following tbasic +td , ±1% or ±10 ms
delay.
Type Level Overshoot Time < 40 ms
100 A/m (0.126 mT) continuous 50 Hz Inhibited by Binary or Virtual Input
1000 A/m (1.26 mT) for 3s
Environmental Tests DT Setting Range Is 0.05,0.10…4.0 x In
DT Operate Level 100% Is, ±5% or ±1%xIn
Temperature DT Delay Setting td 0.00,0.01…20,20.5…100,101…
IEC 60068-2-1, IEC 60068-2-2 1000,1010…10000,10100…..…
14400 s
Operating Range -10 C to +55 C
DT Basic Operate Time –
Storage range -25 C to +70 C
0 to 2 xIs 40 ms ±10 ms
0 to 5 xIs 30 ms ±10 ms
Humidity DT Operate time tbasic +td , ±1% or ±10 ms
IEC 60068-2-30, IEC 60068-2-78 following delay.
Operational 56 days at 40 C and 95% relative IT Char Setting IEC NI,VI,EI,LTI ANSI MI,VI,EI &
test (Indoor) humidity (r.h.) DTL
Operational 6 cycles at 24 h between +25 C (97% r.h.) IT Setting Range 0.05, 0.06..2.5 xIn
test (Outdoor) and +55 C (93% r.h.) Tm Time Multiplier 0.025,0.050…1.6
Char Operate Level 105% Is, ±4% or ±1% xIn

47 Negative Phase Sequence Voltage Operate Level 105% Is, ±4% or ±1%xIn
Number of Elements 2 Minimum Operate top 
K
 Tm
Setting Range Vs 1, 1.5…90 V time  IsI   1
Hysteresis Setting 0, 0.1…80% IEC  A 
top   P  B  Tm
Operate Level 100% Vs, ±2% or ±0.5 V   Is   1 
I
Delay Setting td 0.00,0.01…20,20.5…100, ANSI

101…1000,1010…10000,
10100…..…14400 s Follower Delay 0 – 20 s
Basic Operate Time: - Reset ANSI decaying, 0 – 60 s
0V to 2.0xVs 80 ms ±20 ms Inhibited by Binary or Virtual Input
0V to 10xVs 55 ms ±20 ms Inrush detector
Operate time following delay. tbasic +td , ±2% or ±20 ms VT Supervision
Setting Range 5,5.5…200 V
49 Thermal Overload Operate Level 100% Vs, ±5% or ±1% xVn
Operate levels Operate and Alarm Multiplier 0.25.0.3…1
Setting Range Is 0.10, 0.11…3.0 xIn Inhibited by VT Supervision
Operate Level 100% Is, ±5% or ±1% xIn
Time Constant Setting 1, 1.5…1000 min
Operate time 
 I 2  I p2 
 Operation Current check - Phase and Measured
t    In 2 2 

 I  k  I B  

Earth with independent settings,
±5% absolute or ±100 ms Mechanical Trip,
where Ip = prior current CB Faulty Monitor
Capacity Alarm Level Disabled, 50,51…100% Setting Range Is 0.05,0.055…2.0 xIn
Inhibited by Binary or Virtual Input 2 Stage Time Delays Timer 1 20…60000 ms
Timer 2 20…60000 ms
50 (67) Instantaneous & DTL OC & EF (Directional) Operate Level 100% Is, ±5% or ±1% xIn
Basic Operate time < 20 ms
Operation Non directional, Forward
Operate time tdelay ±1% or ±20 ms
or reverse
following delay
Triggered by Any function mapped as trip contact.
Measured Earth & SEF
Inhibited by Binary/Virtual Input
4 x Derived E/F ‘N’
4 x Measured E/F ‘G’
4 x SEF
Setting Range Is: - Number of Elements NDT & NIT
O/C 0.05,0.06…50 xIn NDT Operate Level 100% Vs, ±2% or ±0.5V
Derived E/F ‘N’ 0.05,0.06…50 xIn NDT Delay Setting td 0, 0.01 20, 20.5… 100, 101…
Measured E/F ‘G’ 0.005…25 xIn 1000, 1010… 10000, 10100…
SEF 0.005…5 xIn 14400 s
Time Delay 0.00…14400 s NDT Basic Operate Time: -
Operate Level 100% Is, ±5% or ±1% xIn 0V to 1.5 xVs 76 ms ±20 ms
Operate time: - 0V to 10 xVs 63 ms ±20 ms
Current switched from 0 to 2x 2x Is: 40 ms, ±10 ms, NDT Operate time tbasic +td , ±1% or ±20 ms
Current switched from 0 to 5x 5x Is: 30 ms, ±10 ms following delay.
Operate time following delay tbasic +td , ±1% or ±10 ms NDT & NIT Setting Range Is 1, 1.5…100 V
Inhibited by Binary or Virtual Input Tm Time Multiplier(IDMT) 0.1, 0.2… 10, 10.5… 140
Inrush detector Delay (DTL) 0, 0.01…20 s
VT Supervision Reset ANSI decaying, 0 … 60 s
NIT Operate Level 105% Vs, ±2% or ±0.5 V
51(67) Time Delayed OC&EF (Directional) Inhibited by Binary or Virtual Input
Operation Non directional, Forward or reverse
Elements Phase, Derived Earth, Measured 60 Supervision
Earth & SEF CT (7SR210n) CTS-I
Number of 4 x OC (7SR220n) CTS-I, CTS Vnps, CTS Inps
Elements: - 4 x Derived EF ‘N’ VT (7SR220n) VTS Vnps, VTS Vzps
4 x Measured EF ‘G’ Delay 0.03, 0.04… 20.00, 20.50… 100, 101…
4 x SEF 1000, 1010…10000, 10100… 14400 s
Characteristic IEC NI,VI,EI,LTI ANSI MI,VI,EI & DTL
Setting Range Is: - 64H Restricted Earth Fault
O/C 0.05,0.06…2.5 xIn Setting Range 0.005…0.95 xIn
Derived E/F ‘N’ 0.05,0.06…2.5 xIn Operate Level 100% Is, ±5% or ±1% xIn
Measured E/F ‘G’ 0.005…1 xIn Time Delay 0.00… 14400 s
SEF 0.005…1 xIn Basic Operate Time 0 to 2 xIs 40 ms ±10 ms
Time Multiplier 0.025,0.05…1.6 0 to 5 xIs 30 ms ±10 ms
Time Delay 0,0.01… 20 s Inhibited by Binary or Virtual Input
7SR21 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
+ve
2 3
-ve BI 10 BO 9
4 1
6
+ve
7 E D C B A Data
-ve BI 11 BO 10
8 5 Comms
+ve Optional Optional PSU Analogue (Optional)
10 11
BI 12 BO 11 Blank I/O I/O
9
+ve
12 15
27 28 27 28 27 28 27 28 27 28
BI 13 BO 12
13
+ve Rear View
14 BO 13 17
BI 14 Arrangement of terminals and modules
BO 14 21
+ve
16 19
-ve BI 15
18 BO 15 23
+ve +ve +ve
20 BO 16 27 2 1
BI 16 -ve BI 20 BI 30 -ve
25 4 3
+ve +ve +ve
22 6 5
BI 17 -ve BI 21 BI 31 -ve
8 7
+ve +ve +ve
24 10 9
BI 18 BI 22 BI 32
+ve +ve +ve
26 12 11
BI 19 BI 23 BI 33
28
-ve C
+ve +ve
14 13
+ve 1 BI 24 BI 34
22
-ve BO 1 +ve +ve
24 16 15
3 -ve BI 25 BI 35 -ve
18 17
28 GND.
5 +ve +ve
20 19
BO 2 7 BI 26 BI 36
+ve
2 9 +ve +ve
-ve BI 1 22 21
4 11 BI 27 BI 37
+ve
6 BO 3 13 +ve +ve
-ve BI 2 24 23
8 15 BI 28 BI 38
+ve
10 17 +ve +ve
-ve BI 3 BO 4 26 25
BI 29 BI 39
D
12 19 -ve -ve
28 27
21
14 A BO 5
23
RS485
16 Screen
25
18 B
BO 6 26
20 Term.
B 27
1A +ve
1 18
BI 4
2 IL1
5A (IA) +ve
3 20
BI 5
4
1A +ve
5 22
BI 6 -ve
6 IL2 25
5A (IB)
7 +ve
24
8 BI 7
1A
9 +ve
26
10 IL3 BI 8
5A (IC)
11 +ve
28
12 BI 9 -ve
27
1A
13
19
14 BO 7
I4 (IG/ISEF) 17
5A
15
23
BO 8
16
A 21
NOTES
Shows contacts internal to relay case
BI = Binary Input assembly.
BO = Binary Output Contacts close when the relay chassis is
withdrawn from case
Fig2. 7SR210 Wiring Diagram

7SR22 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
+ve
2 1
-ve BI 4 BO 7
4 3
6
+ve
5 E D C B A Data
-ve BI 5 BO 8
8 7 Comms
+ve Optional Optional PSU Analogue (Optional)
10 9
BI 6 BO 9 Blank I/O I/O
11
+ve
12 13
27 28 27 28 27 28 27 28 27 28
BI 7 BO 10
15
14
+ve
BO 11 17
Rear View
BI 8 Arrangement of terminals and modules
BO 12 19
+ve
16 21
-ve BI 9
18 BO 13 23
+ve
BO 14 +ve +ve
20 25 2 1
BI 10
-ve BI 14 BI 24 -ve
27 4 3
+ve +ve +ve
22 6 5
BI 11
-ve BI 15 BI 25 -ve
8 7
+ve +ve +ve
24 10 9
BI 12 BI 16 BI 26
+ve +ve +ve
26 12 11
BI 13 BI 17 BI 27
28
-ve C
+ve +ve
14 13
1
22
+ve BI 18 BI 28
BO 1
-ve +ve +ve
24 16 15
3
-ve BI 19 BI 29 -ve
18 17
28 GND. 5
+ve +ve
20 19
BO 2 7 BI 20 BI 30
+ve 9
2
BI 1 +ve +ve
-ve 22 21
4 11 BI 21 BI 31
6
+ve
BO 3 13
BI 2 +ve +ve
-ve 24 23
15
8
BI 22 BI 32
+ve 17
10
-ve BI 3 BO 4 26
+ve +ve
25
19
12
BI 23 BI 33
21
28
-ve D -ve
27
14 A BO 5
23
RS485
16 Screen
25
18 B
BO 6 26
20 Term.
B 27
1A 1A
1 17
2 IL1 I5 18
5A (IA) (ISEF) 5A
3 19
4 20
1A
5
6 IL2 VL1 21
5A (IB) (VA)
7 22
1A VL2 23
9
(VB) 24
10 IL3
5A (IC)
11
VL3 25
12
(VC) 26
1A
13
14 I4
V4 27
5A (IG)
15
(VX) 28
16 A
NOTES
Shows contacts internal to relay case
BI = Binary Input assembly.
BO = Binary Output Contacts close when the relay chassis is
withdrawn from case

Function Diagrams for 7SR210 & 7SR220
7SR21
81 60
37 50 50/51 50
49 HBL CTS-
IL1 (x2) BF (x2) AFD
2 I
(IA)
81 60
37 50 50/51 50
49 HBL CTS-
2 I
(IB)
81 60
37 50 50/51 50
49 HBL CTS-
2 I
(IC)
46 81
46 50/51N
NPS HBL
BC (x2)
(x2) 2N
I4
(IG/ISEF) 50/51
64 50/51G 37G
SEF
REF (x2) (x2)
(x2)
74
TCS
79 Optional
Fig4. 7SR210 Function Diagram
7SR22
60 67/ 81
37 50 50 21
49 CTS- 51V 50/51 51c HBL
IL1 (x2) BF AFD LB
I (x4) 2/5
(IA)
60 67/ 81
37 50 50 21
49 CTS- 51V 50/51 51c HBL
IL2 (x2) BF AFD LB
I (x4) 2/5
(IB)
60 67/ 81
37 50 50 21
49 CTS- 51V 50/51 51c HBL
IL3 (x2) BF AFD LB
I (x4) 2/5
(IC)
46 67/ 81
46 60 60
NPS 50/51N 51c HBL
BC CTS VTS
(x2) (x4) 2/5N
67/
50 37G
37 50/51G
I4 BF (x2)
(x4)
(IG)
67/
50 64 37S
37 50/51S
I5 BF H (x2)
(x4)
(ISEF)
NOTE: The use of some

functions are mutually exclusive
27
VL1
59
(VA)
(x4)
27 32 32S 55 21FL
VL2 47 81
59
(VB) (x2) (x6)
(x4)
74
27 TCS
VL3 59N
59
(VC) (x2)
(x4)
79 25 Optional
V4 27
(VX) 59

Ordering Information – 7SR210 Overcurrent Relay
7 S R 2 1 0 - 1 A - 0 A 0

Overcurrent - Non Directional 1
Relay Type
0
Case, I/O and Fascia 1)

E6 case, 4 CT, 9 Binary Inputs, 8 Binary Outputs, 8 LEDs 2
E8 case, 4 CT, 19 Binary Inputs, 16 Binary Outputs, 16 LEDs 3
E8 case, 4 CT, 19 Binary Inputs, 16 Binary Outputs, 8 LEDs + 6 keys 4
E12 case, 4 CT, 39 Binary Inputs / 16 Binary Outputs, 32 LEDs 5
E12 case, 4 CT, 39 Binary Inputs / 16 Binary Outputs, 16 LEDs, 12 keys 6
Measuring input
1 A or 5 A, 50 Hz or 60 Hz 1
Auxiliary voltage
PSU Rated: 24-250V DC / 100-230V AC. Binary Input threshold 19V DC (Rated: 24-250V DC) M
PSU Rated: 24-250V DC / 100-230V AC. Binary Input threshold 88V DC (Rated: 110-250V DC) N
Spare
A
Standard version - included in all models, USB front port, RS485 rear port 1
Standard version - plus additional rear F/O ST connectors (x2) and IRIG-B 2
Standard version - plus additional rear RS485 and IRIG-B 3
Standard version - plus additional rear Electrical Ethernet RJ45 (x2) 7 7
Standard version - plus additional rear Optical Ethernet Duplex (x2) 8 7
Protocol
IEC 60870-5-103 and Modbus RTU (user selectable) 1
IEC 60870-5-103 and Modbus RTU and DNP 3.0 (user selectable) and IEC61850 7-8 7
Spare
0

Standard version - included in all models C
37 Undercurrent
49 Thermal overload
50G/50N Instantaneous earth fault/SEF
50 AFD Arc Flash Detector
51G/51N Time delayed earth fault/SEF
60CTS-I CT supervision
74TC/CCS Trip & close circuit supervision
81HBL5 Overfluxing Detector
86 Lockout
Cold load pickup
Programmable logic
CB Control
Standard version - plus D
79 Autoreclose
Spare
0
Export Data
HS: 8536900
ECCN: N
AL: N

Ordering Information – 7SR220 Directional Overcurrent Relay
7 S R 2 2 0 - 2 A - 0 A 0

Overcurrent - Directional 2
Relay Type
0
Case, I/O and Fascia 1)

E6 case, 5 CT, 4 VT, 3 Binary Inputs, 6 Binary Outputs, 8 LEDs 2 C
E8 case, 5 CT, 4 VT, 13 Binary Inputs, 14 Binary Outputs, 16 LEDs 3
E8 case, 5 CT, 4 VT, 13 Binary Inputs, 14 Binary Outputs, 8 LEDs + 6 keys 4
E12 case, 5 CT, 4 VT, 33 Binary Inputs / 14 Binary Outputs, 32 LEDs 5
E12 case, 5 CT, 4 VT, 33 Binary Inputs / 14 Binary Outputs, 16 LEDs, 12 keys 6
Measuring input
1 A or 5 A, 40 V to 160 V, 50 Hz or 60 Hz 2
Auxiliary voltage
PSU Rated: 24-250V DC / 100-230V AC. Binary Input threshold 19V DC (Rated: 24-250V DC) M
PSU Rated: 24-250V DC / 100-230V AC. Binary Input threshold 88V DC (Rated: 110-250V DC) N
Spare
A
Standard version - included in all models, USB front port, RS485 rear port 1
Standard version - plus additional rear F/O ST connectors (x2) and IRIG-B 2
Standard version - plus additional rear Electrical Ethernet RJ45 (x2) 7 7
Standard version - plus additional rear Optical Ethernet Duplex (x2) 8 7
Protocol
IEC 60870-5-103 and Modbus RTU (user selectable) 1
IEC 60870-5-103 and Modbus RTU and DNP 3.0 (user selectable) and IEC61850 7-8 7
Spare
0

Standard version - included in all models C
21FL Fault Locator
21LB Load Blinder
27/591) Under/overvoltage
32 Power
32S Sensitive Power
37 Undercurrent
1) Ground Undercurrent
37G
1) SEF Undercurrent
37SEF
1) Negative phase sequence voltage
47
49 Thermal overload
50 AFD Arc Flash Detector
51V Voltage dependent overcurrent
55 Power factor
60CTS CT supervision
60CTS-I CT supervision
60VTS VT supervision
67/50G
Directional instantaneous earth fault/SEF
67/50N
67/51G
Directional tIme delayed earth fault/SEF
67/51N
74TC/CCS Trip & close circuit supervision
81 Under/overfrequency
81HBL5 Overfluxing
86 Lockout
Cold load pickup
Programmable logic
CB Control
Standard version - plus D
79 Autoreclose
Standard version - plus E
79 + 25 Autoreclose + Check Sync
Spare
0
1)
5CT is configured as 3PF + EF/SEF + EF/SEF (user selectable setting).
Export Data
HS: 8536900
ECCN: N
AL: N

1.1.3.2 7SR224 Recloser Controller
86 Lockout
User Programmable Logic Equations, via HMI
Graphical Programmable Logic, via pc application
8 Settings Groups - Password access - 2 levels
Self Monitoring
Optional Functionality
25 Synchronising
Loop Automation by Loss of Voltage
Single /Triple Pole Autoreclose for Three Single Pole Circuit
Breakers
User Interface
Description 20 character x 4 line backlit LCD
The 7SR224 Recloser Controller is one of a range of devices 3 fixed function LEDs
providing comprehensive directional and non-directional 8 or 16 Programmable Tri-colour LEDs
overcurrent protection integrated with associated protection 12 Programmable Function Keys with Tri-colour LEDs
elements and Autoreclose scheme logic. It builds on the
years of in-service experience gained from the Argus family
of products. The Controller provides independent Phase Monitoring Functions
Fault, Earth Fault and Sensitive Earth Fault autoreclose
sequences. Each sequence can be user set to any mix of Fault Data Mode – displays Date & Time, Type of fault and
Instantaneous (fast time current characteristic (TCC)) or currents & voltages for each of last 10 faults.
Delayed TCC protection and independent Reclose (Dead) Favourite (Default) meters – User selectable from:-
times. The Controller also provides a separate Autoreclose Currents - Primary, Secondary, xIn, Earth/SEF, Sequence
sequence for external protection. Components and 2nd Harmonic,
Functions included are: - Voltages – 3 phase Primary, Secondary & xVn, Ph-Ph and Ph-
Control, monitoring, instruments, Voltage - Sag & Swell, n, Sequence Components, Calculated Earth Voltage. Voltage
together with integrated input and output logic, data (Vx) from a 4th voltage input, Primary, Secondary & xVn.
logging & fault report functions. Synchronising phase, magnitude & frequency difference.
Controllers are housed in 4U high, size E10 or E12 cases. Optional 3 phase from the source side providing Primary,
Secondary & xVn, Ph-Ph and Ph-n, Sequence Components,
Function Overview Calculated Earth Voltage.
Frequency
Power – MW, MVar, MVA, Power Factor
Standard Functionality Energy – Export & Import - MWh, MVarh,
Direction – Load Flow Indication
21FL Fault Location
Thermal capacity – %
27/59 Under/Overvoltage
Autoreclose – status and shot number
27Sag/59Swell SARFIx Power Quality Counters
CB Maintenance:
37 Undercurrent
2 Independent Trip Counters,
46BC Broken Conductor / Load Unbalance
Frequent Operations Counter
Lockout handle operations counter
47NPS Negative Phase Sequence Overvoltage
49 Thermal Overload –Pole Segregated
General alarms
Battery Condition monitoring and automatic cyclical test.
51c Cold Load Pickup
Power quality – 27 Sag and 59 Swell (Per pole Counters for
SIARFIx, SMARFIx, STARFIx and Interruption Events,)
Binary Input status indication
Binary Output status indication
Virtual internal status indication
64H High Impedance Restricted Earth Fault (EF)
Communications Meters
67/50 Directional Instantaneous Phase Fault O/C
Miscellaneous Meters, Date, Time, Waveform, Fault, Event &
67/50G Directional Instantaneous Earth Fault O/C
Data Log records-counters.
67/51 Directional Time Delayed Phase Fault O/C
Demand Monitoring
67/51G Directional Time Delayed Earth Fault O/C
67/50SEF Directional Instantaneous Sensitive EF
67/51SEF Directional Time Delayed Sensitive EF
74TCS Trip Circuit Supervision H4/5/6/7 schemes
79 Autoreclose
Description of Functionality Two elements, one DTL and one IDMTL, have user settings
for pickup level and delays. These will operate if the Neutral
voltage exceeds the setting for duration of delay. Neutral
With reference to figure 4: ‘Function Diagram’.
overvoltage can be used to detect earth faults in high
impedance earthed or isolated systems.
25 Synchronising
Synchronising is used with three pole Manual Closing and 67/50 Phase Fault Elements
Autoreclose operations to ensure that voltages are within
Provide Directional Instantaneous or Definite Time (DTL)
safe limits before allowing the close operation to proceed.
Overcurrent protection, with independent settings for pickup
The 7SR224 provides settings for voltages, phase and
current and time-delay.
frequency difference for Check Synchronising as well as
Four elements are provided.
System Synchronising and Close on Zero phase difference for
Elements can be Inrush-inhibited
automatic selection following detection of a split system.
Automatic Synchronising bypass is also available to allow
67/51 Phase Fault Elements
closure to energise a dead feeder or busbar.
Provide Directional - Inverse Definite Time Overcurrent
27/59 Under/over Voltage protection, TCC/DTL with independent settings for pickup
current, TCC and minimum/follower time-delay.
4 elements which can be set independently as Under or
overvoltage. Each element has settings for pickup level and
User can select the TCC from standard IEC/ANSI or Legacy
Definite Time Lag (DTL) delays, operates if voltage ‘exceeds’
Characteristics e.g. 101 (A) etc. Reset TCC can be user set to
setting for duration of delay, Typically applied in load
either DTL or shaped, to integrate grading with
shedding schemes.
electromechanical or other protection devices.
37 Undercurrent
Earth Fault/Sensitive Earth Fault
2 element with settings for pickup level and Definite Time
The Earth Fault current is measured directly via a dedicated
Lag (DTL) delays. Each operates if current falls below its
current analogue input. This input is used for both Earth
setting for duration of its delay.
Fault and Sensitive Earth Fault elements.
46BC Broken Conductor
67/50G Earth Fault
Each element has settings for pickup level and DTL delay.
With the circuit breaker closed, if the NPS / PPS current ratio
earth fault protection, with independent settings for pickup
is above setting this could be due to a broken conductor.
Elements can be Inrush-inhibited.
Two elements, one DTL and one IDMT, with user settings for
pickup levels and delays. NPS Current elements can be used 67/51G Earth Fault
to detect unbalances on the system. The negative sequence
Provide Directional - Inverse Definite Time earth fault
phase component of current is derived from the three phase
protection, TCC/DTL with independent settings for pickup
currents. It is a measure of the quantity of unbalanced
current, TCC and minimum/follower time-delay.
current on the system.
User can select the TCC from standard IEC/ANSI or Legacy
47NPS Negative Phase Sequence OverVoltage
Characteristics e.g. 101 (A) etc. Reset TCC can be user set to
Two DTL elements with independent user settings for NPS either DTL or shaped, to integrate grading with
overvoltage pickup level and delays. NPS Voltage elements electromechanical or other protection devices.
can be used to detect unbalances on the system. The
negative sequence phase component of voltage is derived 67/50SEF Sensitive Earth Fault
from the three phase voltages. It is a measure of the
quantity of unbalanced voltage on the system.
49 Thermal Overload
The thermal algorithm calculates the thermal state of each Elements can be Inrush-inhibited
pole from the measured currents and can be applied to lines,
cables and transformers; operates if the user set thermal 67/51SEF Sensitive Earth Fault
overload is exceeded. Capacity Alarm operates if a user set
percentage of overload is reached.
The circuit breaker fail function may be triggered from an Elements can be Inrush-inhibited
internal trip signal or from a binary input. All measured User can select the TCC from standard IEC/ANSI or Legacy
currents can be monitored following a trip signal and an Characteristics e.g. 101 (A) etc. Reset TCC can be user set to
output is issued if any current is still detected after a either DTL or shaped, to integrate grading with
specified time interval. This can be used to re-trip the CB or electromechanical or other protection devices.
to back-trip an upstream CB. A second back-trip time delay is
provided to enable another stage to be utilized if required. 67 Directional Control
Phase Fault, Earth Fault and Sensitive Earth Fault elements
can be directionalised. Each element can be user set to
Forward, Reverse, or Non-directional.
Where multiple elements are provided two could be set for 50 High Set elements, provides the user with full flexibility.
Forward and two for Reverse, thus providing Bi-Directional It enables the optimisation of the protection characteristics,
Tri-state protection is a single device. which will be applied at each point in the protection
Phase Fault elements are polarised from the calculated sequence. Limits can be set by the user on the number of
quadrature voltage i.e. Ia~Vbc, Ib~Vca & Ic~Vab. Delayed Trips to Lockout or High set trips to Lockout.
Earth Fault/SEF elements are polarized from internally The External Protection Auto Reclose sequence allows
calculated Zero sequence Voltage, i.e. Io~Vo. AutoReclose to be provided for a separate high speed
Protection device with options for Blocking External Trips to
51c Cold Load allow Overcurrent grading to take place.
When a circuit breaker is closed onto a ‘cold’ load, i.e. one
that has not been powered for a prolonged period, this can Single/Triple Auto Reclose
impose a higher than normal load-current demand on the Additional optional functionality is available to provide
system which could exceed ‘Normal settings’. These tripping, auto reclose and control of three single pole
conditions can exist for an extended period and must not be Reclosers located together and controlled by a single 7SR224
interpreted as a fault. To allow optimum setting levels to be device. The facility to operate each of the three phases
applied for normal operation, Cold Load causes the 67/51 independently for systems where single phase loads are
elements to change to 67/51c settings i.e. Setting/TCC/Time connected is common in some countries. The 7SR224
Multiplier /Follower delay times, for a limited period. Cold provides flexible schemes which are used to provide single
Load resets and returns to ‘Normal settings’ when either the and three pole trip and reclose operations depending on the
circuit breaker has been closed for a User set period, or if the fault type detected.
current has fallen to below a set level for a set time and it is
safe to return. Dead/Live indication
Detection of live voltage is provided for each phase on both
21FL Fault Locator sides of the Recloser. This can be set to provide indication
The relay provides a basic single-end type fault locator which and alarms.
is able to estimate the fault position using analogue
information measured by the relay at one end of the Loss of Voltage LOV Automation
protected circuit during the short duration of the fault. Additional optional functionality is available to provide
control of Normally Open Points (NOP) and other Reclosers
51V Voltage Controlled OverCurrent in the distribution network to provide an automation
Element has settings for UnderVoltage pickup level and sequence of load restoration following a persistent fault. The
operates if voltage falls below setting. On Pick-up this sequence is started by the loss of voltage detection, for an
element applies the set 51v Multiplier to the pickup setting extended period of time, following a complete but
of the 67/51 phase fault elements. unsuccessful auto reclose sequence, which has caused
Lockout of a Recloser at any point in the network.
The CT Supervision considers the presence of negative phase 81 Under/Over Frequency
sequence current, without an equivalent level of negative Each of the 4 elements has settings for pickup level, drop-off
phase sequence voltage, for a user set time as a CT failure. level and Definite Time Lag (DTL) delays. This function
Element has user operate and delay settings. operates if frequency ‘exceeds’ setting for duration of delay.
Typically applied in load shedding schemes.
The VT Supervision uses a combination of negative phase 81HBL2 Second Harmonic Block
sequence voltage and negative phase sequence current to Where second harmonic current is detected i.e. during
detect a VT fuse failure. This condition may be alarmed or transformer energisation the user selected elements can be
used to inhibit voltage dependent functions. Element has blocked
27/59 Voltage Sag/Swell
64H Restricted Earth Fault - scheme Power System Utilities use SARFI indices of Voltage Sag and
The measured earth fault input may be used in a 64H high- Swell, which express the magnitude and duration of Sag and
impedance, restricted earth fault scheme. The required Swell variations occurring on their systems. These indices
external series stabilising resistor and shunt non-linear are based on the ‘ride-through’ capability of the customer’s
Varistor can be supplied. plant and are usually expressed in terms of the number of a
specific class (index) of r.m.s. variation per customer per
74TC Trip Circuit Supervision specified period.
Up to three trip circuits can be monitored using binary inputs These elements provide the raw data in the form of counters
connected in H4/H5/H6 or H7 schemes. Trip circuit failure that display the total count of each type of index value. Sags
raises an HMI alarm and output(s). have a greater impact on plant performance than Swells.
Disturbances are classified according to their magnitude and
79 Auto Reclose duration, the limits can be User set for SIARFI, SMARFI &
The controller provides independent Phase Fault, Earth Fault STARFI. Breaks above 60s duration are Interruptions.
and Sensitive Earth Fault sequences. They can be set for up Counters for each are provided per pole.
to 4 Shots i.e. 5 Trips + 4 Reclose attempts to Lockout. These
sequences can be user set to any configuration of Programmable User Logic
Instantaneous (fast TCC) or Delayed TCC protection, with Each Protection element output can be used for Alarm &
independent Reclose (Dead) times. Indication and/or tripping.
As the user defines which elements are Instantaneous, the User can freely map any protection element output to any
combination of TCC1 plus 50 High set elements & TCC2 plus Binary Output(s); and any Binary Input(s) to any Function

Inhibit(s), Binary Output, LED’s and/or internal Virtual signal
points. User can also enter up to 16 Equations via the HMI or Technical Data
from a pc, defining User scheme-logic using standard
Boolean Logic e.g. ( )/AND/OR/NOT/XOR, to combine BI, other
Equations, Function Keys, LEDs, BO, and internal Virtual For full technical data refer to the Performance Specification
signal points. Each equation has PU/DO Time Delays and a Section of the Technical Manual.
Target Counter. Each Equation appears in the Output matrix
and can be freely mapped to LEDs/BO.
In addition, the Reydisp Manager pc application provides
Inputs and Outputs
graphical programming of user logic within the device.
Current Inputs
Quantity 3 x Phase & 1 x Earth or
Four circuit breaker trip counters are provided:- Sensitive Earth
Total Trip Count increments upon each trip command issued Rated Current In 1/5 A
to give data for maintenance. Measuring Range 80 x In
Delta Trip Count is an additional counter which can be reset
Instrumentation ≥ 0.1xIn ±1% In
independently of the Total Trip Counter and counts the
Frequency 50/60 Hz
number of operations since the last reset.
Thermal Withstand:
Frequent Operations Counter monitors the number of trip
Continuous 3.0 x In
operations in a rolling window period of one hour and
10 Minutes 3.5 x In
operates to stop cyclical sequences if the set number is
5 Minutes 4.0 x In
exceeded.
3 Minutes 5.0 x In
An I2t summation Counter provides a means monitoring
2 Minutes 6.0 x In
contact wear indicating the total energy interrupted by the
3 Seconds 57.7 A (1 A) 202 A (5 A)
circuit breaker contacts.
2 Seconds 70.7 A (1 A) 247 A (5 A)
1 Second 100 A (1 A) 350 A (5 A)
when reached, can be mapped to raise Alarms/ Binary
1 Cycle 700 A (1 A) 2500 A (5 A)
Outputs.
Burden @ In 0.1 VA (1 A phase and Earth
Function LED’s element)
0.3 VA (5 A phase and earth
Eight (E10 case) or sixteen (E12) user programmable tri-
element)
colour LED’s are provided eliminating the need for expensive
panel mounted pilot lights and associated wiring. Each LED
Voltage Inputs
can be user set to red, green or yellow allowing for clear
indication of the associated function’s state. A slip-in label Quantity 4 or 6
pocket along-side enables the user to insert his own Nominal Voltage 40…160 V RMS a.c. Range
notation. A printer compatible template is available. Instrumentation ≥ 0.8xVn ±1 % Vn
Operating Range 4x VT models:
Function Keys 0-270 V RMS
Twelve user programmable function keys are available for 6x VT models:
implementing User logic and scheme control functionality,
0-270 V RMS V1,V2,V3.
eliminating the need for expensive panel mounted control
switches and associated wiring. Each function key has an 0-132 V RMS for V4,V5,V6
associated user programmable tri-color LED (red, green, Thermal Withstand:
yellow) allowing for clear indication of the associated Continuous 300 V RMS
function’s state. A slip-in label pocket along-side enables the 1 Second
user to insert his own notation for the Function Key LED Burden @ 110V  0.1 VA
Identification.
Each Function Key can be mapped directly to any of the Binary Inputs
built-in Controller/Circuit Breaker Command functions or to Operating Voltage 19 V dc: Range 17 to 290 V dc
the User Logic equations. 88 V: Range 74 to 290 V dc
Maximum dc current for 1.5 mA
operation
Binary Outputs
Hand Reset
Contact Operate / Release 7 ms / 3 ms
Time.
Making Capacity:
Carry continuously 5 A ac or dc
Make and carry 20 A ac or dc for 0.5 s
(L/R  40 ms and V  300 V) 30 A ac or dc for 0.2 s
Breaking Capacity
(  5 A and  300 V):
Fig1. Tri-colour LED’s and function keys
DC Resistive 75 W High Frequency Disturbance
DC Inductive 30 W at L/R  40 ms IEC 60255-22-1 Class III
50 W at L/R  10 ms Type Level Variation
Common 2.5 kV  10 %
Auxiliary supply (longitudinal)
Rated DC Voltage 24-250V DC Series (transverse) 1.0 kV  10 %
Operating Range 19.2 to 275V mode
Allowable superimposed 12% of DC voltage RS485 standard rear 1.0 kV No data loss
ac component port
Rated AC Voltage 100-230 VAC 50/60Hz Electrostatic Discharge

Range 80 to 253 V rms AC IEC 60255-22-2 Class IV
50/60Hz ±5%
Power Consumption: Quiescent 24V: 8W
State (DC) 110V: 7W Contact discharge 8.0 kV 5%
250V: 7W
Fast Transient Immunity
Maximum 24V: 12W IEC 60255-22- 4 Class A (2002)
Load (DC) 110V: 11W Type Level Variation
250V: 11W 5/50 ns 2.5 kHz 4 kV  10 %
Quiescent 100V: 16VA repetitive
State(AC) 230V: 22VA RS485 standard rear 2 kV No data loss
port
Maximum 100V: 23VA
Load (AC) 230V: 32VA Surge Immunity
Allowable breaks/dips in DC 50ms IEC 60255-22-5; IEC 61000-4-5
supply (collapse to zero) AC 2.5/3 cycles Type Level Variation
@50/60Hz Analog Inputs. 4.0 kV  10 %
Line to Earth
Case, Aux Power & I/O. 2.0 kV  10 %
Mechanical Tests Line to Earth
RS485 Comms port 1.0 kV No Data Loss
Vibration (Sinusoidal) Line to Earth
IEC 60255-21-1 Class I Analog Inputs. 1.0 kV  10 %
Line to Line
Case, Aux Power & I/O. 1.0 kV*  10 %
Vibration response 0.5 gn 5% Line to Line
Vibration endurance 1.0 gn 5% *Note 45ms DTL pick up delay applied to binary inputs
Shock and Bump Conducted Radio Frequency Interference Immunity

IEC 60255-21-2 Class I IEC 60255-22-6
Type Level Variation Type Level Variation
Shock response 5 gn, 11 ms 5% 0.15 to 80 MHz 10 V 5%
Bump test 10 gn, 16 ms 5% Radiated Radio Frequency Emissions
IEC 60255-25
Seismic Type Limits at 10 m, Open Area test
IEC 60255-21-3 Class I site, Quasi-peak
Type Level Variation 30 to 230 MHz 40 dB(V/m)
Seismic response 1 gn 5% 230 to 10000 MHz 47 dB(V/m)
Mechanical Classification Conducted Radio Frequency Emissions

Durability >106 operations IEC 60255-25
Type Limits
Quasi-peak Average
Electrical Tests 0.15 to 0.5 MHz 79 dB(V) 66 dB(V)
0.5 to 30 MHz 73 dB(V) 60 dB(V)
Insulation
IEC 60255-5 Radiated Immunity
Type Level
and earth 80 MHz to 1000 10 V/m 5%
MHz
Between independent 2.0 kV AC RMS for 1 min
circuits
contacts

0 to 2.0xVs 63 ms ±10 ms
Climatic Tests 1.1 to 0.5xVs 58 ms ±10 ms
Operate time Tbasic +td , ±1 % or ±10 ms
following delay.
Temperature
IEC 60068-2-1/2
VT Supervision
Operating Range -10 C to +55 C Voltage Guard
37 Undercurrent
Humidity Number of Elements 2
IEC 60068-2-78
Operational test 56 days at 40 C and 93 % Operate Level 100% Is, ±5% or ±1%xIn
relative humidity Delay Setting td 0.00,0.01…20,20.5…100,101…
1000,1010…10000,10100…144
IP Ratings 00s
IEC 60529 Basic Operate Time:
Type Level 1.1 to 0.5 x Is 35 ms ±10 ms
Installed with cover IP 51 from front Operate time following Tbasic +td , ±1% or ±10 ms
delay.
Installed with cover IP 20 from front
removed Inhibited by Binary or Virtual Input

DT Setting Range Is 0.05,0.10…5.0 x In
DT Operate Level 100 % Is, ±5 % or ±1 %xIn
Performance DT Delay Setting td 0.00,0.01…20,20.5…100,101…
1000,1010…10000,10100…144
00 s
27/59 Under/Over Voltage DT Basic Operate Time:
Number of Elements 4 Under or Over 0 to 2 x Is 40 ms ±10 ms
Operate Any phase or All phases 0 to 5 x Is 30 ms ±10 ms
Voltage Guard 1,1.5…200 V DT Operate time Tbasic +td , ±1% or ±10ms
Setting Range Vs 5,5.5…200 V following delay.
Hysteresis Setting 0.0.1…80 % IT Char Setting IEC NI,VI,EI,LTI ANSI MI,VI,EI &
Vs Operate Level 100 % Vs, ±1 % or ±0.25 V DTL
Reset Level: IT Setting Range 0.05..2.5
Undervoltage =(100%+hyst)xVop, ±1% or 0.25 V Tm Time Multiplier 0.025,0.03...1.6,1.7… 5,6… 100
Overvoltage =(100%-hyst)xVop, ±1% or 0.25 V Char Operate Level 105 % Is, ±4 % or ±1 %In
Delay Setting td 0.00,0.01…20,20.5…100,101…10 Overshoot Time < 40 ms
00,1010…10000,10100…14400 s Inhibited by Binary or Virtual Input
Basic Operate Time :
0 to 1.1xVs 73 ms ±10 ms 47 Negative Phase Sequence
0 to 2.0xVs 63 ms ±10 ms Number of Elements 2
1.1 to 0.5xVs 58 ms ±10 ms Setting Range Vs 1,1.5…90 V
Operate time Tbasic +td , ±1% or ±10ms Hysteresis Setting 0,0.1…80 %
following delay. Operate Level 100 % Vs, ±2 % or ±0.5 V
Inhibited by Binary or Virtual Input Delay Setting td 0.00,0.01…20,20.5…100,101…
VT Supervision 1000,1010…10000,10100…144
Voltage Guard 00 s
Basic Operate Time
Vx 27/59 Under/Over Voltage 0V to 1.5xVs 80 ms ±20 ms
Number of Elements 1 Under or Over for 4xVT variants 0V to 10xVs 55 ms ±20 ms
Operate Any phase or All phases Operate time following Tbasic +td , ±2 % or ±20 ms
Voltage Guard 1,1.5…200 V for 4xVT variants delay.
1,1.5…120 V for 6xVT variants Overshoot Time < 40 ms
Setting Range Vs 5,5.5…200 V for 4xVT variants Inhibited by Binary or Virtual Input
5,5.5…120 V for 6xVT variants
Hysteresis Setting 0.0.1…80% 49 Thermal Overload
Vs Operate Level 100 % Vs, ±1 % or ±0.25 V Operate levels Operate and Alarm
Reset Level: Setting Range Is 0.10,0.11…3.0 x In
Undervoltage =(100 %+hyst)xVop, ±1 % or 0.25 V Operate Level 100% Is, ±5% or ±1%xIn
Overvoltage =(100 %-hyst)xVop, ±1 % or 0.25 V Time Constant Setting 1,1.5…1000min
Delay Setting td 0.00,0.01…20,20.5…100,101…10 Operate time 
 I 2  I p2 

t    In 2
00,1010…10000,10100…14400 s 
 I  k  I B 2 
Basic Operate Time : ±5 % absolute or ±100 ms where
0 to 1.1xVs 73 ms ±10 ms Ip = prior current
(Is 0.3xIn to 3x In) Timer 2 20…60000ms
Alarm Level Disabled, 50,51…100 % Operate Level 100% Is, ±5% or ±1%xIn
Inhibited by Binary or Virtual Input Basic Operate time < 20ms
Operate time following Tdelay ±1% or ±10ms
50 (67) Instantaneous & DTL OC&EF (Directional) delay
Operation Non directional, Forward or Triggered by Any function mapped as trip
reverse contact.
Elements Phase and Measured Earth Inhibited by Binary/Virtual Input
Number of Elements 4 x OC Timer By pass Yes, 50BF CB Faulty Input
4 x Measured EF ‘G’ where fitted
4 x SEF where fitted 59N Neutral Voltage Displacement
Setting Range Is 0.05,0.06…50 x In Number of Elements 1xDT & 1xIT
SEF 0.005…5 x In DT Setting Range Is 1…100V
Time Delay 0.00…14400s DT Operate Level 100% Vs, ±5% or ±1%xVn
Operate Level Iop 100% Is, ±5% or ±1%xIn DT Delay Setting td 0 …14400s
Reset Level  95 % Iop DT Basic Operate Time 76ms ±20ms
Operate time: 0V to 1.5xVs
50 0 to 2xIs – 35ms, ±10ms, DT Operate time Tbasic +td , ±1% or ±20ms
0 to 5xIs – 25ms, ±10ms following delay.
Operate time following Tbasic +td , ±1% or ±10ms IT Setting Range 1…100V
delay TM Time 0.1…140
Inhibited by Binary or Virtual Input Multiplier(IDMT)
Inrush detector Delay (DTL) 0…20s
VT Supervision Reset 0 … 60s, ANSI decaying
51(67) Time Delayed OC&EF (Directional) Inhibited by Binary or Virtual Input
Elements Phase, Measured Earth & SEF
Number of Elements 4 x OC 60 Supervision
4 x Measured EF ‘G’ CT Vnps & Inps
4 x SEF VT nps/zps
Operation Non directional, Forward or
reverse 64H Restricted Earth Fault
Characteristic IEC NI,VI,EI,LTI ANSI MI,VI,EI &
Setting Range 0.005…0.95xIn
DTL & Legacy (101 etc.)
SEF 0.005…1 x In
Basic Operate Time 0 to 2 xIs 45ms ±10ms
Time Multiplier 0.025,0.03...1.6,1.7… 5,6… 100
0 to 5 xIs 35ms ±10ms
Time Delay 0,0.01… 20s
Reset Level  95 % Iop
Minimum Operate time top  
K
 Tm
IEC  IsI   1
 A 
top   P  B  Tm
ANSI   Is   1 
I
Inrush detector
VT Supervision

Setting Range 5,5.5…200V
Operate Level 100% Vs, ±5% or ±1%xVn
Multiplier 0.25.0.3…1 x Is(51)
Inhibited by VT Supervision

Operation Current check - Phase and
Measured Earth with
independent settings
Mechanical Trip
CB Faulty Monitor
2 Stage Time Delays Timer 1 20…60000ms

Rear View: Arrangement of terminals and modules
2
+ve 7SR224n 1 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
-ve BI 4 BO 7
4 3
+ve
6 5
8
-ve BI 5 BO 8
7
E D C B A Data
(Optional) (Optional) Comms
+ve
10 9
I/O I/O I/O PSU Analogue (Optional)
BI 6 BO 9
11
+ve
12 13
BI 7 BO 10 27 28 27 28 27 28 27 28 27 28
15
+ve
14 BO 11 17
BI 8 Optional Additional I/O for (23 Inputs 22 Outputs) and (33 Inputs 30 Outputs) Models
BO 12 19
2
+ve
2
+ve
+ve BI 14 1
BI 24 1
16 21 4
-ve
BO 15 3
4
-ve
BO 23 3
+ve +ve
BI 9
6 6
-ve BI 15 5
BI 25 5
18 BO 13 23 8
-ve
BO 16 7
8
-ve
BO 24 7
+ve +ve
10 10
+ve BI 16 9
BI 26 9
20 BO 14 25 BO 17 11
BO 25 11
+ve
12 +ve
BI 10
12
BI 17 13
BI 27 13
27 BO 18 15
BO 26 15
+ve +ve
14 14
BI 18 BO 19 17
BI 28 BO 27 17
+ve
22 16
+ve 19
16
+ve 19
BI 11 18
-ve BI 19 BO 20 21
18
-ve BI 29 BO 28 21
20
+ve BO 21 23
20
+ve BO 29 23
BI 20 25
BI 30 25
+ve BO 22 BO 30
24 22
+ve 27
22
+ ve 27
BI 12 BI 21 BI 31
+ve +ve
24 24
BI 22 BI 32
+ve
26 26
+ve
26
+ve
BI 33
BI 23
BI 13
C D E
-ve -ve
28 28
-ve
28
+ve
1 Optional Additional I/O for (43 Inputs 22 Outputs) Models
22 +ve +ve
BO 1 2 +ve 1
2
-ve VAUX 4
-ve BI 14
BO 15
1
4
-ve BI 24 BI 34 -ve
3
24 6
+ve 3
6
+ve +ve
5
3 BI 15 5 BI 25 BI 35
8
-ve
BO 16 7
8
-ve -ve
7
+ve +ve +ve
10 9
28 GND. 5 BI 16 9
10
BI 26 BI 36
BO 17 11
12 +ve ve
+ +ve
11
BO 2 7 BI 17
BO 18
13
12
BI 27 BI 37
15
14 +ve +ve +ve
13
+ve BI 18 BO 19 17
14
BI 28 BI 38
2 9
BI 1 +ve 19
16 +ve +ve
15
-ve BI 19 BO 20 21
16
BI 29 BI 39
4 11 18
-ve
18
-ve -ve
17
20
+ve BO 21 23
+ve +ve
19
20
+ve BO 3 BI 20 25 BI 30 BI 40
6 13 BO 22 27
-ve BI 2 22
+ve
BI 21 22
+ve
BI 31 BI 41
+ve
21
8 15
+ve +ve +ve
24 23
+ve BI 22
24
BI 32 BI 42
10 17
BI 3 BO 4 26
+ve
BI 23 26
+ve
BI 33 BI 43
+ve
25
-ve -ve
D -ve
E -ve
12 19 28 28 27
21
14 A BO 5 Optional Additional I/O for (33 Inputs 14 Outputs) Models
23
RS485
+ve +ve
16 Screen 2
BI 14
1
4
-ve BI 24 -ve
3
27
18 B BO 6 6
+ve
-ve BI 15 BI 25
+ve
-ve
5
8 7
25 +ve +ve
20 Term. 10
BI 16 BI 26
9
B 26 12
+ve
BI 17 BI 27
+ve
11
+ve +ve
14 13
1A BI 18 BI 28
1 +ve +ve
16 15
18
-ve BI 19 BI 29 -ve
17 Alternative Voltage Input Connections
2 IL1 +ve +ve
5A
20
BI 20 BI 30
19
for 6VT Models.
3 (IA) +ve +ve Note re-allocation of Terminals
22 21
BI 21 BI 31
4 17
VL1
+ve +ve
24 23
BI 22 BI 32
5
1A 26
+ve
BI 23 BI 33 +ve
25 (VA) 18
-ve -ve
28
D 27
6 IL2 VL2 19
7
5A (IB) 21 (VB) 20
VL1
8 (VA) 22 21
NOTES VL3
1A (VC) 22
9
VL2 23 BI = Binary Input
10 V4 23
IL3 (VB) 24 BO = Binary Output
11
5A (IC) (VX) 24
Shows contacts internal
12 V5 25
VL3 25 to relay case assembly.
1A (VC) 26 Contacts close when the (VY) 26
13
relay chassis is
V6 27
withdrawn from case
14
5A
I4
V4 27 A (VZ) 28
15 (IG/ISEF)
(VX) 28
16 A

7SR224 Interface Diagram
7SR224
+ve
2 1
-ve BI 4 BO 7 BO - Trip
4 3 Trip Coil
+ve
6 5 BO - Close
BI 5 BO 8 Close Coil
-ve
8 7
+ve
10 9
BI - CB Open BI 6 BO 9 Actuator
Aux. Sw. ‘b’
11
BI - CB Closed +ve
Aux. Sw. ‘a’ 12 13
BI 7 BO 10
BI - CB Lockout 15
CB Lockout
+ve
14 BO 11 17
BI 8
BO 12 19
+ve
16 21
Actuator -ve BI 9
18 BO 13 23
+ve
BI - Close
20 BO 14 25
PB - Close BI 10
27
BI - Trip +ve
PB - Trip 22
BI 11
Sw. – BI - Hot Line Working
Hot Line Working +ve
24
BI 12
+ve
26
BI 13
Panel 28
-ve C
1
+ve
22
VAUX BO 1
-ve
24
3
28 GND. 5
Switch BO 2 7
Unit +ve
2 9
Driver BI - Aux ac/Charger OK
BI 1
-ve
& 4 11 BO - Battery
Monitoring BI - Capacitor OK
+ve BO 3 Start Test
Switch
6 13
-ve BI 2 Unit
BI - Reclose Block 8 15 BO - Battery
Apply Test
Driver
+ve &
10 17
-ve BI 3 BO 4 Monitoring
12 19 BO - Capacitor
Start Test
21
14 A BO 5
23
RS485
16 Screen
27
18 B BO 6
25
20 Term.
B 26
1A
1
2 IL1
5A (IA)
3
1A
5
CURRENT INPUTS
6 IL2 VL1 21
5A (IB) (VA)
7 22
8
VOLTAGE INPUTS
1A VL2 23
9
(VB) 24
10 IL3
5A (IC)
11
VL3 25
12
(VC) 26
1A
13
14 I4
V4 27
5A (IG)
15
(VX) 28
16 A
Fig3. 7SR224 Interface Diagram

Function Diagram for 7SR224 Recloser Controller
7SR224
67/ 67/ 81
37 50
49 51V 50 51 HBL
IL1 (x2) BF
(x4) (x4) 2
(IA)
67/ 67/ 81
37 50
49 51V 50 51 HBL
IL2 (x2) BF
(x4) (x4) 2
(IB)
67/ 67/ 81
37 50
49 51V 50 51 HBL
IL3 (x2) BF
(x4) (x4) 2
(IC)
46
46 60 60
NPS
BC CTS VTS
(x2)
67/ 67/ 67/ 67/

64
50G 51G 50S 51S
I4 H
(x4) (x4) (x4) (x4)
(IG/ISEF)

functions are mutually exclusive
Note:
Example shows
27 Voltage Config =
VL1 27S
59 Van, Vbn, Vcn
(VA) 59S
(x4)
27
VL2 27S 47 81 * 59N can be configured
59
(VB) 59S (x2) (x4) as derived or Vx
(x4)
27 74
VL3 27S 59N Batt
59 TCS
(VC) 59S (x2)* Test
(x4) (x3)
27
V4 Cap.
59 79 25
(VX) Test
(x4)
27
V5
59
(VY)
(x4) V5 & V6 voltage inputs are optional.
1x 27/59 element is provided in 4xVT variants.
27
V6
59
(VZ)
(x4)

Ordering Information – 7SR224 Argus Recloser Controller
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
ORDER-No.: 7 S R 2 2 4 - - 0 0
| | | | | | | | | | | |
Protection Product Family 5 | | | | | | | | | | |
Overcurrent - Directional 2 | | | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | | | |
Relay Type 6 | | | | | | | | | |
Recloser 4 | | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | | |
Case, I/O and Fascia 1) 7 | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | C | |
E10 case, 13 Binary Inputs / 14 Binary Outputs, 8 LEDs + 12 keys 2
3 | | | | | D A |
| | | | C | |
E10 case, 23 Binary Inputs / 22 Binary Outputs, 8 LEDs + 12 keys 3 1-4 2-3
3 | | | D A |
| | | | | | C | |
3 | | | | | D A |
| | | | | | C | |
| | | | | | E A |
| | | | C | |
| | | | E A |
| | | | C | |
| | | | E A |
| | | | | | | | |
Measuring Input 8 | | | | | | | |
4xCT 1/5 A, 4xVT 63.5/110V 2 | | | | | C/E | |
4xCT 1/5 A, 6xVT 63.5/110V 3 | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
Auxiliary Nominal Voltage 9 | | | | | | |
PSU Rated: 24-250V DC / 100-230V AC. Binary Input threshold 19V DC (Rated: 24-250V DC) M | | | | | | |
PSU Rated: 24-250V DC / 100-230V AC. Binary Input threshold 88V DC (Rated: 110-250V DC) N | | | | | | |
| | | | | | |
Region Specific Functions 10 | | | | | |
Region World, 50/60Hz, language English, (language changeable) Reyrolle fascia A | | | | | |
Region World, 50/60Hz, language English, (language changeable) Siemens fascia B | | | | | |
Region USA, 60/50Hz, language English-US (ANSI), (language changeable), Siemens fascia C | | | | | |
| | | | | |
Communication Interface 11 | | | | |
Standard version - included in all models, USB front port, RS485 rear port 1 2-3 | | | |
Standard version - plus additional rear F/O ST connectors (x2) and IRIG-B 2 2-3 | | | |
Standard version - plus additional rear RS485 and IRIG-B 3 2-3 | | | |
Standard version - plus additional rear RS232 and IRIG-B 4 2-3 | | | |
Standard version - plus additional rear Electrical Ethernet RJ45 (x2) 7 8 | | | |
Standard version - plus additional rear Optical Ethernet Duplex (x2) 8 8 | | | |
| | | | |
Protocol 12 | | | |
IEC 60870-5-103 and Modbus RTU and DNP 3.0 (user selectable setting) 1-4 2 | | | |
IEC 60870-5-103 and IEC60870-5-101 and Modbus RTU (user selectable setting) 1-4 3 | | | |
IEC 60870-5-103 and IEC60870-5-101 and Modbus RTU and DNP 3.0 (user selectable setting) and IEC61850 7-8 8 | | | |
| | | |
Spare 13 | | |
0 | | |
(continued on following page)

Ordering Information – 7SR224 Argus Recloser Controller
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
ORDER-No.: 7 S R 2 2 4 - - 0 0
| | |
Protection Function Packages 14 | |
Standard version - included in all models C | |
21FL Fault Locator | |
27/59 Under/overvoltage | |
27/59 Under/overvoltage, Sag/swell | |
37 Undercurrent | |
46BC Broken conductor/load unbalance | |
46NPS Negative phase sequence overcurrent | |
47NPS Negative phase sequence overvoltage | |
49 Thermal overload | |
50BF Circuit breaker fail | |
51V Voltage dependent overcurrent | |
59N Neutral voltage displacement | |
60CTS CT supervision | |
60VTS VT supervision | |
67/50 Directional instantaneous phase fault overcurrent | |
67/50G Directional instantaneous earth fault | |
67/51 Directional time delayed phase fault overcurrent | |
67/51G Directional time delayed earth fault | |
67/50HIZ Directional instantaneous sensitive earth fault | |
67/51HIZ Directional time delayed sensitive earth fault | |
74TC Trip circuit supervision | |
74BF Circuit breaker close fail | |
79 Autoreclose | |
81 Under/overfrequency | |
81HBL2 Inrush restraint | |
86 Lockout | |
Battery and capacitor test | |
Cold load pickup | |
Programmable logic | |
Standard version - plus 2-4 3 D A |
27/59 Under/overvoltage | |
60VTS VT supervision | |
Loop automation by loss of voltage | |
Standard version - plus 6-8 E A |
Single/triple pole autoreclose | |
| |
Additional Functionality 15 |
25 Synchronising, synchronising check D |
|
Settings File 16
Standard settings and standard labels for Siemens Recloser 0

1.1.3.3 7SR23 High Impedance Circulating Current Relay
Standard Monitoring Functionality
Primary differential current phases and earth
Secondary differential current phases and earth
Time and date
Starters
Fault records
Event records
Waveform records
Fig1. 7SR23 DAD fascia Description of Functionality
Description
3 87/ 87/
CT50
1 87
REF
50-1 50-2
2
The 7SR23 DAD provides comprehensive, configurable high
impedance protections with enhanced functionality and 1 87
REF
50G
74
TCS
7SR23
performance. Relay functionality is accessed via a familiar 1
(x2)
x12 DAD
user friendly interface.
Housed in 4U high, size E6 or E8 cases, these relays provide
protection, control, monitoring, instrumentation and Fig2. 7SR DAD Function Diagram
metering with integrated input and output logic, data
logging & fault reports. Communication access to relay Figure 2 illustrates the functionality available within the
functionality is via a front USB port for local PC connection 7SR23. The relay can be configured to provide the following
or rear electrical RS485 port for remote connection. modes of operation:
Additional rear port options are available.
 3 Pole Diff + REF
 3 Pole Diff + EF
Function Overview  REF1 + REF2
87/50 Differential Protection - scheme

Protection
Two sets of differential protection are provided, 87/50-1 and
50G Instantaneous/DTL Earth Fault 87/50-2.
87REF High Impedance REF Current inputs can be connected to provide overall phase
87/50 Phase Segregated Differential Protection segregated high impedance differential protection.
External series stabilising resistors and non-linear, voltage
Supervision limiting, shunt resistors are required for each phase.
CT50 CT Supervision To facilitate ordering, installation and commissioning these
74TCS Trip Circuit Supervision external components can be provided in a separate optional
‘High Impedance Component Box’. See separate publication.
Control Output contacts of the relay are configured to trip the
86 Lockout connected CBs and to short circuit the series stabilising
resistors thereby ensuring that thermal ratings of the
Features components are not exceeded.
User Programmable Logic Equations, via HMI CT50 CT Supervision
Graphical Programmable Logic, via PC application The CT Supervision feature measures the unbalance current
Self Monitoring in the CT circuits. Any unbalance current may indicate an
open circuit in the CT secondary connections.
The phase segregated elements have user selectable operate
User Interface current and time delay settings. This allows the faulted
phase(s) to be short circuited and/or alarmed.
3 fixed function LEDs
8 or 16 Programmable Tri-colour LEDs (Option)
50G Earth Fault circuit operate voltage is above that required to guarantee
Earth current is directly measured current from an stability.
independent CT or the residual connection of the 3 line CTs External non-linear resistors (Metrosils) are connected in
(Holmgreen connection). parallel with the relay circuit to limit circuit over-voltages.
Elements have independent settings for pickup current, and
time-delay. The relay current setting and the operating voltage of the
relay/stabilising resistor combination is calculated taking
87REF Restricted Earth Fault - scheme into account:-
Analogue inputs can be connected and configured to provide
one or two high impedance restricted earth fault protections  Transient stability under through fault conditions as
(87 REF). verified by calculation assuming worst case conditions.
Each 87REF protection requires an external series stabilising  The required operate level for internal fault conditions.
resistor and non-linear shunt resistor.
The CT supervision function (CT50) provides monitoring of
In/Out Switching CT secondary wiring connections.
When the protection is selected to ‘Switched Out’ the 87/50 CT supervision commonly supplements 3-phase differential
functions are inhibited, trip contacts are disabled and protection as a fault in the CT secondary circuit wiring will
contacts selected to the CT50 and ‘Switched Out’ functions cause unbalance current to flow during normal load
are energized. conditions. Where the unbalance current is above the
protection operate level this will cause unnecessary tripping
74TCS Trip Circuit Supervision of the protected zone. This is particularly relevant where
current transformer wiring is switched as in some busbar
The trip circuits can be monitored via binary inputs protection arrangements.
connected in H4/H5/H6 or H7 schemes. Trip circuit failure Detection of a CT secondary wiring fault is arranged to
raises an HMI alarm and output(s). provide an alarm and/or inhibit the differential protection
(87/50) after a time delay. The time delay is required such
Programmable User Logic that the CT supervision function does not operate during
The user can map Binary Inputs and Protection operated internal fault conditions.
outputs to Function Inhibits, Logic Inputs, LEDs and/or Binary
Outputs.
The user can also enter up to 16 equations defining scheme Theory of High Impedance
logic using standard functions e.g. Timers, AND/OR gates,
Inverters and Counters. Current Balance Protective
Each Protection element output can be used for
Alarm/Indication and/or tripping.
Schemes and their Application
In addition, the Reydisp Manager PC application provides
graphical programming of user logic within the device. Determination of Stability
The stability of a current balance scheme using a high
Function LED’s impedance relay circuit depends upon the relay voltage
Eight or sixteen user programmable tri-colour LED’s are setting being greater than the maximum voltage which can
provided eliminating the need for separate panel mounted appear across the relay during a through fault condition.
indicators and associated wiring. Each LED can be user set to This maximum voltage can be determined by means of a
red, green or yellow allowing for indication of the associated simple calculation which makes the following assumptions:
function’s status. A slip-in pocket adjacent to the LEDs One current transformer is fully saturated making its
enables the user to insert customised labels. A printer excitation impedance negligible.
compatible template is available. The resistance of the secondary winding of the saturated
current transformer together with the leads connecting it to
the relay circuit terminals constitute the only burden in
Application parallel with the relay.
The remaining current transformers maintain their ratio.
3 phase high impedance differential protection is typically
Thus the maximum voltage is given by:
applied to busbars, connections, auto-transformers,
reactors and motors. Restricted earth fault protection is
typically applied to provide protection of transformer
(1)  
V  IF R CT  R L  T
windings. See figure 6.
Where:
High impedance protection is recommended for all
V = Maximum voltage across relay circuit during
applications where faults must be cleared in the shortest
through fault conditions.
possible time and where discrimination must be ensured.
High impedance schemes can provide lower fault settings
RL = Resistance current transformer connection
and better through fault stability than is possible with most leads.
other schemes.
RCT = Current transformer secondary winding
The stability of the high impedance scheme is ensured resistance
because the applied operate voltage setting is greater than
the maximum voltage that can appear across the relay IF = Maximum steady state through fault current.
circuit under through fault conditions. An external series
stabilising resistor (RSTAB) is installed to provide a relay

T = Turns ratio of all current transformers (Primary
turns / secondary turns) Technical Data
For stability, the voltage setting of the relay V S must be
made equal to or exceed, the highest value of V calculated For full technical data refer to the Performance Specification
above. Section of the Technical Manual.
Experience and extensive laboratory tests have proved that
if this method of estimating the relay setting voltage is
adopted, the stability of the protection will be very much
Inputs and Outputs
greater than the value of I used in the calculation. This is
because a current transformer is normally not continuously Current Inputs
saturated and consequently any voltage generated by this
Quantity 4
current transformer will reduce the voltage appearing
Rated Current IN 1/5A
across the relay circuit.
Measuring Range 8 x In max
Method of Establishing Relay Setting Current Instrumentation ±1% In or ±10mA
Frequency 50/60Hz
Relay setting current is given by:
Thermal Withstand:
IS  P.O.C  Imag  INLR  / T
Continuous 4.0 xIn
(2)
1 Second 100A (1A) 350A (5A)
Where: Burden @ In ≤0.1VA (1A input)
≤0.3VA (5A input)
IS = Relay setting current
Auxiliary supply
P.O.C. = Primary operate current (fault setting). Rated DC Voltage 24-250V DC
Operating Range 19.2 to 275V
Imag = Current transformer magnetising currents at the Allowable superimposed 12% of DC voltage
value of VS. ac component
Rated AC Voltage 100-230 VAC 50/60Hz
INLR = Current taken by the non-linear resistor/voltage
limiting device at VS (this value is usually small and
50/60Hz ±5%
often may be neglected).
Power Consumption: Quiescent 24V: 8W
Equation (2) should properly be the vector sum, however State (DC) 110V: 7W
arithmetic addition is normally used. 250V: 7W
Establishing the Value of Setting Resistors Maximum 24V: 12W

Load (DC) 110V: 11W
Stabilising resistor value R STAB is given by: 250V: 11W
VS Quiescent 100V: 16VA
(3) RSTAB  State (AC) 230V: 21VA
IS
Maximum 100V: 23VA
Where:
Load (AC) 230V: 30VA
VS = Relay circuit operate voltage
@50/60Hz
Exact resistor values are not necessary, a higher standard
resistance value may be chosen. A check is made to confirm
that the finalized value of Vs provides stability and is Binary Inputs
compatible with the installed CTs ie: Operating Voltage 19V dc: Range 17 to 290V dc
88V: Range 74 to 290V dc
(4) V < Vs < 0.5V x CT knee point voltage Maximum dc current for 1.5mA
operation
The required watt-second rating of the resistor is
established at setting and at the maximum fault rating – Binary Outputs
short time rating. The power dissipation of the resistors Operating Voltage Voltage Free
should be considered, they should be mounted vertically in Operating Mode User selectable - Self or
a well ventilated location and clear of all other wiring and Hand Reset
equipment. Contact Operate / Release 7ms / 3ms
Time.
Making Capacity:
Make and carry 20A ac or dc for 0.5s
(L/R  40 ms and V  300 V) 30A ac or dc for 0.2s
Breaking Capacity
(  5 A and  300 V):
AC Resistive 1250VA
AC Inductive 250VA at p.f.  0.4
DC Resistive 75W
DC Inductive 30W at L/R  40ms Line to Earth
50W at L/R  10ms Case, Aux Power & I/O. 2.0kV
Line to Earth
Analog Inputs. 1.0kV
Mechanical Tests Line to Line
Case, Aux Power & I/O. 1.0kV*
Line to Line
RS485 Comms port. 1.0kV No data loss
Line to Earth
Type Level Variation *Note 45ms pick up delay applied to binary inputs
Vibration response 0.5gn 5%
Vibration endurance 1.0gn 5% Conducted Radio Frequency Interference
IEC 60255-22-6
Shock and Bump Type Level Variation
IEC 60255-21-2 Class I 0.15 to 80MHz 10V  5%
Shock response 5gn, 11ms 5% Radiated Radio Frequency
Shock withstand 15gn, 11ms 5% IEC 60255-25
Bump test 10gn, 16ms 5% Type Limits at 10m, Quasi-peak
30 to 230MHz 40dB(V/m)
Seismic 230 to 10000MHz 47dB(V/m)
Type Level Variation Conducted Radio Frequency
Seismic response 1gn 5% IEC 60255-25
Type Limits
Mechanical Classification Quasi-peak Average
Durability >106 operations 0.15 to 0.5MHz 79dB(V) 66dB(V)
0.5 to 30MHz 73dB(V) 60dB(V)
Electrical Tests Radiated Immunity

Insulation Type Level Variation
IEC 60255-5 80MHz to 1000MHz 10V/m  5%
Type Level
Magnetic Field with Power Frequency
Between any terminal and
earth
2.0kV AC RMS for 1min Type Level
Between independent
circuits 100A/m (0.126mT) continuous 50Hz
1000A/m (1.26mT) for 3s
Across normally open 1.0kV AC RMS for 1min
contacts
Environmental Tests
Temperature
IEC 60068-2-1/2
Case, Aux Power & I/O. 2.5kV  10%
Common mode Operating Range -10C to +55C
Case, Aux Power & I/O. 1.0kV  10% Storage range -25C to +70C
Transverse mode
RS485 Comms 1.0kV No data loss Humidity
IEC 60068-2-78
Electrostatic Discharge Operational test 56 days at 40C and 95% relative
IEC 60255-22-2 Class IV humidity
Contact discharge 8.0kV  5% IP Ratings
IEC 60529
Electrical Fast Transient / Burst Immunity Type Level
IEC 60255-22-4 Class A (2002) Installed with cover IP 51 from front of relay
Type Level Variation Installed with cover IP 20 from front of relay
Case, Aux Power & I/O 4.0kV  10% removed
RS485 Comms 2.0kV No data loss
Surge Immunity
IEC 60255-22-5
Analog Inputs. 4.0kV  10%
Performance
87/50 Differential Protection

Setting Range 0.01…2.00 xIn
Basic Operate Time 2 x Is: 22ms ±5ms, 50Hz
2 x Is: 20ms ±5ms, 60Hz
3 x Is: 1 cycle ±5ms
5 x Is: < 1 cycle
Reset Time < 50ms
Harmonic Rejection 40:1 minimum
(2nd to 15th harmonic)
Inhibited by CT50, Binary or Virtual Input
CT50 CT Supervision
2 x Is: 20ms ±5ms, 60Hz
5 x Is: < 1 cycle
87REF Restricted Earth Fault

2 x Is: 20ms ±5ms, 60Hz
5 x Is: < 1 cycle
Reset Time < 50ms
Harmonic Rejection 40:1 minimum
(2nd to 15th harmonic)
50G Instantaneous & DTL Measured EF

Elements Measured Earth
Setting Range Is: -
Measured E/F ‘G’ 0.01…2 xIn
Time Delay 0.00…60s
Operate time 2 x Is: 22ms ±5ms, 50Hz
2 x Is: 20ms ±5ms, 60Hz
5 x Is: < 1 cycle
Operate time following tbasic +td , ±1% or ±10ms
delay

7SR DAD Connection Diagram
1
1A 7SR23 BO 7
17 1 2 1 2 1 2
19
2
Ia
3
5A
BO 8
21
C B A Data
23
4 Comms
1A +ve Optional PSU Analogue (Optional)
5 18
BI 4 I/O
6
5A Ib +ve
7 20
27 28 27 28 27 28
BI 5
8
1A +ve
9 22 Rear View
BI 6 -ve Arrangement of terminals and modules
10 25
5A Ic
11 +ve
24
12 BI 7
1A
13 +ve
26 NOTES
14 BI 8
5A Ig BI = Binary Input
15 +ve
28 BO = Binary Output
BI 9
16
A -ve
27
1
+ve
22 Shows contacts internal to relay case
BO 1
-ve assembly.
24
3 Contacts close when the relay chassis is
28 GND. 5
withdrawn from case
BO 2 7
+ve 9
2
-ve BI 1 11
4
6
+ve BO 3 13
-ve BI 2 15
8
+ve 17
10
BI 3 BO 4
-ve 19
12
21
14 A BO 5
23
RS485
16 Screen
25
18 B
BO 6 26
20 Term.
B 27
+ve
2 1
-ve BI 10 BO 9
4 3
+ve
6 5
-ve BI 11 BO 10
8 7
+ve
10 9
BI 12 BO 11
11
+ve
12 13
BI 13 BO 12
15
+ve
14 17
BI 14 BO 13
19
+ve BO 14
16 21
-ve BI 15
18 23
+ve BO 15
20 25
BI 16 BO 16
27
+ve
22
BI 17
+ve
24
BI 18
+ve
26
BI 19
28
-ve C
Fig3. 7SR DAD Wiring Diagram

Typical Applications
3-Phase Differential Protection for Connections or Busbars
7SR23
Relay Circuit
3-Phase Differential Protection

7SR23
Relay Circuit for Motor, Reactor or Generator
3-Phase Differential Protection

for Auto-Transformer
7SR23
Relay Circuit
7SR23
7SR23
Relay Circuit
Relay Circuit
Restricted Earth Fault

Protection for Transformer
Fig 4. Typical Applications for the 7SR23 DAD

Ordering Information – 7SR23 DAD High Impedance Relay
DAD 7 SR2 3 0 □-
▲ ▲ ▲
1 □ A □▲ □▲ -
▲ ▲
0 C A0
▲
High Impedance Protection | | | | | | | |
Protection Product | | | | | | | |
Circulating Current 3 0 | | | | | |
| | | | | |
Case I/O and Fascia 1) | | | | | |
4 CT, 9 BI, 8 BO, 8 LEDs E6 Case (1 2 | | | | |
4 CT, 19 BI, 16 BO, 16 LEDs E8 Case (1 3 | | | | |
| | | | |
Measuring Input | | | | |
1/5 A, 50/60Hz 1 | | | |
| | | |
Auxiliary voltage | | | |
PSU Rated: 24-250V DC / 100-230V AC, binary input threshold 19V DC (Rated: 24-250V DC) M | | |
PSU Rated: 24-250V DC / 100-230V AC, binary input threshold 88V DC (Rated: 110-250V DC) N | | |
| | |
Communication Interface | | |
Standard version – included in all models, USB front port, RS485 rear port 1 2 |
Standard version – plus additional rear F/O ST connectors (x2) and IRIG-B 2 2 |
Standard version – plus additional rear RS485 and IRIG-B 3 2 |
Standard version – plus additional rear RS232 and IRIG-B 4 2 |
Standard version – plus additional rear Electrical Ethernet RJ45 (x2) 7 7 |
Standard version – plus additional rear Optical Ethernet Duplex LC (x2) 8 7 |
| |
Protocol | |
IEC 60870-5-103, Modbus RTU and DNP3.0 (user selectable setting) 2 |
IEC 60870-5-103, Modbus RTU and DNP 3.0 (user selectable) and IEC 61850 7 |
|
Protection Function Packages |
50G Measured Earth Fault Protection C
87/50 Phase Segregated High Impedance Differential Protection
87REF High Impedance Restricted Earth Fault Protection
CT50 CT Supervision
74TCS
Programmable logic
1) BI = Binary Input, BO = Binary Output,

1.1.3.4 7SR242 Transformer Protection Relay
User Interface

3 fixed LEDs
16, 24 or 32 Programmable Tri-colour LEDs (Option)
Primary current phases and earth
Secondary current phases and earth
Relay Operate and restraint currents
Positive Phase Sequence (PPS) Current
Negative Phase Sequence (NPS) Current
Zero Phase Sequence (ZPS) Current
Description Thermal status
Primary Single phase voltage*
Our new generation of integrated transformer protection Secondary single phase voltage*
relays are designated the 7SR24 series. The relays utilise Data logging and Demand Metering
years of numeric relay protection experience with the Frequency & fluxing*
‘Duobias’ family of products. Binary Input/binary output and virtual I/O status
Housed in 4U high, size E8, E10 or E12 cases, these relays Trip circuit healthy/failure
provide protection, control, monitoring, instrumentation and Time and date
metering with integrated input and output logic, data Fault records
logging & fault reports. Communication access to relay Event records
functionality is via a front USB port for local PC connection Waveform records
or rear electrical RS485 port for remote connection. Circuit breaker trip counters
Additional rear port options are available. I2t summation for contact wear
* Optional voltage measurements from single phase VT
input
Function Overview
Standard Functionality
74TCS/CCS Trip/Close Circuit Supervision The circuit breaker fail function may be triggered from an
81HBL2 Inrush Detector internal trip signal or from a binary input. Line and neutral
81HBL5 Overfluxing Detector currents are monitored following a trip signal and an output
87BD Biased Differential (2Windings) is issued if any current is still detected after a specified time
87HS Current Differential High-Set interval. Alternatively, if the trip is from a mechanical
8 Settings Groups protection the circuit breaker position can be used to
Password Protection – 2 levels determine a failure. A second time delay is available to enable
User Programmable Logic Equations, via HMI another stage to be utilized if required. An input is also
Graphical Programmable Logic, via pc application available to bypass the time delays when the circuit breaker is
Self Monitoring known to be faulty.
Optional Functionality 64H Restricted Earth Fault - scheme

24 Over-Fluxing The measured earth fault input may be used in a high
27/59 Under/Over Voltage impedance restricted earth fault scheme. Required external
37/37G Undercurrent series stabilising resistor and non-linear voltage limiting
46BC Open Circuit shunt resistor can be supplied.
49 Thermal Overload 74TCS/CCS Trip/Close Circuit Supervision
50 Instantaneous Overcurrent The trip and close circuit(s) can be monitored via binary
50G/N Instantaneous Earth Fault inputs. Circuit failure raises an HMI alarm and output(s).
51G/N Time Delayed Measured Earth Fault /SEF 81HBL2 Inrush Detector
59N Neutral Voltage Displacement Where second harmonic current is detected (i.e. during
81 Under/Over Frequency transformer energisation) user selectable elements can be
blocked.

81HBL5 Overfluxing Detector characteristic. Operates if Volts/Hertz ratio is above setting
Fifth Harmonic Detectors can be user selected to block the for duration of delay.
Biased Differential Elements.
87BD Biased Differential Each element has settings for pickup level, drop-off level and
The differential characteristic incorporates two bias stages – Definite Time Lag (DTL) delays. Operates if voltage ‘exceeds’
the first stage for steady state errors i.e. tap position and CT setting for duration of delay.
ratios the second stage for transient errors i.e. CT saturation. This function can be used within load shedding schemes.
87HS High-Set Differential 37/37G Undercurrent

High speed differential elements provide protection against Each element has settings for pickup level and Definite Time
high levels of internal fault current. Lag (DTL) delays. Operates if current falls below setting for
duration of delay.
Programmable Logic
The user can map Binary Inputs and Protection operated 46NPS Negative Phase Sequence Overcurrent
outputs to Function Inhibits, Logic Inputs, LEDs and/or Binary Two DTL and two inverse/DTL elements are provided. NPS
Outputs. Current elements can be used to detect unbalances on the
The user can also enter up to 16 equations defining scheme system or remote earth faults when a delta-star transformer
logic using standard functions e.g. Timers, Latches, AND/OR is in circuit.
gates, Inverters and Counters.
Each Protection element output can be used for Alarm & 46BC Open Circuit
Indication and/or tripping. Each element has settings for pickup level and DTL delay.
In addition, the Reydisp Manager PC application provides With the circuit breaker closed, if the NPS:PPS current ratio is
graphical programming of user logic within the device. above setting this could be due to an open circuit.
Circuit Breaker Maintenance 49 Thermal Overload

For each winding two circuit breaker operations counters are The thermal algorithm calculates the thermal states from the
provided. The Maintenance Counter records the overall measured line currents. Outputs are available for thermal
number of operations and the Delta Counter the number of overload and thermal capacity.
operations since the last reset.
I2t summation Counters provide a measure of the contact 50/51 Phase Fault
wear indicating the total energy interrupted by the circuit 50 INST/DTL and 51 IDMTL/DTL elements provide overcurrent
breaker contacts. protection, each with independent settings for pickup
Each counter has a user set target operations count which, current, time-multiplier (51) and time-delays. IEC, ANSI or
when reached, can be mapped to raise Alarms/ Binary user defined Time Current Characteristics can be selected.
Outputs. The IDMT stage has a user programmable DTL or shaped
These counters assist with maintenance scheduling. current/time reset characteristic, to improve grading with
electromechanical protection.
Function LED’s
16 or 24 user programmable tri-colour LED’s are provided 50G/51G/50N/51N Earth Fault
eliminating the need for expensive panel mounted pilot Two earth fault measurement modes are available. One
lights and associated wiring. Each LED can be user set to red, mode directly measures the earth current from an
green or yellow allowing for clear indication of the independent CT, or the residual connection of the 3 line CTs
associated function’s state. A slip-in label pocket along-side (50G/51G). The second mode derives the earth current
enables the user to insert his own notation. A printer internally from the 3 phase CTs (50N/51N).
compatible template is available. 50 INST/DTL and 51 IDMTL/DTL elements provide overcurrent
current, time-multiplier (51) and time-delays. IEC, ANSI or
user defined Time Current Characteristics can be selected..
The IDMT stage has a user programmable reset characteristic
either DTL or shaped current/time reset characteristic to
improve grading with electromechanical protection.

One element provides a definite time lag (DTL)
characteristic; the second element provides an inverse/DTL
characteristic. Operates if Neutral voltage exceeds setting for
duration of delay.
Neutral overvoltage can be used to detect earth faults in
Fig1. Tri-colour LED’s high impedance earthed or isolated systems.
Optional Functionality Definite Time Lag (DTL) delays. Each element operates if
frequency exceeds setting for duration of delay. Typically
applied in load shedding schemes.
24 Over-Fluxing
Two elements each provide a definite time lag (DTL)
characteristic, the third element provides a user defined
Binary Inputs
Technical Data Operating Voltage 19V dc: Range 17 to 290V dc
88V dc: Range 74 to 290V dc
For full technical data refer to the Performance Specification Maximum dc current for 1.5mA
Chapter of the Technical Manual. operation
Binary Outputs
Inputs and Outputs Operating Voltage Voltage Free
Operating Mode User selectable - Self or Hand
Reset
Current Inputs Contact Operate / Release 7ms / 3ms
Quantity 6 x Phase & 2 x Earth Time.
Rated Current IN 1/5A Making Capacity:
Measuring Range 80 x In Carry continuously 5A ac or dc
Instrumentation ≥ 0.1xIn ±1% In Make and carry 20A ac or dc for 0.5s
Frequency 50/60Hz (L/R  40 ms and V  300 30A ac or dc for 0.2s
Thermal Withstand: V)
Continuous 3.0 x In Breaking Capacity
10 Minutes 3.5 x In (  5 A and  300 V):
5 Minutes 4.0 x In AC Resistive 1250 VA
3 Minutes 5.0 x In AC Inductive 250 VA at p.f.  0.4
2 Minutes 6.0 x In DC Resistive 75 W
3 Seconds 57.7A (1A) 202A (5A) DC Inductive 30 W at L/R  40ms
2 Seconds 70.7A (1A) 247A (5A) 50 W at L/R  10ms
1 Second 100A (1A) 350A (5A)
1 Cycle 700A (1A) 2500A (5A)
Burden @ In  0.1VA (1A phase and Earth Mechanical Tests
element)
 0.3VA (5A phase and earth
element)
Voltage Inputs Type Level Variation
Quantity 1 (optional)
Nominal Voltage 40…160V a.c. Range Vibration endurance 1.0 gn 5%
Thermal Withstand: Shock and Bump
Continuous 300V IEC 60255-21-2 Class I
1 Second Type Level Variation
Burden @ 110V  0.1 VA Shock response 5 gn, 11 ms 5%
Auxiliary supply Bump test 10 gn, 16 ms 5%
Nominal voltage Operating Range
Seismic
24 - 250V dc 19.2 - 275 V dc
100 - 230V ac 80 - 253 V ac
Nominal Voltage Quiescent Quiescent Burden Seismic response 1 gn 5%
Burden (typical) (back-light)
24V dc 6.0W 7.4W Mechanical Classification
48V dc 5.8W 7.1W Durability >106 operations
60V dc 5.8W 7.0W
110V dc 6.5W 7.5W
125V dc 5.4W 1.2W Electrical Tests
220V dc 5.2W 6.4W
250V dc 5.2W 6.4W Insulation
IEC 60255-5
100V ac 13.4VA 15.9VA
Type Level
110V ac 13.7VA 16.2VA
115V ac 13.7VA 16.2VA Between any terminal 2.0 kV AC RMS for 1 min
120V ac 14.0VA 16.6VA and earth
200V ac 16.0VA 19.0VA Between independent 2.0 kV AC RMS for 1 min
230V ac 17.0VA 20.2VA circuits
Allowable superimposed ac  12% of dc contacts
component voltage
Allowable breaks/dips in
supply (collapse to zero from  20 ms
nominal voltage)
Transient Overvoltage
IEC 60255-5 Climatic Tests
Between all terminals and 5 kV
earth or between any two 1.2/50 µs Temperature
independent circuits 0.5 J IEC 60068-2-1/2
Operating Range -10 C to +55 C
Type Level Variation Humidity
Common 2.5 kV 5% IEC 60068-2-3
(longitudinal) mode
Operational test 56 days at 40 C and 93 %
relative humidity
mode
IP Ratings
Electrostatic Discharge
IEC 60255-22-2 Class IV Type Level
Type Level Variation Installed with cover IP 51 from front of relay
Contact discharge 8.0 kV 5% Installed with cover IP 20 from front of relay
removed
Fast Transients
IEC 60255-22-4 Class IV
Type Level Variation Performance
5/50 ns 2.5 kHz 4kV 5%
repetitive
Surge Immunity Number of Elements 4 Under or Over
IEC 60255-22-5 Setting Range Vs 5, 5.5…200V
Type Level Variation Hysteresis Setting 0. 0.1…80%
Between all 4.0 kV  10 % Vs Operate Level 100% Vs, ±1% or ±0.25V
terminals and earth Reset Level:
Between any two 2.0kV Undervoltage (100% + hyst) x Vop, ±1% or
independent circuits 0.25V
Overvoltage (100% - hyst) x Vop, ±1% or
0.25V
IEC 60255-22-6 Delay Setting td 0.00, 0.01…20, 20.5…100,
101…1000, 1010…10000,
Type Level Variation 10100…14400s
0.15 to 80 MHz 10 V 5% Basic Operate Time :
0 to 1.1xVs 73ms ±10ms
Radiated Radio Frequency 0 to 2.0xVs 63ms ±10ms
IEC 60255-25 1.1 to 0.5xVs 58ms ±10ms
Type Limits at 10 m, Quasi-peak Operate time following Tbasic + td , ±1% or ±10ms
30 to 230 MHz 40 dB(V) delay.
230 to 10000 MHz 47 dB(V) Inhibited by Binary or Virtual Input
U/V Guard
Conducted Radio Frequency
Type Limits 37, 37G Undercurrent
Quasi-peak Average Number of Elements Phase (37) x 2
0.15 to 0.5 MHz 79 dB(V) 66 dB(V) Earth (37G) x 2
0.5 to 30 MHz 73 dB(V) 60 dB(V) Setting Range Is 0.05, 0.10…5.0 x In
Radiated Immunity Delay Setting td 0.00, 0.01…20, 20.5…100,
IEC 60255-22-3 Class III 101…1000, 1010…10000,
Type Level Variation 10100…14400s
80 MHz to 1000 10 V/m 5% Basic Operate Time: 35ms ±10ms
MHz 1.1 to 0.5xIn
Operate time following Tbasic + td , ±1% or ±10ms
Magnetic Field with Power Frequency delay.
IEC 61000-4-8, Class V Overshoot Time < 40ms
100 A/m continuous 50Hz; 1.257mT U/I Guard (37)
1000 A/m for 3s
DT Setting Range Is 0.05, 0.06…4.0 x In
DT Operate Level 100% Is, ±5% or ±1%xIn
DT Delay Setting td 0.00, 0.01…20, 20.5…100,
101…1000, 1010…10000, Follower Delay 0 - 20s
10100…14400s Reset ANSI decaying, 0 – 60s
DT Basic Operate Time: 40ms ±10ms Inhibited by Binary or Virtual Input
0 to 2 x Is Inrush detector
DT Operate time Tbasic + td , ±1% or ±10ms
following delay. 50BF Circuit Breaker Fail
IT Char Setting IEC: NI,VI,EI,LTI Operation Current check
ANSI: MI,VI,EI Setting Range Is 0.05,0.055…2.0 x In (Phase)
DTL 0.005,0.010…2.0 x In (Earth)
IT Setting Range 0.05, 0.06 ..2.5 2 Stage Time Delays Timer 1 0,5…60000ms
Tm Time Multiplier 0.025, 0.050…1.6 Timer 2 0,5…60000ms
Char Operate Level 105% Is, ±4% or ±1%In Operate Level 100% Is, ±5% or ±1%xIn
Overshoot Time < 40ms Basic Operate time < 20ms
Inhibited by Binary or Virtual Input Operate time following Tdelay ±1% or ±10ms
delay
49 Thermal Overload Triggered by Any function mapped as trip
Operate levels Operate and Alarm contact.
Setting Range Is 0.10, 0.11…3.0 x In Inhibited by Binary or Virtual Input
Time Constant Setting 1,1.5…1000min 59N Neutral Voltage Displacement
Operate time 

t    In 2
I 2  I p2 
 Number of Elements DT & IT
2 
 I  k  I B  
  DT Setting Range Is 1…100V
±5% absolute or ±100ms where DT Operate Level 100% Vs, ±5% or ±1%xVn
Ip = prior current DT Delay Setting td 0 …14400s
Alarm Level Disabled, 50,51…100% DT Basic Operate Time 76ms ±20ms
Inhibited by Binary or Virtual Input 0V to 1.5xVs
DT Operate time Tbasic + td , ±1% or ±20ms
50 Instantaneous & DTL OC&EF following delay.
Elements Phase (OC), Derived Earth (N) IT Setting Range 1…100V
and Measured Earth (G) Tm Time 0.1…140
Number of Elements 2 x OC Multiplier(IDMT)
2 x Derived EF (N) Delay (DTL) 0…20s
2 x Measured EF (G) Reset ANSI Decaying, 0 … 60s
Setting Range Is 0.05,0.06…50 x In (OC, N) Char Operate Level 105% Vs, ±2% or ± 0.5V
0.005…25 x In (G) Inhibited by Binary or Virtual Input
Time Delay 0.00…14400s
Operate Level 100% Is, ±5% or ±1% x In 64H Restricted Earth Fault
Operate time: Setting Range 0.005…0.95xIn
50, 50G 0 to 2xIs – 35ms, ±10ms, Operate Level 100% Is, ±5% or ±1%xIn
0 to 5xIs – 25ms, ±10ms Time Delay 0.00… 14400s
50N 0 to 2xIs – 35ms, ±10ms, Basic Operate Time 0 to 2 x Is: 45ms ±10ms
0 to 5xIs – 30ms, ±10ms 0 to 5 x Is: 35ms ±10ms
Operate time following Tbasic + td , ±1% or ±10ms Inhibited by Binary or Virtual Input
delay
Inhibited by Binary or Virtual Input 74TCS Trip Circuit Supervision
Inrush detector
Number of supervisable 6
circuits
51Time Delayed OC&EF)
Number of BI’s Required 1 or 2 per function
Elements Phase (OC), Derived Earth (N)
and Measured Earth (G) 81 Under/Over Frequency
2 x Derived EF (N)
4 x Measured EF (G) Setting Range Vs 40 … 69.99Hz
Characteristic IEC: NI,VI,EI,LTI Hysteresis Setting 0. 0.1…80%
ANSI: MI,VI,EI Vs Operate Level 100% Fs, ±10mHz
DTL Reset Level:
Setting Range Is 0.05, 0.1…2.5 x In (OC, N) Over frequency (100% - hyst) x Fop, ±10mHz
0.005, 0.01…1.0 x In (G) Under frequency (100% + hyst) x Fop, ±10mHz
Time Multiplier 0.025,0.05…1.6 Delay Setting td 0.00, 0.01…20, 20.5…100,
Time Delay 0, 0.01… 20s 101…1000, 1010…10000,
10100…14400s
Basic Operate Time : Typically <110ms
Minimum Operate time top 
K
 Tm
 Is 
I  (for ROCOF between 0.1 Maximum <150ms
IEC 1
and 5.0 Hz/sec)
 A 
top   P  B  Tm Operate time following Tbasic + td , ±1% or ±10ms
ANSI   Is   1 
I
delay.
 5 % absolute or  30 ms Inhibited by Binary or Virtual Input

87BD Biased Differential
Setting Range
Initial 0.1, 0.15 … 2 x In
1st Bias Slope 0.1, 0.15 … 0.7x
1st Bias Slope Limit 1, 2 … 20 x In
2nd Bias Slope 1, 1.5 … 2x
2nd Bias Slope Type Line, curve
Operate Level:
Initial setting ±5% of setting or ±0.01 In
Bias slope ±10% of setting or ±0.01 In
Reset Level:
Over frequency (100% - hyst) x Fop, ±10mHz
Under frequency (100% + hyst) x Fop, ±10mHz
Delay Setting td 0.000, 0.005 … 1s
Basic Operate Time :
(inrush action Enabled)
0 to 3 x IOP 35ms ±10ms
0 to 10 x IOP 30ms ±10ms
Operate time following Tbasic + td , ±1% or ±10ms
delay.

Rear View: Arrangement of terminals and modules
1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
E D C B A Data
Comms
1 Optional Optional PSU CT CT/VT (Optional)
22
+ve 7SR242 I/O I/O
BO 1
-ve
24
3
27 28 27 28 27 28 27 28 27 28
28 GND. 5
BO 2 7
+ve 9
2
-ve BI 1 11
4
+ve +ve
+ve BO 3 13 2 1
6
BI 20 BI 30
-ve BI 2 15 4
-ve -ve
3
8
+ve +ve
+ve 17 6 5
10
BO 4 BI 21 BI 31
-ve BI 3 19 8
-ve -ve
7
12
+ve +ve
21 10 9
14 A BO 5 BI 22 BI 32
23
+ve +ve
RS485
16 Screen 12 11
25
18 B
BI 23 BI 33
BO 6 26
20 Term. +ve +ve
14 13
C 27
BI 24 BI 34
+ve 1A +ve +ve

18 1 16 15
-ve BI 4 -ve BI 25 BI 35 -ve

20 2 18 17
+ve W2-Ia 5A +ve +ve

22 3 20 19
BI 5 BI 26 BI 36
-ve
24 4
+ve 1A +ve +ve
26 5 22 21
BI 6 BI 27 BI 37
-ve
28 6
+ve W2-Ib 5A +ve +ve
17 7 24 23
-ve BI 7 BI 28 BI 38
19 8
+ve 1A +ve +ve
21 9 26 25
BI 29 BI 39
23
-ve BI 8
10 28
-ve E -ve
27
+ve W2-Ic 5A
25 11
-ve BI 9
27
B 12
+ve 1
2
1A -ve BI 10 BO 7
1 17 4 3
+ve 5
2 18 6
5A W1-Ia Ig-2 5A -ve BI 11 BO 8
3 19 8 7
+ve 9
4 20 10
1A BI 12 BO 9
5 11
+ve 13
6 12
5A W1-Ib BI 13 BO 10
7 27 15
V +ve
8 28 14 BO 11 17
1A BI 14 19
9 BO 12
+ve 21
10 16
5A W1-Ic -ve BI 15
11 18 BO 13 23
+ve 25
12 20 BO 14
1A BI 16
13 27
+ve
14 22
5A Ig-1 BI 17
15
+ve
16
A 24
BI 18
+ve
26
BI 19
NOTES
Shows contacts internal 28
-ve D
to relay case assembly.
BI = Binary Input Contacts close when the
BO = Binary Output relay chassis is
withdrawn from case

7SR24 Function diagram / example of external connections
7SR242n-2aAn1-0CA0
W1-Ia 37 50 50 51
49
81 81
(x2) BF-1 (x2) (x2) HBL2 HBL5
W1-Ib 37 50 50 51
49
81 81
(x2) BF-1 (x2) (x2) HBL2 HBL5
W1-Ic 37 50 50 51
49
81 81
(x2) BF-1 (x2) (x2) HBL2 HBL5
46 46
50N 51N
BC NPS
(x2) (x2)
(x2) (x4)
50
37G 50G 51G
BF-1 64H
(x2) (x2) (x4)
I4
Ig-1
ICT
Each function element

can be assigned to W1
or W2 CT inputs.

functions are mutually
exclusive
87HS 87BD ICT
50
37G BF-2 50G 51G 64H
Ig-2 I4
74
CCS
(x6)
46 46 74
50N 51N
BC NPS TCS
(x6)
W2-Ic 50 81 81
37 50 51 49
BF-2 HBL2 HBL5
W2-Ib 81
50 81
37 50 51 49 HBL
BF-2 HBL5
2
W2-Ia 81
50 81
37 50 51 49 HBL
BF-2 HBL5
2
27
24 59N 81
59
(x3) (x2) (x6)
V (x4)
Fig3. Standard and Optional Functionality of 7SR24 Relay

Ordering Information – 7SR242 Winding Transformer Protection

Duobias 7 S R 2 4 2 □ - 2 □A □▲ □▲ - 0 □▲ A▲ 0
▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
Multifunctional 2 winding | | | | | | | | |
transformer differential Protection Product | | | | | | | | |
protection Transformer 4 | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
Relay Type | | | | | | | |
Differential (2 winding) 2 | | | | | | |
| | | | | | |
Case I/O and Fascia | | | | | | |
E8 case, 6 CT, 2 EF/REF CT, 1 VT, 9 Binary Inputs / 6 Binary Outputs, 2 | | | | | |
16 LEDs | | | | | | |
E10 case, 6 CT, 2 EF/REF CT, 1 VT, 19 Binary Inputs / 14 Binary 3 | | | | | |
Outputs, | | | | | | |
24 LEDs
E12 case, 6 CT, 2 EF/REF CT, 1 VT, 39 Binary Inputs / 14 Binary 4 | | | | | |
Outputs, | | | | | |
32 LEDs
| | | | | |
Measuring Input | | | | | |
1/5 A, 40/160V, 50/60Hz 2 | | | | |
| | | | |
Auxiliary voltage | | | | |
24-250V DC / 100-230V AC. Binary input threshold 19V DC M | | | |
24-250V DC / 100-230V AC. Binary input threshold 88V DC N | | | |
| | | |
Communication Interface | | | |
Standard version – included in all models, USB front port, RS485 rear 1 | | |
port
Standard version – plus additional rear F/O ST connectors (x2) and 2 | | |
IRIG-B
Standard version – plus additional rear RS485 (x1) and IRIG-B 3 | | |
Standard version – plus additional rear RS232 (x1) and IRIG-B 4 | | |
Standard version – plus additional rear Electrical Ethernet RJ45 (x2) 7 | | |
Standard version – plus additional rear Optical Ethernet Duplex (x2) 8 | | |
| | |
Protocol | | |
IEC 60870-5-103 and Modbus RTU (user selectable setting) 1 | |
IEC 60870-5-103 and Modbus RTU and DNP 3.0 (user selectable) 2 | |
IEC 60870-5-103 and Modbus RTU and DNP 3.0 (user selectable) and 7-8 7 | |
IEC61850
| |
Protection Function Packages | |
Option A: Standard version – Included in all models A |
- 81HBL2 Inrush Detector | |
- 81HBL5 Overfluxing detector | |
- 87BD Biased current differential | |
- 87HS Current differential highset | |
Programmable logic | |
For each winding/circuit breaker | |
- 50BF Circuit breaker fail | |
- 64H High impedance REF | |
- 74TCS/CCS Trip/Close circuit supervision | |
| |
Option B: Standard version – plus B |
- 37/37G Undercurrent | |
- 46BC Open circuit | |
- 46NPS Negative phase sequence overcurrent | |
- 49 Thermal overload | |
- 50 Instantaneous phase fault overcurrent | |
- 50G/50N Instantaneous earth fault | |
- 51 Time delayed phase fault overcurrent | |
- 51G/51N Time delayed earth fault | |
(continued on following page )

Ordering Information – 7SR242 Winding Transformer Protection
Duobias 7 S R 2 4 2 □ - 2 □ A □□ - 0 □ A 0
(continued from previous Option C: Standard version - plus C |
page) - 24 Overfluxing | |
- 27/59 Under/overvoltage | |
- 59N Neutral voltage displacement | |
- 81 Under/overfrequency | |
- 37/37G Undercurrent | |
- 46BC Open circuit | |
- 46NPS Negative phase sequence overcurrent | |
- 49 Thermal overload | |
- 50 Instantaneous phase fault overcurrent | |
- 50G/50N Instantaneous earth fault | |
- 51 Time delayed phase fault overcurrent | |
- 51G/51N Time delayed earth fault | |
|
Additional Functionality |

1.1.4 7SR45 Non-Directional Overcurrent Protection
Features
Password Protection
Self Monitoring
Trip Timers
Healthy shut-down below operating ranges
Remote reset (binary input based) of flag with/without CT
power and Auxiliary power
Two Settings Groups
User Interface

9 non-programmable LEDs
Local Flag Indicator
Description
Primary/Secondary Current Phases and Earth
The 7SR45 Self Powered/Dual Powered Non-Directional Binary Input/Binary Output Status
Overcurrent and Earth Fault Relay is developed using the Time and Date
latest generation of hardware technology and is available Fault Records (Trip Log)
in multiple variants depending on the CT, binary input/binary Event Records (Event Log)
output, power supply and communication configuration.
7SR45 is a member of Siemens Reyrolle ® protection devices
Argus product family. Hardware
The 7SR45 Self Powered/Dual Powered Non-Directional
Overcurrent and Earth Fault Relay is housed in a 4U high, 4 CT (1 A or 5 A, via ordering option)
size 4 non draw-out case and provides protection, 4 BI, 4 BO
monitoring, instrumentation, and metering with integrated 1 Local Flag indication
input and output logic and fault reports. 1 Remote Flag output
1 Pulse Output
The relay functionality can be configured via a front USB 9 LEDs
port for local PC connection or rear electrical RS485 Rear RS485 communication port
(optional) port for remote connection. By using the Reydisp Auxiliary Power input
Evolution software, the user can update the settings and
view the fault records (trip log) and the event records (event
log). Data Storage and
7SR45 Self Powered/Dual Powered Non-Directional Communication
Overcurrent and Earth Fault Relay supports the
IEC 60870-5-103 and Modbus communication protocols. Front USB port + Rear RS485 port (optional)
Protocols - IEC60870-5-103, Modbus RTU
7SR45 Self Powered/Dual Powered Non-Directional Fault Records (Trip Log)
Overcurrent and Earth Fault Relay can indicate the trip with Event Recording (Event Log)
local and remote flag indicator. Time Synchronism
Viewing and Changing Settings
Battery Profiling
Function Overview
Protection
Application
50 Instantaneous Overcurrent Protection 7SR45 Self Powered/Dual Powered Relay is a numerical

50N/G Instantaneous Derived/Measured Earth overcurrent and earth fault protection relay primarily
Fault Protection intended for secondary distribution electrical networks.
51 Time Delayed Overcurrent Protection
51N/G Time Delayed Derived/Measured Earth The 7SR45 Dual Powered Non-Directional Overcurrent and
Fault Protection Earth Fault Relay is designed to operate with/without an
50LC/SOTF Switch-On-To-Fault auxiliary supply. The 7SR45 Dual Powered Non-Directional
Overcurrent and Earth Fault relay is powered primarily from
the auxiliary voltage even though all other power sources
are available.

50G/50N INST/DTL and 51G/51N IDMTL/DTL elements
In the absence of auxiliary voltage, the relay is powered by provide earth fault protection, each with independent
CT input. settings for pickup current, time-multiplier (51G/51N) and
time-delays. User can select IEC or ANSI time current
The relay offers definite-time and inverse-time overcurrent characteristics.
and earth fault protection functions in accordance to IEC and The IDMT curve has a user programmable reset characteristic
ANSI standards. either DTL or IEC/ANSI decaying to improve grading with
7SR45 Self Powered/Dual Powered Non-Directional
Overcurrent and Earth Fault Relay are built-in with a 1000
capacitor discharge pulse output for low-energy trip coil of

the circuit breaker. Changeover binary outputs are also
available for trip via an auxiliary powered shunt trip coil.
7SR45 Self Powered/Dual Powered Non-Directional

Overcurrent and Earth Fault Relay are targeted for the 100
following applications:
 Protection Relay for Ring Main Units (RMU)
 Back up protection relay for the medium voltage Time
applications (sec)
 Protection applications in remote locations where auxiliary
supply is not available.
 Control and relay panels refurbishment of old 10
Long Time Inverse
electromechanical protection relays
Functional Diagram
Normal Inverse
1
Very Inverse
7SR45
50LC/ 50
51
SOTF (x2)
IL1 Extremely Inverse
(IA)
50LC/ 50 0.1
51
IL2 SOTF (x2) 1 2 3 4 5 6 8
10 20 30 40 50 60 80
100
(IB)
Fig2. IEC Overcurrent Curves
50LC/ 50
51
SOTF (x2) 1000
IL3
(IC)
50N
51N
(x2)
IE 100
(IG) 50G
51G
(x2)
Time
Fig1. Functional Diagram of 7SR45 Self Powered/Dual (sec)
Powered Non-Directional Overcurrent and Earth Fault
Relay
10
50/51 Phase Overcurrent Fault

50 INST/DTL and 51 IDMTL/DTL elements provide overcurrent
current, time-multiplier (51) and time-delays. User can select
IEC or ANSI time current characteristics.
Moderately Inverse
1
The IDMT curve has a user selectable reset characteristic, Very Inverse
either DTL or IEC/ANSI decaying to improve the grading with
Extremely Inverse
50G/51G/50N/51N Measured/Derived Earth fault
0.1
mode directly measures the earth current from an 1 2 3 4 5 6 8
10 20 30 40 50 60 80
100
independent CT (50G/51G) and the second mode derives Current (multiples of setting)
the residual current internally from the 3 line CTs (50N/51N). Fig3. ANSI Overcurrent Curves

50LC / SOTF TRIP READY LED TURN ON when the relay is TRIP ready at the
SOTF functionality provides high speed tripping if a fault is above mentioned current levels.
still present on the feeder after the reclosure of the circuit
breaker (Close-on-to-Fault) or if earthing clamps are left The following graphs show the sensitivity of the relay and
connected after maintenance. corresponding operating time for different start up currents.
The following graph shows the SOTF operating time

depending on the fault currents.
Fig6. Sensitivity for Single Phase Fault with binary output
Fig4. Operating Time for Single Phase Fault with binary

output
Fig7. Sensitivity for Single Phase Fault with pulse output
NOTE: Multi-phase current will improve the sensitivity.
Fig5. Operating Time for Single Phase Fault with pulse

Data Acquisition -
output Via Communication Interface
NOTE: Multi-phase faults will result in shorter operating Sequence of Event Records (Event Log)
time.
Up to 100 events can be stored and time tagged to 1 ms
resolution. The events are stored on first-in-first-out basis.
Sensitivity
The events are available through the communication
In case absence of auxiliary voltage, the sensitivity of the interface.
relay is the minimum phase current required for the relay to
energize, detect a fault and trip as per the configuration. Fault Records (Trip Log)
The last 10 fault records are displayed on the relay fascia and
The sensitivity of 7SR45 Self Powered/Dual Powered Non- are also available through the communication interface with
Directional Overcurrent and Earth Fault Relay is 20 % of time and date of trip, measured quantities and type of fault.
nominal current for single phase and 13 % of nominal
current in three phases. The PROTECTION HEALTHY LED and

Real Time Clock
The time and date can be set and is maintained while the
Relay is de-energised by a coin cell battery.
Communications
The relay offers a USB port as standard on the front of all
units. All of the relay functions can be set on a PC using
Reydisp Evolution software via the USB port. The connection
is made with a USB cable and operates with a ‘plug and play’
The front port can be switched off or set to use either the
Modbus RTU or IEC60870-5-103 protocols for testing
purposes. Fig11. 7SR4502
Fig12. 7SR4502 Rear view
Front view
the relay for system interface connections.
An internal terminating resistor is provided, which can be

connected into the circuit by adding a wire loop between the User Interface
relevant terminals.
Ext Wire loop to

Term
1 1 Include line
To Control 2 2 A/+ terminating Res
3 3 GND
System 4
4 B/-
Rear terminals Rear terminals

twisted pair twisted pair
Fig8. Typical RS485 connection
The rear RS485 can be user selected to be OFF,

IEC60870-5-103 or Modbus RTU.
Construction
The relay is housed in a non draw-out 4U high, size 4 case.
The rear connection comprises of user friendly pluggable
type terminals for pulse and flag output, binary inputs, The operator interface is designed to provide a user friendly
binary outputs, RS485 communication and auxiliary input. method of viewing menus, entering settings, and retrieving
data from the relay. Five buttons are provided for navigation
The CT terminals are suitable for ring type lug connection to around the menu structure. Additionally, two buttons are
provide a secure and reliable termination. provided for battery ON/OFF and Backlight ON/OFF
functionality.
LCD
instrumentation, and fault data.
LEDs
9 non-programmable LEDs are available eliminating the
associated wiring. Each LED shows clear indication of the
associated functions state and has a label for identification.
Flag Indicator
1 local flag indicator is provided and configured for the trip
indication.
Fig9. 7SR4501
Fig10. 7SR4501Rear view
Front view

Relay Information
The device is identified by the rating label on the front fascia Technical Data
of the housing. The user can also give the device its own
identity by editing the ‘Relay Identifier’ displayed on the LCD. For full technical data, refer to the Technical Specification
Power
7SR45 Self Powered/Dual Powered Non-Directional Technical Data Overview
Overcurrent and Earth Fault Relay can be powered in the
Product Family Non Directional Self Powered
following modes and their priority is as follows:
/Dual Powered Overcurrent and
Earth Fault Relay
 Auxiliary Power Supply
 CT Power Case and LEDs Non draw-out Polycarbonate case
 USB Power (Size 4 standard, Non draw-out
 Battery Power design), 9 non-programmable
LEDs
Indication of Conformity Measuring Inputs 1 A or 5 A (ordering option),
(Current) 50 Hz/60 Hz
Low Voltage Directive: Auxiliary voltage 24 V-60 V DC
2006/95/EC Directive of the European 60 V-240 V AC/DC
Parliament and of the Council of 12 Communication Front communication port : USB
December 2006 on the harmonisation of (IEC 60870-5-103 or
the laws of Member States relating to Modbus RTU)
electrical equipment designed for use within Rear communication port: RS485
certain voltage limits (until 19.04.2016) (IEC 60870-5-103 or
Modbus RTU)
2014/35/EU Directive of the European
Parliament and of the Council of 26 Protection Functions 50, 50G/N, 51, 51G/N, 50LC/SOTF
February 2014 on the harmonisation of the Binary Input and 4 BI and 4 BO
laws of the Member States relating to the Binary Output
making available on the market of electrical Remote flag 24 V, 0.01 Ws
equipment designed for use within certain
Local flag Mechanical Flag Indicator
voltage limits; Official Journal of the EU L96,
29/03/2014, p. 357–374 (from 20.04.2016)  Normal – Green colour
 Trip – Red colour
EMC Directive:
Pulse output 24 V, 0.1 Ws pulse output
2004/108/EC Directive of the European
Parliament and of the Council of 15 Overvoltage Category III
December 2004 on the approximation of Pollution Degree 2
the laws of the Member States relating to Altitude above sea Maximum up to 2000 m
electromagnetic compatibility (until level
19.04.2016)
2014/30/EU Directive of the European Sensitivity
Parliament and of the Council of 26
Minimum phase 20 % of nominal current in single
February 2014 on the harmonisation of the
current for relay phase
laws of the Member States relating to
operation 13 % of nominal current in three
electromagnetic compatibility; Official
Journal of the EU L96, 29/03/2014, p. 79– phases
106 (from 20.04.2016)
Mechanical Specifications
Design Panel mounting, Non draw-out
Polycarbonate moulded case
Enclosure IP 52 (front panel)

IP 40 (enclosure sides)
IP 20 (rear side)
Depth is 203 mm
Weight 1.8 kgs (appx)
Terminal Blocks
Auxiliary Power 3 position (Terminal X3),
Supply M3 screw-type plug-in terminals
suitable for 2.5 mm 2 cable

Current Inputs 8 position (Terminal X1), Burden @ In ≤ 3.0 VA per phase and ≤ 0.2 VA
M4 Screw-type Barrier Terminal earth for 1 A CT input
block suitable for 2.5 mm 2/ ≤ 3.5 VA per phase and ≤ 0.2 VA
4 mm2 cable earth for 5 A CT input
Binary Input 4 position (Terminal X2),
4 position (Terminal X5) for Binary Inputs
additional binary inputs Number 2 or 4
M3 screw-type plug-in terminals 19 V DC Range 24 V - 66 V DC
88 V Range 88 V - 265 V
Binary Output 5 position (Terminal X2), AC/DC
5 position (Terminal X6) for Range DC 88 V - 265 V DC
additional binary outputs AC 68 V - 265 V AC
M3 screw-type plug-in terminals Maximum AC/DC
current for operation 3.5 mA
Pulse Output 2 position (Terminal X2),
Pick Up Delay User selectable 0 to 600 s
M3 screw-type plug-in terminals (up to 10 mins)
Drop Off Delay User selectable 0 to 600 s
Remote Flag 2 position (Terminal X2), (up to 10 mins)
M3 screw-type plug-in terminals
suitable for 2.5 mm 2 cable Binary Outputs
Front USB, Type B Number 2 or 4
Communication (2 NO contact and 2 C/O contact)
Port
4 position (Terminal X4), Operating Voltage Potential free
Rear
Communication M3 screw-type plug-in terminals Operating Mode User selectable - BO 1 and BO 2
Port suitable for 2.5 mm2 cable Self or Hand /Electrical Reset
Ground Terminal M3 ring type terminals suitable for BO 3 and BO 4 Self Reset
2.5 mm 2/4 mm2 cable (Operated only with Auxiliary
input is present)
Operating Time from < 20 ms
Inputs and Outputs energizing Binary Input
Making Capacity:
Auxiliary Supply Carry continuously
Rated Voltage 60 V - 240 V AC/DC, 50/60 Hz ± 5% Make and carry 5 A AC or DC
Tolerance – 20 % to +10 % (L/R  40 ms and 20 A AC or DC for 0.5 s
24 V - 60V DC, V  300 V AC) 30 A AC or DC for 0.2 s
Tolerance – 20 % to +10 %
(ordering option) Breaking Capacity
(  5 A and  250 V):
Allowable 15 % of DC voltage
superimposed AC
component
DC Resistive 75 W
Typical Power <7W
DC Inductive 30 W at L/R  40 ms
consumption (DC) 50 W at L/R  10 ms
Typical Power < 12 VA
consumption (AC)
Max Interruption ≤20 ms (19.2 V DC)
time (Collapse to ≤ 20 ms (48 V DC) Front Communication Port
Zero) ≤ 500 ms (230 V AC) Quantity 1
Electrical connection USB, Type B
Current Inputs
Protocol Support Modbus RTU, IEC 60870-5-103
Quantity 3 x Phase and 1 x Earth
Rated Current (In) 1 A or 5 A (ordering option) Rear Communication Port
Measuring Range 0.2xIn to 20xIn Quantity 1 (Optional)
Instrumentation ± 5 % (Typical) Electrical connection RS485, 2 wire electrical, twisted
(≥0.13xIn to 2xIn) pair
± 3% Protocol Support Modbus RTU, IEC 60870-5-103
(> 2xIn to 20xIn) Rate Data Transfer rate:
Frequency 50 Hz (Range: 45 Hz to 55 Hz) 1200 - 57600 bps
60 Hz (Range: 54 Hz to 66 Hz)

Data Storage Frequency Interfer- 150 kHz to 80 MHz, 10 V (RMS)
Fault Record (Trip Log) 10 records ence Class III
Events (Event Log) 100 events (1 ms resolution)

Power Frequency IEC 60255-26
Mechanical Tests 300 A/m applied for 3 s
Radiated Emissions IEC 60255-26
Test Standard CISPR 11, Class A
Vibration IEC60255-21-1, Conducted Emissions IEC 60255-26

Response and Endurance, Class I CISPR 11, Class A
Shock and Bump IEC 60255-21-2 Thermal Withstand IEC 60255-27#

Shock response and withstand, Continuous 2 x In
Class I 1s 50 A (1 A) 150 A (5 A)
Bump, Class I
Functional IEC 60255-151 and IEC 60255-1
Seismic IEC 60255-21-3, Class I performance
Degree of Protection IEC 60529, Maximum Allowable IEC 60255-6
IP52 front, IP20 rear Temperature Max. temperature limit
+100°C
Contact IEC 60255-1
(Ref: Std IEC 61810-1) Gradual IEC 60255-26
shutdown/Start-up Shut down/start up ramp 60 s
Electrical Endurance IEC 60255-1
Test test Power off 5 min
(Ref: Std IEC 61810-1)
(10000 operations at 250 V, 5 A) * NOTE: Between each independent port and earth
# NOTE: All aspect of IEC 60255-5 have been covered under

Electrical Tests IEC 60255-27
^ NOTE: Flag Ouput and Pulse Ouput X3 are excluded

Test Standard between any terminals and earth.
Insulation Resistance IEC 60255-27#
Insulation resistance >100 M
Ohms at 500 V DC
Climatic Environmental Tests
Test Duration: > 5 s
Impulse Voltage IEC 60255-27# Temperature
Withstand 5 kV, 1.2/50 µs, 0.5 J IEC 60068-2-1/IEC 60068-2-2
5 +ve, -ve pulses
Ambient Operating
(Between all terminals and case -100C to + 600C
Temperature
earth and any two independent
circuits) ^ Permissible
High Voltage IEC 60255-27# Temporary
(Dielectric) 2 kV AC RMS for 1 min Operating -400C to + 700C
(Between any terminal and earth, Temperature,
independent circuits) ^ (Tested for 16 h)
1 kV AC RMS for 1 min Storage
(across normally open contacts) Temperature -250C to + 700C
High Frequency IEC 60255-26 (Non-operational)
Disturbance 2.5 kV (CM)*, 1.0 kV (DM)
1 MHz Humidity
Electrostatic IEC 60255-26 IEC 60068-2-30/IEC 60068-2-78
Discharge 8 kV air discharge Damp heat test, +25…55°C, RH > 93%
6 kV contact discharge Cyclic 6 cycles
Electrical Fast IEC 60255-26 Damp heat test,
Transient or Burst ± 2 kV, 5 kHz 10 days at 95% RH, +400C
Steady State
IEC 60255-26
Surge Immunity 4 kV (CM), 2 kV (DM) NOTE: Cold test at -40°C:
1.2/50 µs The device was kept in non-energized condition at -40° C for
Radiated Immunity IEC 60255-26 16 hours. Energized at the end of 16 hours (@ -40°C ) and
80 MHz to 1.0 GHz and accuracy test was performed and found to be within limits.
1.4 GHz to 2.7 GHz The LCD was blank at -40°C.
Field strength: 10 V/m (RMS)
Amplitude Modulated: 80 % AM After accuracy test at -40° C, temperature was ramped up to
room temperature and accuracy test was found within limits.

load current) K
Product Safety Test IEC
top 
 IsI   1
 Tm
 A 
top   P  B  Tm
ANSI   Is   1 
I
Clearances and IEC/EN 60255-27: Edition 2

± 5% or ± 50 ms
Creepage Distances ≥• 4 mm Follower Delay 0.00, 0.01... 20 s
IP Rating IEC/EN 60255-27: Edition 2 Reset IEC/ANSI decaying, 0, 1... 60 s
IP52 (Front side) Inhibited by Binary Input
IP20 (Rear side)
50LC / SOTF (Switch-On-To-Fault)
Impulse Voltage IEC/EN 60255-27: Edition 2 Operate level 100% Is, ±5%
5 kV, 5 +ve, -ve pulses
Setting range 1,2,....20xIn
AC Dielectric IEC/EN 60255-27: Edition 2
Voltage 2 kV AC, 50 Hz, 1 min
Insulation IEC/EN 60255-27: Edition 2 Real Time Digital Simulation Test (RTDS)
Resistance
500 V DC, > 5 s, > 100 M ohm Trip Response at Fault Current: 1.1, 2, 3, 5, 10
different fault currents times of set value
Protective Bonding IEC/EN 60255-27: Edition 2
Resistance Influence on Accuracy Influence of DC components
< 12 V AC/DC, 1 min, < 0.1 Ohm DC content at first peak : 100%
Protective Bonding IEC/EN 60255-27: Edition 2 Decay time: 25 ms, 50 ms, 100
Continuity ms
Flammability IEC/EN 60255-27: Edition 2 Immunity to inrush current
Single Fault IEC/EN 60255-27: Edition 2 2nd harmonic content : up to
Condition 28%
Relay behaviour at primary CT
saturation
Performance Fault currents: 10 A, 20 A, 40 A
Trip response at Fault Current: 2 times and 5
recurring faults times of set value.
50 Instantaneous & DTL OC&EF Delay between recurring faults:
Operation Non directional 300 ms, 1 s, 2 s
Elements Phase, Derived Earth, Measured
Earth Inrush Response Test
Setting Range Is 0.2, 0.3, ..... 20.0xIn Test Conditions Simulated Inrush current with
(50/50N/50G) 15 % 2nd harmonic content
Time Delay 0,0.01,....600 s
Test Result The relay does not operate until
Operate Level Iop 100% Is, ±5%
fault current peak reaches 3
> 0.2xIn to 0.9xIn setting: times the setting value
≥ 90% Iop
Reset level
> 1xIn to 20xIn setting:
≥ 94% Iop
Basic Operate time
(with auxiliary power /
load current): 2xIS 25 ms, ±15 ms,
50, 50G, 50N 5xIS 20 ms, ±15 ms
Operate time delay Tbasic+Td, ± 1% or ± 30 ms
Inhibited by Binary Input
Disengaging time < 50 ms *
* NOTE: With Auxiliary power supply
51 Time Delayed OC&EF

Operation Non directional
Elements Phase, Derived Earth, Measured
Earth
Setting Range Is (51) 0.2, 0.21… 2.0xIn
Setting Range Is 0.1,0.11… 0.8xIn
(51G,51N)
Time Multiplier 0.01,0.02.....10
Time Delay (DTL) 0.00, 0.01... 15 s
Minimum Operate time
(with auxiliary power /
Case Dimensions
Fig14. Front View Fig15. Rear View
Fig16. Panel cut-out View Fig17. Side View

7SR4501 Terminal Label
X2 X1 1A/5A
1
+ve
1
BI 1 IL1
-ve
2
+ve 2
3
BI 2 1A/5A
-ve 3
4
NO 6 IL2
COM 7
BO 1 4
NC 8
1A/5A
NO 9 5
BO 2
COM 10
IL3
+ve 6
13
-ve PO
14 1A/5A
7
+ve
15 IL4
-ve FO
16 8
GND
Fig18. Terminal Diagram of Self Powered Non-Directional Overcurrent and Earth Fault Relay

X5 X2 X1 1A/5A
+ve 1
1 +ve
1
-ve BI 3
2 BI 1 IL1
-ve
2
+ve 2
3 +ve
BI 4 3
-ve BI 2
4 -ve 1A/5A
4 3
X4 X6 NO 6 IL2
1 TERM COM 7
NO 1
BO 1 4
RS485
2 A/+
COM 2 NC 8
3 GND BO 3 1A/5A
NC 3 NO 9 5
4 B/-
BO 2
NO 4 COM 10
BO 4
IL3
X3 COM 5
+ve 6
1 L 13
N Aux -ve PO
2 14 1A/5A
Supply 7
E
3
+ve
GND 15 IL4
-ve FO
16 8
Additional 2BI 2BO options are not

available for the Basic variant. 7SR4502 Terminal Label
X5
+ve
1
-ve BI 3
2
+ve
3
BI 4
-ve
4
X6
NO 1
COM 2
BO 3
NC 3
NO 4
BO 4
COM 5
Fig19. Terminal Diagram of Dual Powered Non-Directional Overcurrent and Earth Fault Relay

Ordering Information – 7SR45 Argus
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 - 8 9 10 11 12 - 13 14 15 16
7SR45 Argus 7 S R 4 5 0 - 0 - 1 A A 0
Nondirectiona
l Overcurrent
and Earth
Fault Relay
Case, I/O and fascia
Size 4 Moulded Case, 4 CT 1), 2 BI/2 BO, pulse output, 9 LEDs 1
Size 4 Moulded Case, 4 CT 1), 4 BI/4 BO, pulse output, 9 LEDs 2 H/J
Measuring Input
1 A, 50/60Hz 1
5 A, 50/60Hz 2
Auxiliary Voltage
Self Powered (CT Powered : BI Threshold 19VDC) G 1
Dual powered (CT Powered + Aux. Powered : 24-60VDC, BI threshold 19VDC) H 2
Dual powered (CT Powered + Aux. Powered : 60-240VAC/DC, BI threshold 88VAC/DC)
J 2
Front Fascia
Standard Version A
Standard Version - with Trip Flag Indicator B
Communication Options
Front port : USB 1
Front Port : USB and Rear Port : RS-485 supporting
IEC60870-5-103 and Modbus RTU (user selectable setting) 2
Protection Function Packages - Standard version

51 Time delayed phase fault overcurrent A
50LC/SOTF Switch-On-To-Fault
Additional functionality
Use the following ordering information to order 7SR45 Self Powered/Dual Powered Non-Directional Overcurrent and Earth
Fault Relay battery spares.
Variants Description
7XG1900-1AA00-1000 Main Battery CR123A
7XG1900-2AA00-1000 RTC Battery CR1632
7XG1900-3AA00-1000 Main Battery CR123A + RTC Battery CR1632

1.1.5 Arc Fault Protection
1.1.5.1 7XG3120 Arc Fault Monitor Relay

 For moderate arc fault currents the trip time of the over-
current IDMT stage will be too slow;
 For very low arc fault currents the instantaneous trip stage of
a standard over-current relay cannot be set low enough.
Arc Fault Protection
Arc fault protection is a technique employed for the fast

clearance of arcing faults on bus bars & within metal clad
switchgear & associated cable boxes. The arc is detected
using an optical sensor & the signal input to a protection
device which also monitors the load current on the system. A
trip signal can be achieved in less than 10 ms using arc
detection only or within 20 ms when using overcurrent
Features check. This is considerably faster than a traditional IDMT
overcurrent relay & provides additional protection from the
onset of arcing faults with relatively low fault currents.
 Compact economic design Arguably the greatest risk of arc fault damage exists at the
 Simple panel mounting for retrofit applications CB cable termination & in the CB chamber itself due to the
 Two or three arc sensor inputs slow clearance times of the IDMT feeder protection.
 Two high-speed, tripping duty output contacts The problem of arc faults is most prevalent in older metal-
 Push-button reset clad switchgear which already has operational protection
 Continuous arc sensor supervision systems. The RA20 (ReyARC 20) Arc Fault Monitor has
 Integrated self supervision therefore been designed for the following applications:
 Fail alarm contact
 AC or DC operation Existing Switchgear
 options for auxiliary supply range, suitable for 24 Where a requirement exists to retrofit arc fault protection to
to 250V supplies metal clad switchgear utilizing the existing overcurrent
protection relay.
Introduction New Switchgear

Where a requirement exists to install arc fault protection to
new switchgear for integration with the customer-preferred
Medium voltage switchgear is a key element in the power
overcurrent feeder protection relay, where a binary input
supply chain. Existing protection systems operate effectively
and appropriate logic is available.
under most circumstances, but they are too slow to effectively
Reyrolle 7SR11/12/210/220 overcurrent & earth fault relays
clear arcing short circuits before significant damage is caused.
have the enhanced high-speed 50AFD protection function,
specifically designed to interface with the ReyARC range for
Arcing faults can occur as a result of insulation breakdown
even further increased tripping performance.
due to equipment age and/or poor maintenance.
The degree of damage caused by arcing depends principally on

the duration of the arc. If an arc lasts only 100ms, the switch-
Switchgear Applications
gear needs to be checked & the insulation resistance measured
before power can be re-established. With a 200ms arc, the Switchgear Arc Protection
power supply will be interrupted; the switchgear must be Risk of arc fault damage exists at the CB cable termination &
checked; power is re-established only after minor repairs. In in the CB chamber itself. The CB cable termination is
the event of a 500ms arc the supply is interrupted, metal parts particularly at risk to ingress of moisture & rodent damage.
of the switchgear are destroyed & poisonous gases are emit- One, two or three arc sensors may be connected to the RA20
ted. A 1-second arc destroys most of the switchgear & may Arc Fault Monitors as depicted in the single line application
cause a fire, injury to personnel & damage to property. diagrams (Figures 1, 2 & 3).
The over-current caused by an arc is, due to its resistance, Figures 1 & 2 show the trip signals being used to trip the
lower than the over-current caused by a “metallic” short circuit. feeder circuit breaker in the event of an arc fault occurring at
The over-current caused by the arc may also be lower than the any sensor provided the overcurrent relay starter contact is
protection start current when energising circuits or starting picked up. In these applications the overcurrent check stage
large motors. The consequence of these conditions is that a is optional as the consequence of a single feeder outage is
protection system based solely on over-current detection can- less than the loss of an entire bus.
not effectively discriminate between normal system currents &
an arc fault condition: Figure 3 shows an application where a single RA20 is applied
for the protection of the Cable box, CT chamber & CB

chamber using three sensors. In this configuration one arc
trip output is used to trip the feeder circuit breaker in the
event of an arc fault in the cable box / CT chamber. The
second trip output is set for independent operation to trip
the bus breaker (bus overcurrent check not shown), in the
event of an arc fault in the CB chamber.
Existing switchgear applications

50/51
The existing overcurrent relay protecting the feeder will
normally provide an independent output contact associated
with the start current setting of the relay. That is, an output
contact that will close when a phase or earth fault current is
detected above the threshold which starts the internal relay
timers.
RA30
An Arc Fault Monitor relay RA20 is installed on the RA20

switchgear panel adjacent to the protection relay. The RA20
is specifically designed for simple retrofit to existing panels
& requires only a single 31mm mounting hole to be drilled.
The RA20 fits through this hole, the designation label
supplied with the unit positioned & the retention shroud Fig1. Single arc sensor - Cable box only
fitted. Refer Figure 14 & 16. (Optional overcurrent check stage depicted)
RA30 optical arc sensors are fitted in the cable termination

box & CT chamber as depicted in figure 2.
The overcurrent relay starter contact may optionally be wired
in series with the arc fault detection trip output contact as
depicted in figure 6. The resulting “AND” function trip output
is wired to trip the breaker in ~15ms in the event that an arc
fault is detected while the overcurrent start element is 50/51
picked up. RA30
The second arc trip & fail alarm contacts may be employed
for interface to a SCADA system for fault reporting.
New switchgear applications RA30

For new switchgear installations a modern numeric feeder
protection relay is likely to be employed which will have RA20
numerous programming & configuration options.
The basic concept is the same as for the existing switchgear

application described above except that the additional
features & flexibility of modern feeder protection relay Fig2. Two arc sensors - Cable box & CT chamber
allows improved system integration. (Optional overcurrent check stage depicted)
Trip bus CB(s)
This may be achieved by using the second arc trip output
contact to interface to a programmable status input on the
feeder protection relay. Depending on the model of
protection relay being used this input may be programmed RA30
1S30
to provide an alarm message on the HMI, time stamped

event record available via its communications link.
50/51
Where this level of system integration is employed the RA20
does not need to be mounted on the front panel as the 1S30
RA30
alarm indications are available on the feeder relay. Remote
reset of the RA20 LED is achieved by momentary interruption
of the power supply using a SCADA controlled series contact.
The DIN rail mounting option is a convenient alternative in
this situation. 1S30
RA30
RA30
Fig3. Two arc sensors - Cable box & CT chamber

Independent trip to CB (Optional overcurrent check stage
depicted) One arc sensor - CB chamber
Independent trip to bus breaker
(Bus overcurrent check stage not shown)

Busbar Applications
Combined Bus Bar & Switchgear Arc Protection
Figure 4 shows an application where a single RA20 is applied
for the protection of the Cable box & CT chamber plus the CB 50/51
RA20
chamber & bus chamber using three sensors.
In this configuration one arc trip output is used to trip the

feeder circuit breaker in the event of an arc fault in the cable
box / CT chamber. The second trip output is set for
independent operation to trip the bus breaker (bus
overcurrent check stage not shown), in the event of an arc
fault in the CB chamber or bus chamber.
RA30 RA30
Trip bus CB(s)
RA30
1S30
RA30
1S30
50/51
50/51
50/51 50/51
RA30
1S30
1S20
RA20
Fig 4. One arc sensor - Cable box / CT chamber Fig5. One, two or three arc sensors located in the bus
Independent trip to CB chamber
Two arc sensors - CB chamber & bus chamber
Independent trip to bus breaker
(bus overcurrent check stage not shown) Operation
Bus Bar Arc Protection
Figure 5 depicts how the RA30 may also be applied for the Operation Indicator
protection of bus bars. The number of sensors in the bus A single tri-colour LED is integrated into the front panel reset
chamber is dictated by the switchgear design and the length push button to provide the following status indications:
of switchboard.
System healthy Green solid
In most indoor metal clad switchgear the bus bar chamber is
a continuous chamber between panels only broken into RA30 Power up test OK Flash green 3 times
segregated sections at a bus section breaker & as such the
strategic placement of one or two arc sensors in each bus Solid red for 2s followed by:
bar chamber run is normally adequate.
Arc fault trip
Alternate red & green until reset.
Some indoor metal clad switchgear may segregate the bus
chamber of each panel from the next via insulated bus
chamber side barriers per panel, if this is the case then each RA30 Arc Sensor 1 service Orange solid
bus chamber per panel would need to be monitored by at

least one arc sensor. RA30 Arc Sensor 2 or 3 service Orange flashing
In large enclosures the arc sensors should be placed at RA30 Arc Sensor continuous pick up Alternate orange & red.
approximately 5m intervals.
Arc sensor circuit supervision

The RA30 Arc Sensor is the heart of the system & supervision
of circuit continuity is critical for correct operation. To
monitor the integrity of the wiring between the RA30 arc

sensor & RA20 Arc Monitor, a continuous 2mA supervision Arc detection reset time (effect of multiple arc trips)
current flows between the units. The RA20 alarm contact A delay of 2s is required to reset the RA20 after an initial arc
will drop out after a 1s time delay if it fails to detect this sensor trip. Subsequent arc detection will cause the trip
current. output contacts to re-operate & reset the time delays
described under Configuration Switch Settings.
Where a fault is detected on the Arc Sensor 1 circuit the
front panel LED will give a solid orange indication. Independent trip output contacts
The RA20 may be set using configuration switch 3 for both
Where a fault is detected on Arc Sensor 2 or 3 circuits the trip output contacts to pick up when an arc is detected by
front panel LED will give a flashing orange indication. any sensor input. Alternatively arc sensor 1 can be linked to
trip contact 1 & arc sensor 2 (& 3 if fitted), to trip contact 2.
Where a fault is detected on Arc Sensor 1 & 2 or 1& 3 circuits This function may be applied where an arc fault detected in
the front panel LED will give a solid orange indication. the cable box is directed to trip the feeder circuit breaker
while an arc fault in the bus chamber is to be directed to trip
Arc Sensor Function the bus.
The RA30 is an optical sensor that responds to the flash of
light emitted during the incidence of an arcing fault. Onset Arc sensor continuously picked up
of the light flash & detection by the RA30 occurs in a few High ambient light levels may cause a RA30 to be
milliseconds. continuously picked up. This condition could occur for
example if the CB cable box cover was left open in very high
When an arc is detected, the resistance presented by the ambient light level conditions. A non arc fault over-current
RA30 drops to a level where the current flow increases to pick up would then result in an arc fault trip operation.
approximately 20mA. This increased current flow is
instantaneously detected by the RA20 and its trip output To avoid possible mal-operation due to this condition, the
contacts close. Refer to the RA30 Technical catalogue sheet RA20 is designed to automatically disable the arc fault
for further details. tripping function if the RA30 sensor is picked up for >10s.
The RA20 alarm contact will be set & the front LED flash
Arc fault tripping using current check alternate orange & red until the ambient light level problem
Fast operation of a tripping scheme usually results in is corrected. The RA20 will then perform an arc sensor test
reduced system security. The arc detection method can function and automatically reset.
however, combine the RA20 optical detection technique with
a traditional overcurrent method to maximize system
security particularly for bus bar protection schemes. Both Configuration
conditions must coexist for the trip condition to be met as
depicted in figure 6.
arc FAULT OVER-CURRENT RELAY

CB 3 Pole OC + EF
SENSOR MONITOR
arc FAULT TRIP INITIATE
Fig6. Key components required to implement an Arc Fault

Protection scheme with an overcurrent check stage to Fig7. RA20 rear view showing configuration switches
enhance system security
Configuration switch
The application examples in figures 1 to 5 utilize this
The configuration switches are accessible to the user by first
concept for enhanced system security in that both the RA20
unplugging the electronic module from the terminal base as
AND the OC 50 starter contact must be picked up for a CB
shown in Figure 7.
trip signal to be initiated. As the arc fault trip contact closes
considerably faster than the overcurrent relay starter
1: ARC SENSOR 2 ON OFF
element picks up, the CB trip time will be dictated by the
2: LATCHING TRIP LED ON OFF
overcurrent relay performance. 3: INDEPENDENT ARC TRIP ON OFF
4: LATCHING TRIP CONTACTS ON OFF
Low current arcing faults 5: ARC SENSOR 3 ON OFF
Arcing faults can occur at low current levels & it is possible
for the over-current starter element to be set above this Configuration switch settings
level. To avoid this problem & obtain very fast clearance The internal wiring label identifies the position of the
(<10ms), of an arc fault, the RA20 arc fault trip contact may following switch functions:
be wired directly to the breaker operate coil. It should be
noted that this method may lead to reduced system security. Switch 1: Arc sensor 2
ON - Arc Sensor 2 fitted
OFF - Arc Sensor 2 not fitted

Switch 2: Arc fault trip indication LED reset
ON - Latching until manually reset
OFF - Automatic self reset (Extinguish) after 4
hours will also reset contacts set for latching
function
Switch 3: Independent arc trip output contacts
ON - Arc Sensor 1 activates trip output contact 1 &
Arc sensor 2 or 3 activates trip output
contact 2
OFF - Arc Sensor 1, 2 or 3 activate both trip
outputs
Switch 4: Arc fault trip output contact reset
ON - Latching – Reset with trip LED
OFF - Self reset after 2s
Switch 5: Arc sensor 3
ON - Arc Sensor 3 fitted
OFF - Arc Sensor 3 not fitted

Wiring Diagram
1 N/O arc
Fault trip
contact 2
2
3 N/O arc
Fault trip
contact 1
4
5 N/C Fail
alarm
P/U when
6 healthy
arc
Sensor 3
arc 2&3
arc
8 Sensor 2
COMMON
9
arc 1 *
10 *arc
Sensor 1
arc
11 Sensor 1
12 DC AUXILIARY SUPPLY
Fig8:. RA20 Socket Terminal Layout viewed from the front when un-plugged from the main housing
Note: * Always wire Arc Sensor 1. Arc Sensors 2 & 3 are optional.
Protection
+
Vx 12 11
10 Arc fault Overcurrent

relay relay
9
Arc 1
(Must be wired)
5 6
Fail
Alarm
Control
+
I>start
1 2
CB Aux Switch
Trip Coil
RA20 52 - a
I>
52
T
50/51
RA20 application Figure 1 diagram - Circuits shown in de-energised condition
Fig9. RA20 Wiring application diagram (Refers to Figure 1 Line Diagram)

Protection
+
Vx 12 1
1
8
9
Arc
2 1 Arc fault Overcurrent
0 Relay
relay
9 or
Arc 11
1 wired)
(Must be
5 6
Fail
Alarm
1 2
Contro Trip Bus CB
l
+ Signal
I>star
3 4 t
CB Aux
Trip
RA20 Switch
52 - a Coil
I>
52
T
50/51
RA20 application Figure 2 diagram - Circuits shown in de-energised condition

Protection
+
V 1 1
x 2 1
8
9
Arc Arc
3 2
1 Arc Overcurren
0 fault
rela t rela
y y
9 or
Arc 11
(Must be
1
wired) 5 6
Fail
Alar
1 2 m
Contro Trip Bus CB
l
+ Signal
I>star
3 4 t
CB Aux Trip
RA2 52 -
Switch Coil
0 I a
> 5
2T
50/5
1
RA20 application Figure 3 diagram - Circuits shown in de-energised
condition
Mounting Options
The RA20 is available in two versions:
1. A surface mount version which has a separate reset

button & LED indicator on the front panel. The
advantage of this version is the lower cost, and to
offer a solution where front panel space is limited.
2. A panel mount version which has a combined reset

button & LED indication. The advantage of this version
is that it can be either panel or surface mounted, with
a high-visibility indication from the large LED button.
Surface mount version

This version is suitable for location in the rear of a Fig14. RA20 through-hole panel mount version
cubicle. It may be surface mounted as shown in figures
12 & 19. It may also be DIN rail mounting when the Slide-out cable Maximum panel
optional DIN Rail Mounting Kit is fitted. Refer figures 13, entry points thickness 3mm
3 on one side
18 & 21. 1 at each end
Top & Bottom rear

Terminal Block
retaining screws
Retention
Shroud
Fig12. RA20 surface mount version front view

Slide-out cable
Fig15. Panel mount version side view
entry points
3 on one side
Top & bottom rear
1 at each end
Terminal Block
Retaining screws
Serial no. &

6
5
Rating label on
Module side
4
3
2
1
)
B :
N
for panel
A /
S
C
( C
2
K D
mount version
0 V
2 0
5
S
1 -1
6
3
:
X
U
A
Remove for
Rear cable
Entry options
Remove for
two M4 or 4BA
mounting screws
Fig13. Surface mount version side view
Panel mount version

This version is suitable for mounting on the front panel of
a cubicle or door. This is achieved using a 31mm diameter
hole in the panel adjacent to the protection relay as
depicted in figures 14, 15 & 16.
This version may also be surface mounted by reversing

the terminal block retaining screws. It may also be DIN
rail mounting when the optional DIN Rail Mounting Kit is
fitted. Refer figures 17, 18 & 21.

Panel Mount Version
RA20
Fig16. Panel mounting cut out detail
RA20
Fig17. Surface mounting detail
RA20
Fig18. DIN rail mounting detail

Surface Mount Version
RA20
Fig19. Surface mounting detail
RA20
Fig20. DIN rail mounting detail
Fig21. DIN rail clip fitting detail

Manual reset
Technical Data Press front reset button or interrupt power supply to reset
the unit.
Auxiliary Supply burden (at 110V DC)
Output contacts
Monitoring mode: Less than 4W
Arc fault trip contacts: 2 N/O
Arc fault detected: Less than 10W for 2s
Fail alarm: 1 N/C for the power supply / CPU
fail
Auxiliary Supply
Normally picked up & drops out to
3 options are available for the auxiliary supply: signal an alarm condition.
24/32/48V AC or DC nominal
110/125V AC or DC nominal Output contact ratings IEC60255-0-2
220/240/250V AC or DC nominal
Carry continuously 5A AC or DC
Make & carry 0.5s 20A AC or DC
Operate Time
L/R ≤ 40ms & V ≤
Arc fault trip contacts guaranteed to pick up in less than 0.2s 30A AC or DC
300V
10ms including bounce. Typical operate time is 7ms. AC resistive 1,250VA
Break capacity AC inductive 250VA @ PF ≤ 0.4
I ≤ 5A & V ≤ 300V DC resistive 75W
30W @ L/R ≤ 40ms
DC inductive
50W @ L/R ≤ 10ms
106 at maximum
Minimum number of operations
load
0.5W limit
Minimum recommended load
10mA/5V
Transient overvoltage IEC60255-5

Between all terminals & earth 5kV 1.2/50us 0.5J
Between independent circuits
5kV 1.2/50us 0.5J
without damage or flashover
Insulation coordination IEC60255-5

CRO trace showing nominal operation time of the trip
contacts at 7ms. First contact touch at 6.25ms and fully Between all terminals & earth 2.0kV RMS for 1 minute
closed by 7.25ms. Operation in <10ms is considered Between independent circuits 2.0kV RMS for 1 minute
acceptable as overcurrent relay operate time is ~25ms. Across normally open contacts 1.0kV RMS for 1 minute
7SR11 / 12 / 210 / 220: 50 Instantaneous Overcurrent Auxiliary supply IEC60255-11

Element – Operate Time Allowable breaks / dips in supply
Operate and Reset Time Collapse to zero from nominal voltage ≤ 20ms
Attribute Value High frequency disturbance - IEC60255-22-1 Class III

0 to 2 xIs: 30 ms,  10ms 2.5kV 1MHz common mode
No mal operation
tbasic Element basic operate time 1.0kV 1MHz differential mode
0 to 5 xIs: 20 ms,  10ms
Electrostatic discharge - IEC60255-22-2 Class III
7SR11 / 12 / 210 / 220: 50AFD Arc Flash Detector 6kV contact discharge No mal operation
Element – Operate Time
Operate and Reset Time Radio frequency interference IEC60255-22-3 Class III
Attribute Value 10V/m, 80 TO 1,000MHz No mal operation
tbasic Element basic operate time 10ms – 16ms Fast transient IEC60255-22-4 Class III
4kV, 5/50ns, 100KHz repetitive No mal operation
AFD Zone operate time
top 15ms – 25ms
(Flash & 50AFD)
Conducted RFI IEC60255-22-6 Class III
Repeatability ± 10ms 10V, 0.15 to 80MHz No mal operation
Arc sensor inputs Temperature range IEC68-2-1/2

Two or three independent arc sensor inputs for type RA30 Operating: -5 to +55oC
arc sensors. Storage: -25 to +75oC
Minimum arc duration Humidity IEC68-2-78

The minimum arc flash duration required to guarantee 40 oC & 93% RH non-condensing
operation of the output contacts is 1.25ms.
Case
Trip contact reset time ZA12 flush or DIN rail mount type, 12 M4 screw
Once operated, the trip output contacts will reset in 2 terminals, Plug-in module to facilitate easy wiring & fast
seconds as per the configuration switch 4 setting. change-over
7 X G 3 1 2 0 - □▲ □▲ □▲ 0 0 - 0 A A 0
▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
Arc Fault ||| | | | |
Protection Category ||| | | | |
Components Arc Protection 3 1 | | | | |
| | | | |
Device | | | | |
RA20 Arc Fault Monitor Relay 2 0 | | |
| | |
Sensor Inputs | | |
Two sensor inputs 2 | |
Three sensor inputs 3 | |
| |
Operating Voltage | |
24/32/48V AC or DC Nominal F |
110/125V AC or DC Nominal G |
220/240/250V AC or DC Nominal H |
|
Mounting |
Panel or Surface Mount, No DIN Rail kit. A
Panel or Surface Mount, With DIN Rail kit. B
Surface Mount only, No DIN Rail kit. C
Surface Mount, With DIN Rail kit. D

1.1.5.2 7XG3123 Arc Fault Interface Module
using an optical sensor & the signal input to a protection
device which also monitors the load current on the system. A
trip signal can be achieved in less than 10ms using arc
detection only or within 20ms when using overcurrent
check. This is considerably faster than a traditional IDMT
overcurrent relay & provides additional protection from the
onset of arcing faults with relatively low fault currents.
Arguably the greatest risk of arc fault damage exists at the
CB cable termination & in the CB chamber itself due to the
slow clearance times of the IDMT feeder protection. The CB
cable termination is particularly at risk to ingress of moisture
& rodent damage.
The problem of arc faults is most prevalent in older metal
clad switchgear which already has operational protection
systems.
RA23 Arc Fault Interface Module

The RA23 (ReyArc23) Arc Fault Interface Module (Arc
Module), described in this document is designed to connect
Features one or two optical fault sensors to a protection relay status
input.
Refer to the RA30 Catalogue Sheet for details on the arc fault
 Compact, simple, rugged and economic design
sensor ordering options.
 Simple wiring and DIN rail mounting
 Interface for one or two RA30 arc fault sensors
 High speed arc fault tripping output to interface
with protection relay status inputs
Switchgear Applications
 Apply to initiate IEC 61850 GOOSE messaging of arc
fault events Switchgear ARC Protection
 Continuous arc fault sensor supervision Risk of arc fault damage exists at the CB cable termination &
 Arc fault pick up and supervision healthy indication in the CB chamber itself. The CB cable termination is
 24, 32, 48, 110, 125, 220, 240 and 250V DC particularly at risk to ingress of moisture & rodent damage.
auxiliary versions RA30 Arc Sensors may be located as depicted in the single
line application diagrams (Figure 1).
Modern numeric feeder protection relays provide internal
Introduction logic functions that may be programmed to interface with
the RA23 Module. Refer to figure 6 for details.
Depending on the model of protection relay being used this
Medium voltage switchgear is a key element in the power input may be programmed to provide not only a high speed
supply chain. Existing protection systems operate effectively arc fault trip output but also an alarm message on the HMI
under most circumstances, but they are too slow to handle and time stamped event record via its communications link.
arcing short circuits. This level of system integration allows the RA23 Module to
Arcing faults can occur as a result of insulation breakdown be back of panel mounted with the alarm indications
due to equipment age & / or poor maintenance. programmed to be displayed on the protection relay front
The degree of damage caused by arcing depends principally on panel.
the duration of the arc. If an arc lasts only 100ms, the switch-
gear needs to be checked & the insulation resistance measured Cable box protection
before power can be re-established. With a 200ms arc, the
Figure 1 shows the trip signal being used to trip the feeder
power supply will be interrupted; the switchgear must be
circuit breaker in the event of an arc fault occurring in the
checked; power is re-established only after minor repairs. In
cable box provided the overcurrent relay starter logic is
the event of a 500ms arc the supply is interrupted, metal parts
picked up.
of the switchgear are destroyed & poisonous gases are emit-
ted. A 1s arc destroys most of the switchgear & may cause a
CT Chamber protection
fire, injury to personnel & damage to property.
The over-current caused by an arc is, due to its resistance, In circuit breakers where the CT is screened from the cable
lower than the over-current caused by a “metallic” short circuit. box a second sensor and ARC Module may be deployed as
For moderate arc fault currents the trip time of the over- per figure 1.
current IDMT stage will be too slow.
The consequence of these conditions is that a protection sys-
tem based solely on over-current detection cannot effectively
protect the switchgear against an internal arcing fault.
Arc Fault Protection

Arc fault protection is a technique employed for the fast
clearance of arcing faults on Busbars & within metal clad
switchgear & associated cable boxes. The arc is detected
Multiple RA23 Interface Modules
Figure 3 depicts multiple RA23 Modules connected to a
single status input. This scheme may be employed where
more than one sensor is required to protect a single arc
protection zone.
50/51 Multiple ARC Fault Interface

50/51 O/C Protection Modules on a single status input
ARC Fault
O/C Protection Interface Module
1
ARC
1 1 1
2 2 2
PW R ARC ARC ARC
PW R PW R PW R
3 3 3
4 4 4
ARC Flash Detection
RA30 Arc sensors
Fig3. Multiple Arc Modules per status input

Fig1. Cable box and CT chamber protection
Operation
Circuit Breaker Chamber Protection
Arc fault occurring within the CB chamber must be cleared by
the upstream breaker. This may be achieved as depicted in Front panel layout
figure 2. Note the optional use of GOOSE messaging over Two LED’s are integrated into the front panel to provide the
IEC61850 to communicate an arc fault condition to the following status indications:
incoming feeder protection relays. Programmable logic may GREEN Auxiliary supply indication
then be applied in these relays to open the appropriate up- A green LED is continuously illuminated to indicate presence of
stream circuit breakers to clear the fault. the auxiliary supply and normal operation including
Where trip signalling is achieved using conventional wiring, supervision of the RA30 sensor(s).
the trip output connection should be terminated in close RED Arc fault pick-up
proximity to the ARC Module and screened cable employed to A red LED is illuminated when an optical signal above the
transfer the trip signal to the up-stream protection relay status detection threshold is present. This LED will self reset when the
input. optical signal falls below the detection threshold with a
minimum dwell time of ~2s.
Arc trip This feature is useful during commissioning and routine tests
O/C to
signal to verify correct operation of the system. Figure 14 provide a
TRIP incoming
relay
SIGNALING feeder(s) tabulation of the LED and output conditions to allow diagnosis
Hard on of the RA30 operating status.
OPTIONS
wired H IEC6
o wi GO
ar 185
r GO sig
re mes
d 0OS
OSE nal
d sagE FLYING LEADS TO
PROTECTION RELAY
e STATUS INPUTS
ARC TRIP SUPERVISION
ARC Flash
Detection 1
ARC
50
O/C
/5
Protect
1 1
ion A
R
C
PWR
P
W
3R
4 3
Fig4. RA23 Module front panel layout
Arc Sensor continuously picked up

High ambient light levels may cause a RA30 to be continuously
Fig2. CB chamber protection Arc trip signal to BUS picked up. This condition could occur for example if the CB
overcurrent check stage cable box cover was left open in very high ambient light level

conditions. A non arc fault over-current pick up would then
result in an arc fault trip operation. 0V +VE
To avoid possible mal-operation due to this condition, the
RA23 module is designed to automatically disable the arc fault
tripping function, if the RA30 sensor is picked up for >500ms.
Arc Fault status input

The RA23 Module will then disable the healthy supervision
O/C Protection
signal and the front power LED will flash until the ambient
light level problem is corrected. The ARC Module will then
perform an arc sensor test function and automatically reset.
ARC TRIP
PWR
Arc Detection reset time (effect of multiple arc trips)
A delay of >500ms is required to reset the ARC Module after an SUPERVISION
RA23
initial arc sensor trip. Subsequent arc detection will cause the
ARC
trip contact to re-operate.
RA30
Arc Sensor function Optical
The RA30 is an optical sensor that responds to the flash of light Sensors
emitted during the incidence of an arcing fault. Onset of the
light flash and detection by the RA30 occurs in a few ms.
When an arc is detected, the resistance presented by the RA30
drops to a level where the current flow increases to
approximately 20mA. This increased current flow is detected
by the RA23 Module which responds in <1ms to close a solid
state contact to activate the arc fault input on the protection
relay as depicted in figures 6 and 7.
Fig5. Key components required to implement an Arc fault
Arc Sensor supervision Protection scheme with an overcurrent check stage to
The RA30 Arc Sensor is the heart of the system and supervision enhance system security
of the circuit continuity is critical for correct operation. To
monitor the integrity of the wiring between the RA30 arc The application examples in figures 1 and 2 utilize this concept
sensor and the RA23 Module, a continuous 2mA supervision for enhanced system security in that both the RA23 Module
current flows between the units. A supervision healthy signal is AND the OC 50 starter logic must be picked up for a CB trip
output to the protection relay status input. This signal will be signal to be initiated. As the arc fault trip contact picks up
disabled after an ~1s time delay if the supervision current considerably faster than the overcurrent relay starter element,
signal is lost. the CB trip time will be dictated by the overcurrent relay
An arc sensor fault will also be reported if an incorrect number performance.
of sensors are fitted to the RA23 Module as follows:
No arc sensor(s) connected
1 sensor connected to an RA23 Module specified for 2 sensors
Arc sensor fault indication;

Where a fault is detected on the Arc Sensor circuit the front
panel power LED will flash continuously until the fault is
rectified.
Arc fault tripping using current check

Fast operation of a tripping scheme usually results in
reduced system security. The arc detection method can
however, combine the optical detection technique with a
traditional overcurrent method to maximize system security.
Both conditions must coexist for the trip condition to be met
as depicted in figures 6 - 7.

Relay Logic & Wiring
Protection relay logic
For the current check scheme to function correctly a protection relay with the following attributes is required:
Attribute Parameter Necessity

Programmable relay logic AND gates Mandatory
High speed status input <5ms pick up Mandatory
High speed current check
<15ms at 2x setting Mandatory
element
Programmable front panel Arc trip indication Desirable

indication Supervision status Desirable
IEC61850 for trip
GOOSE messaging Optional
signaling
Fig6. Reydisp manager logic programming
A suitable relay available with all of the above attributes is the Reyrolle 7SR21/22 platform multi -function feeder manager.
A screen shot of the Reydisp Manager logic programming software is shown in figure 6.
Protection
+
ARC Fault 50/51

Interface Overcurrent
Module relay
Vx 2 1
Supervision
Status Input
W
1S30 Sensors
IEC61850 Port
3
Arc Fault
4 Status Input
B
Non polarized
parallel connection
ARC Fault
Pick-Up
Pick-Up
O/C
Internal Relay Logic

Control
+
AND
Arc Fault Trip Output
CB Aux Switch Trip Coil

52 - a
I> 52
T
ARC Fault Interface Module application diagram - Circuits shown in de-energised condition
Fig7. RA23 Module application diagram

Relay Logic & Wiring
Enclosure dimensions
Flying Leads
2 Metres 1
ARC - AD
2
Arc
+VE
Fig10. RA23 Module depicting four (4) front screw

4
2
RA30 Inputs
ARC
terminals and two (2) top entry flying leads

0V
PWR
Terminations
O/C Protection
Arc Fault status input
3 4x M4 screw terminals suitable for heavy duty ring lugs.
Terminal 1: DC negative
Terminal 2: DC positive
4 Terminal 3: RA30 arc fault in (Non polarized)
Terminal 4: RA30 arc fault in (Non polarized)
2x 2 metre flying leads with 0.75 sq. mm conductor.
Blue lead: Arc fault trip output - negative
White lead: Supervision status output - negative
Mounting
Fig8. RA23 Module dimensional details DIN rail mounting of multiple DIN rail modules allows for a
compact installation close to the protection relay status
Arc Sensor inputs inputs. Wiring should be kept as short as practical to
One or two optical arc fault sensors type RA30 may be minimize the circuit resistance and possibility of noise on the
connected to the RA23 Module. Refer to the RA30 Catalogue protection relay status input.
Sheet for mounting options.
The number of sensors specified in the RA23 ordering code
must be connected to ensure correct operation of the sensor
supervision function.
If only one sensor is connected to the two sensor version the
supervision output will indicate a sensor fail condition.
If two sensors are connected to the one sensor version the
supervision output will indicate a sensor fail condition.
Fig11. Array of 7 x RA23 modules
Optical sensitivity
~10,000 Lux* for white light at normal incidence to the
detector window(s) as depicted in figure 12:
Front Light
Detector Source
Rear 1S30 [A] & [B]
Light
Detector models
Fig9. RA30 Arc Fault Sensor – front and back 1S30 [B]
models only
DIN rain mount enclosure
The ARC Fault Interface Module is enclosed in a compact
enclosure sealed with thermally conductive potting
compound. The module is designed for DIN rail mounting. Fig12. RA30 Arc Sensor
As the illuminace of diffuse ambient sunlight falls in the

range 5,000 to 10,000 Lux, this will not normally be
sufficient to trigger the RA23 Module. The luminous
intensity from the sun at noon at the equator however is

~100,000 Lux which will be sufficient to trigger the RA23 Optical Arc fault detection operate time
Module so measures should be made to avoid this situation. An arc fault trip signal is output in less than 1ms.
Detector spectral response Output circuit

100% Dedicated non-isolated outputs are provided to connect to
overcurrent protection relay status inputs as shown in figure
90% 6. Upon detection of light intensity greater than the pick–up
Relative Sensitivity
threshold a solid state switch connects the 0V rail to the

80% relay status input.
70% Output ratings IEC60255-0-2

The Arc Module outputs are designed for connection to
60% dedicated protection class binary status inputs only. They are
not suitable for direct tripping applications of auxiliary relays
50% or circuit breaker coils.
600 700 800 900 1,000 1,100 1,200 The following ratings are conservative and are suitable for
Wavelength (nm) application with status inputs employed on many modern
Fig13. Arc detector spectral response protection relays such as the Reyrolle 7SR1 and 7SR2
platforms.
* Due to the relatively high sensitivity of the detector to IR
wavelengths the type of light source employed for sensitivity Supervision output
testing will have a major effect on the results obtained.
Open circuit voltage: 125% of nominal
Sensitivity testing should therefore be conducted using a 50-
Maximum current: 15mA for 20 ms
75W halogen lamp with an integrated aluminum reflector.
4mA continuous
System supervision
Arc trip output
A CPU software watchdog monitors the system and in the
event of an abnormal condition will automatically perform a Open circuit voltage: 125% of nominal
soft restart. Maximum current: 15mA for 20 ms
4mA continuous
Should this restart not clear the abnormal condition the Auxiliary supply IEC60255-11
system will revert to a safe mode with the outputs disabled. Allowable breaks / dips in supply
This will cause the self supervision healthy signal to be lost Collapse to zero from nominal ≤ 20ms
and the abnormal condition detected and reported by the voltage
protection relay via it’s ARC supervision status input.
A front panel green LED is illuminated on the RA23 Module High Frequency disturbance IEC60255-22-1 Class III
under normal conditions. This LED is switched off in safe 2.5kV 1MHz common mode
No mal operation
mode. 1.0kV 1MHz differential mode
Minimum Arc duration Electrostatic discharge IEC60255-22-2 Class III

The minimum arc “flash” duration required to guarantee 8kV air discharge No mal operation
operation of the output contacts is 0.5ms.
Radio frequency interference IEC60255-22-3
Trip signal reset time 10V/m, 80 TO 1,000MHz No mal operation
Once operated the trip output signal is self reset with a
minimum dwell time of 100 to 120ms. Fast transient IEC60255-22-4
4kV, 5/50ns, 100KHz repetitive No mal operation
Technical Data Insulation coordination IEC60255-5

5kV 1.2/50us 0.5J
Impulse voltage withstand test
Auxiliary supply burden (At 110V DC) 2.0kV RMS for 1
Dielectric test
minute
Monitoring mode: Less than 0.75W
Arc fault detected: Less than 1.5W for 2s
Between all terminals and earth
The earth point is defined as the DIN rail mounting bracket
Auxiliary supply There is no isolation between any of the output terminals or flying
The Arc Module is suitable for use with the following leads. They should be considered as the same group.
nominal auxiliary supplies. A tolerance of -20% to +20%
must be maintained to ensure correct operation and to avoid Conducted RFI IEC60255-22-6
thermal damage. 10V, 0.15 to 80MHz No mal operation
Vx
24V DC Temperature range IEC68-2-1/2
32V DC
Operating: -10 to +55oC
48V DC
Storage: -25 to +75oC
110V DC
125V DC
220V DC Humidity IEC68-2-78
240V DC 40 oC and 93% RH non condensing
250V DC

Technical Data (Contd)
Fault Condition RED LED Trip Output GREEN LED Supervise Output
One (1) Sensor open circuit OFF OFF FLASH OFF
Two (2) Sensors open circuit OFF OFF FLASH OFF
One (1) Sensor short circuit on
OFF OFF FLASH OFF
power up
Two (2) Sensors short circuit on
OFF OFF FLASH OFF
power up
Arc trip >500ms (Continuous
ON OFF FLASH OFF
arc pick up)
OFF for
Arc trip current limit exceeded ON for 2s OFF for 2s OFF for 2s
100ms
Supervise output current limit
OFF OFF FLASH - PAUSE - FLASH OFF
exceeded
Power supply fail OFF OFF OFF OFF
CPU fail OFF OFF OFF OFF
Single sensor software Three (3) flashes at
identification startup
Dual sensor software Four (4) flashes at
identification startup
Fig14. Arc Module status table


7 X G 3 1 2 3 - □▲ □▲ A 0 0 - 0 A A 0
▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
Reyarc – Arc ||| | | |
Fault Protection Category ||| | | |
Components Arc Protection 3 1 | | | |
| | | |
Device | | | |
RA23 Arc Fault Interface Module 2 3 | |
| |
Sensor Inputs | |
One sensor input 1 |
Two sensor inputs 2 |
|
Operating Voltage |
24V DC A
32V DC B
48V DC C
110V DC D
125V DC E
220V DC F
240V DC G
250V DC H

1.1.5.3 7XG3124 Arc Fault Monitor Relay
Arc Fault – Cause and Effect

Medium voltage switchgear and associated bus bars are a key
element in the power supply chain. Existing protection systems
operate effectively and quickly under most fault types but arcing
faults may lead to slow operating times.
Due to the resistive nature of an arcing fault the associated fault
current is likely to be lower than for a bolted short circuit.
Instantaneous overcurrent protection is set to operate above
network energisation currents and motor starting currents, the
Fig1. RA24 Arc Fault Module fault current due to an arc may be lower than this.
The consequence of these conditions is that a protection system
based solely on over-current detection cannot effectively dis-
Features criminate between normal system currents and an arc fault
condition:
 Up to 16 arc fault sensors
 Moderate to low arc fault currents may not operate the
 2 x High speed arc fault tripping duty contacts
instantaneous trip stage of a standard over-current re-
 Trip indication LED for each arc fault sensor
lay
 Arc sensor supervision with sensor fail LED for each zone
 For a Moderate to low arc fault current the trip time of
 10Base-T / 100Base-TX port
the over-current IDMT stage will be too slow
 Optional 100Base-FX port
 System configuration via web browser
Arcing faults in metal clad switchgear and associated Bus bars
 IEC61850 GOOSE capable
may occur for a number of reasons:
 Up to 16 independent arc fault SARC logic nodes
 Self-supervision watchdog with healthy LED and alarm
 defective or ageing insulating materials
 Wide range auxiliary supply
 poor bus or cable connections
 poor maintenance
 human error
Introduction  ingress of moisture, dust or vermin
 abnormal service conditions
Arc fault protection is a technique employed for the clearance of
arcing faults on low voltage panels, MCC’s, BUS bars and within The degree of damage caused by arcing depends principally on
metal clad switchgear and associated cable boxes. the duration of the arc. If an arc lasts only 100ms, the switch-
Conventional current based protection techniques are at times gear needs to be checked and the insulation resistance meas-
challenged by the nature of arcing faults, and can result in slow ured before power can be re-established. With a 200ms arc, the
protection clearance times. Slow protection clearance times power supply will be interrupted; the switchgear must be
increase the risk to nearby personnel and increase the degree of checked; power is re-established only after minor repairs. In the
damage to plant and equipment. event of a 500ms arc the supply is interrupted, metal parts of
By employing an optical detection technique, Arc Fault Protec- the switchgear are destroyed and poisonous gases are emitted.
tion results in fast clearance of arcing faults. A 1s arc destroys most of the switchgear and may cause a fire,
With the added benefit of IEC61850 Goose Messaging, the RA24 injury to personnel and damage to property.
(ReyArc24) is a scalable solution capable of being employed in
the most challenging applications with reduced engineering Arc Flash Detection Principle
overhead. An arcing fault results in an intense and rapid discharge of light
With the flexibility of the IEC 61850 standard ARC tripping with from the arcing source. The light discharged from an arcing fault
current checking or ARC tripping with operational interlocks are will typically be several thousand times normal ambient lighting
able to be implemented with ease. levels.
The RA24 arc Fault Detection system optically senses the pres-
ence of an arc by the means of RA30 optical sensors connected
to the RA24 monitor.
Very fast ARC detection is achieved using this technique, and

protection operation times of <10ms are achievable.
Arc Fault Protection with Current Check

For system security purposes, the optical ARC detection may also
be supervised by an external Instantaneous Current Check ele-
Fig2. Energy release due to electrical arcing faults ment to confirm fault detection.

ARC FLASH ed sections at a bus section breaker and as such the strategic
OPTICAL DETECTION
placement of one or two arc sensors in each bus bar chamber
&
ARC FLASH DETECTED
TRIP BREAKER run is normally adequate.
O/C PICK UP
(ANSI 50 element) Some indoor metal clad switchgear may segregate the bus
chamber of each panel from the next via insulated bus chamber
Fig3. High speed AND logic employed to discriminate an arc
side barriers per panel, if this is the case then each bus chamber
flash fault
per panel would need to be monitored by at least one arc sen-
sor.
Integration with Reyrolle Overcurrent Relays Isolating switches between bus bar sections need to also be
The Reyrolle 7SR11, 7SR12, 7SR210 and 7SR220 overcurrent considered and appropriate tripping zones created to ensure
relays have a dedicated Arc Fault Detector protection function isolation of the faulted section.
(50AFD). This function uses a time optimised algorithm to check In large enclosures the arc sensors should be placed at approxi-
an arc flash input against a current input for the fastest possible mately 5m intervals. RA30 arc sensors are also available with
operation time in the event of an arc fault. dual optical detectors to allow detection of an arc in both direc-
tions.
50AFD The intense light produced by an arcing fault is strong enough to
Disabled
be picked up on by the sensors by its reflection off the switch-
Enabled gear walls. Therefore, direct line of sight of the fault is not usual-
ly required, making exact sensor placement less critical.
AFD Zone 1 Flash & AFD Zone 1
IEC61850
Arc Detector
AFD Zone 1 Flash
Substations, power plants and distributed energy resources all
Binary Input over the world are now implementing protection, control, au-
tomation and condition monitoring functions in Power Automa-
tion Systems (PAS) according to the IEC61850 Standard.
AFD Zone 6 Flash & AFD Zone 6
The open architecture and high speed GOOSE messaging availa-
AFD Zone 6 Flash ble through the implementation of IEC61850 make it an ideal
50AFD platform on which to base a scalable, selective and flexible arc
Setting fault protection scheme for any power system configuration.
IA
c The RA24 system provides a comprehensive solution for the
IB 50 AFD
protection of arcing faults in metal clad air insulated switchgear
IC 50 AFD PhA and bus bar systems based on the IEC61850 Standard.
50 AFD PhB The arc is detected using an optical sensor and the signal input
50 AFD PhC to the RA24 arc monitoring system. The RA24 generates
Fig4. 50AFD arc flash protection function logic IEC61850 GOOSE messages which are broadcast via the station
bus LAN. Intelligent IED’s are employed to subscribe to the arc
Arc fault protection compliments existing conventional overcur- fault GOOSE messages and generate tripping signals to the
rent and differential protection schemes and is easily imple- appropriate circuit breakers based on tripping logic that takes
mented into both new and existing installations. into account pre-determined system configurations. The RA24
may be connected directly to an IED using a cross over cable or
alternatively through a Station Bus Lan as per the typical IED
topology shown in Fig 5.
An IEC61850 based Arc Fault Solution will achieve reduced
engineering overhead compared to a conventional hard wired
alternative.
Fig5. Consequences of arcing faults
Arc Sensor Location

The number and location of optical arc sensors is dictated by the
switchgear and bus bar design and the length of the switch-
board.
In most indoor metal clad switchgear the bus bar chamber is a
continuous chamber between panels only broken into segregat-

Fig6. IEC 61850 based arc fault solution
Arc Configuration Screen

Functional Description The current status of each ARC detector is shown. To make the
web page follow the ARC status in real time, tick the Automatic
refresh button.
Web Based Configuration
Configuration of the RA24 Arc Fault Monitor is carried out using Arc Configuration:
a web browser interface as depicted in the screen shots shown in
figure 7 and 8. Connection is made between the RA24 and a PC Each individual ARC sensor can be configured as follows:
using a standard Category 5 patch cable with RJ45 electrical
plugs. ‘Armed’ or ‘Disabled’ by clicking on the state column
Connect the RA24 port P1 to the PC Ethernet LAN port. (Affects both IEC61850 Goose outputs and the hardware trip
Open a PC browser using the default IP address 192.168.0.220 contacts)
Ethernet Configuration Arc States

The current status of the device’s communications configuration The following list defines the possible ARC states:
is shown in the browser interface.  Disabled: Sensor not connected or disabled
 Armed: Ready to detect an arc fault
SNTP Server Change SNTP server name  Failed: Arc sensor supervision failure
(SNTP server of the Station Bus Lan)  Tripped: Arc detected
SNTP re-sync. Changes re-sync. time in seconds  Initializing: Arc sensor initializing (transitory)
Password Change administration password  Stuck: Arc sensor stuck on, i.e. continuously picked
up
Any changes are password protected and require entry of the  Included: Determines whether a sensor is allocated to
username (“admin”) and the password (default from the factory the relay
is “RMS”).  Trip outputs (Yes or No)
Each individual arc sensor provides the following status:

Trip: Indicates when the arc sensor LED Flag is
asserted (Yes or No)
Count: Retains a count since power on of how many times
arc sensor has been tripped. This count can be reset
to 0 by clicking on the counter.
Fig7. RA24 IP Configuration screen

IEC61850, as well as observing the state of the Alarm
and Sensor Fail relays remotely.
 A Logical Node 0 (LLN0), that observes name plate in-
formation about the device and overall device current
behaviour. A global block can be set and unset via
IEC61850 using the LLN0 Mode
The structure of the ICD file is depicted in figure 9 and may be

viewed using third party ICD browsers.
There are two .icd files that can be downloaded from the Reyrolle
website. Descriptions of both files are provided below:
The 1S24.cid can be used as-is on the RA24 and has a default set
of 16 separate Goose messages, one for each FADet point with
stVal and Quality included in the Goose.
However, The IP address within this file, must match the IP Ad-
dress configured on the RA24.
The 1S24-bare.icd has an ICD extension as it is intended for

importing into site configuration tools which can add specific
Goose to it (with whatever VLAN, Versioning etc. required). The
Tool can then export a CID file for use on the RA24. Please Note:
On the RA24 itself, it must be called 1S24.cid.
Fig8. RA24 Arc Sensor Configuration screen
IEC61850 Project
The IEC61850 standard permits the integration of the RA24 into
a substation project incorporating any third party CB manage-
ment IED.
The RA24 is modelled under IEC61850 with a Logical node mod-

el defined by a IS24.icd file. This file can be imported into your
IEC61850 system configurator and incorporated into an
IEC61850 project.
Fault Detector
Status
Examples of an IEC61850 Substation project incorporating a
RA24 into an ARC Fault Protection scheme and CB Management
SARC Logical Logic utilising subscribed Goose messages from the RA24 are
nodes shown in Figure 10.
Fault Detector
quality attribute
Fig9. ICD editing screen
IED Capability Description (ICD)

The ICD is utilised in IEC61850 Substation Project Development.
The RA24 ICD model contains the following logical nodes:
 A standard IEC61850-5 SARC (Monitoring and diagnos-

tics for arcs), for each of the 16 Arc detectors. These
cover an individual Arc fault detection, fault counter
and detector health. Also, each Arc detector can be en-
abled or disabled using the SARC Mode.
 A configuration GGIO that can be used to configure the
inclusion of each Arc detector in the single Alarm out-
put relay of the RA24, as an alternative to the web
page.
 A run-time GGIO that allows the front panel LED state
for each Arc detector to be observed and cleared via
CB Management
IEDs
RA24 Arc Fault IED
IEC61850 Configurator
such as DIGSI used to
create Goose
interconnections between
IEDs
Example of SARC
Trip Marshalling and
Current Check logic
implemented in a CB
management relay
Fig10. Reydisp Manager IEC61850 project editing and Reylogic screens

Arc Sensor Function Remote Reset
The RA30 is an optical sensor that responds to the flash of light A remote reset status input is provided to reset the arc trip LED’s.
emitted during the incidence of an arcing fault. Onset of the light
flash and detection by the RA30 occurs in a few ms.
Refer to the RA30 Technical catalogue sheet for further details.
RA30 Point Sensor Inputs and Indicators

A red LED is provided for each arc sensor input to indicate:
Trip: LED illuminates solid on detection of an arc fault.
Resets when the front panel reset button is pressed or
voltage pulse applied to remote reset status input. Indi-
vidual flags can also be observed and cleared via Fig14. Remote reset binary input - flag reset
IEC61850.
Fail: LED Flashes to indicate failure of RA30 Arc Fault Sensor Optical Arc Sensors
in zone. The RA30 optical arc sensors are the heart of the system and are
available for application with the RA24.
Details on the function and sensitivity of these sensors may be

found in the specific Technical catalogue sheet.
Point Sensor Supervision

To monitor the integrity of the wiring between the RA30 arc
sensor and RA24 Arc Monitor, continuous 2mA supervision cur-
Fig11. Point arc sensor LED’s and terminals rent flows between the units.
If the sensor supervision current is not detected for 1s the Sensor
Arc Trip Output Contacts Alarm contact will operate and the Sensor Alarm LED will illumi-
The RA24 provides two (2) high speed tripping output contacts. nate solid.
These may be employed for local tripping functions and for sys- The affected sensor(s) will be indicated by the front panel sensor
tem testing purposes. Each sensor input may be set to trip either LED 1-16 flashing. The associated IEC61850 Arc Fault Quality will
of the output contacts. change to questionable.
The arc trip contacts will self-reset after a 2s delay. The trip indi-
cation LED is reset either by pressing the front panel reset but- Arc Sensor Continuously Picked Up
ton, via the remote reset status input or via IEC61850 control. High ambient light levels may cause a RA30 to be continuously
picked up. This condition could occur for example if the CB cable
box cover was left open in very high ambient light level condi-
tions. A non-arc fault over-current pick up would then result in
an arc fault trip operation.
To avoid possible mal operation due to this condition, the RA24

is designed to automatically disable the arc fault tripping func-
tion if the RA30 sensor is picked up for >10s. The RA24 Sensor
Alarm contact will operate and Sensor Alarm LED will illuminate
Fig12. Arc trip output contacts and trip LED
solid until the ambient light level problem is corrected. The RA24
will then perform an arc sensor test function and automatically
Arc Trip Blocking Input reset.
The RA24 provides a status input to enable a global block of all
arc fault detection sensors. Application of a control voltage The affected sensor(s) will be indicated by the front panel sensor
within the specified range will activate this function and energize LED 1-16 flashing.
the Global Arc Block LED.
Sensor Fail Alarm
A common Sensor Fail Alarm contact is provided.
Fig13. Global arc block input and LED indication
Arc Detection Reset Time Fig15. Sensor fail alarm LED and output contact
Effect of multiple arc trips
A delay of 2s is required to reset the RA24 after an initial arc Self-Supervision Service Alarm
sensor trip. Subsequent arc detection will cause the trip outputs
A change over alarm contact is maintained in the energized state
to re-operate.
when all of the following conditions are met:
 The auxiliary supply is applied

 The internal 5V DC rail is within acceptable limits

 The CPU hardware watchdog maintains a pulsing out- device configuration.
put Optional Second Port
 The Service Alarm LED will be energized for a CPU fail An optional second port employs a plug-in optical fibre port and
condition. supports 100Base-FX.
The two port option allows one of the ports to connect to an
IEC61850 station bus LAN for Goose messaging purposes and
either port may be utilised for device configuration.
Fig16. Self-supervision service alarm
System Status
LED’s are provided to indicate auxiliary supply and Ethernet
activity.
Fig21. Standard single port 10Base-T / 100Base-TX
Fig17. System status LED’s
Device Earth Terminal Fig22. Optional dual port 10Base-T / 100Base-TX + 100Base-
The RA24 provides a device earthing terminal. FX
Application Diagram
Fig18. Device earth terminal
Rating Plate and Flag Reset CB CHAMBER MAIN BUS

DETECTION ZON E BAR Z ONE
The rating plate is clearly identified on the front panel.
A reset button is provided to reset the arc trip LED’s.
This button also has other functions to initiate warm boot and
cold boot to restore factory default settings. Refer to the User
Guide for details.
CT, VT & C ABLE

T ERMIN ATIO N ZONE
Fig23. Single bus circuit breaker
Single Bus Switchgear

Single busbar switchgear systems are prevalent at medium volt-
Fig19. Relay rating plate and reset button age levels. The complexity on the protection required to mitigate
arc flash faults is dependent on the Bus configuration. Figure 23
Customer Specific Labels depicts a typical circuit breaker arrangement in a single bus
Provision for a slide-in customer specific label is provided on the scheme.
front panel.
Single Bus and Switchgear Arc Protection
Figure 24 depicts how the RA24 may be applied for arc fault
protection on a single bus bar configuration.
Fig20. Default slide in label
Ethernet Communication Ports

The RA24 provides the option of either one or two high speed
Ethernet port options for connection to an IEC61850 compliant
station bus local area network (LAN).
Standard Port
The standard port employs an electrical interface with an RJ45
connector and supports 10Base-T / 100Base-TX. The port may be
utilised for either IEC61850 Goose messaging purposes or for
(A1) (A2)
(A1) (A1)
Fig24. Single bus scheme
Double Bus and Switchgear Arc Protection

Technical Data Figure 26 depicts how the RA24 may be applied for arc fault
protection on a double bus bar configuration.
RESERVE BUS
BAR ZONE
CB CH AMBER CT, VT & C ABLE

DETECTI ON ZONE T ERMINATION ZONE
MAIN BUS
BAR ZONE
Fig25. Single bus circuit breaker
Dual Bus Switchgear

Double busbar switchgear systems present additional challenges
for protection against arc flash faults due to the number of arc
fault protection zones and multiple operating configurations
possible. Figure 25 depicts a typical circuit breaker arrangement
in a double bus scheme.

(A1) (A2)
(A1) (A1)
REYROLLE RM 1S24
CB CONTROLLER IED’s ARC FAULT IED
B1 B2
B1 B2
C1 C1 C1 C1 E1 C2 C2 C2 C2
E2
D1 D1 D1 D1 D1 D1 D1 D1
G1 G2 G3 G4
F1 F2 F3 F4
F1 F2 F3 F4
INCOMER ZONES BUS COUPLER ZONES INCOMING ZONES B2 OPTICAL ARC

(B1 and B2) (E1 and E2) (A1 to A2) SENSOR INPUTS
MAIN BUS ZONES FEEDER ZONES
IEC61850 TRIPPING ZONE
(C1 and C2) (F1 to F4)
STATION BUS LAN REFERENCE
RESERVE BUS ZONE FEEDER CB CHAMBERS
CB TRIPPING HIGH
(D1) (G1 to G4)
SIGNALS VOLTAGE BUS
Fig26. Double bus scheme
<23ms pickup
AC Operate Time
<33ms dropout
Compliance Data
Enable on the application
Function
Auxiliary Supply of a control voltage
Nominal voltage Operating Range

Output Contacts
24 / 32 / 48 20-70V dc
Operating Voltage Voltage free
b110 / 125 / 220 / 240 /
80-275V ac / 88-300V dc Operating Mode Self-reset
250
Allowable breaks/dips in Operate Time 7ms
20ms
supply (Collapse to zero) Release Time 3ms
Burden - Quiescent 8W at 110V dc Making Capacity
Burden - Maximum 15W at 110V dc Carry Continuously 8A ac or dc
Make and Carry 20A ac or dc for 0.5s
Binary Inputs L/R ≤ 40ms and ≤ 300V 30A ac or dc for 0.2s
Voltage Range 18-275V ac / 18-300V dc
Breaking Capacity L/R ≤ 40ms and ≤ 300V
10mA pickup for 1ms
Operating Current Reducing to 1.5mA after AC Resistive 2,000VA
4ms AC Inductive 250W at p.f. ≤ 0.4
<4ms pickup DC Resistive 60W
DC Operate Time
<16ms dropout 30W at L/R ≤ 40ms
DC Inductive
50W at L/R ≤ 10ms
Minimum Load 100mA ≥12V

Arc Fault Point Sensor Inputs Humidity IEC 680068-2-78
Number 16 40 degrees Celsius and 93%
Operating Range
Type RA30 point sensors RH non condensing
Connection Electrical termination
Zones Up to 16 IP Rating IEC 60529
Supervision duration Continuous Installed IP4x
Trip Contact Operate
<10ms (Typically <7ms) Vibration – Sinusoidal IEC 60255-21-1 Class I
Time
Reset Time 2s Vibration Response 0.5gn
No mal-op
Vibration Endurance 1.0gn
Goose Response
GOOSE Response <3ms to first publish Shock and Bump IEC 60255-21-2 Class I
Shock Response 5gn, 11ms
Insulation IEC 60255-5
Shock Withstand 15gn, 11ms No mal-op
Type Level
Bump Test 10gn, 16ms
Any Terminal and Earth 2.0kV ac rms for 1min
5.0kV 1.2/50us 0.5J Seismic IEC 60255-21-3 Class I
Between Independent Seismic Response 1gn No mal-op

2.0kV ac rms for 1min
Circuits
5.0kV 1.2/50us 0.5J Mechanical Classification
Durability >106 operations at no load
Across Normally Open 1.0kV ac rms for 1min
Contacts
Arc Flash & Overcurrent Operation Time
High Frequency Disturbance IEC 60255-22-1 The circuit breaker trip time will be dictated by the
relays overcurrent element operation time. Please see
Type Level Variation the overcurrent element performance specification on
Common (Longitudinal) 2.5kV relay used for more information.
No mal-op.
Differential (Transverse) 1.0kV
Electrostatic Discharge IEC 60255-22-2 Class 3

Contact Discharge 6.0kV No mal-op.
Fast Transients IEC 60255-22-2 Class A

5/50ns 100kHz 4.0kV No mal-op
Surge Immunity IEC 60255-22-5

Between all Terminals and
4.0kV
Earth
No mal-op
Between any Two
2.0kV
Independent Circuits
Conducted Radio Frequency Interference IEC 60255-22-6

0.15 to 80MHz 10V rms No mal-op
Radiated Immunity IEC 60255-22-3 Class III

80MHz to 2,760MHz 10V/m No mal-op
Temperature IEC 60068-2-1/2

Operating Range -10 to +55 degrees Celsius
Storage Range -25 to +70 degrees Celsius

Front Panel
Auxiliary Flag Arc trip High speed Sensor System

supply and reset blocking input arc trip output fail fail
Earth input contacts alarm alarm
4x M4 screw holes
for surface mounting
RJ45
IEC 61850 ports
Fibre LC connector
16 point arc sensor inputs

Trip & fail LED indicators
48x M3 screw terminals
for electrical & sensor
connections
Fig27. Front panel layout, 16 point sensor version with 100base-FX Ethernet port

Wiring Diagram
Wiring and Termination
Sturdy M3 screw terminals are provided suitable for one or two ring terminals. Multiple chassis earthing points are also provided.
Terminal numbering is clearly identified and graphics are provided to visually represent the connection function.
Fig28. Wiring diagram

Arc Sensors
RA30 Point Sensor Connection
16x RA30 point arc sensor inputs are provided.
Each sensor operates independently with a common connec-
tion shared between each pair of sensors to reduce the total
number of terminals required.
Each sensor pair is wired to 3 M3 terminal screws with the
centre screw being common.
Figure 24 shows the wiring arrangement. The RA30 sensor
wires are colour coded but are not polarity sensitive.
Fig29. RA30 sensors
RA30 Shielded Cables

Shielded cables are recommended when the length of the
RA30 cable connections exceed 6m.
M3 earth studs with nuts and lock washers are provided on the
RA24 chassis in two (2) positions - one to the left of terminal 1
and one to the right of terminal 24 - to allow connection of the
optional RA30 sensor cable shields. Refer to figure 28 for con-
nection details.
Fig30. RA30 sensor wiring using shielded cables

Dimensions
Surface or DIN Rail Mounting
Fig31. RA24 dimensions and mounting points

Accessories
DIN Rail Mounting
The RA24 has provision to fit two (2) DIN rail mounting kits.
These “DIN Rail Mount” option must be specified at time of orde
4 x M4 self-threading mounting screw kit
Accessories Supplied with Each Device

4 x M4 self-threading mounting screw kit
IS30 Arc Fault Point Sensor

The RA30 sensors are ordered separately.
Refer to the RA30 Technical catalogue sheet for details
Fig32. Fitting DIN rail mounting kit
7 X G 3 1 2 4 -
▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
□▲ □▲ □▲ 0 0 - 0 A A 0
Arc Fault ||| | | | |
Protection Category ||| | | | |
| | | | |
Device | | | | |
RA24 Arc Fault Monitor 2 4 | | |
| | |
Network Connection | | |
Single port 10Base-T/100Base-Tx 1 | |
Dual port 10Base-T/100Base-Tx + 100Base-Fx 2 | |
| |
Operating Voltage | |
20 – 70V DC A |
88 - 300V DC / 88 – 275V AC B |
|
Mounting |
Surface Mount A
DIN Rail mount (supplied with mounting hardware) B

1.1.5.4 7XG3130 Optical Arc Fault Sensor
Sensitivity of the arc sensor has been set to a low level to

reduce the possibility of mal operation under high ambient
lighting conditions. This is made possible due the high
intensity of light emitted under arc fault conditions.
Additional security can be incorporated by way of a current
check stage.
In standby mode the RA30 sensor presents a high resistance
to the 12V DC control signal provided by the Arc Fault
Monitor. This allows a small circulating current to flow for
continuous supervision of the RA30 connection circuit.
When an arc is detected, the resistance presented by the
RA30 drops to a level where the current flow increases to
approximately 20mA. This increased current flow is
instantaneously detected by the Arc Fault Monitor & its trip
Features output contacts closed. Refer to the RA20 Arc Fault Monitor
Catalogue sheet for further details.
 Compact rugged design Single detector package

 One or two optical detectors
Figure 1 depicts the RA30 with a single optical detector. Note
 High speed arc detection
the window where the active part of the detector is
 Heavy duty 6m termination cable
positioned to. This permits convenient mounting on the
 Optional 20m & screened cables
outside of the panel with the detector window protruding
 Simple flush cable panel mounting outside or inside through a hole in the panel.
switchgear compartment
 Integrated sensor circuit supervision
 Very low sensitivity to ambient light levels to avoid
nuisance tripping even in direct sunlight
 Sealed module for harsh environments
 Metal reinforced mounting shield comes as
standard
Application
Arc fault protection is a technique employed for the fast clear- Fig1. RA30 with single optical detector
ance of arcing faults on busbars & within metal clad switch-
gear & associated cable boxes. The arc is detected using an
optical sensor & the signal input to a protection device which Dual detector package
also monitors the load current on the system. A trip signal can Figure 2 depicts the RA30 with dual optical detectors. The
be achieved in less than 10ms using arc detection. two optical detectors face in opposite directions to provide
While the high intensity flash caused by an electrical arc will be arc detection coverage in both directions. This version is
reflected within the metal clad switchgear, it is recommended particularly useful when mounted in a bus chamber or
that one or more sensors be mounted in each enclosed barrier between adjacent switchgear chambers. The main
switchgear compartment. benefits are reduced cost compared to two separate sensors
For busbar protection applications multiple sensors are re- & use of only one input channel on the RA20 Arc Fault
quired to achieve adequate coverage along the length of the Monitor.
bar. A sensor version with two optical detectors “looking” in
opposite directions is available for this purpose (Refer figure 3
for generic layout).
Description
The RA30(ReyArc30) is an optical sensor that responds to the

flash of light emitted during the incidence of an arcing fault.
Onset of the light flash & detection by the RA30 occurs in a
few ms. Fig2. RA30 with dual optical detectors
Each arc fault sensor consists of one or two silicon PIN photo
diode light detectors mounted on a circuit board together Detector range
with the associated detection circuit (Figures 1 & 2). The A detection range along the 100% relative sensitivity curve
detector monitors a wide space angle. A broad spectral shown in figure 3 is approximately 3m. Single detector
response in the visible region is provided as depicted in versions therefore need to be placed at a maximum spacing
figure 5. of 5-6m. The dual detector versions may be placed at a
maximum spacing of 8-10m to provide adequate detection
overlap. In switchgear the light caused by the arc is reflected Detector spectral response
from the walls & therefore, the mounting of the sensor is not
100
critical. %
While the high intensity flash caused by an electrical arc will be 90
reflected within the metal clad switchgear, it is recommended %
Relative Sensitivity
that one or more sensors be mounted in each enclosed 80
%
switchgear compartment. 70
%
60
%
50
% 60 70 80 90 1,00 1,10 1,20
0 0 0 Wavelength
0 0 0 0
(nm)
Fig5. Arc detector spectral response
* Due to the relatively high sensitivity of the detector to IR

Fig3. Detection range along 100% relative sensitivity wavelengths the type of light source employed for sensitivity testing
curve will have a major effect on the results obtained.
Sensitivity testing should therefore be conducted using a 50-75W
halogen lamp with an integrated aluminum reflector.
Detector Characteristics
Mounting Options
Optical sensitivity
~10,000 Lux* for white light at normal incidence to the
detector window(s) as depicted in figure 4: Flush panel mounting
The RA30 is suitable for flush panel mounting in a number of
Front Light configurations.
Detector Source Flush mount
Rear
Light RA30 [A] reinforcing
Source Detector plate
RA30 [B]
Dual detectors 2 x M4
models only self threading
mounting screws
(Supplied)
Fig4. ~10,000 Lux* for white light at normal incidence to
the detector window(s)
For the RA30 single detector version the front detector only
is fitted. In this configuration the RA30 will be insensitive to
white light incident on the rear surface of the case up to a
level of 200,000 Lux. Fig6. RA30 shown mounted on the outside of a
As the illuminace of diffuse ambient sunlight falls in the switchgear panel. Detector oriented to ‘look’ through a
range 5,000 to 10,000 Lux, this will not normally be hole into the switchgear
sufficient to trigger the RA30 sensor. The luminous intensity
from the sun at noon at the equator however is ~100,000
Lux which will be sufficient to trigger the RA30 sensor so
2 x M4
measures should be made to avoid this situation. Optical detector
self threading
protruding through
Direct sunlight incident on the rear of the RA30 single sensor mounting screws
hole in panel
model will not cause it to pick up. This attribute provides a (Supplied)
significant safety margin to avoid nuisance tripping when
the option of mounting the sensor externally on switchgear
as depicted in figure 6 is employed. Switchgear Sealed cable
panel stress relief
Detector directional characteristics
Detector sensitivity falls to ~40% of the nominal level at Fig7. RA30 shown mounted on the inside of a switchgear
inclination angles up to 70 degrees from the normal for panel Detector oriented to ‘look’ out into the switchgear
white light. compartment
Flush mounting reinforcing plate

When mounting the RA30 on the outside of a switchgear
cubicle as depicted in figure 6, the hole required in the panel
may degrade the short circuit rating. If this is considered to
be an issue then a reinforcing plate may be fitted over the
RA30 as depicted below. The Reinforcing plate comes as
standard with the RA30.

Single Dual
optical detector optical detector
Optical detector 2 x M4
facing away self threading
from panel Optical detector
mounting screws window facing away
(Supplied) from right angle
mounting bracket
Right angle
Fig8. Flush mount reinforcing plate mounting
1.2mm zinc plated mild steel bracket
Dual detector version

The dual detector version can be panel mounted to monitor
two adjacent switchgear compartments simultaneously. This Fig11. Right angle mounting off a surface mount off floor
feature can be used to reduce the total cost for sensors or to or walls within switchgear / busbar chamber
increase the monitoring coverage for each RA20 Arc Fault
Monitor unit.
Optical detector Technical Data
window facing away
Optical detector from compartment
protruding through divider Arc fault protection scheme
compartment divider
into adjacent
Refer to the ReyArc20/23/24 Technical Catelogue sheets for
switchgear chamber further details .
Arc protection scheme operate time

Internal partition Arc fault trip contacts guaranteed to pick up in less than 10ms
between switchgear
compartments including bounce. Typical operate time is 7ms.
Fig9. RA30 shown mounted on the inside of a switchgear

panel. This configuration combines the functions
described in Figures 6 & 7 with the application of a single
dual detector arc fault sensor
Panel mount cut out detail
Hole in panel
to allow detector
to ‘look’ into
switchgear CRO trace showing nominal operation time of the trip
chamber contacts at 7ms. First contact touch at 6.25ms and fully
closed by 7.25ms. Operation in <10ms is considered
acceptable as current check relay operate time is ~25ms.
Fig10. Flush mounting detail
Minimum Arc duration
Right angle mounting off a surface
The minimum arc “flash” duration required to guarantee
operation of the Arc Fault Monitors output contacts is
A right angle mounting bracket may be fabricated using the
1.25ms.
panel cut out detail in figure 10. Single & dual detector
models may be mounted in this manner as depicted in figure Auxiliary supply
11.
Voltage from RA20 Arc Fault Monitor: 12V DC
Power consumption: <2.5mA
Casing
Rugged moulded construction to IP51.
Temperature range
Operating: -5 to +55oC
Storage: -25 to +75oC

Sensor Connections For connection over longer distances shielded cable is
The RA30 is supplied with a 6m two core connection cable as recommended. For distances over 20m, 24/0.2 mm cable
standard. Two core multi strand wire (2x16/0.2mm), is should be employed.
supplied stripped & pre tinned at the RA20 connection end.
The standard 6m cable may be cut down to the desired Additional RA30 cable length
length & crimp ring lugs fitted for termination. Screened arc sensor cables may be increased by wiring
The RA30 connections are not polarity sensitive. Reversal of additional series twisted pair SCREENED cable provided it
the wires on the arc monitor terminals has no effect on the does not exceed 5 ohms and 30nF loop impedance.
performance of the RA30 or arc detection system.
The cable is factory fitted to the RA30 Arc Fault Sensor using
a stress relief molding to provide a sealed & durable
connection interface. The cable employs thick inner & outer
insulation layers to avoid damage during installation.
Dimensions
Order Code
Serial No.
Optional second
optical detector
‘looks’ forward
through front
label window
Fig12. RA30 Arc fault Sensor dimensions


7 X G 3 1 3 0 -
▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
□▲ □▲ □▲ 0 0 - 0 A A 0
Reyarc – Arc ||| | | | |
Fault Protection Category ||| | | | |
| | | | |
Device | | | | |
RA30 Arc Sensor 3 0 | | |
| | |
Arc Detectors | | |
Single detector (Through Hole) 1 | |
Dual detector 2 | B
| |
Cabling | |
6m unshielded A |
6m shielded B |
20m shielded C |
|
Reinforcing plate (single sensors only) |
Required A
Not Required B

1.2 Alpha Range
1.2.1 7PG11 Auxiliary Relay
Suffix letters are used to identify further features:
Suffix D – indicates a relay fitted with a suppression diode
across the coil to reduce the effects of back emf on switch-
off.
Suffix SB – identifies a relay with a series break contact to
cut-off the operating coil, thus the relay burden becomes
zero after operation of this contact. Only available with AR
relays which have hand reset contacts.
Type Number of Flag Contact

Contacts Reset Reset
AR101 2,4,6 or 8 N.A. Self
AR103 4,6 or 8 N.A. Elec & Hand
AR106 2, 4, or 6 N.A. Elec
AR111 2,4,6 or 8 Hand Self
AR112 2,4,6 or 8 Hand Hand
Description AR113 4, 6 or 8 Hand Elec & Hand
AR114 4 or 6 Hand Hand & Self
The 7PG111 & 7PG112 AR range of electromechanical relays AR121 2,4,6 or 8 Hand* Self
are available with up to eight self, hand or electrically reset AR124 4,or 6 Hand* Hand & Self
contacts. They can be supplied in most combinations of AR131 2,4,or 6 Self Self
contact, flag and reset arrangements. Fixed time delay AR133 2,4,6 or 8 Self Elec & Hand
models are also available. AR136 2,4 or 6 Self Elec
AR141 2,4,or 6 Self* Self
AR relays are voltage operated from either AC or DC supplies. * Indicates a reverse acting flag indicating on de-energisation.
Features Technical Data

• Consistent positive action
• Robust design for a long, reliable, service life Inputs and Outputs
Type AR relays are a range of electro-mechanical relays with
up to 8 contacts and complying to BS142. They can be Rated Voltage (Vn)
supplied in most combinations of contact, flag and reset A.C. 63.5, 110, 220, 240V
arrangements and with a fixed time delay. The relays are D.C. 12, 24, 30, 50, 125, 240V
identified by a series of numbers and letters which define
important relay features. Operating Range
The following comments are provided as a guide to the A.C. 80% to 110% of rated
various features of type AR relays. voltage
D.C. 70% to 115% of rated
AR - 1 Up to 8 self reset contacts, in any combination of voltage
normally open or normally closed as required.
AR - 2 Up to 8 self reset contacts, in any combination of
Burden
normally open or normally closed as required.
AR - 3 Electrical and hand set contacts supplied with a 3 to 5W/VA depending upon Dependent on rating.
contact reset mechanism in the relay case cover. rating Rectified a.c. relays
AR - 4 Hand and self reset contacts, can be supplied with 2 nominal power factor =
hand reset contacts and a maximum of 4 self reset contacts. 0.96
All the contacts may be either normally open or normally
closed. Output Contacts
AR - 6 Electrical reset contacts with optional self reset flag. Make and carry 1250VAa.c. or 1250Wd.c.
AR - 3 & 6 Reset coils are short time rated, we recommend continuously within the limits of 660V and
that reset circuits include a normally open (cut-off) contact 5A
First Digit Second Digit Third Digit Type of Make and carry for 3 7500VAa.c. or 7500Wd.c.
Type of flag contact reset seconds within the limits of 660Vand
Number of 0 No flag 1 Self 30A
identical 1 Hand reset 2 Hand Breaking Capacity
elements 2 Hand reset 3 Electrical & (  5 A and  250 V):
reverse acting hand AC Resistive 1250 VA
3 Self reset 4 Hand & self DC Resistive 100 W
4 Self reset 6 Electrical DC Inductive 50 W L/R = 40ms
reverse acting Minimum number of 1000 at maximum load
operations
Minimum recommended Performance
0.5 Watt limits 10mA or 5V
load
Instantaneous Operating time
Electrical Tests Typically 25ms
Range 10ms to 50ms
Insulation
IEC 60255-5 RMS levels for 1 minute
Between contacts to earth 2.0 kV
and to the coil
Between any case terminal 2.0 kV
and earth
Between case terminals of 2.0 kV
independent circuits
Across normally open 1.0 kV
contacts
Transient Overvoltage
IEC 60255-5
Between all terminals and
earth or between any two 5 kV
independent circuits 1.2/50 µs
without damage or 0.5 J
flashover
Mechanical
IEC 255-21-1 The relays meet the
requirements of Class 1
for vibration response and
endurance
BS142 section 2.1 relays will withstand a
category S2 20G shock or impact on
the panel without
operating
Shock Bump
IEC 255-21-2 Class 1 severity
BS142, sub-section 1.5.2. Class 1 severity
(1989)
Mechanical Life
Durability in excess of 10,000
operations with the contact
rating at a rate of 600
operations per hour
Environmental
Temperature
IEC 68-2-1/2
Operating -10 °C to +55 °C
Storage -25 °C to +70 °C
Humidity
IEC 68-2-3
Operational test 56 days at 40 °C and 95%
RH

Case Dimensions
Fig1. E2 Case Dimensions

Connection Diagram 7PG11 AR
Terminal Numbering (E2 Case)

Viewed from Rear
1 2
3 4
5 6
7 8
9 10
11 12
13 14
15 16
17 18
19 20
21 22
23 24
25 26
27 28
Terminal Numbering (E4 Case)

Viewed from Rear
RH-element LH-element
1 2 1 2
3 4 3 4
5 6 5 6
7 8 7 8
9 10 9 10
11 12 11 12
13 14 13 14
15 16 15 16
17 18 17 18
19 20 19 20
21 22 21 22
23 24 23 24
25 26 25 26
27 28 27 28
Fig3. Connection Diagrams

Ordering Information – 7PG111 AR
Auxiliary relay (AR101, AR103) 7 P G 1 1 □▲ □▲ - □▲ □▲ □▲ □▲ □▲ - □▲ □▲ □▲ □▲

A.C. or D.C. voltage operated | | | | | | | | | | |
relay. | | | | | | | | | | |
Number of elements | | | | | | | | | | |
Single element 1 | | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | | |
Type of flag | | | | | | | | | |
No flag 0 | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | |
Contact operation | | | | | | | | |
Self reset contacts 1 | | | | | | | |
Hand and electrical reset contacts 3 | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
Contact arrangement – NO | | | | | | | |
0 NO A | | | | | | |
1 NO B | | | | | | |
2 NO C | | | | | | |
3 NO D | | | | | | |
4 NO E | | | | | | |
5 NO F | | | | | | |
6 NO G | | | | | | |
7 NO H | | | | | | |
8 NO J | | | | | | |
| | | | | | |
Contact arrangement NC | | | | | | |
0 NC A | | | | | |
1 NC B | | | | | |
2 NC C | | | | | |
3 NC D | | | | | |
4 NC E | | | | | |
5 NC F | | | | | |
6 NC G | | | | | |
7 NC H | | | | | |
8 NC J | | | | | |
| | | | | |
Number of contacts 1) | | | | | |
Two 0 | | | | |
Four 1 | | | | |
Six 3 | | | | |
Eight 5 | | | | |
| | | | |
Contact type | | | | |
NO (Standard) / NC (Standard) 0 | | | |
| | | |
Time delay | | | |
No additional time delay 0 | | |
| | |
Housing size | | |
Case size E2 (4U high) A | |

Auxiliary relay (AR101, AR103) 7 P G 1 1 □ □ - □ □ □ □ □ - □ □ □▲ □▲

(continued from previous page) | |
| |
Voltage rating | |
12V DC A |
24V DC B |
30V DC C |
50V DC D |
60V DC E |
125V DC F |
220V DC G |
240V DC H |
63.5V AC J 0
110V AC K 0
220V AC L 0
240V AC M 0
|
Back emf suppression diode |
Not Fitted 0
Fitted 1
1) Number of contacts must match selected contact arrangement

Auxiliary relay (AR901) 7 P G 1 1 1 0 - 7 A E 1 0 - 0 A

▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
□ 0
D.C. voltage operated relay. | | | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | | | |
Single element 1 | | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | | |
Type of flag | | | | | | | | | |
No flag 0 | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | |
CT shorting contacts 7 | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
0 NO A | | | | | | |
| | | | | | |
4 NC E | | | | | |
| | | | | |
Number of contacts | | | | | |
Four 1 | | | | |
| | | | |
| | | |
Time delay | | | |
| | |
Housing size | | |
| |
Voltage rating | |
30V DC C |
50V DC D |
125V DC F |
240V DC H |
|
|
Not Fitted 0

Auxiliary relay (AR106) 7 P G 1 1 □▲ □▲ - □▲ □▲ □▲ □▲ □▲ - □▲ □▲ □▲ □▲

relay. | | | | | | | | | | |
Single element 1 | | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | | |
Type of flag | | | | | | | | | |
No flag 0 | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | |
Electrical reset contacts 6 | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
0 NO A | | | | | | |
1 NO B | | | | | | |
2 NO C | | | | | | |
3 NO D | | | | | | |
4 NO E | | | | | | |
5 NO F | | | | | | |
6 NO G | | | | | | |
| | | | | | |
0 NC A | | | | | |
1 NC B | | | | | |
2 NC C | | | | | |
3 NC D | | | | | |
4 NC E | | | | | |
5 NC F | | | | | |
6 NC G | | | | | |
| | | | | |
Two 0 | | | | |
Four 1 | | | | |
Six 3 | | | | |
| | | | |
| | | |
Time delay | | | |
| | |
Housing size | | |
| |
Voltage rating | |
12V DC A |
24V DC B |
30V DC C |
50V DC D |
60V DC E |
125V DC F |
220V DC G |
240V DC H |
63.5V AC J 0
110V AC K 0
220V AC L 0
240V AC M 0
|

Auxiliary relay (AR106) 7 P G 1 1 □ □ - □ □ □ □ □ - □ □ □ □▲

(continued from previous page) Back emf suppression diode |
Not Fitted 0
Fitted 1


relay. | | | | | | | | | | |
Two element 2 | | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | | |
Type of flag | | | | | | | | | |
No flag 0 | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
0 NO A | | | | | | |
1 NO B | | | | | | |
2 NO C | | | | | | |
3 NO D | | | | | | |
4 NO E | | | | | | |
5 NO F | | | | | | |
6 NO G | | | | | | |
| | | | | | |
0 NC A | | | | | |
1 NC B | | | | | |
2 NC C | | | | | |
3 NC D | | | | | |
4 NC E | | | | | |
5 NC F | | | | | |
6 NC G | | | | | |
| | | | | |
Number of contacts/element 1) | | | | | |
Two 0 | |A| |
Four 1 | | C | |
Six 3 | | C | |
| | | | |
| | | |
Time delay | | | |
| | |
Housing size | | |
Case size E4 (4U high) C | |
| |
Voltage rating | |
12V DC A |
24V DC B |
30V DC C |
50V DC D |
60V DC E |
125V DC F |
220V DC G |
240V DC H |
63.5V AC J 0
110V AC K 0
220V AC L 0
240V AC M 0
|


Not Fitted 0
Fitted 1


A.C. or D.C. voltage operated. | | | | | | | | | | |
relay | | | | | | | | | | |
Single element 1 | | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | | |
Type of flag | | | | | | | | | |
Hand reset flag 1 | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | |
Hand reset contacts 2 | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
0 NO A | | | | | | |
1 NO B | | | | | | |
2 NO C | | | | | | |
3 NO D | | | | | | |
4 NO E | | | | | | |
5 NO F | | | | | | |
6 NO G | | | | | | |
7 NO H | | | | | | |
8 NO J | | | | | | |
| | | | | | |
0 NC A | | | | | |
1 NC B | | | | | |
2 NC C | | | | | |
3 NC D | | | | | |
4 NC E | | | | | |
5 NC F | | | | | |
6 NC G | | | | | |
7 NC H | | | | | |
8 NC J | | | | | |
| | | | | |
Two 0 | | | | |
Four 1 | | | | |
Six 3 | | | | |
Eight 5 | | | | |
| | | | |
| | | |
Time delay | | | |
| | |
Housing size | | |

Auxiliary relay (AR111, AR112) 7 P G 1 1 □ □ - □ □ □ □ □ - □ □ □▲ □▲

| |
Voltage rating | |
12V DC A |
24V DC B |
30V DC C |
50V DC D |
60V DC E |
125V DC F |
220V DC G |
240V DC H |
63.5V AC J 0
110V AC K 0
220V AC L 0
240V AC M 0
|
Not Fitted 0
Fitted 1

Auxiliary relay (AR112SB) 7 P G 1 1 □▲ □▲ - □▲ □▲ □▲ □▲ □▲ - □▲ □▲ □▲ □▲

D.C. voltage operated relay with | | | | | | | | | | |
series break contact to reduce | | | | | | | | | | |
relay burden to zero after Number of elements | | | | | | | | | | |
operation. Single element 1 | | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | | |
Type of flag | | | | | | | | | |
Hand reset flag 1 | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
0 NO A | | | | | | |
1 NO B | | | | | | |
2 NO C | | | | | | |
3 NO D | | | | | | |
4 NO E | | | | | | |
5 NO F | | | | | | |
6 NO G | | | | | | |
7 NO H | | | | | | |
| | | | | | |
0 NC A | | | | | |
1 NC B | | | | | |
2 NC C | | | | | |
3 NC D | | | | | |
4 NC E | | | | | |
5 NC F | | | | | |
6 NC G | | | | | |
7 NC H | | | | | |
8 NC J | | | | | |
| | | | | |
Two 0 | | | | |
Four 1 | | | | |
Six 3 | | | | |
Eight 5 | | | | |
| | | | |
Contact type 1) | | | | |
NO (Standard) / NC (Standard / 1 SB) 4 | | | |
| | | |
Time delay | | | |
| | |
Housing size | | |

Auxiliary relay (AR112SB) 7 P G 1 1 □ □ - □ □ □ □ □ - □ □ □▲ □▲

| |
Voltage rating | |
12V DC A |
24V DC B |
30V DC C |
50V DC D |
60V DC E |
125V DC F |
220V DC G |
240V DC H |
63.5V AC J 0
110V AC K 0
220V AC L 0
240V AC M 0
|
Not Fitted 0
Fitted 1
1) One NO contact allocated for series break



relay | | | | | | | | | | |
Single element 1 | | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | | |
Type of flag | | | | | | | | | |
Hand reset flag 1 | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
0 NO A | | | | | | |
1 NO B | | | | | | |
2 NO C | | | | | | |
3 NO D | | | | | | |
4 NO E | | | | | | |
5 NO F | | | | | | |
6 NO G | | | | | | |
7 NO H | | | | | | |
8 NO J | | | | | | |
| | | | | | |
0 NC A | | | | | |
1 NC B | | | | | |
2 NC C | | | | | |
3 NC D | | | | | |
4 NC E | | | | | |
5 NC F | | | | | |
6 NC G | | | | | |
7 NC H | | | | | |
8 NC J | | | | | |
| | | | | |
Four 1 | | | | |
Six 3 | | | | |
Eight 5 | | | | |
| | | | |
| | | |
Time delay | | | |
| | |
Housing size | | |

Auxiliary relay (AR113) 7 P G 1 1 □ □ - □ □ □ □ □ - □ □ □▲ □▲

| |
Voltage rating | |
12V DC A |
24V DC B |
30V DC C |
50V DC D |
60V DC E |
125V DC F |
220V DC G |
240V DC H |
63.5V AC J 0
110V AC K 0
220V AC L 0
240V AC M 0
|
Not Fitted 0
Fitted 1


relay | | | | | | | | | | |
Single element 1 | | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | | |
Type of flag | | | | | | | | | |
Hand reset flag 1 | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | |
Hand and self reset contacts 4 | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
0 NO A | | | | | | |
1 NO B | | | | | | |
2 NO C | | | | | | |
3 NO D | | | | | | |
4 NO E | | | | | | |
5 NO F | | | | | | |
6 NO G | | | | | | |
| | | | | | |
0 NC A | | | | | |
1 NC B | | | | | |
2 NC C | | | | | |
3 NC D | | | | | |
4 NC E | | | | | |
5 NC F | | | | | |
6 NC G | | | | | |
| | | | | |
Four 1 | | | | |
Six 3 | | | | |
| | | | |
NO (Self Reset) / NC (Self Reset / 2 Hand Reset) 1 | | | |
NO (Self Reset / 2 Hand Reset) / NC (Self Reset) 2 | | | |
NO (Self Reset / 1 Hand Reset) / NC (Self Reset / 1 Hand Reset) 3 | | | |
| | | |
Time delay | | | |
| | |
Housing size | | |
| |
Voltage rating | |
12V DC A |
24V DC B |
30V DC C |
50V DC D |
60V DC E |
125V DC F |
220V DC G |
240V DC H |
63.5V AC J 0
110V AC K 0
220V AC L 0
240V AC M 0
|


Not Fitted 0
Fitted 1
1) Hand reset contacts are fitted as 2NO, 2NC or 1NO/1NC, remaining contacts are self reset in any combination


relay | | | | | | | | | | |
Two element 2 | | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | | |
Type of flag | | | | | | | | | |
Hand reset flag 1 | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | |
Hand reset contacts 2 | | | | | C | |
| | | | | | | |
0 NO A | | | | | | |
1 NO B | | | | | | |
2 NO C | | | | | | |
3 NO D | | | | | | |
4 NO E | | | | | | |
5 NO F | | | | | | |
6 NO G | | | | | | |
| | | | | | |
0 NC A | | | | | |
1 NC B | | | | | |
2 NC C | | | | | |
3 NC D | | | | | |
4 NC E | | | | | |
5 NC F | | | | | |
6 NC G | | | | | |
| | | | | |
Two 0 | |A| |
Four 1 | | C | |
Six 3 | | C | |
| | | | |
| | | |
Time delay | | | |
| | |
Housing size | | |
| |
Voltage rating | |
12V DC A |
24V DC B |
30V DC C |
50V DC D |
60V DC E |
125V DC F |
220V DC G |
240V DC H |
63.5V AC J 0
110V AC K 0
220V AC L 0
240V AC M 0
|

Auxiliary relay (AR211, AR212) 7 P G 1 1 □ □ - □ □ □ □ □ - □ □ □ □▲

Not Fitted 0
Fitted 1

Auxiliary relay (AR212SB) 7 P G 1 1 □▲ □▲ - □▲ □▲ □▲ □▲ □▲ - □▲ □▲ □▲ □▲

D.C. voltage operated relay with | | | | | | | | | | |
series break contact to reduce | | | | | | | | | | |
relay burden to zero after. Number of elements | | | | | | | | | | |
operation Two element 2 | | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | | |
Type of flag | | | | | | | | | |
Hand reset flag 1 | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
0 NO A | | | | | | |
1 NO B | | | | | | |
2 NO C | | | | | | |
3 NO D | | | | | | |
4 NO E | | | | | | |
5 NO F | | | | | | |
| | | | | | |
0 NC A | | | | | |
1 NC B | | | | | |
2 NC C | | | | | |
3 NC D | | | | | |
4 NC E | | | | | |
5 NC F | | | | | |
6 NC G | | | | | |
| | | | | |
Two 0 | | | | |
Four 1 | | | | |
Six 3 | | | | |
| | | | |
NO (Standard) / NC (Standard / 1 SB) 4 | | | |
| | | |
Time delay | | | |
| | |
Housing size | | |
| |
Voltage rating | |
12V DC A |
24V DC B |
30V DC C |
50V DC D |
60V DC E |
125V DC F |
220V DC G |
240V DC H |
63.5V AC J 0
110V AC K 0
220V AC L 0
240V AC M 0
|
Not Fitted 0
Fitted 1
1) One NO contact allocated for series break



relay | | | | | | | | | | |
Single element 1 | | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | | |
Type of flag | | | | | | | | | |
Hand reset reverse acting flag 2 | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
0 NO A | | | | | | |
1 NO B | | | | | | |
2 NO C | | | | | | |
3 NO D | | | | | | |
4 NO E | | | | | | |
5 NO F | | | | | | |
6 NO G | | | | | | |
7 NO H | | | | | | |
8 NO J | | | | | | |
| | | | | | |
0 NC A | | | | | |
1 NC B | | | | | |
2 NC C | | | | | |
3 NC D | | | | | |
4 NC E | | | | | |
5 NC F | | | | | |
6 NC G | | | | | |
7 NC H | | | | | |
8 NC J | | | | | |
| | | | | |
Two 0 | | | | |
Four 1 | | | | |
Six 3 | | | | |
Eight 5 | | | | |
| | | | |
| | | |
Time delay | | | |
| | |
Housing size | | |


| |
Voltage rating | |
12V DC A |
24V DC B |
30V DC C |
50V DC D |
60V DC E |
125V DC F |
220V DC G |
240V DC H |
63.5V AC J 0
110V AC K 0
220V AC L 0
240V AC M 0
|
Not Fitted 0
Fitted 1


relay | | | | | | | | | | |
Single element 1 | | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | | |
Type of flag | | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | |
Hand and self reset contacts 4 | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
0 NO A | | | | | | |
1 NO B | | | | | | |
2 NO C | | | | | | |
3 NO D | | | | | | |
4 NO E | | | | | | |
5 NO F | | | | | | |
6 NO G | | | | | | |
| | | | | | |
0 NC A | | | | | |
1 NC B | | | | | |
2 NC C | | | | | |
3 NC D | | | | | |
4 NC E | | | | | |
5 NC F | | | | | |
6 NC G | | | | | |
| | | | | |
Four 1 | | | | |
Six 3 | | | | |
| | | | |
NO (Self Reset) / NC (Self Reset / 2 Hand Reset) 1 | | | |
NO (Self Reset / 2 Hand Reset) / NC (Self Reset) 2 | | | |
NO (Self Reset / 1 Hand Reset) / NC (Self Reset / 1 Hand Reset) 3 | | | |
| | | |
Time delay | | | |
| | |
Housing size | | |
| |
Voltage rating | |
12V DC A |
24V DC B |
30V DC C |
50V DC D |
60V DC E |
125V DC F |
220V DC G |
240V DC H |
63.5V AC J 0
110V AC K 0
220V AC L 0
240V AC M 0
|
(Continued on following page)


Not Fitted 0
Fitted 1


relay Number of elements | | | | | | | | | | |
Two element 2 | | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | | |
Type of flag | | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
0 NO A | | | | | | |
1 NO B | | | | | | |
2 NO C | | | | | | |
3 NO D | | | | | | |
4 NO E | | | | | | |
5 NO F | | | | | | |
6 NO G | | | | | | |
| | | | | | |
0 NC A | | | | | |
1 NC B | | | | | |
2 NC C | | | | | |
3 NC D | | | | | |
4 NC E | | | | | |
5 NC F | | | | | |
6 NC G | | | | | |
| | | | | |
Two 0 | |A| |
Four 1 | | C | |
Six 3 | | C | |
| | | | |
| | | |
Time delay | | | |
| | |
Housing size | | |
| |
Voltage rating | |
12V DC A |
24V DC B |
30V DC C |
50V DC D |
60V DC E |
125V DC F |
220V DC G |
240V DC H |
63.5V AC J 0
110V AC K 0
220V AC L 0
240V AC M 0
|
Not Fitted 0
Fitted 1


relay. | | | | | | | | | | |
Single element 1 | | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | | |
Type of flag | | | | | | | | | |
Self reset flag 3 | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
0 NO A | | | | | | |
1 NO B | | | | | | |
2 NO C | | | | | | |
3 NO D | | | | | | |
4 NO E | | | | | | |
5 NO F | | | | | | |
6 NO G | | | | | | |
| | | | | | |
0 NC A | | | | | |
1 NC B | | | | | |
2 NC C | | | | | |
3 NC D | | | | | |
4 NC E | | | | | |
5 NC F | | | | | |
6 NC G | | | | | |
| | | | | |
Two 0 | | | | |
Four 1 | | | | |
Six 3 | | | | |
| | | | |
| | | |
Time delay | | | |
| | |
Housing size | | |
| |
Voltage rating | |
12V DC A |
24V DC B |
30V DC C |
50V DC D |
60V DC E |
125V DC F |
220V DC G |
240V DC H |
63.5V AC J 0
110V AC K 0
220V AC L 0
240V AC M 0
|

Auxiliary relay (AR131, AR136) 7 P G 1 1 □ □ - □ □ □ □ □ - □ □ □ □▲

Not Fitted 0
Fitted 1


relay | | | | | | | | | | |
Single element 1 | | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | | |
Type of flag | | | | | | | | | |
Self reset flag 3 | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
0 NO A | | | | | | |
1 NO B | | | | | | |
2 NO C | | | | | | |
3 NO D | | | | | | |
4 NO E | | | | | | |
5 NO F | | | | | | |
6 NO G | | | | | | |
7 NO H | | | | | | |
8 NO J | | | | | | |
| | | | | | |
0 NC A | | | | | |
1 NC B | | | | | |
2 NC C | | | | | |
3 NC D | | | | | |
4 NC E | | | | | |
5 NC F | | | | | |
6 NC G | | | | | |
7 NC H | | | | | |
8 NC J | | | | | |
| | | | | |
Two 0 | | | | |
Four 1 | | | | |
Six 3 | | | | |
Eight 5 | | | | |
| | | | |
| | | |
Time delay | | | |
| | |
Housing size | | |


| |
Voltage rating | |
12V DC A |
24V DC B |
30V DC C |
50V DC D |
60V DC E |
125V DC F |
220V DC G |
240V DC H |
63.5V AC J 0
110V AC K 0
220V AC L 0
240V AC M 0
|
Not Fitted 0
Fitted 1


relay | | | | | | | | | | |
Two element 2 | | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | | |
Type of flag | | | | | | | | | |
Self reset flag 3 | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
0 NO A | | | | | | |
1 NO B | | | | | | |
2 NO C | | | | | | |
3 NO D | | | | | | |
4 NO E | | | | | | |
| | | | | | |
0 NC A | | | | | |
1 NC B | | | | | |
2 NC C | | | | | |
3 NC D | | | | | |
4 NC E | | | | | |
| | | | | |
Two 0 | |A| |
Four 1 | | C | |
| | | | |
| | | |
Time delay | | | |
| | |
Housing size | | |
| |
Voltage rating | |
12V DC A |
24V DC B |
30V DC C |
50V DC D |
60V DC E |
125V DC F |
220V DC G |
240V DC H |
63.5V AC J 0
110V AC K 0
220V AC L 0
240V AC M 0
|
Not Fitted 0
Fitted 1


relay | | | | | | | | | | |
Single element 1 | | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | | |
Type of flag | | | | | | | | | |
Self reset reverse acting flag 4 | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
0 NO A | | | | | | |
1 NO B | | | | | | |
2 NO C | | | | | | |
3 NO D | | | | | | |
4 NO E | | | | | | |
5 NO F | | | | | | |
6 NO G | | | | | | |
| | | | | | |
0 NC A | | | | | |
1 NC B | | | | | |
2 NC C | | | | | |
3 NC D | | | | | |
4 NC E | | | | | |
5 NC F | | | | | |
6 NC G | | | | | |
| | | | | |
Two 0 | | | | |
Four 1 | | | | |
Six 3 | | | | |
| | | | |
| | | |
Time delay | | | |
| | |
Housing size | | |
| |
Voltage rating | |
12V DC A |
24V DC B |
30V DC C |
50V DC D |
60V DC E |
125V DC F |
220V DC G |
240V DC H |
63.5V AC J 0
110V AC K 0
220V AC L 0
240V AC M 0
|
Not Fitted 0
Fitted 1


relay. | | | | | | | | | | |
Two element 2 | | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | | |
Type of flag | | | | | | | | | |
Self reset reverse acting flag 4 | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
0 NO A | | | | | | |
1 NO B | | | | | | |
2 NO C | | | | | | |
3 NO D | | | | | | |
4 NO E | | | | | | |
| | | | | | |
0 NC A | | | | | |
1 NC B | | | | | |
2 NC C | | | | | |
3 NC D | | | | | |
4 NC E | | | | | |
| | | | | |
Two 0 | |A| |
Four 1 | | C | |
| | | | |
| | | |
Time delay | | | |
| | |
Housing size | | |
| |
Voltage rating | |
12V DC A |
24V DC B |
30V DC C |
50V DC D |
60V DC E |
125V DC F |
220V DC G |
240V DC H |
63.5V AC J 0
110V AC K 0
220V AC L 0
240V AC M 0
|
Not Fitted 0
Fitted 1

Switching Relay, TR431
1.2.2 7PG15 Tripping Relay
Designed to meet the requirements of NGC TDM 5/11, this is
an electrically reset relay with a flag indicator which follows
the contact operation. These relays are intended to switch
protection and auto reclose equipment in and out of service
when controlled over pilot wires from a remote point. They
are intended to operate from a remote 50V d.c. battery with
a pilot loop resistance of up to 200 ohms.
Special purpose relays, TR9 series

This designation identifies TR relays designed to meet a
special purpose e.g. TR901 is a high burden repeat relay, a
type TR231 with a 2 position flag indicator used as a plant
follower relay for circuit breakers and disconnectors.
Description
Type TR relays are a range of multi-contact attracted
armature relays designed to both IEC 255-5 and to BS142. A
wide range of models is available to meet the requirements
of the electric supply industry.
High speed, positive action

Can be supplied in modular and drawout type case
Robust design for a long, reliable service life
TR1 Low burden to ESI 48-4 EB1 & NGTS

3.6.15, ESI 1.
TR2 High burden to ESI 48-4 EB2 & NGTS 3.6.15,
ESI 2
TR312 NGC (CEGB) P15. (low burden trip relay)
TR431 NGC (CEGB) TDM 5/11. (switching relay)
Low burden, TR1 series

Type TR1 relays are suitable for application for tripping and
auxiliary duties where immunity to capacitance discharge is
not required. These relays are not intended for use with
current operated series follower relays.
High burden, TR2 series

High burden relays with immunity to capacitance discharge
currents. They are also suitable for certain applications
where they are remote from the initiation signal.
A high burden also permits reliable operation of current

operated series repeat relays. TR relays can be provided with
an instantaneous or time-delayed cut-off.
Low burden relay, TR312

Designed to meet the requirements of NGC specification
P15, this is an electrically reset relay (no flag indicator) with
additional terminals in the economy circuit to enable a direct
connection to the dc supply.
This arrangement allows a reduction in the break duty of the

initiating contact.

Relay Type Number of Contact Reset Operating Coil Cut-off Specification Burden Modular
Contacts Arrangement Level Case
Size
TR112 7 or 11 Self Economy EB1 low E4
TR121 7 or 11 Hand Instantaneous EB1 Low E2
TR131 6 or 10 Electrical Instantaneous EB1 Low E2
TR141 6 or 10 Hand & electrical Instantaneous EB1 Low E2
TR212 6 or 10 Self Economy EB2 High E2 or E4
TR214 5 or 10 Self Economy 2s delayed EB2 High E4

reset
TR221 7 or 11 Hand Instantaneous EB2 High E2
TR223 7 or 11 Hand 40/60ms delay EB2 High E4
TR231 6 or 10 Electrical Instantaneous EB2 High E2
TR233 6 or 10 Electrical 40/60ms delay EB2 High E4
TR241 6 or 10 Hand & electrical Instantaneous EB2 High E2
TR243 6 or 10 Hand & electrical 40/60ms delay EB2 High E4
TR312 5 Self Economy NGC P15 Low E4
TR431 7 Electrical Instantaneous NGC TDM.5/11 Low E4
TR901 10 electrical Instantaneous EB2 High E2

Insulation
Technical Information Relays will withstand:
• 5kV 1.2/50µs waveform as IEC 255-4
• 2kV rms 50Hz for 1minute (2.5kV for 1s) between
TR1 and TR2 relays
all terminals and earth
• 1kV rms 50Hz for 1 minute across
Operating time 10ms at rated voltage
normally open contacts to IEC 255-5 and BS142
Rated voltage Vn 24V, 30V, 48V, 125V, 240V d.c.
Note: 24V and 240V ratings are not part of ESI 48-4
Operating range 50% to 120% of rated voltage

Operating coils of self-reset and economy cut-off relays are
rated at 120% of rated voltage. All other operate and reset
coils are short time rated well in excess of the operating
time of their cut-off contacts. Self-reset relays will reset at
not less than 5% rated voltage.
Nominal burdens
BURDEN (W)
Rated voltage V d.c. TR1-- TR2--
30 43 43
48 46 52
125 47 127
Reset coil 50 50
Relays with economy circuits reduce to approximately 7W

after operation.
Contacts
Ratings
Make and carry continuously:
1250VAa.c. or 1250Wd.c. within limits of 660V and 5A
Make and carry for 3 seconds:

7500VAa.c. or 7500Wd.c. within limits of 660V and 30A
Break:
1250VAa.c. or 100W (resistive) d.c. or 50W (inductive) d.c.
within limits of 250V and 5A
Indication:
TR1 and TR2 relays have a hand reset mechanical flag
indicator, TR4 and TR9 relays have a self reset flag indicator.
Environmental
Temperature
IEC68-2-1/2 and BS2011 (1977)
Operating -10°C to +55°C
Storage -25°C to +70°C
Humidity IEC 68-2-3
56 days at 95% RH and 40°C
Vibration IEC 255-21-1 Class l.
Shock and bump

IEC 255-21-2 and BS142, 1.5.2 (1989)
Relays meet the requirements with respect to shock and

bump testing for Class 1 severity.
Operational/Mechanical life
Relays will withstand in excess of 10,000 operations, within
the maximum contact loading specified.

Case Dimensions

Ordering Information – 7PG15TR
Tripping relay (TR112) 7 P G 1 5 □ □
▲ ▲
- □ □□□□
▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
- □ □□
▲ ▲ ▲
0
Self reset low burden tripping | | | | | | | | | |
Relay. | | | | | | | | | |
TR - tripping | | | | | | | | | |
TR1-- : low burden, EB1 1 | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
Operating coil cut-off | | | | | | | |
Economy 2 | | | | | | |
| | | | | | |
Contact arrangement – NO | | | | | | |
1 NO B | | | | | |
2 NO C | | | | | |
3 NO D | | | | | |
4 NO E | | | | | |
5 NO F | | | | | |
6 NO G | | | | | |
7 NO H | | | | | |
8 NO J | | | | | |
9 NO K | | | | | |
10 NO L | | | | | |
11 NO M | | | | | |
| | | | | |
Contact arrangement NC | | | | | |
0 NC A | | | | |
1 NC B | | | | |
2 NC C | | | | |
3 NC D | | | | |
4 NC E | | | | |
5 NC F | | | | |
6 NC G | | | | |
7 NC H | | | | |
8 NC J | | | | |
9 NC K | | | | |
| | | | |
Number of contacts 1) | | | | |
Seven 4 | | | |
Eleven 7 | | | |
| | | |
Contact type | | | |
NO (Standard) / NC (Standard) 0 | | |
| | |
Type of flag | | |
Hand reset flag 1 | |
| |
Housing size | |
Case size E4 (4U high) C |

Tripping relay (TR112) 7 P G 1 5 □□ - □□□□□ - □□□
▲
0
|
Voltage rating |
24V DC B
30V DC C
50V DC D
125V DC F
240V DC H

Ordering Information - 7PG15 TR
▲ ▲
- □ □□□□
▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
- □ □□
▲ ▲ ▲
0
Hand reset low burden tripping relay. | | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | | |
TR – tripping | | | | | | | | | |
TR1-- : low burden, EB1 1 | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
Instantaneous 1 | | | | | | |
| | | | | | |
1 NO B | | | | | |
2 NO C | | | | | |
3 NO D | | | | | |
4 NO E | | | | | |
5 NO F | | | | | |
6 NO G | | | | | |
7 NO H | | | | | |
8 NO J | | | | | |
9 NO K | | | | | |
10 NO L | | | | | |
11 NO M | | | | | |
| | | | | |
0 NC A | | | | |
1 NC B | | | | |
2 NC C | | | | |
3 NC D | | | | |
4 NC E | | | | |
5 NC F | | | | |
6 NC G | | | | |
7 NC H | | | | |
8 NC J | | | | |
9 NC K | | | | |
| | | | |
Seven 4 | | | |
Eleven 7 | | | |
| | | |
| | |
Type of flag | | |
| |
Housing size | |
Case size E2 (4U high) A |

Tripping relay (TR121) 7 P G 1 5 □ □ - □ □ □ □ □ - □ □ □▲ 0
|
Voltage rating |
24V DC B
30V DC C
50V DC D
125V DC F
240V DC H

Tripping relay (TR131) 7 P G 1 5 □
▲▲
□ - □ □□□□ - □
▲▲▲▲▲
□□ 0
▲▲▲
Electrical reset low burden tripping | | | | | | | | | |
relay. | | | | | | | | | |
TR - tripping | | | | | | | | | |
TR1-- : low burden, EB1 1 | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
| | | | | | |
1 NO B | | | | | |
2 NO C | | | | | |
3 NO D | | | | | |
4 NO E | | | | | |
5 NO F | | | | | |
6 NO G | | | | | |
7 NO H | | | | | |
8 NO J | | | | | |
9 NO K | | | | | |
10 NO L | | | | | |
| | | | | |
0 NC A | | | | |
1 NC B | | | | |
2 NC C | | | | |
3 NC D | | | | |
4 NC E | | | | |
5 NC F | | | | |
6 NC G | | | | |
7 NC H | | | | |
8 NC J | | | | |
| | | | |
Six 3 | | | |
Ten 6 | | | |
| | | |
| | |
Type of flag | | |

Tripping relay (TR131) 7 P G 1 5 □□ - □□□□□ - □□□ 0

▲▲
| |
Housing size | |
|
Voltage rating |
24V DC B
30V DC C
50V DC D
125V DC F
240V DC H

▲ ▲
- □ □□□□
▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
- □ □□
▲ ▲ ▲
0
Hand and electrical reset low burden | | | | | | | | | |
tripping relay. | | | | | | | | | |
TR - tripping | | | | | | | | | |
TR1-- : low burden, EB1 1 | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
| | | | | | |
1 NO B | | | | | |
2 NO C | | | | | |
3 NO D | | | | | |
4 NO E | | | | | |
5 NO F | | | | | |
6 NO G | | | | | |
7 NO H | | | | | |
8 NO J | | | | | |
9 NO K | | | | | |
10 NO L | | | | | |
| | | | | |
0 NC A | | | | |
1 NC B | | | | |
2 NC C | | | | |
3 NC D | | | | |
4 NC E | | | | |
5 NC F | | | | |
6 NC G | | | | |
7 NC H | | | | |
8 NC J | | | | |
| | | | |
Six 3 | | | |
Ten 6 | | | |
| | | |
| | |
Type of flag | | |
| |
Housing size | |


▲
|
Voltage rating |
24V DC B
30V DC C
50V DC D
125V DC F
240V DC H

Tripping relay (TR212, TR214) 7 P G 1 5 □ □

▲ ▲
- □ □□□□
▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
- □ □□
▲ ▲ ▲
0
Self reset high burden tripping relay. | | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | | |
TR - tripping | | | | | | | | | |
TR2-- : high burden, EB2 2 | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
Economy 2 | | | | | | |
Economy and 2 second delay on reset 4 | | | | | C |
| | | | | | |
0 NO A | | | | | |
1 NO B | | | | | |
2 NO C | | | | | |
3 NO D | | | | | |
4 NO E | | | | | |
5 NO F | | | | | |
6 NO G | | | | | |
7 NO H | | | | | |
8 NO J | | | | | |
9 NO K | | | | | |
10 NO L | | | | | |
| | | | | |
0 NC A | | | | |
1 NC B | | | | |
2 NC C | | | | |
3 NC D | | | | |
4 NC E | | | | |
5 NC F | | | | |
6 NC G | | | | |
7 NC H | | | | |
8 NC J | | | | |
| | | | |
Six 3 | | | |
Ten 6 | | | |
| | | |
| | |

Tripping relay (TR212, TR214) 7 P G 1 5 □□ - □□□□□ - □□□ 0

▲ ▲ ▲
Type of flag | | |
| |
Housing size | |
|
Voltage rating |
24V DC B
30V DC C
50V DC D
125V DC F
240V DC H
Contact type
NO (Standard) / NC (Standard)

Product Description Variants Order No.
▲ ▲
- □ □□□□
▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
- □ □□
▲ ▲ ▲
0
Hand reset high burden tripping | | | | | | | | | |
relay. | | | | | | | | | |
TR - tripping | | | | | | | | | |
TR2-- : high burden, EB2 2 | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
| | | | | | |
3 NO D | | | | | |
4 NO E | | | | | |
5 NO F | | | | | |
6 NO G | | | | | |
7 NO H | | | | | |
8 NO J | | | | | |
9 NO K | | | | | |
10 NO L | | | | | |
11 NO M | | | | | |
| | | | | |
0 NC A | | | | |
1 NC B | | | | |
2 NC C | | | | |
3 NC D | | | | |
4 NC E | | | | |
5 NC F | | | | |
6 NC G | | | | |
7 NC H | | | | |
8 NC J | | | | |
| | | | |
Seven 4 | | A |
Eleven 7 | | A |
| | | |
| | |
Type of flag | | |

Tripping relay (TR221) 7 P G 1 5 □□ - □□□□□ - □□ □ 0
▲ ▲
| |
Housing size | |
|
Voltage rating |
24V DC B
30V DC C
50V DC D
125V DC F
240V DC H
Contact type
NO (Standard) / NC (Standard)

▲ ▲
- □ □□□□
▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
- □ □□
▲ ▲ ▲
0
Hand reset high burden tripping | | | | | | | | | |
relay. | | | | | | | | | |
TR - tripping | | | | | | | | | |
TR2-- : high burden, EB2 2 | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
40/60ms delay 3 | | | | | | |
| | | | | | |
3 NO D | | | | | |
4 NO E | | | | | |
5 NO F | | | | | |
6 NO G | | | | | |
7 NO H | | | | | |
8 NO J | | | | | |
9 NO K | | | | | |
10 NO L | | | | | |
11 NO M | | | | | |
| | | | | |
0 NC A | | | | |
1 NC B | | | | |
2 NC C | | | | |
3 NC D | | | | |
4 NC E | | | | |
5 NC F | | | | |
6 NC G | | | | |
7 NC H | | | | |
8 NC J | | | | |
| | | | |
Seven 4 | | | |
Eleven 7 | | | |
| | | |
| | |
Type of flag | | |

Tripping relay (TR223) 7 P G 1 5 □□ - □□□□□ - □□ □ 0
▲ ▲
| |
Housing size | |
|
Voltage rating |
125V DC F

▲ ▲
- □ □□□□
▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
- □ □□
▲ ▲ ▲
0
Electrical reset high burden tripping | | | | | | | | | |
relay. | | | | | | | | | |
TR - tripping | | | | | | | | | |
TR2-- : high burden, EB2 2 | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
| | | | | | |
0 NO A | | | | | |
1 NO B | | | | | |
2 NO C | | | | | |
3 NO D | | | | | |
4 NO E | | | | | |
5 NO F | | | | | |
6 NO G | | | | | |
7 NO H | | | | | |
8 NO J | | | | | |
9 NO K | | | | | |
10 NO L | | | | | |
| | | | | |
0 NC A | | | | |
1 NC B | | | | |
2 NC C | | | | |
3 NC D | | | | |
4 NC E | | | | |
5 NC F | | | | |
6 NC G | | | | |
7 NC H | | | | |
8 NC J | | | | |
| | | | |
Six 3 | | A |
Ten 6 | | A |
| | | |
| | |
Type of flag | | |
| |
Housing size | |

▲
|
Voltage rating |
24V DC B
30V DC C
50V DC D
125V DC F
240V DC H

▲ ▲
- □ □□□□
▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
- □ □□
▲ ▲ ▲
0
Electrical reset high burden tripping | | | | | | | | | |
relay. | | | | | | | | | |
TR - tripping | | | | | | | | | |
TR2-- : high burden, EB2 2 | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
40/60ms delay 3 | | | | | | |
| | | | | | |
2 NO C | | | | | |
3 NO D | | | | | |
4 NO E | | | | | |
5 NO F | | | | | |
6 NO G | | | | | |
7 NO H | | | | | |
8 NO J | | | | | |
9 NO K | | | | | |
10 NO L | | | | | |
| | | | | |
0 NC A | | | | |
1 NC B | | | | |
2 NC C | | | | |
3 NC D | | | | |
4 NC E | | | | |
5 NC F | | | | |
6 NC G | | | | |
7 NC H | | | | |
8 NC J | | | | |
| | | | |
Six 3 | | | |
Ten 6 | | | |
| | | |
| | |
Type of flag | | |
| |
Housing size | |
|
Voltage rating |
125V DC F

▲ ▲
- □ □□□□
▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
- □ □□
▲ ▲ ▲
0
Hand and electrical reset high burden | | | | | | | | | |
tripping relay. | | | | | | | | | |
TR - tripping | | | | | | | | | |
TR2-- : high burden, EB2 2 | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
| | | | | | |
2 NO C | | | | | |
3 NO D | | | | | |
4 NO E | | | | | |
5 NO F | | | | | |
6 NO G | | | | | |
7 NO H | | | | | |
8 NO J | | | | | |
9 NO K | | | | | |
10 NO L | | | | | |
| | | | | |
0 NC A | | | | |
1 NC B | | | | |
2 NC C | | | | |
3 NC D | | | | |
4 NC E | | | | |
5 NC F | | | | |
6 NC G | | | | |
7 NC H | | | | |
8 NC J | | | | |
| | | | |
Six 3 | | A |
Ten 6 | | A |
| | | |
| | |
Type of flag | | |
| |
Housing size | |
|
Voltage rating |
24V DC B
30V DC C
50V DC D
125V DC F
240V DC H

▲ ▲
- □ □□□□
▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
- □ □□
▲ ▲ ▲
0
Hand and electrical reset high burden | | | | | | | | | |
tripping relay. | | | | | | | | | |
TR - tripping | | | | | | | | | |
TR2-- : high burden, EB2 2 | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
40/60ms delay 3 | | | | | | |
| | | | | | |
2 NO C | | | | | |
3 NO D | | | | | |
4 NO E | | | | | |
5 NO F | | | | | |
6 NO G | | | | | |
7 NO H | | | | | |
8 NO J | | | | | |
9 NO K | | | | | |
10 NO L | | | | | |
| | | | | |
0 NC A | | | | |
1 NC B | | | | |
2 NC C | | | | |
3 NC D | | | | |
4 NC E | | | | |
5 NC F | | | | |
6 NC G | | | | |
7 NC H | | | | |
8 NC J | | | | |
| | | | |
Six 3 | | | |
Ten 6 | | | |
| | | |
| | |
Type of flag | | |
| |
Housing size | |
|
Voltage rating |
125V DC F

▲ ▲
- □ □□□□
▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
- □ □□
▲ ▲ ▲
0
Self reset low burden tripping relay. | | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | | |
TR - tripping | | | | | | | | | |
TR3-- : low burden, CEGB spec. P15 3 | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
Economy 2 | | | | | | |
| | | | | | |
0 NO A | | | | | |
1 NO B | | | | | |
2 NO C | | | | | |
3 NO D | | | | | |
4 NO E | | | | | |
5 NO F | | | | | |
| | | | | |
0 NC A | | | | |
1 NC B | | | | |
2 NC C | | | | |
3 NC D | | | | |
4 NC E | | | | |
5 NC F | | | | |
| | | | |
Number of contacts | | | | |
Five 2 | | | |
| | | |
| | |
Type of flag | | |
No flag 0 | |
| |
Housing size | |
|
Voltage rating |
125V DC F

▲ ▲
- □ □□□□
▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
- □ □□
▲ ▲ ▲
0
Electrical reset low burden tripping | | | | | | | | | |
relay. | | | | | | | | | |
TR - tripping | | | | | | | | | |
TR4-- : low burden, CEGB spec. TDM 5/11 4 | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
| | | | | | |
0 NO A | | | | | |
1 NO B | | | | | |
2 NO C | | | | | |
3 NO D | | | | | |
4 NO E | | | | | |
5 NO F | | | | | |
6 NO G | | | | | |
7 NO H | | | | | |
8 NO J | | | | | |
| | | | | |
0 NC A | | | | |
1 NC B | | | | |
2 NC C | | | | |
3 NC D | | | | |
4 NC E | | | | |
5 NC F | | | | |
6 NC G | | | | |
7 NC H | | | | |
8 NC J | | | | |
| | | | |
Seven 4 | | | |
Eight 5 | | | |
| | | |
| | |
Type of flag | | |
Self reset flag 2) 3 | |
| |
Housing size | |
|
Voltage rating |
50 / 125V DC N

2) Flag indication "IN" and "OUT"

1) Flag indication "OPEN" and "CLOSED"

1.2.3 7PG18 Tripping Relay-A
Reset coil 50
Relays with economy circuits reduce to approximately
14W
Type No. of Contact Operatin Spec Burde Ca
conta Reset g coil n se
cts cut-off siz
e
TR- 20 Self Economy EB2 High 4
A212
TR- 20 Self Economy EB2 High 4
A214 2s delay
TR- 20 Hand Instanta EB2 High 4
A221 neous
TR- 20 Hand 40/60ms EB2 High 4
Features A223
TR- 20
delay
Electric Instanta EB2 High 4
A231 al neous
High speed, positive action TR- 20 Electric 40/60ms EB2 High 4
Can be supplied in modular and drawout type case A233 al delay
Robust design for a long, reliable, service life TR- 20 Hand Instanta EB2 High 4
A241 and neous
Electric
Description al
TR- 20 Hand 40/60ms EB2 High 4
A243 and delay
Type TR-A relays are a range of volt age operated multi-
Electric
contact attracted armature relays designed to both IEC 255-
al
5 and to BS142. A wide range of models is available to meet
the requirements of the electric supply industry.
TR-A2 – High burden to ESI 48-4 EB2 & NGTS

Ratings
3.6.15, ESI 2.
Table 1 shows the standard relays available. 1250VAa.c. or 1250Wd.c. within limits of 660V and 5A
High burden, TR-A2 series 7500VAa.c. or 7500Wd.c. within limits of 660V and 30A
High burden relays with immunity to capacitance discharge
currents. They are also suitable for certain applications Break;
where they are remote from the initiation signal. 1250VAa.c. or 100W (resistive) d.c. or 50W (inductive)
A high burden also permits reliable operation of current d.c. within
operated series repeat relays. TR relays can be provided limits of 250V and 5A
with a time delayed economy feature, either instantaneous Maximum rate of operation, 600 per hour
or time delayed, see Table1. Indication
TR-A2 relays have a hand reset mechanical flag indicator
Technical Information
Environmental
TR-A2 series relays
Operating time 10ms at rated voltage Temperature
Rated voltage Vn 24V, 30V, 48V, 125V, 240Vd.c IEC68-2-1/2 and BS2011 (1977)
Note. 24V and 240V ratings are Operating -10°C to +55°C
not part of ESI 48-4 Storage -25°C to +70°C
Operating range 50% to 120% of rated voltage Humidity IEC 68-2-3
Operating coils of self-reset and economy cut-off relays are 56 days at 95% RH and 40°C
rated at 120% of rated voltage. All other operate and reset Vibration IEC 255-21-1 Class l.
coils are short time rated well in excess of the operating
time of their cut-off contacts. Self-reset relays will reset at Shock and bump
not less than 5% rated voltage. IEC 255-21-2 and BS142, 1.5.2 (1989). Relays meet the
requirements with respect to shock and bump testing for
Nominal burdens Class 1 severity.
Rated Voltage V.d.c TR2 -
30 43
48 52
125 <150

Operational/mechanical life
Relays will withstand in excess of 10,000 operations,
within the maximum contact loading specified, at a rate
of 600 operations per hour.
Insulation
Relays will withstand:
5kV 1.2/50µs waveform as IEC 255-4
2kV rms 50Hz for 1minute (2.5kV for 1s) between all
terminals and earth
1kV rms 50Hz for 1 minute across normally open contacts
to IEC 255-5 and BS142

Case Dimensions
NOTES:
1. The ø3.6 holes are for M4 thread forming
(Trilobular) screws. These are supplied as
standard and are suitable for use in
ferrous/aluminium panels 1.6mm thick and
above. For other panels, holes to be M4
clearance (typically ø4.5) and relays mounted
using M4 machine screws, nuts and lockwashers
(supplied in panel fixing kit).
2. 52mm dimension used for 7PG18 relays only, for
holes as Note 1.

Ordering Information – 7PG18
Tripping relay 7 P G 1 8 2 1 - 2
▲ ▲ ▲
□□
▲ ▲▲
8 0 - 1
▲ ▲
c
▲ ▲ ▲
□ 0
▲
EPSILON | | | | | | | | | | | |
TR-A212, TR-A214 (20 CONTACT) | | | | | | | | | | | |
Alpha range 5 | | | | | | | | | | |
TR-A Tripping 8 | | | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | | | |
TR-A Tripping 6 | | | | | | | | | |
TR-A2-- : high burden, EB2 2 | | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | | |
Contact operation 7 | | | | | | | | |
Self reset contacts 1 | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | |
Operating coil cut-off 8 | | | | | | | |
Economy 2 | | | | | | | |
Economy and 2 second delay on reset 4 | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
Contact arrangement - NO 9 | | | | | | |
0 NO AW | | | | | |
1 NO BV | | | | | |
2 NO CU | | | | | |
3 NO D T | | | | | |
4 NO E S | | | | | |
5 NO F R | | | | | |
6 NO GQ | | | | | |
7 NO H P | | | | | |
8 NO JN | | | | | |
9 NO KM | | | | | |
10 NO L L | | | | | |
11 NO MK | | | | | |
12 NO N J | | | | | |
13 NO PH | | | | | |
14 NO QG | | | | | |
15 NO R F | | | | | |
16 NO S E | | | | | |
17 NO TD | | | | | |
18 NO UC | | | | | |
19 NO VB | | | | | |
20 NO WA | | | | | |
| | | | | | |
Contact arrangement NC 10 | | | | | |
0 NC A | | | | | |
1 NC B | | | | | |
2 NC C | | | | | |
3 NC D | | | | | |
4 NC E | | | | | |
5 NC F | | | | | |
6 NC G | | | | | |
7 NC H | | | | | |
8 NC J | | | | | |
9 NC K | | | | | |
10 NC L | | | | | |
11 NC M | | | | | |
12 NC N | | | | | |
13 NC P | | | | | |
14 NC Q | | | | | |
15 NC R | | | | | |

Tripping relay □ 8 0 - 1 C □ 0
EPSILON 16 NC S | | | | | |
TR-A212, TR-A214 (20 CONTACT) 17 NC T | | | | | |
18 NC U | | | | | |
19 NC V | | | | | |
20 NC W | | | | | |
| | | | | |
Number of contacts 11 | | | | |
Twenty 8 | | | | |
| | | | |
Contact type 12 | | | |
| | | |
Type of flag 13 | | |
Hand reset flag 1 | | |
| | |
Housing size 14 | |
| |
Voltage Rating 15 |
24V dc B |
30V dc C |
50V dc D |
125V dc F |
240V dc H |
|
Back emf suppression diode 16
Not Fitted 0

▲ ▲ ▲
□□
▲ ▲▲
8 0 - 1 C
▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
□ 0
▲
EPSILON TR-A221 (20 CONTACT) | | | | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | | | | |
Alpha range 5 | | | | | | | | | | |
TR-A Tripping 8 | | | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | | | |
TR-A Tripping 6 | | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | | |
Hand reset contacts 2 | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | |
Instantaneous 1 | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
0 NO AW | | | | | |
1 NO BV | | | | | |
2 NO CU | | | | | |
3 NO D T | | | | | |
4 NO E S | | | | | |
5 NO F R | | | | | |
6 NO GQ | | | | | |
7 NO H P | | | | | |
8 NO JN | | | | | |
9 NO KM | | | | | |
10 NO L L | | | | | |
11 NO MK | | | | | |
12 NO N J | | | | | |
13 NO PH | | | | | |
14 NO QG | | | | | |
15 NO R F | | | | | |
16 NO S E | | | | | |
17 NO TD | | | | | |
18 NO UC | | | | | |
19 NO VB | | | | | |
20 NO WA | | | | | |
| | | | | | |
0 NC A | | | | | |
1 NC B | | | | | |
2 NC C | | | | | |
3 NC D | | | | | |
4 NC E | | | | | |
5 NC F | | | | | |
6 NC G | | | | | |
7 NC H | | | | | |
8 NC J | | | | | |
9 NC K | | | | | |
10 NC L | | | | | |
11 NC M | | | | | |
12 NC N | | | | | |
13 NC P | | | | | |
14 NC Q | | | | | |
15 NC R | | | | | |

Tripping relay □ 8 0 - 1 □ C 0
EPSILON TR-A221 (20 CONTACT) 16 NC S | | | | | |
17 NC T | | | | | |
18 NC U | | | | | |
19 NC V | | | | | |
20 NC W | | | | | |
| | | | | |
Twenty 8 | | | | |
| | | | |
| | | |
| | |
Housing size 14 | |
| |
Voltage Rating 15 |
24V dc B |
30V dc C |
50V dc D |
125V dc F |
240V dc H |
|
Not Fitted 0

▲ ▲ ▲
□□
▲ ▲▲
8 0 - 1 C
▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
□ 0
▲
| | | | | | | | | | | |
Alpha range 5 | | | | | | | | | | |
TR-A Tripping 8 | | | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | | | |
TR-A Tripping 6 | | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | | |
Electrical reset contacts 3 | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
0 NO AW | | | | | |
1 NO BV | | | | | |
2 NO CU | | | | | |
3 NO D T | | | | | |
4 NO E S | | | | | |
5 NO F R | | | | | |
6 NO GQ | | | | | |
7 NO H P | | | | | |
8 NO JN | | | | | |
9 NO KM | | | | | |
10 NO L L | | | | | |
11 NO MK | | | | | |
12 NO N J | | | | | |
13 NO PH | | | | | |
14 NO QG | | | | | |
15 NO R F | | | | | |
16 NO S E | | | | | |
17 NO TD | | | | | |
18 NO UC | | | | | |
19 NO VB | | | | | |
20 NO WA | | | | | |
| | | | | | |
0 NC A | | | | | |
1 NC B | | | | | |
2 NC C | | | | | |
3 NC D | | | | | |
4 NC E | | | | | |
5 NC F | | | | | |
6 NC G | | | | | |
7 NC H | | | | | |
8 NC J | | | | | |
9 NC K | | | | | |
10 NC L | | | | | |
11 NC M | | | | | |
12 NC N | | | | | |
13 NC P | | | | | |
14 NC Q | | | | | |
15 NC R | | | | | |

17 NC T | | | | | |
18 NC U | | | | | |
19 NC V | | | | | |
20 NC W | | | | | |
| | | | | |
Twenty 8 | | | | |
| | | | |
| | | |
| | |
Housing size 14 | |
| |
Voltage Rating 15 |
24V dc B |
30V dc C |
50V dc D |
125V dc F |
240V dc H |
|
Not Fitted 0

▲ ▲ ▲
□□
▲ ▲▲
8 0 - 1 C
▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
□ 0
▲
| | | | | | | | | | | |
Alpha range 5 | | | | | | | | | | |
TR-A Tripping 8 | | | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | | | |
TR-A Tripping 6 | | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | | |
Hand and electrical reset contacts 4 | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
0 NO AW | | | | | |
1 NO BV | | | | | |
2 NO CU | | | | | |
3 NO D T | | | | | |
4 NO E S | | | | | |
5 NO F R | | | | | |
6 NO GQ | | | | | |
7 NO H P | | | | | |
8 NO JN | | | | | |
9 NO KM | | | | | |
10 NO L L | | | | | |
11 NO MK | | | | | |
12 NO N J | | | | | |
13 NO PH | | | | | |
14 NO QG | | | | | |
15 NO R F | | | | | |
16 NO S E | | | | | |
17 NO TD | | | | | |
18 NO UC | | | | | |
19 NO VB | | | | | |
20 NO WA | | | | | |
| | | | | | |
0 NC A | | | | | |
1 NC B | | | | | |
2 NC C | | | | | |
3 NC D | | | | | |
4 NC E | | | | | |
5 NC F | | | | | |
6 NC G | | | | | |
7 NC H | | | | | |
8 NC J | | | | | |
9 NC K | | | | | |
10 NC L | | | | | |
11 NC M | | | | | |
12 NC N | | | | | |
13 NC P | | | | | |
14 NC Q | | | | | |
15 NC R | | | | | |

17 NC T | | | | | |
18 NC U | | | | | |
19 NC V | | | | | |
20 NC W | | | | | |
| | | | | |
Twenty 8 | | | | |
| | | | |
| | | |
| | |
Housing size 14 | |
| |
Voltage Rating 15 |
24V dc B |
30V dc C |
50V dc D |
125V dc F |
240V dc H |
|
Not Fitted 0

1.2.4 XR 7PG17 Interposing and Supervision Relays
1.2.4.1 7PG17 XR105, XR106, XR107, XR205 and XR206 Interposing

Relays
Normal duty, contact ratings

Make and carry continuously
1250VAa.c. or 1250Wd.c. within the limits of
660V and 5A
Make and carry for 3 seconds

7500VAa.c. or 7500Wd.c.
within the limits of 660V and 30A
Break:
1250VAa.c. or 100W (resistive) d.c. or 50W
(inductive)
L/R = 0.04, d.c. within the limits of 250V and 5A
Description
Temperature
In service: -10ºC to 55 ºC
Type XR205 and XR206 are two element versions of the
Storage -25 ºC to 70ºC
XR105 and XR106 respectively with the same performance.
Type XR relays are developments for specific applications
Mechanical durability
from the type AR relay range. They are electro-mechanical
relays with a consistent positive action, a long service life Vibration, relays comply with BS142, Section 2.1
and complying with BS142. Type XR105 has no flag Category S2.
indicator, XR106 & XR107 have a hand reset flag. Both types
are available with a suppression diode across the coil to Shock, relays will withstand a 20G shock or impact on the
reduce the effects of the back emf which occurs on switch- panel without operating. Operational/mechanical life, relays
off. will withstand in excess of 10,000 operations with the
contact rating stated.
Application Normally closed contact location

(Epsilon case terminal numbers)
1-3 2-4 5-7 6-8
Types XR105/XR106/XR107 are intended for the remote 1 NC NC
control of switchgear and associated equipment over pilot
2 NC NC NC
wires with a maximum resistance of 200 ohms. These relays
are designed so that they are not susceptible to certain a.c. 3 NC NC NC NC
voltage levels which may be induced onto the pilots wires. 4 NC NC NC NC NC
Technical information
External resistor required for 125Vd.c. operation

Operating range. With zero pilot resistance
78 to 125% of nominal rated voltage
With a maximum pilot loop resistance of 200ohm 92 to

125% of nominal rated voltage.
Burden Typically 3.7W for a relay with 4 normally open
contacts.
A.C. Rejection
For a 48Vd.c. rated relay, typically 110V 50Hz a.c.
Operating time
For a relay rated 48Vd.c. with 4 normally open contacts at
rated voltage typically 30ms. With 200ohms pilot resistance
less than 80ms. Reset time is less than 35ms
Fig1. connection details for Epsilon Case
Contacts
2 normally open, 4 normally open or 2 normally open and 2
normally closed, self reset on XR105 & XR106.
Hand reset on XR107.

Case Dimensions
Note: The ø3.6 holes are for M4 thread forming (trilobular) screws. These are supplied as stand ard and are suitable for use in
ferrous/aluminum panels 1.6mm thick and above. For other panels, holes to be M4 clearance (typically ø4.5) and relays
mounted using M4 machine screws, nuts and lockwashers (supplied in panel fixing kit).

Ordering Information – 7PG17 XR

Interposing control relay (XR105, XR106, XR107) 7 P G 1 7 □□- □□□□□- □□□0
▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
| | | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | | | |
XR relay type | | | | | | | | | | |
Interposing control 3 | | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | | |
Number of elements | | | | | | | | | |
Single element, self reset contacts 1 | | | | | | | | |
Single element, hand reset contacts 3 | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | |
Type of flag | | | | | | | | |
No flag 0 | | | | | | | |
Hand reset flag 1 | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
0 NO A | | | | | | |
1 NO B | | | | | | |
2 NO C | | | | | | |
3 NO D | | | | | | |
4 NO E | | | | | | |
| | | | | | |
0 NC A | | | | | |
1 NC B | | | | | |
2 NC C | | | | | |
3 NC D | | | | | |
4 NC E | | | | | |
| | | | | |
Two 0 | | | | |
Four 1 | | | | |
| | | | |
Contact type ) | | | | |
| | | |
Voltage rating | | | |
24V DC 1 | | |
30V DC 2 | | |
50V DC 3 | | |
125V DC 1) 4 | | |
| | |
Housing size | | |
| |
| |
Voltage rating (alarm) | |
Not Applicable A |
|
Not Fitted 0
Fitted 1
1) Supplied with resistor VCE:2101H10152

(1500 Ohm) for wiring in series with the coil.
2) Number of contacts must match selected
contact arrangement

Interposing control relay (XR205, XR206) 7 P G 1 7 □□- □□□□□- □□□□
▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
| | | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | | | |
XR relay type | | | | | | | | | | |
Interposing control 3 | | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | | |
Two element, self reset contacts 2 | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | |
Type of flag | | | | | | | | |
No flag 0 | | | | | | | |
Hand reset flag 1 | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
0 NO A | | | | | | |
1 NO B | | | | | | |
2 NO C | | | | | | |
3 NO D | | | | | | |
4 NO E | | | | | | |
| | | | | | |
0 NC A | | | | | |
1 NC B | | | | | |
2 NC C | | | | | |
3 NC D | | | | | |
4 NC E | | | | | |
| | | | | |
Two 0 | | | | |
Four 1 | | C | |
| | | | |
Contact type ) | | | | |
| | | |
24V DC 1 | | |
30V DC 2 | | |
50V DC 3 | | |
125V DC 1) 4 | | |
| | |
Housing size | | |
| |
Not Applicable A |
|
Not Fitted 0
Fitted 1
1) Supplied with resistor VCE:2101H10152 (1500 Ohm) for wiring in series with the coil.

1.2.4.2 7PG17 XR151 Trip Relay Supervision Relay
Contact arrangements
4 contacts in any combination of normally open or normally
closed
Contact rating
1250VA a.c. or 1250Wd.c.
with limits of 660V and 5A

7500VA a.c. or 7500Wd.c
with limits of 660V and 30A
Break
1250VA a.c. or 100Wd.c. resistive, or 50W
inductive (L/R = 0.04) d.c. with limits of 250V
Description
Type XR relays are developments for specific applications of
Environmental Information
the type AR relay range. They are electro-mechanical relays
with long service life and complying with the appropriate Temperature IEC 68-2-1 & 2
requirements of IEC 255 and BS 142. These relays have a -Storage - 25ºC to +70ºC
low operating current, specific settings and time delayed -Operating - 10ºC to +55ºC
drop-off. This latter feature is to keep the relay in the Humidity IEC 68-2-3
operated condition during temporary reductions in the 56 days at 95% RH and 40ºC
battery voltage, such as those which occur just prior to a Vibration IEC 255-21-1
fuse blowing or during a busbar fault when many trip relays
operate simultaneously. The relays meet the requirements of Class 1 for vibration
response and endurance
Application Shock and bump IEC 255-21-2
The relays meet the requirements of IEC 255-21-2 and
Type XR151 relays are designed to allow the supervision of a BS142, sub-section 1.5.2.
trip relay operating coil, supply & associated wiring. This (1989) with respect to shock and bump testing for class 1
application requires relays with low operating current, visual severity
indication and the ability to initiate a remote alarm. Both
these relays have mechanical flag indicators which show on Mechanical life
de-energisation, either self reset or hand reset. The relays will withstand in excess of 10,000 operations with
the contact rating at a rate of 600 operations per hour
Low burden & consistent, positive action
Suitable for high burden trip relays (EB2) only. Insulation IEC 255-5
Exact burden & operating current dependent upon 5kV peak, 1.2/50µs, 0.5J between all terminals and case
application. earth and between adjacent terminals.
2kV rms 50Hz for 1 minute between all case terminals
connected together and the case earth and between
Technical information independent circuits.
1kV rms 50Hz for 1 minute between normally open contacts.
Rated voltage V n 125V

Settings Pick-up: 70% of Vn Typical connections
Drop-off: not less than 26%
of Vn
Reset time No less than 100ms when XR151 SUPERVISION
RELAY
supply is switched from
13 14
100% to 26% of Vn.
15
Operating current Less than 20mA. 1 3
Burden Less than 2.5W 2 4
Thermal Withstand 1.15 Vn continuously
5 7
Indication A self or hand reset flag
6 8
indicator shows when the
relay is de-energised.

Case Dimensions
Note: The ø3.6 holes are for M4 thread forming (trilobular) screws. These are supplied as standard and are suitable for use i n

Trip Relay supervision relay (XR151) 7 P G 1 7 □□- □□□□□- □□□0
▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
| | | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | | | |
XR relay type | | | | | | | | | | |
Trip Relay supervision 5 | | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | |
Type of flag | | | | | | | | |
Hand reset flag 1 | | | | | | | |
Self reset flag 3 | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
0 NO A | | | | | | |
1 NO B | | | | | | |
2 NO C | | | | | | |
3 NO D | | | | | | |
4 NO E | | | | | | |
| | | | | | |
0 NC A | | | | | |
1 NC B | | | | | |
2 NC C | | | | | |
3 NC D | | | | | |
4 NC E | | | | | |
| | | | | |
Four 1 | | | | |
| | | | |
| | | |
125V DC 4 | | |
| | |
Housing size | | |
| |
Not Applicable A |
|
Not Fitted 0

1.2.4.3 7PG17 XR152 and XR153 Supply Supervision Relays
energised
XR152 self reset flag
XR153 hand reset flag
Contact arrangements
2 or 4 contacts in any combination of normally open and
normally closed
Contact rating
1250VA a.c. or 1250Wd.c. with limits of 660V and 5A
7500VA a.c. or 7500Wd.c with limits of 660V and 30A
Description Break
1250VA a.c. or 100Wd.c. resistive, or 50W inductive (L/R =
Type XR relays are developments for specific applications of 0.04) d.c. with limits of 250V
the type AR relay range. They are electro-mechanical relays
with long service life and complying with the appropriate
requirements of IEC 255 and BS 142. These relays have a Environmental Information
low operating current, specific settings and time delayed
drop-off. This latter feature is to keep the relay in the
Temperature IEC 68-2-1 & 2
operated condition during temporary reductions in the
-Storage - 25ºC to +70ºC
battery voltage, such as those which occur just prior to a
-Operating - 10ºC to +55ºC
fuse blowing or during a busbar fault when many trip relays
Humidity IEC 68-2-3
operate simultaneously. Healthy circuits therefore do not
56 days at 95% RH and 40ºC
give spurious alarms and the relay effected by the fuse
Vibration IEC 255-21-1
failure provides the alarm and indication necessary for
accurate maintenance attention.
The relays meet the requirements of Class 1 for vibration
Application Shock and bump IEC 255-21-2
The relays meet the requirements of IEC 255-21-2 and
BS142, sub-section 1.5.2.
Types XR152 and XR153 relays are designed to comply with (1989) with respect to shock and bump testing for class 1
CEGB and other specification for protection supervision severity
requirements and the monitoring of d.c. voltage supplies.
These applications require relays with low operating current, Mechanical life
visual indication and the ability to initiate a remote alarm. The relays will withstand in excess of 10,000 operations with
Both these relays have mechanical flag indicators which the contact rating at a rate of 600 operations per hour
show on de-energisation, self reset on the XR152 and hand
reset on the XR153. Insulation IEC 255-5
Low burden 5kV peak, 1.2/50µs, 0.5J between all terminals and case
Versatile design, can provide pre-close supervision earth and between adjacent terminals.
Consistent positive action 2kV rms 50Hz for 1 minute between all case terminals
connected together and the case earth and between
independent circuits.
Technical information 1kV rms 50Hz for 1 minute between normally open contacts.
Rated voltage V n 24V, 30V, 50V, 60V, 125V

and 220Vdc
Typical connections
Settings Pick-up 70% of rated
voltage DC SUPPLY +VE
XR152/3 SUPERVISION
RELAY DC SUPPLY -VE
Drop-off not less than 26% 13 14

of Vn
Reset time No less than 100ms when
supply is switched from 1 3
100% to 26% of Vn. 2 4
Operating current 10mA nominal. (17mA for 5 7
24V & 30V ratings) 6 8
Burden 0.4W at 24Vd.c. 1.25W at

125Vd.c
Thermal Withstand 1.15 Vn continuously
Indication A flag indicator shows
when the relay is de-

Case Dimensions

D.C. supply supervision relay (XR152, XR153) 7 P G 1 7 □□- □□□□□- □□□0
▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
| | | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | | | |
XR relay type | | | | | | | | | | |
D.C. supply supervision 4 | | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | |
Type of flag | | | | | | | | |
Hand reset flag 1 | | | | | | | |
Self reset flag 3 | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
0 NO A | | | | | | |
1 NO B | | | | | | |
2 NO C | | | | | | |
3 NO D | | | | | | |
4 NO E | | | | | | |
| | | | | | |
0 NC A | | | | | |
1 NC B | | | | | |
2 NC C | | | | | |
3 NC D | | | | | |
4 NC E | | | | | |
| | | | | |
Four 1 | | | | |
| | | | |
| | | |
24V DC 1 | | |
30V DC 2 | | |
50V DC 3 | | |
125V DC 4 | | |
240V DC 5 | | |
| | |
Housing size | | |
| |
Not Applicable A |
|
Not Fitted 0

1.2.4.4 7PG17 XR250 to XR351 Trip Circuit Supervision Relays
Burden
H7 scheme relay burdens are typically:
Rated Trip circuit condition Alarm

voltage C.B. open C.B. closed circuit
50Vd.c -- -- 2W
125Vd.c 1W 2W 4W
240Vd.c 2W 4W 9W
Thermal Withstand 1.15Vn continuous
Indication
A flag indicator shows when the relay is de-
Description energised
Self reset flag XR250 and XR350
Hand reset flag XR251 and XR351
Type XR relays are developments for specific applications of
the type AR relay range. They are electro-mechanical relays Contact arrangements
with a consistent positive action, a long service life and Alarm output - 4 contacts in any combination of normally
complying with the appropriate requirements of IEC 255 and open and normally closed. Pre-closing
BS142. Models XR250/251 have two attracted armature supervision, XR350 & XR351, 1 normally open contact.
elements, XR350/351 have three. These relays incorporate a
time delay on de-energisation to keep the relay in an Contact rating
operated condition during temporary reductions in the
battery voltage.
1250VAa.c. or 1250Wd.c. with limits of 660V and 5A
Low burden
7500VAa.c. or 7500Wd.c with limits of 660V and 30A
Versatile design, can provide pre-close supervision
Consistent positive action
Break:
CATION
1250VAa.c. or 7500Wd.c. resistive, or 50W
Supervision of the trip circuit breaker is desirable as a means
inductive (L/R = 0.04) d.c. with limits of 250V and 5A
of ensuring the integrity to the trip circuit.
There are differing requirements for monitoring a trip circuit,

supervision of the trip with the circuit breaker closed,
Environmental
supervision with the circuit breaker open and closed and pre-
closing supervision. These XR relays are designed to meet all Temperature IEC 68-2-1 & 2
of these requirements and in particular the requirements of Storage -25ºC to +70ºC
BEBS S15 schemes H4 and H7.
Operating -10ºC to +55ºC
Humidity IEC 68-2-3
XR250 and XR251 Circuit breaker closed supervision will
initiate an alarm and provide indication with the circuit 56 days at 95% RH and 40ºC
closed for : Failure of the trip supply, open circuit trip coil, an Vibration IEC 255-21-1
open circuit in the trip circuit wiring and if the trip coil
should fail to respond to a trip command. The relays meet the requirements of Class 1 for vibration
XR350 and XR351
Continuous supervision with the circuit breaker in the open Shock and bump
and closed positions and in compliance with the scheme IEC 255-21-2
requirements of BEBS S15 scheme H7. XR350 and XR351
relays also have a contact for pre-closing supervision, where The relays meet the requirements of IEC 255-21-2 and
a circuit breaker is prevented from being closed if trip relays BS142, sub-section 1.5.2. (1989) with respect to shock and
have not been reset. BEBS S15 scheme H7 is applicable to bump testing for class 1 severity
trip circuit voltages of 125Vd.c. and 240Vd.c.
Operational/mechanical life
The relays will withstand in excess of 10,000 operations with
Technical information the contact rating at a rate of 600 operations per hour
Insulation IEC 255-5
Rated voltage V n 30V, 50V, 125V & 220Vdc 5kV peak, 1.2/50µs, 0.5J between all terminals and case
Operating range 80% to 120% of Vn earth and between adjacent terminals
Reset time 400ms when supply is 2kV rms 50Hz for 1 minute between all case terminals
switched from Vn to off connected together, the case earth and between
independent circuits
1kV rms 50Hz for 1 minute between normally open contacts.

Coil and Resistor Data
R1 and R2 are fitted in the ‘C’ coil circuit.

R3 and R4 are fitted in the ‘A’ and ‘B’ coil circuits respectively.
Fig1. Typical relay wiring, modular case terminal

numbers shown

Case Dimensions
Note: The ø3.6 holes are for M4 thread forming (trilobular) screws. These are supplied as standard and are suitable for use i n
ferrous/aluminum panels 1.6mm thick and above. For other panels, holes to be M4 clearance (typicall y ø4.5) and relays

Trip circuit supervision relay (XR250, XR251) 7 P G 1 7 □□- □□□□□- □□□□
▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
| | | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | | | |
XR relay type | | | | | | | | | | |
Trip circuit supervision 5 | | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | | |
Two element, self reset contacts 2 | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | |
Type of flag | | | | | | | | |
Hand reset flag 1 | | | | | | | |
Self reset flag 3 | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
0 NO A | | | | | | |
1 NO B | | | | | | |
2 NO C | | | | | | |
3 NO D | | | | | | |
4 NO E | | | | | | |
| | | | | | |
0 NC A | | | | | |
1 NC B | | | | | |
2 NC C | | | | | |
3 NC D | | | | | |
4 NC E | | | | | |
| | | | | |
Number of contacts/element | | | | | |
Four 1 | | | | |
| | | | |
| | | |
30V DC 1) 2 | | |
50V DC 1) 3 | | |
125V DC 1) 4 | | |
240V DC 1) 5 | | |
| | |
Housing size | | |
Case size E3 (4U high) B | |
| |
30V DC C |
50V DC D |
125V DC 1) E |
240V DC 1) F |
|
Not Fitted 0
1) Supplied with external resistors

Ordering Information 7PG17 XR
Trip circuit supervision relay (XR350, XR351) 7 P G 1 7 □□- □□□□□- □□□□
▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
| | | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | | | |
XR relay type | | | | | | | | | | |
Trip circuit supervision 5 | | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | | |
Three element, self reset contacts 3 | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | |
Type of flag | | | | | | | | |
Hand reset flag 1 | | | | | | | |
Self reset flag 3 | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
0 NO A | | | | | | |
1 NO B | | | | | | |
2 NO C | | | | | | |
3 NO D | | | | | | |
4 NO E | | | | | | |
| | | | | | |
0 NC A | | | | | |
1 NC B | | | | | |
2 NC C | | | | | |
3 NC D | | | | | |
4 NC E | | | | | |
| | | | | |
Number of contacts/element | | | | | |
Four 1 | | | | |
| | | | |
| | | |
Voltage rating 2) | | | |
30V DC 1) 2 | | |
50V DC 1) 3 | | |
125V DC 1) 4 | | |
240V DC 1) 5 | | |
| | |
Housing size | | |
Case size E3 (4U high) B | |
| |
30V DC C |
50V DC D |
125V DC 1) E |
240V DC 1) F |
|
Not Fitted 0
1) Supplied with external resistors

2) Voltage rating for both trip coils

1.3 Classical Range and Associated Products
1.3.1 7PG23 Restricted Earth Fault
CT Requirements
Experience has shown that most protection CTs are

suitable for use with the high impedance relays and that
where the CTs are specifically designed for this protection
their overall size may be smaller than that required for an
alternative current balance protection. The basic
requirements are:
a) All CTs should, if possible, have identical turns ratios.
b) The knee point voltage of each CT should be at least 2x

Vs. The knee point voltage is expressed as the voltage
applied to the secondary circuit with the primary open
circuit which when increased by 10% causes the
magnetizing current to increase by 50%.
Description
c) CTs should be of the low leakage reactance type. Most
modern CTs are of this type and there is no difficulty in
The relay uses a type B61 attracted armature element meeting this requirement. A low leakage reactance CT
energized via a low pass filter circuit and a full wave has a jointless ring type core, the secondary winding
rectifier. The relay has a minimum setting of I5V. Other evenly distributed along the whole length of the
resistors are introduced into the circuit to provide the magnetic circuit and the primary conductor passes
voltage setting range up to 270V in increments of 5V through the approximate centre of the core.
using heavy duty DIL switches. Included within the relays
are the essential non-linear resistors to limit the peak
voltage output from saturated CTs, these resistors protect Technical Information
the CT insulation and secondary wiring.
Frequency fn: 50 or 60 Hz
Functional Overview Current Is: Fixed at 20mA
Voltage Vs: I5V to 270V in 5V steps
Thermal withstand: Continuous 1.25 × Vs
Low settings can be achieved. Accuracy: Vs ± 5%
Stability based upon plant capacity . Burden: Vs x 20mA
Operating time: 45ms maximum at 3xV
Application Indication: Hand reset flag

Contact arrangement: 3 normally open self reset
The 5B3 relay is ideal for restricted earth fault protection Contact rating:
of transformer windings or phase and earth fault Contacts are capable of making and carrying 6.6kVA for
protection of reactors and the stator windings of large 0.2 seconds with a maximum of 30A. Contacts are
machines. intended for use in circuits where a circuit breaker
auxiliary switch breaks the trip coil current.
This relay may also be used for high impedance busbar
protection. High impedance schemes have the
advantages over low impedance schemes that a more
Environmental
sensitive setting can be obtained without any loss of
stability and the primary fault setting calculation is Temperature: IEC 68-2-1 & 2
simpler. Operating: -10°C to +55°C
Storage: -25°C to +70°C
Current operated schemes are more susceptible to mal- Humidity: IEC 68-2-3
operations from through faults unless greater care is 56 days at 95% RH and +40°C
taken with the selection of the current transformers. For Vibration: IEC 255-21-2
some restricted earth fault applications the primary fault
setting needs to be greater at harmonic frequencies than The relay complies with the requirements of BS142,
the setting at the fundamental frequency. The 5B3 relay section 2.2, category S2 over the frequency range 10 to
uses a low pass filter circuit to achieve this. No adverse 800Hz impact. The relay will withstand panel impact
reduction in fault setting can occur with the high shocks of 20g. Operational/mechanical life in excess of
frequency currents which may be produced during 10,000 operations.
switching.

Insulation IEC 255-5 Fault Setting
Relay will withstand: It should, however, be noted that because the operating
voltage of the relay circuit is relatively high, the excitation
5kV 1.2/50,µs 0.5j between all terminals and case earth currents of the CT's in parallel with the relay may
and between adjacent terminals. 2kV rms 50HZ for I comprise a large proportion of the fault setting.
minute between all case terminals connected together
and the case earth and between independent circuits. IkV Primary fault setting = N (I0 + I1 + I2 + I3)
rms 50HZ for I minute across normally open contacts. Where:
I0 = Relay operating current
I1 etc = Excitation current of each CT. at the relay
Case setting voltage.
N = C.T. turns ratio
Single element Epsilon E3 case.
A B C D E F G H I
5B3 (size 3 case) 28 27 22 1 3 2 4 5 7
Fig1. Modular relay case terminal numbers
Stability
A or C
Fig2. High Impedance Scheme
For stability the voltage setting of the relay must be made

equal to or exceed the highest value of V calculated
below:
V=I (Rct+RI)
Where:
RI = The largest value of pilot-loop resistance
between the CTs and the relay.
Rct = The secondary winding resistance of the CT.
I= The CT secondary current corresponding to the
maximum steady state through fault
current of the protected equipment

Case Dimensions
Note: The ø3.6 holes are for M4 thread forming (trilobular) screws. These are supplied as standard and are suitable for use in

Ordering Information – 7PG23 – 5B3
5B3 7 P G 2 3 □▲ □▲ - □▲ □▲ □▲ □▲ □▲ - □▲ □▲ A 0
Single element high impedance | | | | | | | | |
relay, ideal for REF applications. | | | | | | | | |
Relay type | | | | | | | | |
5B3 - High impedance, 50Hz 1 | | | | | | | |
5B3 - High impedance, 60Hz 2 | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
Type of flag | | | | | | | |
Hand reset flag 1 | | | | | | |
| | | | | | |
Contact operation | | | | | | |
Self reset contacts 1 | | | | | |
| | | | | |
Contact arrangement – NO | | | | | |
3 NO D | | | | |
| | | | |
Contact arrangement NC | | | | |
0 NC A | | | |
| | | |
Number of contacts | | | |
Three 3 | | |
| | |
Contact type | | |
NO (Standard) / NC (Standard) 0 | |
| |
Setting range 1) | |
15V AC to 270V AC 1 |
|
Housing size |
Case size E3 (4U high) B
1) Relay is pre-set to 15VAC, customer adjustable settings up to 270VAC in increments of 5V provided by heavy duty DIL switches

1.3.2 7PG21 Pilot Wire Current Differential Protection
Description Additional Options

Solkor R & Solkor Rf are well established pilot wire feeder 15kV Isolation
differential protections operating on the current balance The Solkor R/Rf relay has an insulation level of 5kV between
principle. The R/Rf relay is primarily intended for use in the Rf pilot connections and the local ground to withstand voltages
mode which has the advantage of increased operating speed induced on the pilot cable due to coupling with the fault
but can be simply changed to R mode for compatibility with current and to withstand differential ground voltages caused
pre-installed remote end relays which are older 5kv Solkor R by the flow of fault current. Experience has shown that 5kV
type relays. insulation is usually adequate for most distribution feeders.
The relay is suitable for application on a single pair of For higher voltage systems where feeders may be longer and
privately owned pilots with loop resistance up to 2000ohms fault levels higher, an additional external isolation
to protect 2 ended feeder circuits up to 20km in length. Two transformer is available for use with the relay in Rf mode to
compatible relays are used as a pair with one relay increase the voltage withstand to 15kV.
connected to current transformers at each end of the feeder
respectively. The Solkor R/Rf relays do not require an 5kV systems may be suitable for higher voltage systems
auxiliary DC supply. where fault levels are low or feeder lengths are short. One
isolation transformer is fitted at each end of the pilot circuit.
Tappings at the transformers can be utilised to allow pilots
Function Overview with inter-core capacitance up to 4μF can be used compared
to the 0.8μF limit imposed by the 5kV standard
arrangement.
High transient stability.
High speed operation. Pilot supervision
Low phase and earth fault settings. Communication via the pilots between the relay pair is
essential for correct operation of the Current Differential
Little or no setting variation with pilot length protection system.
Test points at relay fascia
Additional external Pilot Supervision equipment can be
Bleed-off up to 20% of rated current supplied to detect pilot cable open circuit which can lead to
Easily reconnected as R or Rf mode protection operation or short circuit pilots which will greatly
reduce the sensitivity of the relays under subsequent fault
Option of 15kV pilot isolation conditions.
Option of pilot supervision
Pilot supervision will not block relay operation but will
provide an alarm. Pilot Supervision is available to suit the
5kV or 15kV insulation level of the scheme.

Overcurrent Guard
Solkor relay trip contacts can be connected in series with
those of an Overcurrent Guard relay driven from the same
current transformers to avoid operation for damaged pilots
during normal load levels.
The electromechanical B69 can be used for this which will

provide variable settings without an auxiliary supply.
Alternatively, a numeric relay from the Argus range can be

used which will have negligible additional AC burden on the
current transformer and can be used to add the waveform
recording functionality to the traditional Solkor scheme.
Intertripping
The current differential system will naturally issue a trip at
both ends for an in zone fault. Additional connections can
also be made which utilise the pilot connection to initiate a
protection operation at the remote end. This is generally
used to cause a trip for an out of zone fault which has been
detected by a different protection relay. There are 2 different
methods to achieve this and their application depends on
the fault current available for the out of zone fault.
Firstly the pilot loop can be open circuited to allow the

remote end to operate on its measured current. To ensure
positive operation of the remote end relay, the current
should be at least twice the normal fault setting. Switching
relays must provide suitable 5/15kV isolation
Secondly, the local end summation transformer can be short

circuited to allow the remote end to operate on its measured
current but with the local end connected in shunt. This can
be successful with R mode where settings are raised to 4x
normal settings but with Rf mode this can be up to 10x
normal settings and this current is often not available.

Typical Equipment Options and Schemes
Fig 1 Installation with Existing Solkor R relay.
Existing Solkor R/Rf in

Solkor R 5kV Pilots R mode
E6
External Wire Link required
Fig1. Installation with existing Solkor R Relay
Fig 2 Standard 5kV Plain Solkor Rf.
Solkor Rf 5kV Pilots Solkor Rf
E6 E6
Fig2. Standard 5kV Plain Solkor Rf
Fig 3 Standard 15kV Plain Solkor Rf.

F2 F2
T2 T2
Solkor Rf T1 T1 Solkor Rf
15kV Pilots
S2 S2
E6 BOP BOP E6
15kV 15kV
Isolation Isolation
Transformer Transformer
Fig3. Standard 15kV Plain Solkor Rf
Fig 4 5kV Solkor Rf with Pilot Supervision.

E4 E4
Solkor Rf 5kV Pilots Solkor Rf
E6 E6
B75
5kV
Pilot Supervision
Send End B74
B22 5kV
AC Supply Pilot Supervision
Supervision Receive End
E2
Fig4. 5kV Solkor Rf with pilot Supervision

A A
B Solkor Rf 5kV Pilots Solkor Rf B

C E6 C
E6
7SR1 Argus E4/ 7SR1 Argus E4/
B69 E6 B69 E6
Fig5. 5kV Plain Solkor Rf with Overcurrent Guard
F2 E12 E12 F2
T2 T2
T1 T1 Solkor Rf
Solkor Rf 15kV Pilots
S2 S2
E6 BOP BOP E6
15kV B75 15kV
Isolation 15kV Pilot Isolation
Transformer Supervision Transformer
Send End B74
15kV
Pilot Supervision
B22 Receive End
AC Supply E2
Supervision
E2
Fig6. 15kV Solkor Rf with Pilot Supervision
A F2 E12 E12 F2 A
E6
E6
T2 T2
Solkor Rf
Solkor Rf
B T1 T1
15kV Pilots B
C S2 S2 C
BOP BOP
7SR1 Argus E4/ 15kV B75 15kV 7SR1 Argus E4/
B69 E6 Isolation Isolation B69 E6
Transformer Transformer
15kV B74
Pilot Supervision 15kV
Send End Pilot Supervision
B22 Receive End
AC Supply E2
Supervision
E2
Fig7. 15kV Solkor Rf with Pilot Supervision and Overcurrent Guard

Service Conditions and performance data
Application Requirements
Number of Pilot cores required 2
Pilot Requirements
R Mode Rf Mode Rf mode with 15kv Transf.
Tap 1 Tap 0.5 Tap 0.25
Max. Loop Resistance 1000 Ω 2000 Ω 1780 Ω 880 Ω 440 Ω
Max. Inter core Capacitance 2.5μF 0.8 μF 1 μF 2 μF 4 μF
Pilot Current and Voltage

R Mode Rf Mode Rf mode with 15kv Transf.
Tap 1 Tap 0.5 Tap 0.25
Peak Voltage applied to pilots under fault 300v 450v 450v 330v 225v
conditions
Maximum current carried by pilots under 200mA 250mA 250mA 380mA 500mA
fault conditions
Maximum Primary Line Capacitive Charging Current.

Solidly Earthed System, 1/3 times the most sensitive earth fault setting
Resistance Earthed System, 1/9 times the most sensitive earth fault setting

Mechanical Durability Environmental
Vibration, relays comply with BS142 section 2.1 Temperature

Category S2. Shock, relays withstand 20G shock or IEC 60068-2-1/2
impact on the panel without operating. Type Level
Operation/mechanical life, relays will withstand in excess
of 10,000 operations. Operating Range -10 C to +55 C
Electrical Performance Humidity

IEC 60068-2-3
Characteristic Energising Quantities Type Level

Rated Current (In) 0.5A Operational test 56 days at 40 C and 95 %
1A relative humidity
2A
5A IP Ratings
6.67A
Type Level
Rated Frequency (fN) Operating Range Installed with cover IP 51

50 Hz 47Hz to 52Hz
Pilot Supervision Equipment
60Hz 57Hz to 62Hz
Auxiliary Supply
Insulation Send End 110/220/240V ac 50/60Hz
Between pilot circuit and all other 5kV rms Receive End 30V dc
independent circuits and earth 50V dc
125V dc
Between all external terminal and earth 2kV rms
240V dc
Between terminals of independent circuits 2kV rms
Across normally open contacts 1kV rms
Burdens
Isolation Transformer AC Supervision Supply 10VA approx.
AC supply fail relay 3 to 5VA
Between pilot circuit terminals and all 15kV rms
Receive Repeat Relay 1W
other terminals and earth
Contact Arrangements
Current Withstand
Pilot Supervision Relay(B75) 1NO self reset
Maximum through fault condition for 50x rated
differential protection stability current Repeat relay B74 2NO & 2NC
Supervision supply fail relay 2NO & 2NC
AC current Multiple of rated current Contact Ratings

Thermal Withstand Type B22, B74 and B75
Make & Carry Continuously 1500VA ac or 1500W dc within
Continuous 2x
limits of 660V and 3A.
20 minutes 2.8x Make and carry 8A for 3 secs or 16A
10 minutes 3.5x for 1 second.
5 minutes 4.7x Break 300VA ac or 75W dc (inductive L/R -
0.04) within limits of 250V and 5A
3 minutes 6.0x
Indication Flag indicators shown on de-
2 minutes 7.3x energisation
3 seconds 60x Supervision supply fail relay Hand Reset Flag
1 second 100x limited to 400A (B22)
Receive Repeat Relay Self Rest Flag
Operating Time R Mode 5kV Rf 15kV Rf Mode

Mode Settings
3x fault setting 60ms 50ms 45ms
Primary fault settings with insulation between pilot circuits
and other terminals and earth 15kV; typical current
Indication Hand Reset Flag transformers and zero pilot capacitance are given below.
Contact Arrangement 3 N/O Values are expressed as percentages of the current
Contact Rating Make and carry for 0.2s a bur- transformer rating.
den of 6600VA with a maxi-
mum of 30A

currents of the current transformers at different ends of the
Fault Fault Setting feeder should normally not differ by more than In/20 amperes
Type for output voltages up to 50/In volts where In =
5kV scheme 15kV scheme (Rf
mode only) rated current of Solkor Rf relay. This criterion is applied to
quantify matching of the transient response of the two CTs
R Mode Rf Mode R Mode Rf Mode so that relay operations do not occur due to differing
responses of the CTs to normal load switching or the
N1 N N1 N N1 N N1 N
incidence and clearance of out of zone faults. This
A-E 16 22 18 25 22 31 25 35
condition is usually easily satisfied by modern CTs of
B-E 18 27.5 21 32 26 39 30 44 similar size since the magnetising current is usually a
C-E 22 37 25 42 31 52 35 59 lower value. Care should be taken when applying a new CT to
A-B 110 125 155 177 be paired with existing CT and also when
B-C 110 125 155 177 interposing CTs are required to match CT ratios .
C-A 55 62 77.5 88.5
3P 63 72 89 101
The addition of Pilot Supervision will increase the settings by

20-50%.
Current Transformer
Requirements
R mode Rf mode
Maximum output of CT 1.2VA 3VA
required to operate relay
The main requisite is that the saturation voltage of the

current transformers should not be less than that given by
the formula:
For the above purpose the saturation voltage i.e. the knee
point of the magnetising curve, may be taken as that point on
the curve at which a 10% increase in output voltage requires
50% increase in magnetising current.
To ensure good balance of the protection the current

transformers at the two ends should have identical turns
ratios. Close balance of the ratio is provided by current
transformers to IEC60044: pt1, class px, whose ratio error is
limited to ±0.25% and these CTs are recommended to meet
the above requirements.
It is recommended that no other burdens should be

included in the current transformer circuit, but where this
cannot be avoided the additional burden should be added to
those listed when determining the current transformer output
voltage required.
In addition to the above, the secondary magnetising

Case Dimensions
Case Earth
47 31 216.5 connection 51.5
151.5
168
159
177
SIDE VIEW
10.5
26 FRONT
MINIMUM CLEARANCES: VIEW
PANEL
CUT-OUT

Fig8. E2 Case
Case Earth
98.5 31 216.5 connection 103.5
151.5
168
159
177
SIDE VIEW
10.25
78 FRONT
PANEL
CUT-OUT
Fig9. E4 Case
Case Earth
150 31 216.5 connection 155.5
151.5
168
159
177
SIDE VIEW
10
130 FRONT
PANEL
CUT-OUT
NOTE:
Fig10. E6 Case

Case Earth
304.5 11 31 216.5 connection 311.5
Typical
151.5
168
159
177
fitted
9.25
100.25
204.25 MINIMUM CLEARANCES:

Fig11. E12 Case (4U high)
Diameter 3.6 - 8 holes

159 177 151.5 MINIMUM CLEARANCES:
(see note) Case Earth
connection
216.5
TOP
295.25
304.5
PANEL
311.5
FRONT
VIEW
CUT-OUT VIEW
204.25
100.25
31
11
168 Typical
9.25
when
fitted
NOTE:
Fig12. E12 Vertical Case (4U wide)

Connection Diagrams
Short Circuit summation

GND 19
Transformer for Intertripping
a 23
1234
17
24
Pilots to remote end
b 25 b
Rf
a
R
18
26
Link for R mode only
c 27
20
n 28
Test Socket on relay facsia
Test Link on relay facsia
Test Socket on relay facsia

1
Fig13. 7PG2111 Solkor R/Rf Connections (E6 case)
17 19
Pilots to relay Pilots to remote end

18 20
GND
28
240v ac 27
26
220v ac
25
24
110v ac 23
Fig14. 7PG212 5kV Pilot Supervision Send End connections (E4 case)
B15 B13

B16 B14
240v ac A16
220v ac A15
110v ac A14
Common A13
Fig15. 7PG212 15kV Pilot Supervision Send End connections (E12 case)

17 19
Pilots to relay B75 Pilots to remote end
18 20
B74
13 + 14
1 * 3
2 * 4
5 * 7
6 * 8
* contacts may be 2M2B as shown or 4M or 4B

Fig16. 7PG214 5kV Pilot Supervision Receive End connections (E4 case)
B15 B13
B16 B14
A13 A14
Fig17. 7PG215 15kV B75 Pilot Supervision Receive End connections (E12 case)
+
13 14
1 * 3
2 * 4
5 * 7
6 * 8

Fig18. 7PG216 B74 Pilot Supervision Receive End Repeat relay for 15kV scheme (E2 case)
+
13 14
1 * 3
2 * 4
5 * 7
6 * 8

Fig19. 7PG213 B22 Power Supply Supervision relay for Pilot Supervision (E2 case)
+ * contacts may be 2M2B as shown or as below

13 14
1-3 2-4 5-7 6-8
4M M M M M
1 * 3
3M1B M B M M
2M2B B B M M
2 * 4
1M3B B B M B
5 * 7 0B B B B B
6 * 8
Fig20. 7PG2183 B34 Delayed Pickup delay relay for Rf Mode Intertripping (E2 case)

Ordering Information - Solkor R/Rf 7PG21
Solkor R/Rf 7 P G 2 1 □ □
▲ ▲
- □ □□□□
▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
- □ □□
▲ ▲ ▲
0
Pilot wire current differential | | | | | | | | | |
feeder protection. | | | | | | | | | |
Relay type | | | | | | | | | |
Solkor R/Rf relay 1 | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | |
Solkor R/Rf equipment | | | | | | | | |
Solkor R/Rf - Circulating current feeder 1 | | | | | | | |
protection | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
Contact operation | | | | | | | |
Self reset contacts 1 | | | | | | |
| | | | | | |
3 NO D | | | | | |
| | | | | |
0 NC A | | | | |
| | | | |
Three 3 | | | |
| | | |
| | |
Solkor mode | | |
Solkor Rf 2) 0 | |
Solkor R 1 | |
| |
Housing size | |
Case size E6 (4U high) D |
|
Rating |
0.5A AC A
1A AC B
2A AC C
5A AC D
6.67A AC E
Solkor R/Rf 7 P G 2 1 □ □
▲ ▲
- 0 A A 0 0 - 0 □
▲
A 0
15kV isolation transformer for use | | |
with Solkor Rf. | | |
| | |
Relay type | | |
Solkor R/Rf - Circulating current feeder protection 1 | |
scheme | |
| |
Solkor R/Rf equipment | |
Solkor Rf – 15kV isolation transformer 2 |
|
Housing size |
Special A
1) For pilot insulation of between 5kV and 15kV, SOLKOR Rf mode only, order 7PG2112 -0AA00-0AA0 isolating transformer with the relay at each feeder-end
2) Relay is set in Solkor Rf mode as default

Ordering Information – Solkor Pilot Supervision 7PG21
Supply transformer rectifier unit 7 P G 2 1 □ 0 - 0 A A 0 0 - □ □ □▲ 0

▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
For use with Solkor R/Rf relay, | | | | | | | | |
pilot supervision send end. | | | | | | | | |
Relay type | | | | | | | | |
Supply Transformer/Rectifier unit (send 2 | | | | | | | |
end) 1) | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
Type of Flag | | | | | | | |
No flag 0 | | | | | | |
| | | | | | |
Contact Arrangement - NO | | | | | | |
0 NO A | | | | | |
| | | | | |
Contact Arrangement – NC | | | | | |
0 NC A | | | | |
| | | | |
None 0 | | | |
| | | |
None 0 | | |
| | |
Insulation level | | |
5kV 1 C |
15kV 2 G/H |
| |
Housing size | |
Case size E12 (4U high) G |
Case size E12 Vertical (4U wide) H |
|
Rating 1) |
110/220/240V AC, 50/60Hz A
1) Supply Transformer/Rectifier unit (send end), ratings 110/220/240V ac, 50/60Hz.

2) For required supply supervision relay B22, see 7PG213*.

B22-AC 7 P G 2 1 □ □ - □ □□□□ - □▲ □ □ 0
▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
For use with Solkor R/Rf relay, | | | | | | | | | |
pilot supervision send end. | | | | | | | | | |
Relay type | | | | | | | | | |
Supply supervision (B22-AC) 3 | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | |
Type of flag | | | | | | | | |
Hand reset reverse acting flag 2 | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
| | | | | | |
2 NO C | | | | | |
| | | | | |
2 NC C | | | | |
| | | | |
Four 4 | | | |
| | | |
| | |
Frequency | | |
50Hz 1 | |
60Hz 2 | |
| |
Housing size | |
|
Voltage rating |
110V AC A
220V AC B
240V AC C

B75/74 7 P G 2 1 □ □
▲ ▲
- □ □□□□
▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
- □▲ □ □
▲ ▲
0
pilot supervision receive end (5kV). | | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | | |
Relay type 1) | | | | | | | | | |
Receive and repeat (B75/B74) 4 | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | |
Type of flag | | | | | | | | |
Self reset reverse acting flag 4 | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
| | | | | | |
0 NO A E | | | | |
2 NO C C | | | | |
4 NO E A | | | | |
| | | | | |
0 NC A | | | | |
2 NC C | | | | |
4 NC E | | | | |
| | | | |
Four 4 | | | |
| | | |
| | |
5kV 1 | |
| |
Housing size | |
|
Voltage rating |
24V DC A
30V DC B
50V DC C
125V DC E
240V DC F
1) Option selection for B74 element, B75 (3mA, 1NO/0NC) element included as stan dard

B75 7 P G 2 1 □ □ - □ □□□□ - □▲ □ □ 0
▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
| | | | | | | | | |
Relay type | | | | | | | | | |
Receive (B75) 5 | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | |
Type of flag | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
| | | | | | |
1 NO B | | | | | |
| | | | | |
0 NC A | | | | |
| | | | |
One 1 | | | |
| | | |
| | |
15kV 2 | |
| |
Housing size | |
Case size E12 (4U high) G |
Case size E12 Vertical (4U wide) H |
|
Current setting |
3mA A

B74 7 P G 2 1 □ □
▲ ▲
- □ □□□□
▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
- □▲ □ □
▲ ▲
0
| | | | | | | | | |
Relay type | | | | | | | | | |
Receive repeat (B74) 6 | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | |
Type of flag | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
| | | | | | |
2 NO C | | | | | |
| | | | | |
2 NO C | | | | |
| | | | |
Four 4 | | | |
| | | |
| | |
15kV 2 | |
| |
Housing size | |
|
Voltage rating |
24V DC A
30V DC B
50V DC C
125V DC E
240V DC F

1.4 Ancillary Equipment
1.4.1 7SG21 Multi Range Digital Setting Time Delay Relay
Operation
A crystal oscillator & embedded micro controller based
timing circuit are employed to provide accurate timing &
flexible functionality. When a control signal is applied to the
timer initiate input, a counter begins counting down from
the thumb wheel switch setting. When the zero is detected,
the output relay contacts & flag operate.
Three time ranges are selected via a front panel switch. An

internal configuration switch can be used to select a x10
range multiplier to provide up to 990s of precision time
Features delay. Two timing modes are available:
Time delay ON mode (Relay starts timing after the initiate

 Four time ranges 0-0.99s, 0-9.9s, 0-99s, 0-990s control signal is applied & output contact picks up after the
 High accuracy & repeatability – timing compensated pre-set time delay has elapsed) or;
for output relay delay
 Time settings easily selected by digital thumb wheel Time delay OFF mode (Relay output contact picks up
switches instantaneously when the initiate control signal is applied,
 Selectable delay operate or delay release starts timing after the initiate control signal is removed &
 Optional reset functions drops out after the pre-set time delay has elapsed).
 Instantaneous (Fast), definite time, count down
 4 C/O output contacts An amber LED on the front panel indicates when the relay
 Wide auxiliary supply range with fail alarm contact has been initiated & flashes during timing.
 Timing in progress LED
 Non-volatile trip indication The DDB20 timer may be specified with a number of
 Multi voltage timer initiate input different reset functions to provide instantaneous reset,
 Multi voltage flag reset input definite time reset or induction dist reset emulation. These
 Size 2M draw out case functions are specified at time of order.
A switchmode power supply provides a very wide auxiliary

Application operating range. A relay fail alarm is provided in the form of
a C/O contact which is picked up when the auxiliary supply
rail & CPU watchdog status is healthy.
The 7SG21 - DDB20 time delay relay is particularly suitable
for use in protection & control schemes where precision time
delays are required. Timing Functions
CB Fail
Timing Function / Initiate Signal input (Status input)
A typical use is for providing a definite time delay in circuit
For accurate timing functions the 7SG21 - DDB20 detects
breaker failure protection. For example: The transformer
application or removal of an external voltage control signal.
multi-trip relays energize the 7SG21 - DDB20 timer & if the
This mode is set using internal configuration switch 2 (Refer
circuit breaker (CB) fails to clear the fault within the pre-set
order code details). efer to Table 2 for timing initiate P/U &
(0.6s) the timer times out & operates a multi-trip relay. This
D/O times.
in turn trips all CB’s on the section of the busbar connected
to the CB, which has failed to trip.
Delay Operate Timing Function
Induction disc reset emulation This timing mode is selected using internal configuration
switch 3.
Replacement of induction disc timing elements with solid-
state relays can result in a loss of grading & reduced
The relay is permanently connected to the auxiliary supply & is
functionality due to the different reset characteristics. For
initiated by the application of a control signal. Application of
example, the inherent slow reset time of induction disc
the initiate signal starts the pre set timing cycle. During timing
relays provide an advantage in sensitive overcurrent
the front panel initiate LED will flash & then go on solid once
schemes where pecking faults could go undetected due to
the thumbwheel time setting has elapsed, this sets the output
the timer being instantaneously reset each time the current
relay & visual indicator. The initiate LED is extinguished & the
momentarily falls below the start setting. The 7SG21 -
output contacts reset when the initiate signal is removed. After
DDB20 may be specified with a number of reset functions to
system reset the visual indicator may be reset locally using the
avoid this problem & to suit specific protection applications.
front anel push button or remotely via the flag reset input.

To achieve a simple but less accurate delay ON function, the Definite Time Reset (Treset)
initiate signal may be connected directly to the auxiliary If reset before the preset time delay is reached the delay
supply. Timing will then commence when power is applied timer will pause until the reset time has elapsed before
to the relay while removal of power will reset the time delay resetting. If the timer is re-initiated before the reset time has
& output relay. This mode is only suitable for longer time elapsed, the delay timer will restart the timing sequence
delay settings as the switch mode power supply takes 100 – from the paused timing point.
500ms (Depending on Vx), to start which adds to the
inherent time delay. Count Down Reset
If reset before the preset time delay is reached, the timer will
count down toward reset. If the timer is re-initiated before
reset is reached the timer will start counting back up
towards the time delay pre set.
Removal of the initiate signal during timing will reset the

time delay (Refer timing reset options). After time out the
contacts are reset to the D/O condition upon removal of the
initiate signal. The flag can be reset provided the timer
initiate signal is removed.
Delay Release Timing Function

This timing mode is selected using internal configuration
switch 3.
The relay is permanently connected to the auxiliary supply.

Application of the initiate control signal, causes the output
relay to set instantaneously (Rset). It will remain in this state
until the control signal is removed; this starts the timing
cycle & resets the output relay when the preset time delay is
reached.
Re-application of the initiate signal during timing will reset

the time delay (Refer timing reset options). After time out
the contacts are reset to the P/U condition. The flag can be
reset at any time, except during timing.
Timing Reset options

Instantaneous
If reset before the preset time delay is reached the timing
element will reset (D/O) as per Table 2.

AC Rejection Filter
Technical Data Initiate input Minimum ON OFF
DC P/U <16ms <4ms
D/O <4ms <16ms
Auxiliary Supply
AC P/U N/A <23ms
40-300V DC & 40-275V AC or 20-70V DC switchmode supply.
D/O <33ms
Table 2
Burden (110V DC nominal supply)
Minimum Output Contact Operate Time
Less than 2 watts during idle & timing.
Less than 4 watts when output relays are energized.
Relay Fail Alarm

A C/O alarm contact is maintained in the energized state
when all of the following conditions are met:
 The auxiliary supply is applied
 The internal 24V DC rail is within acceptable limits
 The CPU hardware watchdog maintains a pulsing
output
A CPU software watchdog records “suspect” events to an The minimum output contact operate time is equal to the
assert register & if necessary performs a soft restart. timer initiate status input delays in Table 2 + 6ms. Time
delay settings ≤ to this figure will result in a relay contact
Time Setting ranges operate time equal to the minimum.
The 7SG21 - DDB20 relay allows for precision time settings
of between zero (Minimum operate time) & 990 seconds. Timing Accuracy
This is achieved by the use of two decimal thumb wheel Maximum timing error as a % of setting + uncertainty in ms.
switches & a range multiplication switch on the front panel.
A 10x setting multiplier is activated when configuration AC Rejection Filter
switch 5 is set to OFF to extend mer range 3 up to 990s. Initiate input ON OFF
DC -0.19% +0.2ms
Range Selector Achievable Time Setting Resolution of AC N/A -0.19% +10ms
Setting Range Time Setting Table 3
Range 1 Zero to 0.99 Sec 0.01 Sec Configuration Switches
Range 2 Zero to 9.9 Sec 0.1 Sec Configuration switches are accessible to the user & can be
Range 3 Zero to 99 Sec 1 Sec set by withdrawing the relay module & following the
Range setting x10 Zero to 990 Sec 10 Sec instructions on the side plate label. A bank of 5 switches are
Table 1 provided as depicted below & are read each time the DDB20
Time Delay setting changes is powered up: Configuration Switches 2 1 3 4 5
The time delay & function settings should only be changed
when the timing initiate LED is extinguished. Time delay
settings are read at the beginning of each timing sequence.

Insulation Coordination IEC60255-5 Class III
Status Input Operating Voltage (AC rejection filter) Between all terminals & earth 2.0kV RMS for 1 minute
The operating range of the status inputs are set using internal Between independent circuits 2.0kV RMS for 1 minute
configuration switch 1. This setting may be pre defined when Across normally open contacts 1.0kV RMS for 1 minute
ordering.
Auxiliary Supply IEC60255-11
18 - 300V DC Set Configuration Switch to ON
Allowable breaks / dips in supply ≤20ms
In this mode the universal status input will reject AC signals
that may be induced on the control wiring. Suitable for high Collapse to zero from normal
security applications where a DC battery supply is available. voltage
18 - 300V DC & 18 – 275V Set Configuration Switch to High Frequency Disturbance IEC60255-22-1 Class III
AC OFF 2.5kV 1MHz common mode ≤ 3% variation
In this mode the universal status input is designed to 1.0kV 1MHz differential mode
operate on both AC & DC input voltages. Suitable for
applications where an AC auxiliary voltage is available such Electrostatic Discharge IEC60255-22-2 Class III
as transformer or generator control panels. 6kV contact discharge ≤ 5% variation
Status Input minimum operating current

Radio Frequency Interference IEC60255-22-3
10mA P/U for 1ms then reducing to1.5mA after 4ms.
10V/m, 80 TO 1,000MHz ≤ 5% variation
While the function of the configuration switches may vary
Fast Transient IEC60255-22-4
for special custom models, the standard functions & default
settings are described in the Ordering Information section. 4kV/m, 5/50ns, 100KHz repetitive ≤ 3% variation
Front Panel Indicators Conducted RFI IEC60255-22-6

Four LED indicators are provided on the front panel: 10V, 0.15 TO 80MHz repetitive ≤ 5% variation
Power On solid when auxiliary supply Green
healthy Temperature Range IEC68-2-1/2
Timing Flashing during timing Amber Operating -10 to 55°C
Trip On solid when output relay operated Red Storage -25 to +75°C
Range x10 On when the x10 time range selected Green
Humidity IEC68-2-78
The trip LED status is stored in non volatile memory & will be 40°C & 95% RH non condensing
restored when the 7SG21 - DDB20 is powered up after loss
of the auxiliary supply. The preserved trip LED state is reset
using the front panel flag reset button or status input.
A hand & remote reset magnetic disc flag (permanent

memory) indicator may be specified as an option. Note that
an auxiliary supply is required to reset the flag circuits.
Transient Overvoltage IEC60255-5 Class III

Between all terminals & earth 5kV 1.2/50us 0.5J
Between independent circuits 5kV 1.2/50us 0.5J
without damage or flashover

Wiring Diagram
Output Relay Contact Configuration
4 C/O contacts
Output Contact dwell time

Once operated all tme delayed output contacts have a minimum dwell time of 100ms
Output contact ratings IEC60255-0-2

Carry continuously 5A AC or DC
Make & carry 0.5s 20A AC or DC
L/R ≤40ms & V ≤300V AC resistive 1,250VA
AC inductive 250VA @PF ≤ 0.4
Dc resistive 75W
DC inductive 30W @ L/R ≤ 40ms
50W @ L/R ≤ 10ms
Minimum numbers of operations 106 at maximum load
Minimum recommended load 0.5W limit 10mA/ 5V

Case Dimensions

Ordering Information – 7SG21 - DDB20
Product description Variants Order No
DDB20 7 S G 2 1 1 1 - 0
▲ ▲
□▲ □▲ □▲ 1▲ - 0 A A 0
▲
Multi range digital time delay relay. | | | | | | |
Relay type | | | | | | |
Line differential 1 | | | | | |
| | | | | |
Timing Range | | | | | |
0 th 0.99s, 0 to 9.9s, 0 to 99s and 0 to 990s 1 | | | | |
| | | | |
Auxiliary supply | | | | |
AC/DC 20-70V A | | | |
AC 40-275V and DC 40-300V B | | | |
| | | |
Timing reset function | | | |
Instantaneous reset A | | |
Definite time reset B | | |
Count down reset C | | |
| | |
Trip flag | | |
Red LED non volatile indication (standard) 1 | |
Magnetic disc trip flag 2 | |
| |
Contact type | |
4 C/O 1 |
|
Housing size |
Housing size E2 (4U high) A

1.4.2 7XG15 High Impedance Component Box
any protection maloperation. The relay is arranged to short
circuit the CT secondary wiring, diverting current from the
protection relay and preventing its operation.
The 7PG1110-7AE10 (AR901) CT shorting relay is such a de-

vice, its contacts are rated to carry in excess of 50A for three
seconds, which is suitable for the majority of installations.
This relay is supplied in a 4U, size E2 relay enclosure.
For more information see section 1.2.1 7PG11 Auxiliary

Relay.
High impedance protection operates on the differential

current-balance principle. In each zone, the current Application
transformers of the incoming and outgoing circuits are
connected together and form a current balance group.
A relay is connected at a convenient point to form a spill Auxiliary units for High impedance Busbar and Auto
circuit. An internal fault upsets the current balance and causes transformer protection.
the relay to operate. The system employs one or more relay
elements with sensitive current setting and low operating Used in conjunction with the 7SR23 High Impedance
burden. Protection Relay, the High Impedance Component Box 7XG15
and its associated CT Shorting Relay 7PG1110-7AE10 provides
An external series resistor is used to give the each relay a complete, panel mounted solution for the provision of High
element the voltage setting required to ensure stability under Impedance Protection.
through fault conditions. This is the setting or stabilizing
resistor. Features of the system include:
CT supervision using elements within the 7SR23.
The resistance of the setting resistor should be sufficient to
ensure the effective setting voltage exceeds the voltage Provision of test points on the front panel of the Component
developed by a through fault with one CT fully saturated. Box.
The current setting of the 7SR23 may be adjusted to achieve CT shorting on the detection of a CT fault, and whenever a
the desired primary operating current. protection operation occurs. This limits the dissipation of the
resistor and metrosil networks within the protection panel.
Non-linear resistors (e.g. Metrosils) are used to protect the
relay components, the insulation of secondary wiring and
current transformers, by suppressing high voltage peaks which Technical Information
may otherwise be developed by the current transformer
secondary winding under internal fault conditions.
7XG15:
Resistors and non-linear resistors are fitted on a per phase
basis. Stabilising Resistor values: 2000, 1000 or 500 Ohms
Non-Linear Resistor: C = 1000, B = 0.22 – 0.25
The resistors and non-linear resistors may be fitted as discrete Pressure tests: 2kV for 1 minute between
components; however the High Impedance Component Box phases, and all circuits to
7XG15 contains these items within a 4U high, size E6 relay Earth.
enclosure. Shock, Bump, Vibration IEC 60255-21-1,2,3
and Seismic tests:
7PG1110-7AE10 CT Shorting Relay

Cases
C.T. Supervision and Shorting:
Unbalance in any current-balance group due to an open- Modular case:
circuited current transformer, the primary of which is carrying 7XG15 High Impedance Component Box: E6
load current, produces a voltage across the relay circuit.
This causes a spill current to flow and leads to instability of the
protection. This condition is monitored using a sensitive ele- Determination of Stability
ment, either within the main protection relay or as a stand
alone device.
The stability of a current balance scheme using a high imped-
CT supervision is especially recommended for protections ance relay circuit depends upon the relay voltage setting being
applied to High Voltage switchgear and for schemes at all greater than the maximum voltage which can appear across
voltages where current transformers are switched to accom- the relay under a given through fault condition. This maximum
modate different busbar arrangements. voltage can be determined by means of a simple calculation
which makes the following assumptions:-
When an unbalance is detected, the alarm element is used to
operate a suitably rated CT shorting relay, which will prevent
1. One current transformer is fully saturated making its
excitation impedance negligible. Current Transformer
2. The resistance of the secondary winding of the satu-
rated CT together with the leads connecting it to the
Requirements
relay circuit terminals constitutes the only burden in
parallel with the relay. The basic requirements are:
3. The remaining current transformers maintain their ra-
tio. 1. All CTs should have identical turns ratios.
Thus the required relay operating voltage is given by: 2. The knee point voltage of the current transformers should
be at least twice the relay setting voltage. The knee point
VS  IF (RCT  RL )  T voltage is expressed as the voltage applied to the secondary
circuit of a current transformer which when increased by 10%
Where causes the magnetising current to increase by 50%.
Vs = Relay circuit setting voltage 3. The current transformers should be of the low leakage
reactance type to IEC 60044 class PX. Generally most modern
RL = The largest value of pilot loop resistance between the CT current transformers are of this type and there should be no
and the relay circuit terminals. difficulty in meeting this requirement. Low leakage reactance
current transformers have a jointless core with the secondary
RCT = The secondary winding resistance of the CT. winding evenly distributed along the whole length of the
magnetic circuit, and the primary conductor passes through
IF = The CT secondary current corresponding to the maximum the centre of the core.
steady-state through-fault current of the protected equipment.
See also the 7SR23 relay manual, applications section.
(Chapter 7, Section 3)
T = Turns ratio of all current transformers (Primary turns / Sec-
ondary turns)
Method of establishing the value of relay setting resistors.
To give the required voltage setting the relay operating level is

adjusted by means of an external series resistor as follows:
VS
R STAB 
IS
Where
Rstab = Resistance of the stabilising resistor
Vs = Relay circuit setting voltage
Is = Relay setting current
Fault Setting
The fault setting of a current –balance protection using a high

impedance relay circuit can be calculated in the usual manner.
It should, however, be noted that because the operating volt-
age of the relay circuit is relatively high, the excitation currents
of the CTs in parallel with the relay may comprise a large por-
tion of the fault setting.
Thus, if Is = the relay setting current, and I1, I2, I3 etc are the
excitation currents of the CTs at the setting voltage, and T is
the CT turns ratio then
Primary Operating Current = (Is +I1+I2+I3)xT

Example: 3-Pole Differential Busbar Protection
Plant Data
Rated voltage: 11kV
CB Break capacity: 31.5kA
Busbar rated current: 2000A
Minimum available fault current: No data
Example System – Single Busbar
Plant Data Control Scheme settings for 7SR23 (see connections diagram)
See diagram above. Protection Healthy BO2
87/50-1 Operated BO3
Setting Requirements
CT50 Operated BO3
Assigned through fault current (rated stability limit) = 31.5kA Zone Switch Out BO3
(CB break capacity)
BI 1 Operated L8
Required Fault Setting (Primary Operate Current):
Self Reset LED L8 (L8 to be marked as “ CT
Approximately 50% of busbar rating, or
Shorting Relay Operated “)
10 – 30% of minimum fault current available, or
BO3 Minimum Operate 5s
As specified by the user
Time
From the supplied plant data a primary operate current (POC)
of 1000A is chosen.
CT and Connection Details

Turns ratio (T) 1/2000
Voltage Knee Point (VK) 600V
Magnetising Current (Imag) 100mA
@ VK
CT secondary resistance 10 Ohms
(RCT)
CT lead loop resistance (R L) 0.15 Ohms max.
Using the data in the 7SR23 settings tool software,

we are given the following settings:
7SR23 Relay
87/50-1 Element Enabled
87/50-1 Current Setting 0.365A
87/50-1 Delay setting 0s
CT50 Element Enabled
CT50 Setting 0.02A
CT50 Delay 3s
Auxiliary Component Box

Rstab 500 Ohms
Metrosil 75mm, c = 1000

Diagrams – Selection of stabilising resistance
R = 2000 Ohms 7XG15
HIGH IMPEDANCE
COMPONENT BOX
23 5
25 13
11
27 6
4
7SR23
2 A9 A5 A1
24,26,28 10 A10 A6 A2
R = 1000 Ohms 7XG15

HIGH IMPEDANCE
COMPONENT BOX
23 5
25 13
11
27 6
4
7SR23
2 A9 A5 A1
24,26,28 10 A10 A6 A2
7XG15
R = 500 Ohms
HIGH IMPEDANCE
COMPONENT BOX
23 5
25 13
11
27 6
4 7SR23
2 A9 A5 A1
24,26,28 10 A10 A6 A2

AC Schematic diagram:-
7SR23, 7XG15, 7PG1110
7XG15
CT SHORTING RELAY HIGH IMPEDANCE
7PG1110-7AE10 COMPONENT BOX
23 5
A
3
1 1
7
A TEST POINTS A
2
CT RELAY
25 13
B
11
3 9
CURRENT
15
B TEST POINTS B
4
CT RELAY
TRANSFORMERS
27 6
C
4
7SR23
5 2 A9 A5 A1
8
C TEST POINTS C
6
CT RELAY
24,26,28 10 A10 A6 A2
N
NOTES:
1. 7SR23 DAD connections to the 7XG15 unit are correct for a setting resistance of 2000 Ohms.
These connections must be varied on the 7XG15 unit where the alternative values of 1000 or 500 Ohms are re-
quired for a given application.
2. The CT Shorting Relay and the 7XG15 unit are both fitted with case shorting contacts. In the event that either d e-
vice is withdrawn, the Current Transformers are automatically short circuited and indication is given by the 7SR23.
3. The 7XG15 unit is designed to be used in conjunction with the 7PG11 CT Shorting Relay.
Do not use the 7XG15 unit without a CT shorting relay, or with alternative scheme connections.

DC Schematic diagram:-
7SR23, 7XG15, 7PG1110
DC SUPPLY +VE DC SUPPLY -VE
7SR23
B22 B24
PSU
B26
7SR23
CT SHORTING RELAY
7PG1110-7AE10
27 28
PROTECTION HEALTHY Zone Switch Out

87/50, CT50
B5 BO2 B9 BO3 B15 13 14
B11
B7 B13
CT SHORTING RELAY 7SR23

7PG1110-7AE10
BI1 B4
7 8 B2
7XG15
HIGH IMPEDANCE
COMPONENT BOX
19 20
7SR23
TRIPPING RELAY
7PG15
BO4
17 19 27 28
NOTES:
1. The rated DC voltage of the CT Shorting Relay and the 7SR23 DAD (Power Supply and Binary Inputs) must be co m-
patible with the available auxiliary supply.
2. On the 7SR23, Binary Input 1 must be suitably mapped to provide a self –reset LED indication that the CT Shorting
Relay is operated, and the protection is temporarily out of service (until the CT Shorting Relay Resets).
3. The CT Shorting Relay and the 7XG15 unit are both fitted with case shorting contacts. In the event that either de-
vice is withdrawn, the Current Transformers are automatically short circuited and indication is given by the 7SR23.
4. Binary Outputs on the 7SR23 are to be mapped as indicated above. This is to allow automatic oper ation of the CT
Shorting Relay as required by the scheme.
5. BO3 must be configured as hand reset. The protection is reset from the keypad on the 7SR23, this will also reset the
CT shorting relay and indication.
6. CB Trip is to be via a latched Trip Relay.

Component Box 7 X G 1 5 2 0 - 3 A A 0 0 - 0 D A 0
▲ ▲ ▲▲ ▲
Setting resistor and metrosil unit │ │ │ │ │
for 7SR23 Disc size, number of phases │ │ │ │ │
High Impedance Protection. Three inch, single phase 2 │ │ │ │
│ │ │ │
│ │ │ │
B value │ │ │ │
0.22 to 0.25 0 │ │ │
│ │ │
C value │ │ │
1000 3 │ │
│ │
Resistors │ │
2000/1000/500 Ohm A │
Case size E6 (4U high) D

1.4.3 7XG21 Capacitor Cone Adapter Unit for NVD protection
Technical information
Different manufacturers fit Capacitor Cones with different

values of capacitance, C1, C2 and C3. The capacitance of the
Adaptor Unit, C4, must therefore be settable to achieve the
required step-down effect. The available setting range is 1 to
201.9nF, with discrete steps of 1, 2.2, 4.7, 10, 22, 47, 47
and 68nF.
Application
C1 Cp = C1 + C2 + C3
Capacitor Cones are used in 11 and 33 kV Sub/Stations to
provide a Neutral Voltage Displacement (NVD) level where
conventional Voltage Transformers are too large or too C2
expensive. This voltage level is too high for use by numeric
relays, being at system primary levels, and so an Adapter
Unit must be used to step it down. The input capacitance of C3
the Adapter can be configured by means of DIL switches to C4
determine the step-down ratio. Vout
Vin
The Adapter Unit can be used with any Reyrolle numeric
relay with an input for NVD measurement.
Vout = Vin x Xc4 / ((Xcp x Xc4) / (Xcp + Xc4))

L1 L2 L3 = Vin x Xc4 x (Xcp + Xc4) / (Xcp x Xc4)
(A) (B) (C)
= Vin x (Xcp + Xc4) / Xcp
= Vin x Xc4 / Xcp (Xc4 >> Xcp)
= Vin x Cp / C4
Capacitor Cones C4 = (Vin / Vout) x Cp
Fig 2. Equivalent circuit of Capacitor Cones and Adaptor

1
Unit
Capacitor Cone
Adaptor Unit Vo The voltage input impedance of the Reyrolle numeric relays
is high enough not to load this circuit. However allowance
must be made for the capacitance of the voltage input
2
(5.7nF) of the relay.
Note 1
Setting= ((Vin / Vout) x Cp in nF) – 5.7nF
Note 1:- Earth
connections are
essential for this
application. Example: 150pF capacitor cones used on a 33kV system.
As a guideline, Primary NVD pick-up level is 25% of the

Primary P-N voltage = 33kV x 0.25 / √3 = 5kV
Fig 1. Connection of Capacitor Cone to Reyrolle
protection relay Choose a relay NVD pick-up of, say, 25V
Adaptor Unit setting = (Vin/Vout) x Cp

= (5kV/25V) x (3 x 150pF) = 90nF

Allowing for the voltage input impedance of the relay
= 90nF – 5.7nF = 84.3nF
Note that allowance should also be made for

the capacitance of cabling if this is significant.
Setting the “3Vo VT Primary” to 5kV,

and the “3Vo VT Secondary” to 25V
will give correct primary and secondary NVD meters
The Adaptor Unit provides a secure housing and has the

advantage that it can be fine tuned on site – by means of Fig 3. Capacitor Cone Adaptor Unit construction
direct primary injection - to allow for variations in the actual
capacitance of the Capacitor cones. It provides a reduced NOTE: Capacitor Cones must be considered as current
voltage level, Vout, and surge suppression; clamping switch- sources for maintenance purposes. Current levels will be low
on or lightning-induced spikes to less than 250 V AC. but the high voltage levels pose a danger to personnel and
plant. The Cones should therefore be short-circuited to
EARTH and NOT open
Case Drawing
37.5 55 110
CAPACITOR CONE Remove Cover for

ADAPTOR UNIT access to DIL switch
Article No. 2422H10002
Serial No. 100123401/002 Small DIN Rail mounting
75
61
2 EARTH
1 INPUT
DIL SW DIL SW
4mm dia - 2 holes
Switch 1 ON = 1nF
Switch 2 ON = 2.2 nF
Switch 3 ON = 4.7 nF
Switch 4 ON = 10nF
Switch 5 ON = 22nF Setting = SUM of the Capacitance of all On Switches
Switch 6 ON = 47nF
Switch 7 ON = 47 nF
Switch 8 ON = 68nF

Ordering Information – Capacitor Cone Adapter Unit 7XG21
Capacitor Cone Adaptor Unit 7 X G 2 1 0 0 - 1 A A 0 0 - 0 A A 0

1.4.4 7XG22 2RMLG, 8W & 10W Test Blocks
Description
The 7XG22 range of Test Blocks, housed within an Epsilon
enclosure, offers facilities for monitoring and secondary
injection testing of power system protection schemes in
conjunction with the appropriate multi-fingered test plug.
The 2RMLG Test Block has 14 pairs of spring loaded contacts

which are linked to a terminal block positioned at the rear of
the enclosure.
The 8W and 10W Test Blocks are of identical construction to

the 2RMLG but with 8 or 10 pairs of contacts respectively.
The 2RMLG07 is coded to only accept the 2RMLB-S7 Test

Plug which has connection terminals 21, 23, 25 &
27,internally – For typical application see Fig 4.
Fig 1 & 2.
Plug which has internal pairs 1&3, 5&7, 9&11 and 15&17 Note: It is important that the sockets in the test plug
shorted together internally – For typical applications see Figs (2RMLBS-1) which correspond to the current transformer
5, 6, 7 & 8. secondary windings are linked prior to the test plug being
inserted into the test block.
Plug which has internal pairs 1-3-5-7, and 17-19 shorted This will ensure that the current transformer secondary
together internally. windings are short circuited prior to disconnection from the
protection scheme or relay (as shown in Figure 3).
Each pair of contacts is normally closed completing the If the dc auxiliary supply is to be used during testing it can
circuit through the test block when the associated protection be linked using the sockets in the test plug.
equipment is in use.
Operation of the contacts can be monitored by connecting
For testing purposes the test block can be accessed by the test equipment to the protection scheme or relay with
removing the front cover. The 2RMLG 01 has a metallic the even numbered sockets of the test plug.
probe attached to the front cover assembly which when If a number of 2RMLG test blocks are connected to a relay it
withdrawn open circuits the 2 contacts at position 13 and is recommended that the dc supply be routed through each
14. of them to safeguard against inadvertent operation.
The main dc auxiliary supply to the protection scheme or Mechanical Specification

relay can be wired to this circuit to prevent inadvertent The 2RMLG, 8W and 10W are a size E2 unit in the Epsilon
tripping of the protection circuit after removal of the cover range of enclosures. The overall dimensions and panel fixing
and during the test procedure. details are shown in Figure 10.
The 2RMLG 02/07/08/09 do not include the above facility The rear terminal block has 28 terminals each with an M4
and contacts 13 and 14 are normally closed. These contacts screw outlet for the attachment of external wiring, fitted
must not be used for current circuits, as the relevant contact with ‘L’ shaped pre-insulated ring tongue terminations.
finger on the 2RMLB test plug is shorter in this position.
2RMLB-S series Multi-fingered test plugs
The short test finger in position 13-14 on the 2RMLB will The 2RMLB-S series are inserted into the 2RMLG test socket
open contacts 13-14 in the test block after the other fingers and is securely retained by means of two knurled screws.
have made contact in all other positions. The 2RMLB-SI test plug incorporates 28 test sockets, each
socket accepting a shrouded or plain 4mm diameter plug.
2RMLB S7 with Shorting Contacts 2RMLG 01 only 1kV rms for 1 minute
The 2RMLB-S7 is similar to the 2RMLB-S1 with shorted 8W & 10W between terminals 13 and
contact pairs 21-23-25-27and is coded to be used with the 14 when the cover is
MMLG07 Test Socket only. removed (e.g. opening the
auxiliary supply or trip
2RMLB S8 with Shorting Contacts circuit).
The 2RMLB-S8 is similar to the 2RMLB-S1 with shorted 2RMLB-S1 As 2RMLG 01 plus 2kV rms
contact pairs 1-3, 5-7, 9-11, 15-17 and is coded to be used for 1 minute between
with the 2RMLG08 Test Socket only. incoming and outgoing
contacts when inserted
2RMLB S9 with Shorting Contacts 2RMLB-S7 As above with the
The 2RMLB-S9 is similar to the 2RMLB-S1 with shorted exception of terminals 21,
contact pairs 1-3-5-7, 9-11, 17-19, 21-23-25-27 and is coded 23, 25 & 27 which are
to be used with the 2RMLG09 Test Socket only. permanently shorted
together
2RMLB-S8 As above with the
Precautions exception of terminal pairs
1&3, 5&7, 9&11, 15&17
which are permanently
BEFORE inserting a Test Plug into a Test Socket carrying shorted together as pairs
current transformer secondary circuits. 2RMLB-S9 As above with the
exception of terminal pairs
ENSURE that the Test Plugs corresponding to the current 1-3-5-7,17-19 which are
transformer circuits are short-circuited. permanently shorted
together as pairs
This is to ensure the current transformer secondary circuits
are not inadvertently open-circuited during insertion of the
Current withstand
last plug.
2RMLG 01/02/07/08 All contact circuits rated at
BEFORE inserting a Test Plug to measure current. 8W & 10W 20A continuously or 400A
ENSURE that the ammeter is on the correct range and that it for 1s, ac or dc
is connected to its test leads 2RMLBS1-S9
Atmospheric environment
Connections
Temperature
The connections will depend upon the scheme and details IEC 255-6: 1988 Storage and transit - 25°C
must be obtained from the appropriate diagrams. If it is to +70°C
necessary to use the d.c. auxiliary supply during testing, Operating -25°C to +55°C
then a test link may be fitted across the sockets in the Test IEC 68-2-1: 1990 Cold
Plug. IEC 68-2-2: 1974 Dry Heat
Humidity
Technical Information IEC 68-2-3: 1969 56 days at 93% RH and
+40°C
High Voltage withstand
Enclosure Protection
Insulation
IEC 255-5: 1977 IEC 529: 1989 IP50 (dust protected)
2RMLG 01/02/07/08/09 5kV rms for 1 minute Mechanical environment

8W & 10W between all case terminals
connected together and the Vibration
case earth terminal. IEC 255-21-1: 1988 Response Class 2
5kV rms for 1 minute
between any contact pair EMC compliance
and either adjacent 89/336/EEC These products have been
alternate contact pair, classified as
provided the intermediate electromagnetically benign
contact pair is not used and are therefore
2kV rms for 1 minute excluded from the
between any contact pair European Community EMC
and either adjacent contact Directive. (89/336/EEC)
pair

TYPICAL APPLICATION OF THE 2RMLG01 / 2RMLG02 TEST SOCKET AND
2RMLB-S1 TEST PLUG
2RMLB-S1 TEST PLUG

(FRONT VIEW)
Fig 3.
TYPICAL APPLICATION OF THE 2RMLG07 TEST SOCKET

AND 2RMLB-S7 TEST PLUG
2RMLB-S7 TEST PLUG

(FRONT VIEW)
Fig 4.

2RMLG08 TEST SOCKET TEST POINTS AND SHORTING
ARRANGEMENT WITH 2RMLB-S8 TEST PLUB INSERTED
2RMLB-S8 2RMLB-S8
2RMLB-S8
2RMLB-S8 PLUG LABEL

(FRONT VIEW)
Fig 5.
TYPICAL APPLICATION OF THE 2RMLG08 TEST

SOCKET AND 2RMLB-S8 TEST PLUG
BELOW INDICATES SHORTED CONNECTIONS WITH 2RMLB-S8 FITTED
SEE 2993W10168 FOR TEST POINTS AND SHORTING

ARRANGEMENT WITH 2RMLB-S8 TEST PLUG INSERTED
Fig 6.

SEE 2993W10168 FOR TEST POINTS AND SHORTING ARRANGEMENT

WITH 2RMLB-S8 TEST PLUG INSERTED
Fig 7.

SEE 2993W10168 FOR TEST POINTS AND SHORTING ARRANGEMENT WITH

2RMLB-S8 TEST PLUG INSERTED
Fig 8.

Fig 9.

Test Modules – 2RMLG 7 X G 2 2 2 0 -

▲ ▲ ▲
□▲ □▲ A 0 0 - 0 A A 0
Modular case test ||| | |
components (MLG). Category ||| | |
Ancillary equipment 2 | | | |
|| | |
Ancillary equipment || | |
Modular case test components 2 | | |
| | |
Test component type | | |
Test modules (MLG) 2 | |
| |
Component type | |
Test module in size E2 case (2RMLG01) 1 |
Test module without open circuit facility between terminals 13 and 2 |
14 when cover removed (2RMLG02) ||
Test module with automatic CT shorting (2RMLG07) 3 |
|
Mounting |
E2 Case Vertical A
E2 Case Horizontal B
Test plugs – 2RMLB 7 X G 2 2 4 0 -

▲ ▲ ▲
□▲ A A 0 0 - 0 A A 0
Modular case test ||| |
components (MLB). Category ||| |
Ancillary equipment 2 | | |
|| |
Ancillary equipment || |
Modular case test components 2 | |
| |
Test component type | |
Test modules (MLG) 4 |
|
Component type |
Multi finger test plug complete with leads (2RMLB-S1) 1
Multi finger test plug complete with leads and internal shorting links (2RMLB-S7) 3
Test plugs are coded to fit, and should only be used with the appropriate test block

Test Modules and Plugs – 8W & 10W 7 X G 2 2 7
▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
□ - 0 A A 0 0 - 0 A A 0
Modular case test | || |
components. Category | || |
|| |
| |
Test modules & plugs 7 |
|
Component type |
8 way test module 1
8 way test plug 2
10 way test module 3
10 way test plug 4

1.4.5 7XG225 – 3RMLG Test Block System
 Testing does not cause disturbance to wiring,
terminals or equipment settings
 Existing auxiliary supply to the equipment under
test may be isolated
The 3RMLG Test Block system is designed as a general-

purpose isolation and test signal injection point. ‘Finger safe’
sockets are employed to improve operator safety and suit
4mm shrouded type banana plugs.
Equipment under test need only be removed for servicing if

problems are detected or for routine maintenance.
Where more than 14 test circuits are required, refer to the
3RMLG models that provide 28 test circuits.
7XG225 is a flexible and high performance test block system
with a focus on operator safety. Suitable for application on a
wide range of protection relay panels.
Test Circuit Access
 Finger safe test sockets Access to the circuits for testing purposes is achieved in a
 Automatic CT shorting three stage process.
 14 or 28 independent test groups
STAGE ONE Test Block Cover Extraction
Isolation: Isolation of Stage 1 circuits
3RMLB-S Test Plug STAGE TWO Isolation Plug Extraction
CT Shorting: Automatic shorting of all CT circuits
Isolation: Isolation of Stage 2
 14 or 28 test circuits
Isolation of CT circuits
 ‘Finger safe’ test sockets STAGE THREE Test Plug Insertion
 One test plug for all 14 way 3RMLG blocks Insertion: 4mm test points available
 One test plug for all 28 way 3RMLG blocks
The above procedure should be completed in the reverse
Features order to place the protection system back in service.
Insertion of the Test Plug type 3RMLB connects the live side
circuits to the 4mm yellow test sockets. The equipment side
 Automatic shorting of CT circuits completed in the circuits are connected to the 4mm black test sockets. Each
test block - No test links or operator intervention test socket is identified by a number, which corresponds to
required the numbered terminal on the rear of the case when the
 Isolation plug provides sequential circuit isolation Test Plug is inserted. Refer to figure 10.
timing in three (3) stages
 ‘Finger safe’ test sockets suit standard or shrouded The internal vertical CT shorting bar shorts the CT terminals
type 4mm banana plugs for direct access to the on the live side only, on removal of the isolation plug.
protection or measurement scheme Therefore it is vital that CTs are connected to the live side
 Clear and concise front panel circuit identification terminals to avoid the CT wiring being open-circuited.
 Test plug fitted with insertion handle and thumb
Inserting the 3RMLB test plug allows changeover in 3 stages
screw retention system to enhance operator safety
as shown in the timing diagram Figure 1.
and system security
 Side label instructions on test plug for changing

from normal service to the test condition
High current / voltage rating
Description
The fourteen (14) test groups are specified to provide
Application automatic CT shorting and sequential circuit to suit specific
protection schemes:
Test blocks enable test technicians to quickly and safely
isolate protection relays so that test signals may be injected  Stage 1 isolation
and system performance verified.  CT shorting
There are a number of advantages in performing injection  Stage 2 isolation

tests at the protection relay panel:
The main advantage of this approach is the improved level
 Reduction in down time of the equipment under of safety and security afforded to the CT circuits. This is
test because the CT shorting function takes place within the

3RMLG Test Block irrespective of the CT circuit position. In tures employed in the 3RMLG test block system to enhance
many test block systems the CT shorting is only operator safety.
accomplished when the Test Plug is inserted which leaves
open the possibility of a CT circuit becoming open circuit
due to the CT shorting links being omitted or in the wrong
position. This potential problem is avoided in the 3RMLG and Finger Safe Test Sockets
allows a single Test Plug to be employed for all 14 way Test
Block configurations.
BLACK - even numbered equipment side sockets
Each test circuit is connected to a separate pair of terminals
at the rear of the case. During normal operation of the YELLOW - odd numbered live side sockets
associated protection equipment, each terminal pair is
connected via a circuit-shorting link.
Where more than 14 test circuits are required such as in EHV

transmission protection panels, the 3RMLG Test Block with
28 test circuits may be employed.
Safety Overview
The 3RMLG Test Plug employs ‘finger safe’ test sockets. This
allows the use of shrouded banana plugs to greatly reduce
While providing maximum convenience and efficiency to
the possibility of an operator coming into contact with any
system testing, test block systems must also provide a high
part of the test circuit.
degree of safety. This section describes the key design fea-
Fig 1. Timing diagram
Test Plug Handles
The 3RMLG employs handles at the top and bottom of the

plug assembly to ensure the operator’s hand is well separat-
ed from the test sockets during insertion. Retention thumb
screws are provided at the top and bottom of the test plug to
avoid inadvertent removal of the plug during testing.
Fig 3. 28 Test circuit versions
Test Lead Insertion
Before use the insulation of the flying leads should be visibly

checked for damage.
Flexible banana test leads with shrouded plugs are

recommended for operator safety. 2.5mm 2 multi-strand wire
with PVC insulation is recommended for adequate current
Fig 2. VT Connections rating and flexibility.

Test Plug Insertion
!
To avoid high voltage shock hazard, external CT circuits must
NOT be open circuited.
Insertion of the 3RMLB-S connects the live side circuits to the

YELLOW test sockets on the front panel. The equipment side
circuits are connected to the BLACK test sockets on the front
panel. Each test socket is identified by a number, which
corresponds to the numbered terminal on the rear of the
case when the Test Plug is inserted.

Automatic CT Shorting
Type Description Function Timing Front Panel Labeling

Stage
1 Stage 1 isolation cassette
This circuit type is isolated at Stage 1
as the front cover is removed from
1
the Test Block. Use to provide:
 Isolation of auxiliary supply
Isolation of trip circuits
This circuit type is isolated later
(General Purpose)
during Stage 2 as the Isolation Plug
is removed from the Test Block. Use
to provide:
 Isolation of trip circuits
 Remote ’Out of Service’ 2b
indication
 Isolation of inter-tripping
circuits
 Isolation of watchdog alarms
 Isolation of VT circuits
 Isolation of I/O circuits

This circuit type is isolated early
(Early Break)
during Stage 2 as the Isolation Plug
is removed from the Test Block. Use
to provide:
2a
 Isolation of trip circuits
 Isolation of inter-tripping
circuits
 Isolation of watchdog alarms
8 CT cassette with shorting
Use for CT connections so that they
bar to the adjacent circuit
will be automatically shorted to the
below Refer to
adjacent CT circuit below.
Figure 2
After shorting, this circuit is isolated
at Stage 2.
9 Last CT cassette on a CT
Use for the last CT connection in a
group
group so that it will be automatically
Refer to
shorted to the adjacent CT circuit
Figure 2
above.
After shorting, this circuit is isolated
at Stage 2.

Recommended Wiring Layout
It is recommended that the Test Block is always wired with

connections to the protective relay or scheme made to the
EVEN numbered equipment side terminals. Connections to
other equipment, e.g. CT’s, VT’s and DC supplies, should be
made to the ODD numbered live side terminals on the Test
Block. This ensures that when the Test Plug is inserted, the
black sockets are connected to the isolated relay circuits and
the yellow sockets are connected to the potentially live
supplies. This is vital as the automatic CT shorting is only
applied to the live side.
 This image shows the 3RMLG with the front cover

removed to isolate the Stage 1 circuits.
 The Isolation Plug is in place so the CTs and Stage
2 circuits are still connected.
 The front label identifies each cassette type.
Fig 5. Application wiring example for a three phase

overcurrent and EF protection scheme with auto CT
shorting.
Order Code – 3RMLG01
Fig 4. Front Panel Layout

Fig 6. Application wiring example for a three phase direc-
3RMLG-01 Test Block for a 3 Ph O/C and E/F application .
tional O/C and E/F or distance protection scheme with auto
CT shorting. Order Code – 3RMLG07
CT Circuits
CT circuits must only be wired to cassette type 8 or 9.

CT circuits must not be wired to cassette types 1, 2 or 3 as
this will result in open circuit CT’s as the isolation plug is
removed.

14 WAY TEST BLOCKS
3RMLG – 01
Fig 7. Application wiring example for three phase CT’s

and core balance E/F CT with auto CT shorting. Order
Code – 3RMLG08
3RMLG – 02
Fig 8. Application wiring example for differential

protection of transformers with auto CT shorting Order
Code – 3RMLG09

3RMLG – 07 3RMLG – 09
3RMLG – 08 3RMLG – 20

3RMLG – 21 3RMLG – 23
3RMLG – 22

28 WAY TEST BLOCKS
3RMLG – 11 3RMLG - 17
Case Case
earth earth
1
B 2 2 1
A 2 2 1
B 2 2 1
A 2 2
3 2 4 3 2 4 3 2 4 3 2 4
5 2 6 5 2 6 5 2 6 5 2 6
7 2 8 7 2 8 7 2 8 7 2 8
9 2 10 9 2 10 9 2 10 9 2 10
11 2 12 11 2 12 11 2 12 11 2 12
13 1 14 13 1 14 13 2 14 13 2 14
15 2 16 15 2 16 15 2 16 15 2 16
17 2 18 17 2 18 17 2 18 17 2 18
19 2 20 19 2 20 19 2 20 19 2 20
21 8 22 21 8 22 21 8 22 21 8 22
23 8 24 23 8 24 23 8 24 23 8 24
25 8 26 25 8 26 25 8 26 25 8 26
27 9 28 27 9 28 27 9 28 27 9 28
3RMLG – 12 3RMLG - 18
Case
earth
1
B 8 2 1
A 8 2
3 9 4 3 9 4
5 8 6 5 8 6
7 9 8 7 9 8
9 8 10 9 8 10
11 9 12 11 9 12
13 2 14 13 2 14
15 8 16 15 8 16
17 9 18 17 9 18
19 2 20 19 2 20
21 2 22 21 2 22
23 2 24 23 2 24
25 2 26 25 2 26
27 2 28 27 2 28

3RMLG - 19 3RMLG - 521
3RMLG - 520 3RMLG - 522

3RMLG - 523 3RMLG - 525
3RMLG - 524

Shrouded Test Leads Current Ratings
Two types of shrouded ‘finger safe’ test leads are available: 20A continuous
CT circuits and terminals
Description 400A 1s
Two-ended test lead short - 75mm 10A continuous

Other circuits
200A 1s
Two-ended test lead long - 180mm
Case Type
Test Lead Plugs
Size 2
E2
Single Plug 28 terminals
The single plug is the most compact and may be plugged Size 2
E4
into any test socket. 56 terminals
Dual Plug Flush

Mounting
4U high rack mount
The dual or ‘piggy back’ plug is larger and should be plugged
into the test sockets on the outside edge of the 3RMLG.
Insulation – 3RMLG – In Service
Standard IEC 60255-5

Type Level
Between any contact pair
& either adjacent contact 2.0kV ac rms for 1 minute
pair.
Between all case terminals
5.0kV ac rms for 1 minute
& the case earth
Between any alternate
contact pair, provided that
the intermediate pair is
not used.
Insulation – 3RMLG with 3RMLB

Fig 9. Two-ended test lead - short FittedFitted
75mm wire length version depicted Standard IEC 60255-5
Type Level
Between incoming &
3RMLG Test Block outgoing contacts.
2.0kV ac rms for 1minute
Between all case terminals
& the case earth
14/28 Equipment side terminals (Even terminal numbers).
14/28 Live side terminals (Odd terminal numbers).
14/28 Live sides to equipment side shorting links.
Temperature
This arrangement provides for up to 14/28 independent circuits
to be connected. Standard IEC 60068-2-1/2
Operating Range -10 to +55 degrees Celsius
Storage Range -25 to +70 degrees Celsius
3RMLB Multi-Finger Test Plug
28/56 test sockets suitable for 4mm shrouded or standard

Humidity
banana plugs.
Securing screws are built-in to retain the Test Plug during Standard: IEC 680068-2-78
testing operations. 40 degrees Celsius and 93%
Operating Range
RH non condensing

IP Rating Rear View
Standard: IEC 60529

Installed IP5x
Vibration - Sinusoidal
Standard: IEC 60255-21-1 Class I

Vibration Response 0.5gn ≤5%
Vibration Endurance 1.0gn ≤5%
Shock and Bump

Shock Response 5gn, 11ms ≤5%
Shock Withstand 15gn, 11ms ≤5%
Front View
Bump Test 10gn, 16ms ≤5%
103
Seismic

Seismic Response 1gn ≤5%
Mechanical Classification 177
Durability >10 5 operations at no load
Front View
51
Rear View
177

Panel Cut-Out 14 Way
2 holes of 3.7
4 holes of 3.7

Test Modules 7 X G 2 2 5 1 - □▲ □▲ □▲ 0 0 - 0 A A 0
▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
14 way Test Blocks ||| | | | |
Category ||| | | | |
Ancillary equipment 2 | | | | | |
|| | | | |
Modular case test components 2 | | | | |
| | | | |
Test Modules 3RMLG 5 | | | |
| | | |
14 way test block 1 | | |
| | |
Standard Arrangements | | |
3RMLG01. For 3 CTs. 1 A A
|||
Custom Arrangements 6||
3RMLG20 6 A A
3RMLG21 6 A B
3RMLG22 6 A C
3RMLG23 6 A D
Test Modules 7 X G 2 2 5 2 -
▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
□▲ □▲ □▲ 0 0 - 0 A A 0
28 way Test Blocks ||| | | | |
Category ||| | | | |
Ancillary equipment 2 | | | | | |
|| | | | |
Modular case test components 2 | | | | |
| | | | |
Test Modules 3RMLG 5 | | | |
| | | |
28 way test block 2 | | |
| | |
Standard Arrangements | | |
3RMLG17. For 6CTs. 3 A A
|||
Custom Arrangements 6||
3RMLG520 6 A A
3RMLG521 6 A B
3RMLG522 6 A C
3RMLG523 6 A D
3RMLG524 6 A E
3RMLG525 6 A F
Test plugs 7 X G 2 2 6 □ - 0 A A 0 0 - 0 A A 0
▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
14 & 28 Way ||| |
Test Plugs Category ||| |
|| |
| |
Test modules (3RMLB-S) 6 |
|
14 way (3RMLB – S14) 1
28 way (3RMLB – S28) 2

Published by and copyright © 2018:
Siemens Protection Devices Limited
P.O. Box 8
North Farm Road
Hebburn
Tyne & Wear
NE31 1TZ
United Kingdom
Phone: +44 (0)191 401 7901
Fax: +44 (0)191 401 5575
E-mail: marketing.spdl.gb@siemens.com
Article Number: EMDG-C90063-00-76GB--Reyrolle Devices Catalogue
January 2018
For enquires please contact our Customer Support Center

Phone: +49 180/524 8437 (24hrs)
Fax: +49 180/524 24 71
E-mail: support.ic@siemens.com
www.siemens.com/protection
Subject to change without notice, Printed in the UK.
www. siemens.com/energy

Reyrolle Product Catalogue

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Reyrolle Product Catalogue

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Reyrolle Product

Siemens Protection Devices Limited 2

Responsible, Excellent, Innovative

 User friendly products

Sub-transmission, distribution, industrial – three sectors, same standards

Siemens Protection Devices Limited 3

1.1 Main Protection

1.1.1.1 7SR10 Non-Directional Overcurrent Protection Relay

Description 20 Character x 4 Line Backlit LCD

Siemens Protection Devices Limited 4

Application 51c Cold Load Protection

Fig 1. Four Pole Overcurrrent Relay

46NPS Negative Phase Sequence Overcurrent

Siemens Protection Devices Limited 5

74T/CCS Trip and Close Circuit Supervision

81HBL2 Inrush Restraint

transformer energisation) user selectable elements can be

Fig 2. IEC Overcurrent Curves

Circuit Breaker Maintenance

Each counter has a user set target operations count which,

Siemens Protection Devices Limited 6

Rear terminals Rear terminals

Via Communication Interface

Fig 4. Typical RS485 connection

Real Time Clock

A rear RS485 electrical connection is optionally available on

Siemens Protection Devices Limited 7

Technical Data Overview

Communication Default front communication port

Relay Information Terminal Blocks

Test Standard Temperature

Siemens Protection Devices Limited 10

HAZARDS resulting from application 16 81HBL2 Inrush Detector

Siemens Protection Devices Limited 11

Operating Mode Phase, Earth, SEF External

50 BF Circuit Breaker Fail

Siemens Protection Devices Limited 12

Fig 7. Rear View

Fig 8. Panel cut-out view Fig 9. Side View

Siemens Protection Devices Limited 13

Siemens Protection Devices Limited 14

Nondirectional O/C Relay (Argus)

Protection Function Packages C

Standard version – plus

Siemens Protection Devices Limited 15

20 Character x 4 Line Backlit LCD

Function Overview Hardware

Siemens Protection Devices Limited 16

1 Independent settings are available for pickup current and

Description of Functionality IDMT curves can also be selected.

50BF Circuit Breaker Fail

Siemens Protection Devices Limited 17

Circuit Breaker Maintenance Language Editor

GND Ext Wire loop to

The rear RS485 can be user selected to be OFF,

The rear connection comprises of user friendly pluggable

Communication, Temperature inputs, and Power Supply.

The CT terminals are suitable for ring type lug connection to

Fig 3. User Interface

The operator interface is designed to provide a user friendly

This product complies with the directive of

This conformity has been proved by tests

Terminal Blocks Binary Inputs